Is 13849 PDF

BID DOCUMENT
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF DECOMPRESSION FACILITY AND

DAUGHTER BOOSTER / ONLINE CNG STATIONS IN
BHUBANESWAR, CUTTACK, PATNA, RANCHI &
JAMSHEDPUR
DOMESTIC COMPETITIVE BIDDING
Bid Document No.:
VOLUME – II OF II
PREPARED AND ISSUED BY

MECON LIMITED
(A Govt. of India Undertaking)
Delhi, India
PARTICULAR JOB SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL, STRUCTURAL
AND
ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
Page 2 of 60
For Construction Of Decompression
Facility And Daughter Booster / Online
CNG Stations In Varanasi,
Bhubaneswar, Cuttack, Patna, Ranchi &
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
CONTENTS
1.0 CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
1.1 GENERAL
1.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
1.3 SITE WORK
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
2.0 PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES
2.1 SITE CLEARANCE
2.2 EARTH WORK IN CUTTING & FILLING
2.3 SANDFILLING AND STONE SOLING
2.4 BRICKWORK IN SUB STRUCTURE
2.5 BRICKWORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE
2.6 PCC WORK
2.7 RCC WORK IN SUB STRUCTURE
2.8 RCC WORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE
2.9 BOUNDARY WALL
2.10 BUILDING WORKS
2.11 FINISHING WORKS
2.12 STEEL WORKS
2.13 ALUMINIUM DOORS/ WINDOWS/ PARTITIONS
2.14 KERB STONE
2.15 SFRC PRE-CAST SLAB
2.16 GROUTING WITH NON-SHRINKABLE COMPOUND

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
1.0 CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS
1.1 GENERAL
The scope of work to be performed under this contract shall include complete civil,
architectural and steel structural works as per plans, equipment layout, drawings &
technical specifications for Developing CNG Facilities at Existing Retail Outlets at
Bhubaneswar, Cuttack, Patna, Ranchi & Jamshedpur GA’s
1.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Contractor shall procure & supply to site all the materials including cement,
reinforcing steel, steel sections, plates, pipes, MS Y Angle Posts, Concertina coil,
RBT fencing wire, Chain link fencing, chequered plate, Colour coated steel sheets,
False ceiling, mesh and other accessories, other masonry materials, bitumen/asphalt,
admixtures & bonding agents, sealants, kerb stones, pavior block, sand, boulder,
etc., and any other construction material / item required to complete the civil &
structural works.
All costs towards testing/inspection of materials/goods shall be borne by the

Contractor.
1.3 SITE WORK
Complete construction work including supply of labour, construction materials,

construction equipment, survey, tools & tackles, dismantling & modification /
strengthening, supervision, testing etc. required to complete all the structures,
foundations, roads, drains, pavements, finishes, supply, fabrication, erection of steel
structures, Canopy, hoarding, Loading unloading platform, LCV Platform, cat ladder,
welded wire mesh fencing and gates etc, painting, including site grading/earthwork in
cutting & filling etc. as specified and required to complete the civil & road works in all
respect.
All enabling works e.g. construction water tank, casting/fabrication yard, electricity,
site stores & office, safety and security measures, coordination with other contractors
working at site etc. shall be Contractor’s responsibility.
Special permits such as ‘Hot Permit”, “Fire Safety Permit”, “permissions for controlled
blasting of rock from concerned authorities” etc. to work at terminals shall be
contractor’s responsibility.
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be broadly, but not limited to, the following:
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
a) Site grading of the plot by removing 150 mm top soil, , stacking it properly and
reusing it for planting purpose, including plot development by filling good
quality earth as required.
b) Earth filling in embankments for external roads wherever required with
providing of RCC Culverts/ Pipe Culvert.
c) Clearing the site, removal of bushes and trees etc as per site requirement.
d) Construction of a 3 m high boundary wall with brick masonry, PCC Coping,
MS Y Angle Posts and Concertina coil with RBT fencing etc as per drawing.
e) RCC cable trenches: complete civil works for cable trench including providing
inserts, conduits (GI, PVC or HDPE etc.) and PVC coated MS Chequred
cover plate / Pre cast concrete covers as per requirement.
f) Construction of single and double S.S.tube trench as per drawing.
g) Construction of compressor foundation as per drawing.
h) Construction of facilities like ‘odourising unit’, Green belt etc as per drawing.
i) Construction of Dispenser foundation, canopy foundation etc. as per relevant
drawings.
j) Construction of fore court, approach roads etc. as per drawing.
k) Construction of cable pit, drain pits etc as per requirement.
l) Construction of Septic Tank along with Soak Pit and connections.
m) Storm water drainage system in RCC/brick drains with complete civil works as
per requirement.
n) Laying of Hume pipes for drainage as per drawing and requirement of site.
o) Construction of Utility/Office building – Control room, Office room, Store
Room, UPS and Battery Room, Electrical Room etc as per relevant
architectural drawings.
p) Construction of Bore well as per supplier specification and direction of
Engineer in charge.
q) 80 mm thick PCC paver block over sand cushion over ground/on a PCC base
(Grade M-10) at locations as specified.
r) Laying PCC kerb stones 125mm x 300 mm over 75 thk PCC base (Grade M-
10) as specified.
s) Grouting of all base plates/frames of equipment foundations and structural
bases.
t) Providing of all inserts, conduits, pre-cast covers, fixing of free issue items
into permanent works etc.
u) Providing of approved quality sand for back filling as per requirement.
v) Clearing all construction debris and handing over completed work site.
w) Any other work not specifically mentioned but required to make the station
functional.
x) Making as-built details/drawings on one set of construction drawings and
return to owner.
.
2.00 PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES - GENERAL
The Preamble to Schedule of Item is an integral part of the SCHEDULE OF RATES

and rates and this is to be considered incorporated into the description of items
themselves. For related drawings reference be made to Annexure-I.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
The Contractor’s rate for any item of work in the schedule of item shall, unless stated
otherwise be held to include the cost of all materials including wastage, conveyance
and delivery, unloading, storing, fabrication, hoisting, all labour for finishing to
required shape and size, tools and plants, power fuel, consumables, all taxes &
duties royalties, other revenue expenses, temporary facilities like roads etc.
The item shall include all the safety provisions listed below:
 The site should be cordoned off on all sides by way of 3 Mt. High corrugated
GI sheet fixed on metal pipes/angles, leaving space for only a Gate. This
fencing should be fixed such that it is not possible for anyone to enter the site
from any other location other than the Gate.
 The gate should be made in metal with metal sheet cladding. A guard
restricting entry of all unauthorized person/material on site should man the
gate. The guard shall also maintain a register of all persons visiting site.
 All persons including all labor, supervisors, visitors etc. on site must wear
hand gloves, helmet and safety shoes. The responsibility of this shall rest with
the main contractor.
 All workmen while working on height shall wear safety helmets.
 All workmen such as welders/ fitters etc. shall wear protective gloves,
protective glasses etc. and as per the requirement and demands of the trade.
 All excavated pits/holes shall be cordoned off with red tape with warning
notice.
 All inflammable material shall be kept in non-inflammable containers that are

fixed with screwed on caps at all times. The containers should be marked with
danger sign and the name of the material shall be marked on the outside.
There should be at least one person who should be responsible for the safe
custody of these materials.
 All areas of work shall have appropriate safety signage depending on the
nature of work, prominently displayed to prevent any mishap, particularly
signs in fluorescent paint for night vision. These signs should be visible from
a reasonable distance for a vehicular traffic at designated speed limits for a
given road/ location. All necessary city traffic rules and signage specifications
shall be observed with strict adherence.
 All gadgets must have required safety devices in working conditions as per
the manufacturers’ recommendations and the law of the country.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
 All the persons on site must be insured against injury and death due to
accidents.
 The contractor shall not use the site for any activity other than what it is
authorised for.
 Children below the age of 18 shall not be allowed to work on site. The
contractor shall prepare a secured crèche adjacent to the site, for the children
of labor working on site and there shall be at least one person dedicated to
look after the safety and other needs of these children at all time.
 All persons working at site shall be physically and mentally fit. The contractor
shall ensure that no illegal activity takes place on site and that no person with
doubtful past shall be engaged on site.
 The contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all persons at site.
 Consumption of liquor and smoking shall not be permitted on the site.
 The site shall be illuminated at night when there is work in progress.
 The contractor shall maintain a First-aid box at site to take care of any minor
injury.
 The storing of all inflammable/explosive material shall be done as per the

laws of the country and best common practice.
 All temporary electrical connections shall be done with the help of insulated
connectors to prevent any sparking etc.
 . Contractor shall keep the Owner and Consultant completely indemnified by

ensuring a completely safe working, keeping a third party insurance cover on site.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES
2.1.0 SITE CLEARANCE
Complete works for the site clearing so that the site is suitable for construction
activity. Brief description of major items shall be as follows:
a) Dismantling of all existing structures in brick masonry/stone

masonry/PCC etc. so that the site becomes suitable for construction
activity.
b) Disposal of all material to be cleared from the site to any authorised

disposal site/ storage yard.
c) Provide all assistance/co-ordination/liaison between any and all

government/semi government agencies connected with the scope
mentioned and also with the body owning/maintaining the access road
to the site.
Note: Demolition of PCC/Brick Masonry, road will be paid in Cu.M.
2.2.0 EARTH WORK IN CUTTING & FILLING
Complete earthwork in Excavation of earth/municipal waste/ malba etc. &

filling with available serviceable earth or borrow earth is included in the scope.
Brief description of major items shall be as follows:
a. Taking pre-work and finished levels.

b. Stripping and grubbing the top soil and preparation of sub-grade.
c. Dewatering of excessive water.
d. Strutting and shoring to retain the earth.
e. Disposal of unserviceable and surplus earth to authorized dumping
ground to any lead.
f. Borrowing of approved quality good earth from any lead.
g. Filling in layers of 150 mm.
h. Watering and compaction up to 95% of its MDD with mechanical
means.
Note : i) Payments for item no. EW–1 shall be based on net volume of
earth excavated.
ii) Payment for item earthwork in filling shall be compacted net
volume of filling after deductions of foundations, culverts, etc.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
iii) No separate payment for excavation for foundation / sewerage /

forecourt or roadwork (since cost of earthwork is included in
respective items).
Earthwork shall be done as per approved detailed construction drawings to be

issued to the successful tenderer. Offer to be prepared by the tenderer based
on the enclosed drawings and on lump sum unit rate (per Cu.M).
2.3.0 SAND FILLING AND STONE SOLING
Complete works in filling is included in the scope.
a) Taking pre-work and finished levels

b) Borrowing of approved quality sand/stone from any lead.
c) Filling in layers of 300 mm.
d) Providing and laying stone ballast 115-150 mm size in layers of 300
mm with spreading blinding material like sand, stone grit, watering and
compaction with mechanical means etc. complete the surface as per
specifications including cost of material.
Note : Payments to be done on completed work profiles by considering the

plan dimensions only.
Sand filling and Stone soling shall be done as per approved detailed
construction drawings to be issued to the successful tenderer. Offer to be
prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed drawings and on lump sum
unit rate (per Cu.M).
2.4.0 BRICK WORK IN SUB STRUCTURE
Complete works in brick masonry in foundation is included in the scope.
Brief description of major civil items shall be as follows:
i) Earth Work in excavation including back filling using serviceable

surplus material or approved borrow material and transportation of
excess earth beyond plot limits. Preparation of sub-base including
dewatering and compaction.
ii) PCC M10.
iii) Brick work with 1:4 cement mortar in foundation.
iv) 40mm thick DPC in 1:2:4 wherever applicable.
v) Plastering on exposed brick surfaces of 15 mm thickness in CM 1:4.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
vi) Lime wash on exposed surfaces of plaster.

vii) Making weep holes of 150x150 with stone filter pack at 1.0 m intervals
in both the directions.
Note: Only net brick masonry volume quantity shall be measured for payment
purpose.
The construction of brick foundation work shall be done as per

approved detailed construction drawings to be issued to the successful
tenderer. Offer to be prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed
drawings and on lump sum unit rate (per Cu.M) of brickwork done.
2.5.0 BRICK WORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE
Complete works in brick masonry superstructure is included in the scope.
i) Brick work with 1:4 cement mortars in superstructure at all heights.

ii) Providing shuttering / supports etc. as per requirement.
Note : Only net brick masonry quantity excluding plaster thickness shall be
measured for payment purpose.
The construction of brickwork in superstructure shall be done as per approved

detailed construction drawings to be issued to the successful tenderer. Offer
to be prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed drawings and on lump
sum unit rate (per Cu.M) of brickwork done.
2.6.0 PCC WORK
Providing and laying PCC 1:2:4, 1:3:6 & 1:4:8 in position, construction and
handing over of PCC in foundations, substructure, superstructure and under
floor including shuttering/ shoring/ stopper and embedment etc complete in all
respects as per scope of work detailed construction drawings (to be released
to contractor by owner), technical specifications and direction of Engineer-in-
charge.

i) Preparation of bed including cleaning, leveling, compacting/tamping of
surface and providing support from bottom and sides.
ii) Providing shuttering and stoppers.
iii) Providing inserts, pockets, recesses, holdfast etc.
iv) Curing, rendering, finishes to match with adjoining surfaces etc.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Note : For all these items only net PCC concrete quantity shall be measured
for payment and PCC below brick work and RCC works is included in
the respective item.
The construction of PCC work shall be done as per approved detailed

prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed typical drawings and on lump
sum unit rate (per Cu.M) of PCC work done.
2.7.0 RCC WORK IN SUB STRUCTURE
Complete works in RCC foundation for equipment foundation, compound wall,

building foundations, canopy foundations, pile caps, built-up piles and other
RCC works e.g. box culvert, pits, tanks etc. is included in the scope.
a) Earth Work in excavation including back filling using serviceable

surplus/ borrow material.
b) PCC M-10 mud mat,
c) Providing shuttering and strutting of all types
d) RCC M-25.
e) Providing and fixing bolts/inserts.
f) Non-shrink grouting over pedestals for structural base and high
strength cementitious grout as per drawings for compressor/ D.G.
bases. ( Payable in separate item )
g) Plastering on exposed RCC surface and application of two coats of
bitumen paint faces in contact with soil. In case of building foundations
the anti-termite treatment shall be applied.
h) Under ground RCC water tanks with food grade paint on the inside.
(Painting of food grade paint is included in this item)
i) Providing and fixing puddle flange for nozzles/inserts in R.C.C. water
tanks fabricated from M.S. pipes upto 900 mm long, welded in the
center to 6 mm thick M.S. square plate of size three times the pipe
diameter as per standard details; whole piece to be hot dip
galvanized, fixed to Reinforcement in RCC walls/slab as per drawing at
the time of casting of RCC water tank complete.
j) Providing and fixing M.S. Structural work fabricated from standard
sections e.g. M.S. rounds, angles, channels including cutting to size,
drilling, welding, fixing and welding to insert plates in RCC
structural members including cutting and making good the walls
and floors for pipe supports from floor (in plant room), M.S. ladders and
manhole covers for water tanks only.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
k) Providing and fixing M.S. slotted angle iron 40x40x2 mm thick with
stone enamel finish & fixed to brick masonry or RCC walls with 12
mm dia bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks 1:2:4 mix (1
cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate 12.5 mm nominal size)
100x100x100 mm size for masonry walls & with expandable anchor
fasteners on RCC spaced not exceeding 600 mm with 15 mm dia
G.I. spacer between wall & angle complete.
Note : For all these items only net RCC concrete quantity excluding
PCC/Mudmat shall be measured for payment (Bolts, inserts, angles
channels will be paid in item structural steel fabrication but not in case
of under ground RCC tanks).
The construction of RCC work shall be done as per approved detailed

prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed typical drawings and on lump
sum unit rate (per Cu.M) of RCC work.
2.8.0 RCC WORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE
Complete works in RCC in superstructure for compound wall/retaining wall,

columns & beams is included in the scope.
a) Providing shuttering and strutting of all types

b) RCC M-25
c) Providing and fixing bolts/inserts.
d) Providing and fixing M.S. Structural work fabricated from standard
sections e.g. M.S. rounds, angles, channels including cutting to size,
drilling, welding, fixing and welding to insert plates in RCC
structural members including cutting and making good the walls.
Note: For all these items only net RCC concrete quantity shall be measured
for payment (Bolts, inserts, angles, channels will be paid in item
structural steel fabrication).
The construction of RCC work shall be done as per approved detailed

construction drawings to be issued to the successful tenderer. Offer to
be prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed typical drawings
and on lump sum unit rate (per CuM) of RCC work done.
2.9.0 BOUNDARY WALL

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Complete civil works for the following buildings is included in the scope.
a) DPC 40 mm with cement concrete 1:2:4 if required.

b) Brick work ( bricks as per SOR ) in super structure at all height and
levels, in cement mortar 1:5
c) RCC 1:2:4. Including steel reinforcement for coping.
d) Cement plaster 1:6, 15 mm on both surfaces.
e) Drip course 25 mm wide over coping.
f) Grooves 12X12 mm in plaster as per design.
g) Painting of internal wall surface with three coats of Acrylic emulsion
paint as per SOR or approved by Engineer-in-charge, applied by brush
followed by roller.
h) External wall surface to be given 3 coats of white wash.
i) Expansion joints shall be provided at corners as per drawings.
j) Height of wall shall be 3000 mm Finished floor level of forecourt.
The construction of the compound wall shall be done as per approved

detailed construction drawings to be issued to the successful tenderer.
Offer to be prepared by the tenderer based on the enclosed
architectural drawings and on lump sum unit rate (per RM) for complete
compound wall work in superstructure.
Note : Only length of completed compound wall shall be measured for

payment purpose.
2.10.0 BUILDING WORKS
Complete civil, plumbing, internal water supply and electrical works from plinth
beam and above for RCC framed structure buildings are included in the
scope.
RCC FRAMED STRUCTURE
Brief description of major items of work shall be as follows:
a) Setting out for all structures on site.

b) All the buildings/rooms shall be RCC framed structure with cladding
and partitions of brick masonry walls, including loft in RCC.
c) DPC 1:2:4, with 40 mm thick.
d) Anti-termite treatment to be applied to all the building foundations,
plinth, under aprons and sub-floors.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
e) All structural concrete for RCC elements shall have a minimum

strength of 25 MPA at 28 days (M-25 nominal mix as per IS)
f) Masonry shall be in cement mortar 1:4 and with bricks of strength not
less than 50 kg / cm2 .
g) Plastering on masonry structures shall be of thickness 15 mm on
smooth face, 19 mm on rough surface and 6 mm on RCC
ceiling/Chajjas. The cement mortar shall not be leaner than 1:3 on
ceiling and 1:4 on walls. Grooves and drip-mould are also included in
this item.
h) Aluminium doors shall be of 10 mm thick glass (ASAHI / MODI
TUFF)/or paneled with laminated board mounted on powder coated
aluminium frames. Windows of full height shall be powder coated
aluminium frame with 8 mm thick glass (ASAHI / MODI
TUFF)/laminated board in-fill. Windows from sill height &Ventilators
shall be powder coated aluminium frame with 5 mm thick glass
louvers/fixed glazing, with powder coated aluminium hardware. All
aluminium frames shall be fixed over aluminium rough ground.
i) Inside surfaces of office shall be finished with plastic emulsion paint of
ICI, Asian paints, Berger and rest of the rooms shall be finished with oil
bound distemper and painting of external walls of building with three
coat of external acrylic emulsion paint with Polyurethane finish.
j) Inserts shall be provided to suit the technological requirements.
k) All exposed flat roofs shall be water proofed with two components
elastic polymerised acrylic water proofing system using “Euco Elastic
Plaster” manufactured by STP including finishing the surface with 40
mm thick cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded
stone) admixed with water proofing compound confirming to IS: 2645
and finally finishing the surface with Trowel with neat cement slurry and
preparation of roof surface with khurras at RWP locations.
l) Under floors shall include filling of river sand and PCC 1:4:8 in level.
m) Polished vitrified tiles of Kajaria/Somani/Orientor equivalent make on
floor and thickness and 100 mm high skirting in office room with 6 mm
grout.
n) Aluminium False ceiling of Luxalon, Trac or equivalent make in MMI
control rooms lobbies etc as indicated and as per approved
manufacturers detail.
o) All finishes and any other works not specifically mentioned but required
and handing over of premises, complete in all respects.
p) External surfaces to be painted with Exterior premium emulsion paints,
APEX of Asian Paints/ WEATHERCOAT of Berger/ WEATHERSHIELD
OF ICI, and part fascia to be of DOMAL (as per approved design) as
per detail, colour scheme, elevation as per approved manufacturer’s
detail and specified thickness. Aluminium composite panel to be used
in elevation at specified locations.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
q) Conduiting, wiring, box & switches, fittings and fixtures for electrical
points, telephone, television points and data cabling.
r) Providing, making, testing and commissioning of light point, fan points,
exhaust fan points, 6 Amp sockets, 16 Amp sockets, 20 Amp sockets
and Sub-mains with 2.5 sq. mm single core multi strand copper
conductor, PVC insulated, 1100 V grade wires in PVC conduit laid in
ceiling/wall/ground in GI pipe, complete with grid plate switch 6/16
Amps. in concealed G I box, circuit wiring i.e. tapping from the DB, 1.5
Sq.MM. insulated copper Earthing connections etc. complete as
required for all length of circuits and 1 light points controlled by one
switch. Light points located on building areas are included.
s) Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of pre–wired wall/
ceiling/ false ceiling mounted type HPF fluorescent light fixtures
including providing and fixing tubes, electronic chokes, starters,
earthing, connections and mounting arrangements etc. complete as
required. Procurement of light fixtures(ref. Electrical TS clause 03.00)
subject to approval by Mecon/GGL Engineer-in-Charge:
t) Making as-built drawings and details and providing to owner.
2.11.0 FINISHING WORKS
A) PLASTER IN CM 1:4
Complete works in plaster is included in the scope.
a) Providing and laying cement plaster of specified thickness on walls,

ceilings, RCC beams, columns and chajja etc. of mix 1:4 (1 cement, 4
fine sand) including making of typical grooves, drip course etc.
including hacking of RCC roof beams and columns surfaces and curing
etc. complete. The job includes the cost of supplying and fixing of
chicken wiremesh at every joint of brick masonry and RCC before
commencing the plastering work.
b) Providing and laying cement plaster of specified thickness on walls,
ceilings, RCC beams, columns and chajja etc. of mix 1:4 (1 cement, 4
fine sand) including making of typical grooves, drip course etc.
including hacking of RCC roof beams and column surfaces and curing
etc. complete. The job includes the cost of supplying and fixing of
chicken wiremesh at every joint of brick masonry and RCC before
commencing the plastering work.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
B) EXTERNAL PAINTING
Supplying and doing/finishing external walls surfaces in approved colour and

applying one or more coats of Apex paint of Asian Paints at all heights or
approved make of desired colour and approved brand as per scope of work
and recommendations of manufacturer, detailed construction drawings (to be
released to contractor by Owner), technical specifications and directions of
the Engineer-in-charge.
C) INTERNAL PAINTING (OBD)
Supplying and doing/finishing internal walls and ceilings in plaster of paris

punning to achieve an even finish and applying of 3 or more coats of Oil
Bound Distemper of desired colour and approved brand as per scope of work,
approved detailed construction drawings (to be released to contractor by
owner), technical specification and directions of the Engineer-in-charge.
D) WHITE WASHING
White washing with Dehradun/ Rajasthan lime 3 or more coats to give an

even finish including the cost of adding required adhesive (DDL), blue
pigment (Robin blue) etc. on walls ceiling etc. complete as per instruction.
E) PROVIDING AND FIXING GRANITE STONE
Providing and fixing 20 mm thick granite polished, machine cut granite stone
for dispenser islands and similar location of require size and approved quality
laid over 20 mm thick base cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) with
joints treated with white cement, mixed with matching pigment, epoxy
touchups, including rubbing making edge moulding, curing etc. complete at all
levels. Texture, colour, pattern of Granite will be decided by Engineer-in-
charge.
F) IPS FLOORING
Providing and laying 40 mm thick cement concrete floor with 1:2:4 (1 cement:
2 coarse sand: 4 stone aggregate of 12 mm nominal size) with a floating coat
of neat cement {Rate include all labour, tools, tackles, PVC/ Glass strips etc.
complete).
2.12.0 STEEL WORKS
A) Complete works in steel structure fabrication is included in the scope.

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Brief description of item shall be as follows: -
Fabrication of cascade supporting and covering structures and loading &

unloading platform structures including supply of raw materials,
transportation and delivery at site, site assembly and erection of structures at
appropriate locations including application of primer and finishing paints, all
works as per specification and drawings. Scope includes all consumables,
preparation, wastages, testing charges, sheeting, fasteners etc as per
specifications. Scope includes preparation of fabrication drawings, their
approval by Owner and preparation of as-built details.
B) PROVIDING AND FIXING CHEQUERED PLATE
Brief description of item shall be as follows: -
Chequered plate in approved panel or over steel structure including cutting,

welding, hoisting, fixing in position has to be provided and fixed.
Two or more coats approved quality synthetic enamel over priming coat of
approved steel primer to be applied.
C) STEEL DOORS AND WINDOWS
Complete works in steel doors and windows is included in the scope.
Brief description of item shall be as follows:-
Steel door/window of approved make fabricated out of `Z' section confirming

to BIS Standard of 3 mm thickness with joints mortice and welded, with 20x5
mm Ms flat hinges fully planed with 2 mm thick MS plate should be supplied,
fitted and fixed in position. Glass panes of 8 mm thickness be fitted. Approved
quality handles, tower bolts be fitted.
This includes supplying and fixing superior quality heavy-duty chromium

plated brass stays, aldrops, and handles, tower bolts painted with two coats of
red oxide. The main frame would be minimum 50x50x6 mm size angle
embedded in the walls with MS fasteners etc. complete as directed by EIC.
2.13.0 ALUMINIUM DOORS/WINDOWS/PARTITIONS
Brief description of item shall be as follows:-
Aluminium glazed doors/windows/partitions should be provided and fixed as

per scope of work based on detailed construction drawings [to be released to
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
contractor] by owner and technical specification, directions to Engineer-in-

charge. The powder coating and/or anodizing to be carried out as per
approved specification and all the fixtures, floor spring etc to be provided as
per standard/ approved make and design.
2.14.0 KERB STONE
Complete works in fixing of kerb stone is included in the scope.
Kerb stone of approved make at or near ground level as per approved pattern
and setting in position with cement mortar 1:3 shall be provided and fixed.
This includes the cost of required centering, shuttering and finishing smooth
with 6 mm thick cement plaster 1:2 on exposed surfaces with hardener, over
75 mm thick PCC 1:4:8 bed (Kerb stone blocks shall have niche with reflective
material fixed on it).
2.15.0 SFRC PRE-CAST SLAB
Brief description of main items shall be as follows:
Heavy duty 70 mm thick precast SFRC Slab in trenches of KK make or

equivalent (size 450x600) shall be provided and fixed as per instruction of
Engineer-in-charge.
2.16.0 GROUTING WITH NON-SHRINKABLE COMPOUND
Ready mix non-shrink cementitious grout of compressive strength 30N/mm2 /

45 N/mm2 as per SOR shall be provided and laid manually or by pumping at
all positions. This shall include shuttering, compacting, edging, repairing,
sealing and curing for shutdown repairs, base grouting of rotating equipment
and other installation complete. This shall be as per specifications, site
sketches/ drawings and direction of the EIC.
Minimum coverage as per manufacturers’ recommendations shall be applied
in absence of actual field consumption data.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
List of Approved Manufacturers of Architectural / Building Products
Sl.
Item/ Name of Manufacturer Place Brand Name
No.
1.0 Floor Finishing
1.1 Terrazzo Tiles
A Nitco Delhi NITCO
B Hindustan Tiles Delhi Hindustan Tiles
1.2 Ceramic Tiles
A Regency Ceramics Ltd. Hyderabad Regency
B Kajaria Ceramics Ltd. Delhi Kajaria
C Orient Ceramics & Industies Ltd. Delhi Orient
D Bell Ceramics Vadodara BELL
E SPL Ltd. Delhi Somany
F H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Johnson
G Spartek Ceramics Chennai Spartek
H Murudeshwar Ceramics Ltd. Hubli Naveen
1.3 Vitrified Tiles
B Orient Ceramics & Industies Ltd. Delhi Orient
C SPL Ltd. Delhi Somany
D H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Johnson
E Murudeshwar Ceramics Ltd. Chennai Spartek
F Kajaria Ceramics Ltd. Hubli
1.4 Acid Resistant Tiles
B H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Endura
1.5 PVC Tiles/ Rolls
All Manufacturers Listed (Having Operative and Valid License) by HIS AI BIS Web Site
A
http://www.bis.org.in
B Armstrong World Insutries Mumbai Excelln
C Bhor Industries Delhi MARBLFX
D Shyam Vinyl Chennai Shyam Vinyles
1.6 PVC Tiles/ Rools / Anti-Static)
A Armstrong World Insutries Mumbai Solid LG1
B Premier Poly Film Ltd. Delhi ANSTAT
1.7 Epoxy Coating
A Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore Nitofloor SL 2000/1000
B Sika Kolkata Sika Floor
C Buildtech Products (I) Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Buildpoxy-SL
D Anupam Industries Kolkata -
E STP Delhi
1.8 Floor Hardener
A Cico Technologies Limited Delhi CICO
B Samcock Chemicals (P) Ltd. Ahmedabad Samhard STD
C PCC CSS Procfssor and Traders Kolkata Doronite
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Designer Paver Tiles/ Interlocking Tiles ISI Marked/ Grass-Jointed Tiles (1st Quality
1.9
Only)
Pavit, Ultra, Hindustan, Eurocon, Vyara,
A
National Tiles, Gem, Unistone, Konkrete
B Rammica Indusries Delhi Rammica
C The Bombay Burmah Trading Corpn. Delhi Formica
2.0 Wood Work
2.1 Block Board/ Flush Door
A
2.1 Plywood
A
2.2 Laminates
A
2.3 MDF Boards
A Nuchem Limited Faridabad NULAM/NVWUD
B Mangalam Timber Products Limited Delhi Nuwud
C Western Bio Systems Ltd. PUNF Ecoboard
D Bajaj Eco-Tech Products Limited Noida Bajaj
2.4 Particle Board (Plain/ Veneered/ Pre-Laminated)
All Manufactureres Listed by BIS Under is
A 3097 (Having Operative and Valid License)
at BIS Web Site http://www.bis.org.in/
2.5 Pressed Steel Door Frames/ Cupboard and Window Frames (Fabricators)
M/s SAIL
M/s TATA
3.0 Steel/ Aluminium/ Fire Rated Doors, Windows, Ventilators
3.1 Pressed Steel Doors/ Windows
A SKS Steel Ind. Delhi -
B Dhiman Steel Delhi -
C Supper Steel Windows Co. Delhi -
D RDG Engineering Mumbai -
E Anand Industries Delhi -
F Raymus Engineering Gurgaon -
G M/s Loyal Safe Works Mayapur New Delhi
H M/s Multiwyn Industrial Corpn. Clacutta Kolkata
I M/s Metal Window Corpn. New Delhi
260 Sadar Bazar,
J M/s Chhabra Steel Udyog
Meerut Cantt
Rani Jhansi Road,
K M/s Delite Safe Works,
New Delhi
175/A Bomay
L M/s Ishwar Industries, Bazar, Meerut
Cantt
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
J-142, Patel nagar

M M/s Chandni Industries
1st, Ghaziabad
3.2A Aluminimum/ Doors/ Windows Sections
A Jindal Aluminium Limited Bangalore
B Hindalco Mumbai
Alluminuml Door/ Windows/ Glazing
3.2B
Fabricator and Anodized
A M/s Alumilite Pvt. Ltd., C. AHLCON New Delhi
B M/s Ajit India Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
3.3 Fire Proof Doors
A Navair International Delhi Viper
B RDG Engineering Bombay Radiant
Steel Windows, Ventilators (as per IS-1038 of 1983) & frames pressed steel dorr/
3.4
window)
A M/s Multiwyn Industrial Corpn Calcutta Kolkata
B M/s Metal Window Corp N/Delhi New Delhi
C M/s Govind Enterprises, Delhi Delhi
M/s Chhabra Steel Udyog 260, Sadar Bazar,
D Meerut Cantt, Agent Steel MFG Pvt. Ltd.
Ahmedabad, Godrej.
M/s Chandni Industries, J-142, Patel Nagar
E Ghaziabad
Ist, Ghaziabad
3.5 Rolling Shutters (ISI marked)
A Swastic Mumbai
B Hercules Bangalore
C Shubdwar
M/s Bharat Rolling Shuters Industries Agra
D
Rama Rolling Shutter Works
Gandhi Entrance Automations Private
E
Limited
4 Door/ Windows Fittings
4.1 Mortice Locks with Handles
A Godrej & Boyce Mumbai Godrej
B Everite Agencies (P) Ltd. Delhi Everite
C Golden Industries Delhi Golden
4.2 Hydraulic Door Closer (Overhead/ Floor Mounted)
All Manufactureres Listed by BIS Under is
A 3087 (Having Operative and Valid License)
at BIS Web Site http://www.bis.org.in/
B Doorking Industries Delhi Doorking
4.3 Misc. Door Fittings e.g. Hingee, Tower Bots, Latches, Stoppers etc.
All Manufacturers Listed by BIS under
A IS:3087 (Having operative and valid license)
at BIS Web Site http://ww.bis.org.in/
C EBCO Industries Delhi EBCO
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
D ECIE (P) Ltd. Mumbai ECIE

D Hardwyn Traders Mumbai Hardwyn
Aluminimum/ Doors/ Windows Fittings
M/s Wlite Enterprises C/6 Shalimar
Hardware 133, Jarg Mahal, Dhobitalao
Mumbai 400002
M/s Mohan Metal Industries 178/2-A, Bhole
Nath Nagar, Shahadara, Delhi 110032
Mepro, Argent New Delhi, Classic, New
Delhi
Argent New Delhi,
Golden Industries Pvt. Ltd. Delhi
4.4 Automatic Glass Door
A Ditec (Gandhi) Mumbai
4.5 Aluminium Grill
Alu Grill, Arihant Aluminium Corporation,
A Bangalore Decogrille
Decogrille
4.6 Builders Hardware
A M/s Golden Industries Pvt.Ltd. Everite, Solo delhi
5.0 Roof Treatment (Water - Proofing)
5.1 P.U. Based Waterproofing (One Componemt)
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Isothane Ema
B Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi Corchem 2061
C Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore Nitoproof
5.2 P.U. Based Waterproofing (Two Componemt)
A Shivalik Agro Poly Products Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Shivabond 903
B Industrial Product Manufacturing Company Pune EZECOAT
C Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvtl. Ltd. Bangalore Brushbond
D Sika Kolkata Sikalastic
E Sip Industries Limited Chennai Sipguard
5.3 Approved Membrane
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloyed Plastolan
B Buildtech Products Pvt. (I) Ltd. Delhi Buil Dwrap P
C Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICO Shield
D Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore Proofex
F Sika Kolkata Sika WP Shield
G STP Ltd Kolkata Super Thermolay
H IWL India Ltd. Chennai Hyperplas
I Pure Leathers Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Roofseai
6.0 Painting Works
Plastic/ Acrylic Emulsion Paint Jodhpur
6.1 (Internal and External, Distemper/ Acrylic Distemper)
A ICI Paints/ ICI India Ltd. Kolkata
B Berger Paints Kolkata Lewis Berger
C Asian Paints Mumbai Asian Paint
D Shalimar Paints Mumbai Color Space
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
E Nerolac Paints Mumbai

F Acropaints/ Imited Delhi
G Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
H N E Paint Udyog Sivasagar (Assam)
6.2 Synthetic Enamel Paint (for Building Works)
B Berger Paints Kolkata
C Asian Paints Mumbai
D Shalimar Paints Mumbai
F Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
G N E Paint Udyog Sivasagar (Assam)
6.3 Waterproof Cement Paint
A Killick Nixon Ltd. Mumbai Snowcem
B Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai Superemcem
C Acropaints/ Imited Delhi Acrocfm
D Snow White Industrial Corpn Chennai Superclm
Xlracem 78 Super
E Rajdoot Paints Delhi
Cement Paint
6.4 Decorative Textured Coating
A Luxture Surface Coatings Pvt. Ltd. Ajmer Luxture
B Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Secundrabad Heritage
C NCL Alltek and Seccolor Ltd. Hyderabad Alltek
D Acro paints Ltd. Delhi Acrotextures
E Unitile Delhi Unitile
F Spectrum Paint Delhi Spectrum
6.5 Ploshing (for Woodwork)
A Asian Paints Mumbai Asian Paint
B Shalimar Paints Mumbai Mellac
7.0 Roofing Sheets & Accessories
7.1 Precoated Profiled G.I./ Galvalume/ Zincalume Sheets
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloydeck
B Interarch Building Products (P) Ltd. Noida Tracdek
C Multi Colour Steel (I) Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Multi ……
D Hardcastele & Waud Mfg. Co. Ltd. Mumbai Fero Colour
E Japan Metal Building Systems Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore JMBS
F TATA Bluescope Steel Limited Pune Trimdf CK
G Era Building Systems Limited Delhi ERA
H Shree Precoated Steels Limited Mumbai Metacolour
7.2 C.G.I. Sheet
A ISPAT Industries Ltd. Delhi Everest
B Steel Authority of India Ltd. - SAIL
C TATA Steel - TISCO
7.3 Aluminium Sheet
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
B Hindalco Mumbai
7.4 Fiber Glass Sheet & Panels
A Simba Frp (P) Ltd. Delhi
8.0 Sanitary, Plumbing Fittings & Fixtures
8.1 Sanitary Fittings
All Manufacturers Listed by BIS under
A IS:3087 (Having operative and valid license)
at BIS Web Site http://ww.bis.org.in/
8.2 Plumbing Fittings and Fixtures
A Jupiter Aqua Lines Ltd. Mohali Jupitor
B Othello Faucets Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Mayur
C Orient Ceramics Delhi Orient
D Gem International Faridabad Gem
E Parkash Brassware Industres Delhi Parko
F Jaquar & Company Ltd. Delhi Jaquar
G Plastocraft Sanitary India Pvt. Ltd./ HSW Delhi Kingston
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
8.2H Calcutta
Hinddustan Engineerng Products Company
8.2I RCC Pipes
Delhi/ Allahabad/
A Indian Hume Pipe Company Chandigarh/
Lucknow
B Hindustan Pressure Pipes Kolhapur
C Dhere Concrete Products Pune
8.2J GI Pipes
A Indian Tube Company Culcutta
B Kalinga Tubes Limited Cuttack Gujarat
C Steel Tube
D Zenith Tube Co. Kolaba
E Bharat Steel Tube New Delhi
F Jindal
G Shivmoni Steel Tubes Limited Bangalore
H Sekhar Iron Works Calcutta
I Jain Tubes, Ghaziabad
J Khandelwal Tubes Nagpur
8.2K G.I. Fittings
A International Pipe Works Calcutta
B R.M. Engineering Works Jalandhar
C Bombay Metal Company Bombay
D Tarapada Das & Sons Howrah
E Annapurna Metal Works Calcutta
8.2L Gun Metal Valves and Copper Alloy Valve
A Leader Engineering Wroks Jalandhar
B Neta Engineering Works Jalandhar
C Lakshmi Metal Works Jalandhar
D Bombay Metal & AlloysCompany Bombay
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
E Luster Sanitary Fittings Jalandhar

F Annapurna Metal Works Culcutta
8.2M Sluice Valves, Check Valves etc.
A Shiva Durga Iron Works, Howrah
B Leader Engineering Wroks Jalandhar
C Kirloskar Bros Limited Pun
D Indian Valve Calcutta
E Geeta Iron & Brass Works Baroda
8.2N Brass Fittings
B L & K Mathura
C Luster Sanitary Fittings Jalandhar
D Annapurna Metal Works Calcutta
E Neta Engineering Works Jalandhar
F Honey Industril Corporation Bombay
8.2O C.P. Fittings
A Ego Metal Works Ballabhgarh
B Jaquar & Company Ltd. Delhi
C Soma Plumbing Fixtures Limited Calcutta
D Gem Sanitary Appliances Pvt. Ltd. Delhi
E Essco Sanitations Delhi
F Bilmet Bombay
8.2P Hydrants
A Brady's Bombay
B Firex Bombay
C Upadhya Valves Calcutta
D Eddy Foundry Calcutta
E Minimax Delhi
8.2Q Stone Ware (Salt - Glazed) Pipes
A Hind Ceramics Limited Orissa
B Ceramic Industries Limited Sambalpur
C Shrikamakshi Agencies Madras
D Binary Udyog Pvt. Lmited Howrah
E Tirumati Moulds Limited Nagpur
F Kiran Potteries Hyderabad
G Perfect Sanitary Pipes Bharatpur
8.3 Mirror/ Glass
A Atul Glass Delhi Atul
B Gujarat Guardian Ltd./ Modi / Saint Govin Delhi Modiguard
C Triveni Glass Kolkata Triveni
D Continental Float Glass Delhi Continental
E Hindustan Safety Glass Kolkata Hindustan
9.0 False Ceiling
9.1 Aluminimum Strip/ Tray Type
A Interarch Building Products (P) Ltd. Noida Trac
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
B Hunter Douglas Delhi Luxalon

C Mascot Oversfas Delhi Mctacie/ Trulon
D Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloyd Lineal Celings
9.2 Gypsum Board
Saint-Gobain Guproc India Ltd., LA, IP
A Mumbai Gypboard
Board
9.3 False Ceiling (POP/ Gypsum Board)
A Armstrong, Daiken, Luxalon, Llyods
10.0 False Flooring
A United Insulation Mumbai
B Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi
C Muti Floors Delhi
D A.R & Brothers Chennai
E Bestlock System & Concepts, Goderej Mumbai
11.0 Insulation
11.1 Underdeck Insulation
A Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Secundrabad Phenotherm
B Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Isolloyd
C UP Twiga Fibre Glass Limited Delhi TWIGA
11.2 Overdeck Insulation
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloyad Spray Foam
B Best Plastronics Ltd. Delhi Best Plastronics
12.0 Miscellaneous Items
12.1 Water Proofing Compound in Plaster
A Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICO No.1
B Pidilite Industries Mumbai Pidiproof LA
C Amit Chemicals (P) Ltd. Delhi CRETO ADMIX
12.2 CPRX Bituman Mastic
A Shai Imar Tar Products Delhi Shalimar Tar
13.0 Concrete Admixtures
13.1 Water Proofing Compound
A Cico Technologies Ltd. New Delhi CICO No.1
CICO Super
CICO Acry
B Kryton Buildmat Co Pvt. Ltd. Delhi KIM
C Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata Plastocrete Plus
Noleek
13.2 Water Reducing Compounds
A CICO Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICOPLAST Super
B Fairmatf Chemicals Pvt. Ltd. Vadodara Faircrete N Fairflo
Fairf LO S
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Plastiment BV
Plastiment 81
Plastiment 70
Sikament FF
Sikament NN
Sikament
NN (BWS)
C Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata Sikament NNSP1
Skamen 1
Sikarapid 1
Sikaviscocrl : L
20HE
Sikaviscocre TE
R550 (I)
Sika AER
14.0 Construction Chemicals

14.1 Polysulphide Sealant
A Cnowksfy Chemicals Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai Techseal
B Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICOSEALANI T580
C Fosroc Chemical Delhi Thioflex 660
D Pidilite Industries Mumbai Pidiseal PS42P
SIKA Polysul PH:DE
E Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata (Sika AST:C)
Construction
14.2 Silicon Sealants
Dr. Fixit Silicon Sealant
A Pidilite Industries Ltd. Mumbai
WX
15.0 Anchor Fasteners
15.1 Mechanical Anchor Fasteners
A Hilti India Pvt. Ltd. Delhi
B Fischer Fixing Systems (MICO) Ltd. Bangalore
15.2 Chemical Anchor Fasteners
16.0 Electro-Forged Gratings
A Greatweld Steel Gratings Pvt. Ltd. Pune
B Indiana Gratings Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
17 Modular Partitions/ Furniture
A Godrej, Blowplast, Featherlire, Duriar
18.0 Wall Care Putty for Base Preparation (1st Quality Only)
A Birla Wall Care Putty
B M/s Sahlimar Hardware
C Berger delhi
D Jenson & Nichoison Gurgaon
E JK White Udaipur
19.0 White Cement (1st Quality Only)
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
A Birla, JK
20.0 Sheet Glass/ Structural Glazing
A Hindustan Pilkington Glass Works Chennai
B Saint Gobain Chennai
C Modi Float Delhi
D Triveni Float Glass Allahabad
F ASI
G Fresca
H Emirates
21.0 Polycorbonate Sheet
A GE Plastic, Everest
22.0 Multiiell/ Multiwall Polycorbonate Panel
A M/s Coxwell Domes Engineering, Delhi Delhi
B M/s Lexan, M/s Galina India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
C M/s Vijaynath Interiors & Exteriors Products Mumbai
23.0 Stainless Steel Railing
A Jindal
24.0 Punch Tape Concetina Coil
A Global Technocrat, S.G. Engineers Delhi
25.0 Punch Tape In Plastic Spool
A Jindal New Delhi
27.0 SGSW Pipes (IS-651) ISI marked
Perfect Agra, Devraj Ind. Gaziabad, Buran,
A
RK, Prince, Supreme Pipe and Fittings
28.0 CI (Centrifugally Cast) Pipes for Sewage Disposal ISI Marked
NICCO, SRIF, A-1 Singhal Casting Co Agra,
A
Jindal Saw, Kesoram
29.0 PVC Rain Water/ Sewage Pipes (IS-4985)
A Reliance, Finolex, Supreme, Kisan, Prince
30.0 HDPE Water / Sewage Pipes (Rotational Moulded)
A Sintex, Swift, Nutech, Sheetal
31.0 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
A Ganga Asbestos Limited U.P
Hyderabad Asbestos Cement Products
B
Limited
C J.K. Super Pipes Industries Nanded
D Konark Cement and Asbestos Limited Orissa
E Maharashtra Asbestos Lmited Bombay
F Poddar Industrial Corporation Patna
G Sarbamangala Mfg. Company Calcutta
32.0 Wind Driyen Air Ventilators
A Multi Colour
Anchit Ispat Pvt. Ltd. Faridabad
Apurva Enterprises Mumbai
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
SVS Wind Driven Turbo Ventilator Ahmadnagar

Real Green Engineers Pvt. Ltd. Bagalores Bangalore
Sun Green Ventilation System Pvt. Ltd Mylapore
SECTION - III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR

MECHANICAL WORKS
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
CONTENTS
SECTION A. SS TUBE LAYING AND TESTING
SECTION B. ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
SECTION C. SUPPLY, ERECTION & COMMISSIONING OF

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
MECHANICAL WORKS
SECTION A. SS TUBE LAYING AND TESTING
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
3.0 REMAKE OF FITTINGS
4.0 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION, CODES AND STANDARDS
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
6.0 SCRAP AND EXCESS MATERIAL

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
1.1 LAYING OF SS TUBE
Laying, testing and commissioning of SS tubes and fittings complete with all
supports.The MS Angle and U-clamps (galvanised) / other fixing arrangement
shall be procured and installed by the contractor. Payment shall be at the rate
for the work set out in the agreed Schedule of Rates.
Contractor shall engage GAIL INDIA LIMITED/MECON approved sub-

contractor for this specialized work. The list of parties are enclosed in
Annexure-I.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS: FOR LAYING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING OF SS

TUBING
Generally the following shall constitute the Contractor's scope of work but not
limited to as given herein:
1.2.1 SS tubes shall be clamped to the MS Angle at every 1000 mm using P-

clamps of SWAGELOK make / any other approved make / SS – 308 clamps
with EPDM cushion. The practice of flattening tubes for clamping purposes
shall not be permitted.
1.2.2 MS Angle and U-clamps (galvanised) shall be procured from approved

manufacturers and through a QAP including stage inspection and pre-
dispatch inspection of the materials by GAIL INDIA LIMITED / MECON. (To
be isolated by rubber gaskets).
1.2.3 Tubes shall be bend using tube benders only and any hot bending will be
totally rejected. Tubes shall be cut using pipe cutting device. Hot cutting is not
allowed.
1.2.4 Carrying out pneumatic testing and purging with nitrogen as per approved
procedures; providing all tools, tackles, instruments, manpower and other
related accessories for carrying out the testing of tubes.
1.2.5 Start-up and commissioning assistance.
1.2.6 Handing over the completed works to GAIL INDIA LIMITED for their
operation/ use purposes.
1.2.7 Any other work not specifically mentioned herein, but required for the
satisfactory completion/ operation/ safety/ statutory/ maintenance of the works
shall also be covered under the scope of work and has to be completed by
the Contractor within specified schedule at no extra cost to GAIL INDIA
LIMITED.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
2.0 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
2.1 TUBE END PREPARATION
2.1.1 Cut the ends square with a hacksaw and a suitable guide. Tube cutters are
satisfactory for most tube materials but tend to work harden stainless steel.
As such proper care shall be exercised while cutting the SS tubes to avoid the
hardening.
2.1.2 Burrs must be removed inside and outside for proper entry into fitting to
prevent contamination and/ or restricted flow. ‘Swagelok’ deburring tool shall
be used.
2.1.3 Remove all fittings, chips, and grit before attachment of fittings.
2.2 ASSEMBLY
2.2.1 Tube line fabrication must be accurate so that the tube end easily enters the
fitting in proper alignment. Do not force an improperly fitted tube line into the
fittings.
2.2.2 Ensure that the tube end is bottomed against the shoulder in the fitting body.
This is necessary to prevent movement of the tube while the nut forces the
ferrule to grip the tube and to seal through any imperfections that may exist
on the outside tube surface.
2.2.3 Never permit the fitting body to rotate during tube end make-up, use two
wrenches. Assemble port connectors to components first and hold with a
wrench while making up the tube joint. All types of union bodies must be held
while each of the tube ends is made up.
2.2.4 Never attempt to make up by torque.
2.2.5 Always turn the nut the prescribed amount regardless of torque required.
Fitting end plugs required only 1- ¼ turn from finger tight make up in all sizes.
3.0 REMAKE OF FITTINGS
A disassembled joint can be remade, simply by retightening the nut to the

position of the original make up. For maximum number of remakes, mark the
fitting and nut before disassembly. Before retightening, make sure the
assembly has been inserted into the fitting until the ferrule(s) seats in the
fitting. Retighten the nut by hand. Rotate the nut with a wrench to the original
position as indicated by the previous marks lining up. (A noticeable increase
in mechanical resistance will be felt indicating the ferrule is being re-sprung
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
into sealing position.) Then snug the nut 1/12 turn (1/2 hex flat) past the
original position.
4.0 REFERENCE SPECIFICATION, CODES AND STANDARDS
The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with this specification,
MECON's Engineering Standards, ASME B 31.8 - Gas Transmission and
Distribution Piping Systems, Oil Industry Safety Directorate (OISD) norms.
Should the Contractor find any discrepancy, ambiguity or conflict in or

between any of the Standards and the contract documents, then this should
be promptly referred to the Engineer-in-Charge (EIC) for his decision, which
shall be considered binding on the contractor.
5.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
5.1 In general the following tubes & fittings shall be supplied:
i ¾” OD SS Tube of 0.095 wall thick min.

ii ½” OD SS Tube of 0.083 wall thick min.
iii Double Compression Ferrule Fittings of sizes ¾”, ½”, 3/8” & ¼”.
iv SS Valves of suitable sizes.
5.2 SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT HIS OWN COST AS PART OF THIS

SPECIFICATION:
The procurement and supply of MS Angle with U- clamps at the appropriate

time of all the materials and consumables except for the materials specifically
enlisted under Owner's scope of supply, shall be entirely the Contractor's
responsibility and its rates of execution shall be inclusive for all these items,
as follows but not limited to these:
i Bolts and nuts for supports, U-bolts with nuts, P-clamps for tubes,
anchor bolts of various sizes for fixing to concrete structure.
ii Bitumen paints primer and solvents.
iii All material for minor civil works like grouting etc.,
iv Minor structural steel for fabrication of tube/ tray supports like MS
plates, GI plates, flats, pipe etc.,
v Pumps, compressor, Corrosion Inhibitor for water used for hydrostatic
testing, including water for testing, inert gas for purging.
vi All items not expressly mentioned in the Contract but which are
necessary for the satisfactory completion and performance of the
Work under this Contract.
Note: Samples of all the consumables items / test certificates required to be

approved by EIC.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
6.0 SCRAP AND EXCESS MATERIAL
Every month the Contractor shall submit an account for all the materials
issued to him by the owner in the standard proforma prescribed for this
purpose by the Engineer-in-charge.
On completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit material appropriation
statements for all the materials issued by the Owner in the standard proforma.
The following scrap allowances are permissible.
ITEM UNACCOUNTABLE SCRAP
Tube 1% 1% (Less than 0.3 m)

Valves 0% 0%
Ferrule Fittings 0% 0%
All excess materials and scrap shall be returned after duly accounting for, to
the GAIL GAS LIMITED stores. Where materials are to be weighed before
return, the Contractor shall be responsible for making necessary
arrangements for weighing etc. The contractor shall not use scrap sections
obtained during the course of construction for fabrication of temporary
supports or other items without prior written permission of Engineer-in-
Charge.
If the Contractor fails to return the surplus material aforesaid, the Owner will
charge the Contractor for such unreturned material at penal rates, which will
be deducted from whatever amount is due to the Contractor. In case any
material issued by the Owner deteriorates during storage by the Contractor,
new material will be issued to him if available at penal rates, but delay in
procuring such materials will be at the Contractor's account only. Any
damaged valve and ferrule fittings should not be used and shall be returned
to GAIL GAS LIMITED stores.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
SECTION B.
ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS:
1. SCOPE OF WORK FOR LOADING, UNLOADING, TRANSPORTATION &

ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT.
2. EQUIPMENT WEIGHTS & SIZES.

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
SECTION-B
LOADING, UNLOADING, TRANSPORTATION & ERECTION OF MECHANICAL

EQUIPMENT
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK:
1.1 Generally the following shall constitute the Contractor’s scope of

work but not limited to as given herein:
i) Receiving of material from stores.
ii) Loading of material/ equipment on a trailer / truck from stores. Safe
transportation to various sites.
iii) Unloading, placement and alignment on foundation
-on ground or above ground + 3.5 m at roof top (cascade only).
iv) Transit Insurance of equipment from stores to site.
v) All equipment transported shall be securely boarded and transported
without causing any damage to equipment. Any damage caused
during loading, transportation & unloading shall be recoverable from
the contractor.
vi) All the equipment shall be leak tested after erection as per instruction
of engineering in charge and standard practice.
2.0 Equipment weight & sizes
Sl. Equipment Weight/

No. Size Unit
Appx.
1. Cascade 4500 L,3000 L 5.5 M X 1.75M X 1.6M (H) 6.0 T
(water capacity) approx
All excess, unutilised or defective materials and scrap shall be returned after
duly accounting for, to theGAIL GAS LIMITED stores. Where materials are to
be weighed before return, the Contractor shall be responsible for making
necessary arrangements for weighing etc. The contractor shall not use
scrapped or defective materials obtained during the course of construction for
fabrication of temporary supports or other items without prior written
permission of Engineer-in-Charge.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
If the Contractor fails to return the surplus material aforesaid, the Owner will
charge the Contractor for such un-returned material at penal rates, which will
be deducted from whatever amount is due to the Contractor. In case any
material issued by the Owner deteriorates during storage by the Contractor,
new material will be issued to him if available at penal rates, but delay in
procuring such materials will be at the Contractor’s account only.
Contractor to arrange all equipment & tools such as cranes, winch, lifting
hook etc and skilled & semiskilled manpower and consumables for erection of
all the electro-mechanical equipment.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
SECTION – C
SUPPLY, ERECTION & COMMISSIONING OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
CONTENTS:
1.0 Fire Fighting Equipment: Contractor will supply and erect at designated locations
the fire fighting equipment. The details of the fire fighting equipment are given below.
1. Supply and installation of 4.5 kg capacity CO2 type fire extinguishers with steel
cylinder with discharge valve and conforming to IS: 2878-1975. Extinguisher shall
be painted with red enamel paint and hardware/ bracket required for fixing to wall.
2. Supply and installation of 10 kg capacity dry chemical powder (DCP) type fire
extinguisher with extinguishers cabinet suitable for inverted operation and
fabricated from MS sheet internally protected with anticorrosive treatment and
hydraulically tested. Extinguishers shall be externally painted with red enamel
paint. Manufacturing code IS: 13849.
3. Supply and installation of 75 kg capacity trolly mounted dry chemical powder

(DCP) type fire extinguisher suitable for inverted operation fabricated from MS
sheet internally protected with anticorrosive treatment and hydraulically tested
extinguishers externally painted with red enamel. Manufacturing code IS: 10658.
4. Providing & installation of galvanised mild steel fire buckets of 9 ltrs. capacity,
made as per IS: 2546 including supplying & fixing of MS angle iron stand to
accommodate 6 nos. of fire buckets and first fill with sand/water all complete as
per direction of Engineer In charge (One set consisting of 6 buckets with stand).
Note: The equipment are to be purchased from the vendor list enclosed.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Sheet 1 of 1
LIST OF SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR BOUGHT-OUT ITEMS
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Fire Extinguihers
1. Nitin Fire Protection Pvt. Ltd., Mumbai

2. Safex Fire Services, Bombay
3. Fire Safety Services, New Delhi
4. HD Fire Protect Co., Thane
5. Zenith Fire Services, Bombay
6. Steelage Industries, New Delhi
7. Atlas Firetech Pvt. Ltd., Delhi
Note: Contractor shall select vendor/ agency from above list and clearly indicate
name(s) as selected from the list, in his bid.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
ANNEXURE- I
LIST OF PARTIES FOR SS TUBING
1. M/s Aadhar Projects, New Delhi

2. M/s Khurana Engineering Works, New Delhi
3. M/s Eco Technologies, New Delhi
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
SECTION - III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Index
Sl. No. Description
1 General.
2 Scope
3 Other Miscellaneous Work
4 Area Classification.
5 Job Specification.
6 Statutory approval of works.
7 Makes of equipments and materials.
8 Inspection, testing and commissioning.
9 Drawings, standard specifications and Installation standards.
PREPARED BY: CHECKED BY: APPROVED BY: ISSUE DATE :
(Shifa Jindal) (Quasim Ahmad) ( D G Majumder ) SEP, 2017

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Introduction
The intent of this specification is to define the requirements for the supply of
equipment and materials (as required), erection, testing and commissioning of the
electrical power distribution system.
The work shall be carried out in the best workmanship – like manner, in conformity
with these specifications, approved drawings and the instructions of the Engineer-in-
charge from time to time.
The contract shall include clearing of temporary construction, waste materials and
loose earth, which might get collected in and nearby the work site consequent of the
execution of work under this contract.
1.2 Standards
The work shall be performed in conformity with, standard specifications and

installation standards enclosed and code of practices of the Bureau of India
Standards. In case of any conflict, the stipulations under this specification shall
govern.
In addition, the work shall also conform to the requirements of the following:
The Indian Electricity Act, and the rules framed there under
The fire Insurance Regulations
The regulations laid down by the Chief Electrical Inspector of the state government /
Central Electricity Authority (CEA).
The regulations laid down by the Factory Inspector.
The regulations laid down by the Chief Inspector of Explosives.
Any other regulations laid down by the Central, State or Local Authorities from time to
time during the pendency of this contract.
1.3 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the installation against any defects of workmanship
and materials (supplied by the contractor) for a period of 12 months from the date of
issue of the completion certificate. Any damage or defects connected with the
erection of materials, equipments or fittings supplied by the contractor that may be
undiscovered at the time of issue of the completion certificate, or may arise or come
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
to light thereafter, shall be rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense
as deemed necessary and as per the instruction of the Engineer-in-charge within the
time limit specified by the Engineer-in-charge.
The above guarantee shall be applicable for the quality of work executed as well as
for the equipment / cable / fittings/ other material supplied by the contractor.
1.4 Site Conditions
The equipment offered and the installation shall be suitable for continuous
operation under the following site conditions.
Max. / Min temperature : 500C/50C

Max. relative humidity : 90 %
Altitude : Less than 1000 m above MSL
Atmosphere : To withstand site conditions
(Dry, dust storms during summer,
Humid & Heavy Rainfall during
Monsoon)
1.5 Power Supply Parameters :
i) For Daughter Booster station at Gordhanpura & NILKA IOCL & Other
equivalent like Decompressing skid in Global Ceramic.
NORMAL POWER 415V AC, 3 Phase & Neutral

LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION (Normal) 230 V AC, 1 Phase
INSTRUMENTATION 230 V AC, 1 Phase
(UPS)
2.0 SCOPE
2.1 SCOPE OF DESIGN & ENGINEERING
2.1.1 Submission of electrical equipment drawings for review, preparation of site

engineering drawings and details for installation works wherever applicable or
required by the Engineer-in-charge, and submits to the Engineer-in-charge
for review.
2.1.2 Correction, updating and submission of all Owner’s drawings for as-built
status.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
2.1.3 Obtaining clearance for energizing the complete electrical facilities covered
under this tender and approval of installation and drawings from the Chief
Electrical Inspector of the State Government/Central Electricity Authority and
other statutory authority as required. This includes equipments installed or
commissioned by others within the battery limit. This is for the purpose of
obtaining a comprehensive approval in one go.
2.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
Following electrical equipment and material are in the contractor’s scope of

supply in this tender.
2.2.1 MV power and control cable (XLPE – insulated armoured Al/Cu conductor
1/2/3/3.5/4 core cables).
2.2.2.1 A stand alone dusk-dawn solar photovoltaic street lighting system for outdoor
emergency lighting at various stations as per enclosed SOR and specification.
2.2.3 GI pipes, GI Cable-trays and accessories, cable markers, identifier tags, GI

saddles and all other associated accessories for cable-laying.
2.2.4 FLP type double-compression nickel-plated brass cable glands, tinned- copper
lugs, clamping material etc. for cable termination.
2.2.5 Lighting system, including lighting fixtures, lighting and power panels,
switches, sockets, PVC conduit to be laid in the concrete slab / other civil
construction etc. in safe area. Piano reed type sockets complete with MDF
Board & 10 pair cable etc. for indoor Telephones including LAN wiring etc.
2.2.6 Earthing and lightning system, including earthing pits, earth electrodes,
earthing strips, grounding conductor of various sizes, Cu strip for flange
jumper and Cu earth plates etc.
2.2.7 Safety equipment in the stations/terminals, like shock treatment charts,

caution boards, first aid equipment, rubber mats, portable fire extinguishers,
sand bucket etc.
2.2.8 Split Air Conditioners with stabilizer.
2.2.9 Flameproof type welding receptacles etc.

Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
2.2.10 UPS system, Rectifier, Battery Bank, ACDB / DCDB & interconnecting cables
as per specification.
2.2.12 Cables between transformer LT terminals of transformer & load break fuse
switch unit, cable supports, double compression cable glands, lugs etc. as
required.
2.2.13 Gas Gen Set
2.2.14 Stand alone Solar street light.
2.2.15 Supply of 250 A TPN, AC-23 duty fuse switch unit in outdoor type dust &
weather proof steel enclosure.
2.2.16 Fabrication and supply of MS frames, supports, canopies and brackets for
miscellaneous electrical equipments, including welding, supply of bolts, nuts
etc for mounting and other necessary supplies, all inclusive of painting as
specified.
2.3 SCOPE OF INSTALLATION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
2.3.1 Laying & termination of all MV power and control cables laid in concrete-lined
trenches, buried cable trenches, pipes, road crossings, pipe-racks etc.
2.3.2 Installation testing & commissioning of 415 V switch boards/PDBs/LDBs.
2.3.3 Installation, testing & commissioning of Outdoor type pole mounted 11/0.433
kV Transformer substation.
2.3.4 Installation, testing & commissioning of Distribution Transformer with Double

Pole, Gang switch, over head Conductor of suitable rating and all necessary
accessories for completion of work including tapping from existing HT line
etc. complete as per specification & SOR.
2.3.5 Installation, testing & commissioning of Cables between transformer LT

terminals of transformer & load break fuse switch unit, cable supports, double
compression cable glands, lugs etc as required.
2.3.6 Installation, testing & commissioning of 250 A TPN, AC-23 duty MCCB in
outdoor type dust & weather proof steel enclosure.
2.3.7 Installation, testing and commissioning of stand alone dusk-dawn solar

photovoltaic street lighting system for outdoor emergency lighting in scope of
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Solar street light contractor/vendor & shall be as per enclosed SOR and
specification.
2.3.8 Installation, testing and commissioning of lighting system in buildings.
2.3.9 Installation, testing and commissioning of street lighting system.
2.3.10 Installation of earthing system material & testing and commissioning of

complete lightning protection system.
2.3.11 Installation, testing and commissioning of the contractor supplied materials.
2.3.12 Installation testing & commissioning of Oil filled transformer and pole
mounted HT substation.
2.3.13 Installation testing & commissioning of Dual Redundant UPS system.
2.3.14 Installation testing & commissioning of Inverter for emergency power.
2.3.15 Installation testing & commissioning Stand alone Solar street light.
2.3.16 All works relating to statutory approvals of the complete installation, from
competent authority like CEA, DGMS, State electricity authority/Board etc,
shall be in the scope of contractor.
3.0 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
3.1 Preparation of buried cable trenches, including, back filling, compacting

providing of brick protection by second-class bricks, spreading of fine river
sand, including all supplies.
3.2 The job includes repairing of all civil works damaged during installation of
electrical facilities.
3.3 The scope of work under this contract shall be inclusive of breaking of walls,
floors and chipping of concrete foundations necessary for the installation of
equipment, materials, and making good of the same.
3.4 Minor modifications wherever required to be done in the owner free supplied
equipments / devices to enable cable entry, termination, etc.
3.5 Sealing of opening made in the walls / floors for cables trays, cables, bus
ducts, etc using acceptable practice and standards.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
3.6 Supply and installation of all other accessories not specifically mentioned
herein, but never the less necessary for completion of the job.
4.0 AREA CLASSIFICATION
Hydrocarbon handling areas have been generally classified as zone 1, gas

group IIA/IIB as per IS: 5572, API RP-500, OISD - 113 and IP Rules. All
equipments to be installed in these areas shall be suitable for the area
classification with temperature class T3 (2000C), CMRI testing and approved
by CCOE, DGFAS and having BIS license.
5.0 JOB SPECIFICAITONS
Various electrical works covered under this contract like equipment erection,
cabling, lighting and grounding works, etc. shall be performed in accordance
with specifications attached with this tender. (Certain clauses of specifications,
which are applicable to equipments or system not covered under this contract,
shall not be applicable).
Erection and commissioning of certain special equipments shall be performed in

accordance with supplier’s instructions and directions of the Engineer-in-
charges under supervision by equipment supplier/s.
The equipments/materials to be supplied by the contractor shall conform to the

requirements of the applicable specifications enclosed in the tender document.
6.0 STATUTORY APPROVAL OF WORKS
All works relating to statutory approvals of the complete installation, from

competent authority like CEA, DGMS, State electricity Authority/Board etc, shall
be in the scope of contractor.
The application on behalf of the owner for submission to Electrical Inspector /

DGMS etc. along with copies of required certificates and drawings, complete in
all respects, shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to the Engineer-
in-charge for onward transmission well ahead of time so that the actual
commissioning of equipment are not delayed for want of inspection by the
Electrical Inspector / DGMS. The actual Liaison work shall be arranged by the
Contractor and necessary coordination and liaisons work in this respect shall be
responsibility of the contractors. However, the Owner on submission of bills
along with documentary evidence shall reimburse any fee paid to the statutory
Authority in this regards.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
7.0 MAKES OF EQUIPMENTS AND MATERIALS
All equipments / materials supplied by the contractor shall be as per the list of
approved makes enclosed with this document subject to submission of
Certification and approvals.
8.0 INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
a. All the equipment supplied and installed by the contractor shall be tested and
commissioning as required and no separate payments shall be made.
Contractor shall purposes. Any damage or defect noticed shall be brought to
the notice of the engineer- in-charge.
b. Any work not conforming to the execution drawings, specifications or codes

shall be rejected forthwith and the contractor shall carry out the rectification at
his own cost.
c. The contractor shall carry out all the tests as enumerated in the technical
specifications and as per applicable codes and standards.
d. Before the electrical system is made live, the electrical contractor shall carry out
suitable tests to establish to the satisfaction of engineer-in-charge that the
installation of equipments, wiring and connections have been correctly done
and are in good working condition and that it will operate as intended.
e. All the tests shall be conducted in the presence of Owner/ Engineer-in/charge

or his authorized representative unless he waives this requirement in writing.
The contractor shall arrange all testing equipment necessary to carry out the
test. The tests shall be recorded on approved Performa and certified records of
the tests shall be submitted to Owner/ Engineer-in-charge.
f. After the completion of all tests and rectification of all defects pointed out
during final inspection, plant start-up trials would be commenced. During the
start-up trials contractor shall provide skilled / unskilled personnel and
supervision round the clock at his cost. The number and category of workmen
and duration up to which required, will be decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
Any defects noticed during the start-up trial relating to the equipment supplied
and work carried out by the Contractor, will be rectified by the contractor at his
own cost.
g. Engineer-in- charge shall have the right to get these defects rectified at the risk
and cost of the contractor if he fails to attend to these defects immediately as
desired.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
h. After the operating conditions are fully achieved in the plant and the other
requirements as stated in the General Conditions of Contract are fulfilled, the
contractor would be eligible for applying for a completion certificate.
9.0 DRAWINGS, STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLATION

STANDARDS
9.1 The equipments / materials to be supplied by the contractor shall conform to

the requirements of the applicable specifications. Also the installation of various
material / equipment shall conform to the installation standards /norms.
9.2 The drawings accompanying the tender documents when read with
specification shall depict the electrical system of the Terminal. These are
indicative of the nature of work and issued for tendering purposes only.
Purpose of these drawings is to enable the tendered to make an offer in line
with the requirements of the Owner. Construction shall be as per drawings /
specifications issued / approved by the Engineer-in-charge during the course of
execution of work.
9.3 Conduit layout drawing in ceiling, wherever required, to be prepared by the

contractor and shall be submitted for approval.
9.4 After the job completion, contractor shall prepare AS-BUILT drawings and
documents, submit catalogues/manuals (O&M) of major brought out items like
UPS, Inverter, HT Substation, Lighting fixture etc. Final certified as built
drawings, documents and manuals etc shall be submitted by the contractor to
owner in bound volume with one set in soft copy (CD) plus five sets of prints.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
ELECTRICAL
LIST OF SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR BOUGHT‐OUT ITEMS
Air Conditioner
1. O General
2. Daikin
3. Hitachi
Batteries (Lead Acid)

1. Amco Batteries Ltd.
2. Exide Industries Ltd.
3. HBLNIFE Power System Ltd.
4. Amara Raja Batteries Ltd.
Batteries (Nickel Cadmium)

1. Amco Batteries Ltd.
2. HBLNIFE Power Systems Ltd.
Batteries Charger/DC-DC Converter

1. Amara Raja Power System(P)Ltd.
2. BCH.
3. Chhabi Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
4. Caldyne Automatics Limited
5. Dubas
6. HBL Nife Power Systems Ltd.
7. Universal Industries Products
8. Universal Instrument Mfg Co Pvt Ltd
Cable – Fire Alarm & Communication Cables

1. Cords Cable Industries Ltd.
2. CMI
3. Delton cables Ltd.
4. ELKAY Telelinks
5. KEI Industries Ltd.
6. Reliance Engineers Ltd.
Cable – HT(XLPE)
1. Universal Cable Ltd.
3. Industrial Cables
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
4. NICCO Corporation Ltd.

5. Uniflex
6. Polycab.
7. Torrent cables Ltd.
Cable – LT Power and Control
1. Cords Cable Industries Ltd.

2. Universal Cable Ltd.
4. Havells.
5. Delton
6. Elkay Telelinks
7. Evershine Electricals
8. Ecko
9. Ravin
10. Rallison.
11. Suyog
12. Netco
13. Uniflex
14. Paramount
15. Gloster
16. Associated cables Pvt Ltd.
17. CMI
18. Gemscab
19. Industrial cables
20. NICCO
21. Polycab
22. Torrent
Cable – Gland
1. .Baliga
2. .Comet
3. Flexpro
4. Flameproof
5. FCG
6. Electro Werke
7. Dowels
8. CCI
Cable – Lugs
1. Dowels
2. Jainson
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
3. Ismal
Cable – Tray
1. Ercon Composites
2. Yamuna Power & Infrastructure Ltd.
Cable Termination and Jointing Kit
1. CCI
2. Raychem
3. M-Seal
Ceiling/Exhaust/Pedestal Fans & Circulators

1. Bajaj Electricals Ltd.
2. Crompton Greaves Ltd.
3. Khaitan Electricals Ltd.
4. Havell’s
Contractors – AC Power
1 Andrew Yule
2 ABB
3 BHEL
4 C&S
5 Havell’s
6 L&T
7 Schneider
8 Siemens Ltd.
9 Telemechanique
Control Transformer
1. AE
2. Indushree
3. Intra Vidyut
4. Kalpa Electrikals
5. Transpower Industries Ltd.
6. Siemens
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
DG Set
1. Sterling and Wilson.
2. GD ankalesaria.
3. Deev Genset.
4. Jackson
5. Sudheer Gensets.
6. Power Engineering(India) Pvt Ltd.
Earthing Materials
1. Rukmani Electrical & Components Pvt Ltd.
2. Indiana Grating Pvt Ltd.
3. Jef Techno Solutions Pvt Ltd
Flame proof LDB’s/ JB,s/Control Station/ switches

7. FCG
8. Sudhir
9. Prompt Engineering Works
10. Flame Proof equipments pvt. Ltd.
11. Baliga Lighting Equipments Pvt. Ltd.
12. Flexpro Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
High Mast
1. Bajaj Electricals Limited

2. Crompton Greaves Limited.
3. Philips India Limited
4. Surya Roshani
High Voltage PCC/ MCC panels
1. BHEL
2. Control and Switchgear
3. Siemens
4. Tricolite Electrical Industries
5. Schneider
6. CGL
7. L&T
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
Indicating Lamps
Alstom Ltd.
BCH
L&T Ltd.
Siemens Ltd.
5. Vaishno Electricals
Indicating Meters
1. ABB
2. AMCO
3. AE
4. Alstom Ltd. (EE)
5. Conzerv/Schneider
6. Elecon Measurement Pvt. Ltd.
7. HPL Electric & Power Pvt. Ltd.
8. MECO Instruments Ltd.
9. Minilec
10. Rishabh Instruments Pvt. Ltd.
11. Trinity energy system
12. kaycee
13. Salzer
Lighting Fixtures
1. GE Lighting Pvt. Ltd.

4. Philips India Ltd.
Lighting Fixtures – Flameproof

2. Baliga Lighting Equipment Pvt. Ltd.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED

4. CEAG Flameproof Controlgear Pvt. Ltd.
5. Flexpro Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
6. Philips India Ltd.
7. Sudhir Switchgears Pvt. Ltd.
8. FCG.
Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) and Lighting DB
1. ABB
2. Hagger
3. Havell’s India Ltd.
4. Indo Asian Fusegear Ltd.
5. Legrand
6. MDS Switchgear Ltd.
7. Schneider
8. Siemens Ltd.
9. HPL
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCBs)
1. ABB
2. Andrew yule
3. Larsen & Toubro
4. Schneider
5. Siemens
6. Control and Switchgear
Protection Relays – Thermal
BCH
L&T Ltd.
Siemens Ltd.
4. Telemenchanique & Controls (India) Ltd.
Low Voltage Power Control Center (PCC)/ MCC/ PDB/ MLDB/ LDB
1. ABB
2. BCH
3. C&S
4. Elecmech Switchgear & Instrumentation
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
5. KMG ATOZ
6. L&T
7. Pyrotech Electronics Pvt. Ltd.
8. Risha control Engineers Pvt. Ltd.
9. Siemens
10. Tricolite Electrical Industries
11. Unilec Engineers ltd.
12. Vidyut Control India Pvt. Ltd.
13. Control and Schematic
14. Zenith Engineering
Push Buttons
1. BCH
2. Alstom Ltd.
3. L&T
4. Siemens Ltd.
5. Telemenchanique & Controls (India) Ltd.
6. Vaishno Electricals
Switches‐Control
1. BCH
2. Easum Reyrolle Relays & Devices Ltd.
3. Alstom
4. Kaycee Industries Ltd.
5. L&T
6. Siemens Ltd.
Switches – 5/15A Piano/ Plate, Switch Socket

1. Anchor Electronics & Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
2. Kingal Electricals Pvt. Ltd.
3. North-West Switchgear Ltd.
Switch Socket Outlets (Industrial)

1. Alstom Ltd.
2. Best & Cromption Engineering Ltd.
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
3. BCH
5. Essen Engineering Company Pvt. Ltd.
Solar Modules
1. Tata BP Solar (I) Ltd.

2. REIL, Jaipur.
3. CEIL, Sahibabad.
4. HBL Power
Solar Street Lighting
1. Tata BP Solar (I) Ltd.

2. REIL, Jaipur.
3. CEIL, Sahibabad.
4. HBL.
Terminals Blocks
1. Connectwell
2. Controls & Switchgear Co. Ltd.
3. Elmex Controls Pvt. Ltd.
4. Essen Engineering Co. Pvt. Ltd.
Tranformers
1. ABB
2. Andrew Yule
3. Areva
4. BHEL
5. Bharat Bijlee
6. Crompton Greaves
7. EMCO Ltd.
8. Intra Vidyut
9. Indushree
10. Indcoil
11. Kirloskar
Jamshedpur
MECON LIMITED
12. Skippers Electricals

13. Transformers & Rectifiers (I) Ltd.
14. Voltamp
UPS System and Inverter
1. DB POWER
2. APLAB
3. KELTRON
4. HI-REL
5. DUBAS
6. Toshiba Corporation
7. Fuzi Electric Co Ltd
GI-Octogonal Pole
1. Bajaj
2. Transrail
3. Wipro
NOTE:- Item/Vendor,which are not listed above,shall be subject to prior approval from
Client/Consultant.
List of Approved Manufacturers of Architectural / Building Products
Sl.
Item/ Name of Manufacturer Place Brand Name
No.
1.0 Floor Finishing
1.1 Terrazzo Tiles
A Nitco Delhi NITCO
B Hindustan Tiles Delhi Hindustan Tiles
1.2 Ceramic Tiles
B Kajaria Ceramics Ltd. Delhi Kajaria
C Orient Ceramics & Industies Ltd. Delhi Orient
D Bell Ceramics Vadodara BELL
E SPL Ltd. Delhi Somany
F H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Johnson
G Spartek Ceramics Chennai Spartek
H Murudeshwar Ceramics Ltd. Hubli Naveen
1.3 Vitrified Tiles
B Orient Ceramics & Industies Ltd. Delhi Orient
C SPL Ltd. Delhi Somany
D H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Johnson
E Murudeshwar Ceramics Ltd. Chennai Spartek
F Kajaria Ceramics Ltd. Hubli
1.4 Acid Resistant Tiles
B H & R Johnson (I) Ltd. Mumbai Endura
1.5 PVC Tiles/ Rolls
A
B Armstrong World Insutries Mumbai Excelln
C Bhor Industries Delhi MARBLFX
D Shyam Vinyl Chennai Shyam Vinyles
1.6 PVC Tiles/ Rools / Anti-Static)
A Armstrong World Insutries Mumbai Solid LG1
B Premier Poly Film Ltd. Delhi ANSTAT
1.7 Epoxy Coating
Nitofloor SL
A Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore
2000/1000
B Sika Kolkata Sika Floor
C Buildtech Products (I) Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Buildpoxy-SL
D Anupam Industries Kolkata -
E STP Delhi
1.8 Floor Hardener
A Cico Technologies Limited Delhi CICO
B Samcock Chemicals (P) Ltd. Ahmedabad Samhard STD
C PCC CSS Procfssor and Traders Kolkata Doronite
Designer Paver Tiles/ Interlocking Tiles ISI Marked/ Grass-Jointed Tiles (1st Quality
1.9
Only)
19 of 497
Pavit, Ultra, Hindustan, Eurocon, Vyara,
A
National Tiles, Gem, Unistone, Konkrete
B Rammica Indusries Delhi Rammica
C The Bombay Burmah Trading Corpn. Delhi Formica
2.0 Wood Work
2.1 Block Board/ Flush Door
A
2.1 Plywood
A
2.2 Laminates
A
2.3 MDF Boards
A Nuchem Limited Faridabad NULAM/NVWUD
B Mangalam Timber Products Limited Delhi Nuwud
C Western Bio Systems Ltd. PUNF Ecoboard
D Bajaj Eco-Tech Products Limited Noida Bajaj
2.4 Particle Board (Plain/ Veneered/ Pre-Laminated)
All Manufactureres Listed by BIS Under is 3097
A (Having Operative and Valid License) at BIS
Web Site http://www.bis.org.in/
2.5 Pressed Steel Door Frames/ Cupboard and Window Frames (Fabricators)
M/s SAIL
M/s TATA
3.0 Steel/ Aluminium/ Fire Rated Doors, Windows, Ventilators
3.1 Pressed Steel Doors/ Windows
A SKS Steel Ind. Delhi -
B Dhiman Steel Delhi -
C Supper Steel Windows Co. Delhi -
D RDG Engineering Mumbai -
E Anand Industries Delhi -
F Raymus Engineering Gurgaon -
G M/s Loyal Safe Works Mayapur New Delhi
H M/s Multiwyn Industrial Corpn. Clacutta Kolkata
I M/s Metal Window Corpn. New Delhi
260 Sadar Bazar,
J M/s Chhabra Steel Udyog
Meerut Cantt
Rani Jhansi Road, New
K M/s Delite Safe Works,
Delhi
175/A Bomay Bazar,
L M/s Ishwar Industries,
Meerut Cantt
J-142, Patel nagar 1st,
M M/s Chandni Industries
Ghaziabad
3.2A Aluminimum/ Doors/ Windows Sections
B Hindalco Mumbai
20 of 497
Alluminuml Door/ Windows/ Glazing Fabricator
3.2B
and Anodized
A M/s Alumilite Pvt. Ltd., C. AHLCON New Delhi
B M/s Ajit India Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
3.3 Fire Proof Doors
A Navair International Delhi Viper
B RDG Engineering Bombay Radiant
Steel Windows, Ventilators (as per IS-1038 of 1983) & frames pressed steel dorr/
3.4
window)
A M/s Multiwyn Industrial Corpn Calcutta Kolkata
B M/s Metal Window Corp N/Delhi New Delhi
C M/s Govind Enterprises, Delhi Delhi
M/s Chhabra Steel Udyog 260, Sadar Bazar,
D Meerut Cantt, Agent Steel MFG Pvt. Ltd.
Ahmedabad, Godrej.
M/s Chandni Industries, J-142, Patel Nagar Ist,
E Ghaziabad
Ghaziabad
3.5 Rolling Shutters (ISI marked)
A Swastic Mumbai
B Hercules Bangalore
C Shubdwar
M/s Bharat Rolling Shuters Industries Agra
D
Rama Rolling Shutter Works
E Gandhi Entrance Automations Private Limited
4 Door/ Windows Fittings
4.1 Mortice Locks with Handles
A Godrej & Boyce Mumbai Godrej
C Golden Industries Delhi Golden
4.2 Hydraulic Door Closer (Overhead/ Floor Mounted)
All Manufactureres Listed by BIS Under is 3087
A (Having Operative and Valid License) at BIS
Web Site http://www.bis.org.in/
B Doorking Industries Delhi Doorking
4.3 Misc. Door Fittings e.g. Hingee, Tower Bots, Latches, Stoppers etc.
All Manufacturers Listed by BIS under IS:3087
A (Having operative and valid license) at BIS
Web Site http://ww.bis.org.in/
C EBCO Industries Delhi EBCO
D ECIE (P) Ltd. Mumbai ECIE
D Hardwyn Traders Mumbai Hardwyn
Aluminimum/ Doors/ Windows Fittings
M/s Wlite Enterprises C/6 Shalimar Hardware
133, Jarg Mahal, Dhobitalao Mumbai 400002
M/s Mohan Metal Industries 178/2-A, Bhole
Nath Nagar, Shahadara, Delhi 110032
Mepro, Argent New Delhi, Classic, New Delhi
Argent New Delhi,
21 of 497
Golden Industries Pvt. Ltd. Delhi
4.4 Automatic Glass Door
A Ditec (Gandhi) Mumbai
4.5 Aluminium Grill
Alu Grill, Arihant Aluminium Corporation,
A Bangalore Decogrille
Decogrille
4.6 Builders Hardware
A M/s Golden Industries Pvt.Ltd. Everite, Solo delhi
5.0 Roof Treatment (Water - Proofing)
5.1 P.U. Based Waterproofing (One Componemt)
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Isothane Ema
B Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi Corchem 2061
C Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore Nitoproof
5.2 P.U. Based Waterproofing (Two Componemt)
A Shivalik Agro Poly Products Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Shivabond 903
B Industrial Product Manufacturing Company Pune EZECOAT
C Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvtl. Ltd. Bangalore Brushbond
D Sika Kolkata Sikalastic
E Sip Industries Limited Chennai Sipguard
5.3 Approved Membrane
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloyed Plastolan
B Buildtech Products Pvt. (I) Ltd. Delhi Buil Dwrap P
C Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICO Shield
D Fosroc Chemical (I) Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore Proofex
F Sika Kolkata Sika WP Shield
Super
G STP Ltd Kolkata
Thermolay
H IWL India Ltd. Chennai Hyperplas
I Pure Leathers Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Roofseai
6.0 Painting Works
Plastic/ Acrylic Emulsion Paint Jodhpur
6.1 (Internal and External, Distemper/ Acrylic Distemper)
B Berger Paints Kolkata Lewis Berger
C Asian Paints Mumbai Asian Paint
D Shalimar Paints Mumbai Color Space
F Acropaints/ Imited Delhi
G Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
H N E Paint Udyog Sivasagar (Assam)
6.2 Synthetic Enamel Paint (for Building Works)
B Berger Paints Kolkata
C Asian Paints Mumbai
D Shalimar Paints Mumbai
F Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
G N E Paint Udyog Sivasagar (Assam)
6.3 Waterproof Cement Paint
22 of 497
A Killick Nixon Ltd. Mumbai Snowcem
B Godavari Paints Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai Superemcem
C Acropaints/ Imited Delhi Acrocfm
D Snow White Industrial Corpn Chennai Superclm
Xlracem 78
E Rajdoot Paints Delhi Super Cement
Paint
6.4 Decorative Textured Coating
A Luxture Surface Coatings Pvt. Ltd. Ajmer Luxture
B Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Secundrabad Heritage
C NCL Alltek and Seccolor Ltd. Hyderabad Alltek
D Acro paints Ltd. Delhi Acrotextures
E Unitile Delhi Unitile
F Spectrum Paint Delhi Spectrum
6.5 Ploshing (for Woodwork)
A Asian Paints Mumbai Asian Paint
B Shalimar Paints Mumbai Mellac
7.0 Roofing Sheets & Accessories
7.1 Precoated Profiled G.I./ Galvalume/ Zincalume Sheets
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Lloydeck
B Interarch Building Products (P) Ltd. Noida Tracdek
C Multi Colour Steel (I) Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Multi ……
D Hardcastele & Waud Mfg. Co. Ltd. Mumbai Fero Colour
E Japan Metal Building Systems Pvt. Ltd. Bangalore JMBS
F TATA Bluescope Steel Limited Pune Trimdf CK
G Era Building Systems Limited Delhi ERA
H Shree Precoated Steels Limited Mumbai Metacolour
7.2 C.G.I. Sheet
A ISPAT Industries Ltd. Delhi Everest
B Steel Authority of India Ltd. - SAIL
C TATA Steel - TISCO
7.3 Aluminium Sheet
B Hindalco Mumbai
7.4 Fiber Glass Sheet & Panels
A Simba Frp (P) Ltd. Delhi
8.0 Sanitary, Plumbing Fittings & Fixtures
8.1 Sanitary Fittings
All Manufacturers Listed by BIS under IS:3087
A (Having operative and valid license) at BIS
Web Site http://ww.bis.org.in/
8.2 Plumbing Fittings and Fixtures
A Jupiter Aqua Lines Ltd. Mohali Jupitor
B Othello Faucets Pvt. Ltd. Delhi Mayur
C Orient Ceramics Delhi Orient
D Gem International Faridabad Gem
E Parkash Brassware Industres Delhi Parko
F Jaquar & Company Ltd. Delhi Jaquar
G Plastocraft Sanitary India Pvt. Ltd./ HSW Delhi Kingston
23 of 497
Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
8.2H Calcutta
Hinddustan Engineerng Products Company
8.2I RCC Pipes
Delhi/ Allahabad/
A Indian Hume Pipe Company
Chandigarh/ Lucknow
B Hindustan Pressure Pipes Kolhapur
C Dhere Concrete Products Pune
8.2J GI Pipes
A Indian Tube Company Culcutta
B Kalinga Tubes Limited Cuttack Gujarat
C Steel Tube
D Zenith Tube Co. Kolaba
E Bharat Steel Tube New Delhi
F Jindal
G Shivmoni Steel Tubes Limited Bangalore
H Sekhar Iron Works Calcutta
I Jain Tubes, Ghaziabad
J Khandelwal Tubes Nagpur
8.2K G.I. Fittings
A International Pipe Works Calcutta
B R.M. Engineering Works Jalandhar
C Bombay Metal Company Bombay
D Tarapada Das & Sons Howrah
E Annapurna Metal Works Calcutta
8.2L Gun Metal Valves and Copper Alloy Valve
B Neta Engineering Works Jalandhar
C Lakshmi Metal Works Jalandhar
D Bombay Metal & AlloysCompany Bombay
E Luster Sanitary Fittings Jalandhar
F Annapurna Metal Works Culcutta
8.2M Sluice Valves, Check Valves etc.
A Shiva Durga Iron Works, Howrah
B Leader Engineering Wroks Jalandhar
C Kirloskar Bros Limited Pun
D Indian Valve Calcutta
E Geeta Iron & Brass Works Baroda
8.2N Brass Fittings
B L & K Mathura
C Luster Sanitary Fittings Jalandhar
D Annapurna Metal Works Calcutta
E Neta Engineering Works Jalandhar
F Honey Industril Corporation Bombay
8.2O C.P. Fittings
A Ego Metal Works Ballabhgarh
B Jaquar & Company Ltd. Delhi
C Soma Plumbing Fixtures Limited Calcutta
24 of 497
D Gem Sanitary Appliances Pvt. Ltd. Delhi
E Essco Sanitations Delhi
F Bilmet Bombay
8.2P Hydrants
A Brady's Bombay
B Firex Bombay
C Upadhya Valves Calcutta
D Eddy Foundry Calcutta
E Minimax Delhi
8.2Q Stone Ware (Salt - Glazed) Pipes
A Hind Ceramics Limited Orissa
B Ceramic Industries Limited Sambalpur
C Shrikamakshi Agencies Madras
D Binary Udyog Pvt. Lmited Howrah
E Tirumati Moulds Limited Nagpur
F Kiran Potteries Hyderabad
G Perfect Sanitary Pipes Bharatpur
8.3 Mirror/ Glass
A Atul Glass Delhi Atul
B Gujarat Guardian Ltd./ Modi / Saint Govin Delhi Modiguard
C Triveni Glass Kolkata Triveni
D Continental Float Glass Delhi Continental
E Hindustan Safety Glass Kolkata Hindustan
9.0 False Ceiling
9.1 Aluminimum Strip/ Tray Type
A Interarch Building Products (P) Ltd. Noida Trac
B Hunter Douglas Delhi Luxalon
C Mascot Oversfas Delhi Mctacie/ Trulon
Lloyd Lineal
D Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi
Celings
9.2 Gypsum Board
A Saint-Gobain Guproc India Ltd., LA, IP Board Mumbai Gypboard
9.3 False Ceiling (POP/ Gypsum Board)
A Armstrong, Daiken, Luxalon, Llyods
10.0 False Flooring
A United Insulation Mumbai
B Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi
C Muti Floors Delhi
D A.R & Brothers Chennai
E Bestlock System & Concepts, Goderej Mumbai
11.0 Insulation
11.1 Underdeck Insulation
A Bakelite Hylam Ltd. Secundrabad Phenotherm
B Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi Isolloyd
C UP Twiga Fibre Glass Limited Delhi TWIGA
11.2 Overdeck Insulation
Lloyad Spray
A Llyod Insulations (I) Ltd. Delhi
Foam
B Best Plastronics Ltd. Delhi Best Plastronics
25 of 497
12.0 Miscellaneous Items
12.1 Water Proofing Compound in Plaster
A Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi CICO No.1
B Pidilite Industries Mumbai Pidiproof LA
C Amit Chemicals (P) Ltd. Delhi CRETO ADMIX
12.2 CPRX Bituman Mastic
A Shai Imar Tar Products Delhi Shalimar Tar
13.0 Concrete Admixtures
13.1 Water Proofing Compound
A Cico Technologies Ltd. New Delhi CICO No.1
CICO Super
CICO Acry
B Kryton Buildmat Co Pvt. Ltd. Delhi KIM
C Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata Plastocrete Plus
Noleek
13.2 Water Reducing Compounds
CICOPLAST
A CICO Technologies Ltd. Delhi
Super
Faircrete N
B Fairmatf Chemicals Pvt. Ltd. Vadodara
Fairflo
Fairf LO S
Plastiment BV
Plastiment 81
Plastiment 70
Sikament FF
Sikament NN
Sikament
NN (BWS)
Sikament
C Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata
NNSP1
Skamen 1
Sikarapid 1
Sikaviscocrl : L
20HE
Sikaviscocre TE
R550 (I)
Sika AER
14.0 Construction Chemicals

14.1 Polysulphide Sealant
A Cnowksfy Chemicals Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai Techseal
CICOSEALANI
B Cico Technologies Ltd. Delhi
T580
C Fosroc Chemical Delhi Thioflex 660
D Pidilite Industries Mumbai Pidiseal PS42P
SIKA Polysul
PH:DE (Sika
E Sika India Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata
AST:C)
Construction
14.2 Silicon Sealants
26 of 497
Dr. Fixit Silicon
A Pidilite Industries Ltd. Mumbai
Sealant WX
15.0 Anchor Fasteners
15.1 Mechanical Anchor Fasteners
15.2 Chemical Anchor Fasteners
16.0 Electro-Forged Gratings
A Greatweld Steel Gratings Pvt. Ltd. Pune
B Indiana Gratings Pvt. Ltd. Mumbai
17 Modular Partitions/ Furniture
A Godrej, Blowplast, Featherlire, Duriar
18.0 Wall Care Putty for Base Preparation (1st Quality Only)
A Birla Wall Care Putty
B M/s Sahlimar Hardware
C Berger delhi
D Jenson & Nichoison Gurgaon
E JK White Udaipur
19.0 White Cement (1st Quality Only)
A Birla, JK
20.0 Sheet Glass/ Structural Glazing
A Hindustan Pilkington Glass Works Chennai
B Saint Gobain Chennai
C Modi Float Delhi
D Triveni Float Glass Allahabad
F ASI
G Fresca
H Emirates
21.0 Polycorbonate Sheet
A GE Plastic, Everest
22.0 Multiiell/ Multiwall Polycorbonate Panel
A M/s Coxwell Domes Engineering, Delhi Delhi
B M/s Lexan, M/s Galina India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi
C M/s Vijaynath Interiors & Exteriors Products Mumbai
A Jindal
24.0 Punch Tape Concetina Coil
25.0 Punch Tape In Plastic Spool
A Jindal New Delhi
27.0 SGSW Pipes (IS-651) ISI marked
Perfect Agra, Devraj Ind. Gaziabad, Buran, RK,
A
Prince, Supreme Pipe and Fittings
28.0 CI (Centrifugally Cast) Pipes for Sewage Disposal ISI Marked
27 of 497
NICCO, SRIF, A-1 Singhal Casting Co Agra,
A
Jindal Saw, Kesoram
29.0 PVC Rain Water/ Sewage Pipes (IS-4985)
A Reliance, Finolex, Supreme, Kisan, Prince
30.0 HDPE Water / Sewage Pipes (Rotational Moulded)
A Sintex, Swift, Nutech, Sheetal
31.0 Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings
A Ganga Asbestos Limited U.P
B Hyderabad Asbestos Cement Products Limited
C J.K. Super Pipes Industries Nanded
D Konark Cement and Asbestos Limited Orissa
E Maharashtra Asbestos Lmited Bombay
F Poddar Industrial Corporation Patna
G Sarbamangala Mfg. Company Calcutta
32.0 Wind Driyen Air Ventilators
A Multi Colour
Anchit Ispat Pvt. Ltd. Faridabad
Apurva Enterprises Mumbai
SVS Wind Driven Turbo Ventilator Ahmadnagar
Real Green Engineers Pvt. Ltd. Bagalores Bangalore
Sun Green Ventilation System Pvt. Ltd Mylapore
28 of 497
QUALITY ASSURANCE & QUALITY CONTROL
SITE QUALITY PLAN
CIVIL ENGINEERING DIVISION
th
MECON LIMITED
13 FLOOR, SCOPE MINAR, NORTH TOWER
LAXMI NAGAR, DISTRICT CENTRE,
DELHI-110 092
Doc. No. Mec/05/11/SQP R0

Issued in - Jan’ 2011
29 of 497
QUALITY ASSURANCE CIVIL ENGINEERING DIVISION
MECON LIMITED, DELHI-110 092
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
ANNEXURE – 1 MATERIAL TESTS FOR SITES
SL. Component/ Sampling plan with Type Instru- Refer- Acceptance Format Testing Remarks
No Operation basis of ment ence Norm of agency
and check docu- Record
Description ment
of test
A: MATERIALS
1.0 COARSE AGGREGATE
1.1 Specific Once in 12 weeks or Labora Weigh IS:2386 Package These test will be
Gravity, change of source tory balance, Part III, Contractor carried out while
Density, Voids whichever is earlier Test Oven, Jar IS:456, establishing design mix.
IS:383
1.2 Sieve Analysis For Industrial Projects: Field Sieve set & IS:383 As per L-04 -do- Mandatory Site Test
One sample per 200 M3 Labora weigh requirement of
(or part thereof) or tory balance design mix
change of source Test within the limits
whichever is earlier. specified in
For Building Projects: relevant IS
One sample per 45M3 (or Codes.
part thereof)
1.3 Petrography To be done once per Visual/ - IS:2386 - -do- Test will be carried out
examination source Checki Part IV, while establishing mix
including visual ng IS:383 design
inspection (for
acceptanc
e limits)
Prepared By: Checked By: Approved By: QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN NO.
Laxmi Narayan AGM (Civil) AK Bajpai AGM (Civil) H Chandnani DGM I/c (Civil) MEC/05/11/QA&QC/SQP-01 – R0
J Singh AGM (Civil) Date of Issue 31-01-2011
30 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
1.4 Deleterious To be done once per Lab Balance IS:2386 -do- Test will be carried out
Chemicals source Test Sieve & Part III, while establishing mix
Container IS:383 design
(for
acceptanc
e limits)
1.5 Soundness To be done once per -do- Sieve IS:2386 -do- Test will be carried out
source Scales & Part V, while establishing mix
Drying IS:383 design
Oven (for
acceptanc
e limits)
1.6 Acid & Alkali To be done once per Lab Weigh IS:2386 -do- Test will be carried out
Reactivity source Test balance Part VII, while establishing mix
IS:383 design
1.7 Flakiness To be done once per -do- - IS:2386 -do- -do-
source Part-I,
IS:2386
Part VII,
IS : 383
31 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
1.8 Bulk Density One Sample per 200 m3 Oven, Jar & IS:2386 -do- -do-
or part thereof Weigh
balance
2.0 FINE AGGREGATE
2.1 Bulkage One sample per 20M3 (or Routin Oven, Jar IS : 2386 -do- Mandatory Site Test.
Moisture part thereof) e and weigh Part-III, Volume of sand and
Measu balance IS : 383 weight of water shall be
rement adjusted as bulkage &
moisture contents.
2.2 Sieve Analysis For Industrial Projects. Routin Sieve Set, IS : 2386 As per L – 03 -do- Mandatory Site Test.
One sample per 200 e Weigh Part-I, IS : requirement of
m3(or part thereof) or balance 383 design mix
change of source within the limits
whichever is earlier. specified in
For Building Project. relevant IS
One sample per 40 M3 (or Codes
part thereof)
2.3 Particle Size To be done once per Routin -do- IS : 2386 Particle size -do- To be carried out during
and Shape source and to be repeated e Part-I, IS : shall be mix design.
if source is changed 383 maximum 4.75
32 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
mm. Grading
shall be within
the limits of
grading zone –
III for concrete
work and for
mortar and
grout within the
limits of grading
zone III & IV.
2.4 Deleterious -do- -do- Balance, IS : 2386 -do- To be carried out during
Chemicals sieve & Part-III, mix design.
Container IS : 383
2.5 Soundness -do- -do- Sieve, IS : 2386 - -do- To be carried out during
Scales & Part-V, IS mix design.
Drying : 383 ( for
Oven acceptanc
e limit)
33 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
2.6 Acid and Alkali To be done once per -do- Weigh IS : 2386 - -do- To be carried out during
Reactivity source and to be repeated Balance Part-VII, mix design.
if source is changed IS : 383
2.7 Mortar Making -do- Compressio IS : 2386 - -do- To be carried out during
Properties n testing Part-VI, IS mix design.
machine, : 383
7.06 cm
cube
moulds
2.8 Petrographic -do- Visual/ - IS : 2386 -
Examination Physic Part-VI, IS
including visual al : 383 ( for
inspection acceptanc
e limit)
2.9 Specific Once in 12 weeks, change Measu Weigh IS : 2386 These tests will be
Gravity, of source whichever is rement Balance Part-III carried out while
Density, Voids earlier establishing design mix.
2.10 Check Silt and Every 20M3 (or part Measu Jar & Oven IS : 2386 Deleterious - Mandatory Site Test
Clay Content thereof) rement Part-II, IS material not to
: 383 exceed 5%
34 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
3.0 LIME
3.1 Chemical and Every 10 MT (or part Labora IS: 6932 -do- Optional Test if
Physical thereof) tory (Part I to required.
Properties Test X)
4.0 CEMENT
4.1 Fineness For each consignment of Labora IS : 4031, Manufactur Manufacturer’s
100T (or part thereof). tory IS : 269, er/ certificate to be
Test IS : 1489, Package furnished.
IS : 455 Contractor
4.2 Normal -do- Labora Vicat IS : 4031, Manufactur -do-
consistency tory needle IS : 269, er/
Test IS : 1489, Package
IS : 456 Contractor
35 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
4.3 Initial and -do- Labora Vicat IS : 4031, Depending on Manufactur -do-
Final setting tory needle IS : 269, the type of er/
Test IS : 1489, cement and as Package
IS : 457 per relevant IS Contractor
4.4 Soundness, -do- Labora IS : 4031, Manufactur -do-
Specific tory IS : 269, er/
Gravity Test IS : 1489, Package
IS : 458 Contractor
4.5 Compressive Every fortnight for each Measu Compressio IS : 4031, Depending on Package Mandatory Site Test
Strength consignment. rement n Testing IS : 269, the type of Contractor
Machine IS : 1489, cement and as
IS : 459 per relevant IS
5.0 CONCRETE
5.1 Workability, Once a day for each Measu IS : 456, Degree of Package Mandatory Site Test
Slump test batching/ mixing plant rement IS : 1199, workability Contractor
and Client’s adopted
compaction specificati depending on
factor test on the type of
structure and
type of
36 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
compaction
equipment.
5.2 Crushing One set of 6 cubes of 150 Measu Compressio IS : 516, Shall be as per Package Three specimens shall
Strength cm. Size per 35 Cum. of rement n Test IS : 1199, IS: 456 Contractor be tested at 7 days and
concrete or part thereof Machine IS : 416 remaining at 28 days.
for each grade of concrete and Mandatory Site Test.
per 8 hours of work or Client’s
portion thereof. specificati
on
5.3 Water Cement At random at the time of Measu Visual As per Package
Ratio batching rement observation approved Contractor
design mix
5.4 Check cement -do- Measu IS : 3025, Package
content rement IS : 456 Contractor
/ by and
weigh approved
batche design
r mix.
6.0 WATER
37 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
6.1 Tests for Once for each source of -do- Lab Test IS : 3026 Package During mix design stage
ascertaining supply and Soil Contractor
limits of solid investigati
on record.
6.2 Test of pH -do- -do- PH meter IS : 456 PH value shall Site log -do-
value be less than 6. book
7.0 BRICK
7.1 Compressive For designation 100, Compr Compressio IS: 1077 As per brick Mandatory Site Test
Strength Every 50,000 or part essive n Testing designation.
thereof. strengt Machine
For designation up to 75, h
Every 100,000 or part
thereof.
7.2 Shape, Size, -do- Visual IS: 3495 Mandatory Site Test
Colour &
measu
rement
for
size.
38 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
7.3 Water One test for each source Routin IS: 3495 Water Mandatory Site Test
absorption and of manufacturer and every e absorption: a)
efflorescence lot of 200,000. after 24 hours
not less than
20% by weight
b) after 6 hours
not less than
10% by weight.
c) moderate
degree of
efflorescence
8.0 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
8.1 Tensile Every 20T or every Measu Universal IS: 1599 Manufactur Manufacturer test
Strength consignment purchased rement Testing er/ certificate must be
by Package Contractor Machine Package submitted
Contractor
8.2 Bend Strength -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
39 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
8.3 Surface Random Visual Visual

cracks, Rusts
etc.
9.0 TIMBER
9.1 Moisture Every 1M3 or part thereof Measu Moisture Package Mandatory Test
Content rement meter Contractor
10.0 FLUSH DOOR SHUTTER
10.1 End N = Total No of Shutters Destru At IS: 2202 Package Mandatory Test
Immersion 1 Shutter for N<=65 ctive approved Contractor
10.2 Knife Test 2 Shutters for Test test house
10.3 Adhesion Test 65<N<=180
3 Shutters for
180<N<=300
4 Shutters for 300<
N<=500
5 Shutters for N>=501
11.0 ALUMINIUM DOORS/ WINDOW FITTINGS
11.1 Thickness of Cost of fittings of every Measu At IS: 5523 Package Mandatory Test
Anodic Coating Rs.20,000/- or part rement approved Contractor
thereof test house
40 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
12.0 MARBLE
12.1 Moisture For value of every Measu IS: 1124 Package Mandatory Test
absorption Rs.10,000/- or part rement Contractor
thereof
12.2 Mhose Scale Optional Test
hardness
13.0 TERRAZO TILES
13.1 Transverse Every 2000 tiles or part Site IS: 1237 Package MandatoryTest
Strength thereof Measu Contractor
rement
13.2 Water -do- Site -do- -do- -do-
absorption Measu
rement
13.3 Abrasion Test -do- Labora -do- -do- -do-
tory
Test
14.0 WHITE GLAZED TILES
14.1 Water Every 3000 tiles or part Measu IS: 777 Package Mandatory Test
absorption thereof rement Contractor
14.2 Crazing Test -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
41 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
14.2 Impact Test -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- -do- Optional Test
15.0 MORTICE LOCK
15.1 Testing of Every 100 locks or part Measu Approved Package Mandatory Test
springs thereof rement Test House Contractor
16.0 BITUMEN
IS: 73
17.0 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
42 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
17.1 Cement 100% Visual IS: 4082 Covered

storage.
 Clear gap of
min. 15cm
from the
floor.
 Space of
min. 45cm
around the
exterior
wall.
 Stacking not
more than
15 bags
high
arranged
alternately
lengthwise
and
crosswise.
43 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test

Width of the
stack shall not
be more than 3
meters
17.2 Reinforcement 100% Visual IS: 4082 Open storage.
 Bars of
different
classification
, sizes and
length will
be stacked
separately.
44 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
17.3 Brick 100% Visual IS: 4082 Open storage.

 Bricks shall
be stacked
on dry firm
ground.
 Stacks shall
be 50 bricks
long and 10
bricks high.
 Bricks shall
be placed on
edge.
 Width of
each stack
shall be two
bricks.
45 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
17.4 Aggregates 100% Visual IS: 4082  Shall be

stored at
site on a dry
ground/
platform of
planks/ old
corrugated
iron sheets/
floor of
bricks/ thin
layer of lean
concrete.
 Stacks of
fine
aggregate
and coarse
aggregate
shall kept in
separate
stockpiles.
46 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
17.5 Other Bought 100% Visual IS: 4082 Covered

Out Items storage.
Materials shall
be stored as per
manufacturer's
specification.
18.0 PILING
18.1 PLANT & MACHINERY
47 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
 Concrete Visual/
mixer Physical
 Vibrators
of
adequate
capacity
 Power
driven rigs
of
adequate
capacity
 Weigh
Batchers
 Lighting
 Mobile
Cranes
19.0 CONSTRUCTION OF PILE
19.1 SPT values 100%
during boring
operation
48 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
19.2 Tolerances in 100% Measu Measuring IS: 2911 Piles <600mm: Piling
position rement Tape (Part I/ 75mm or D/4 Contractor
Sec2) whichever is
less.
Piles >600mm:
75mm or D/10
whichever is
more.
For single pile:
<600mm:
50mm or D/4
whichever is
less.
>600mm:
100mm.
19.3 Control of 100% Measu Measuring IS: 2911 Vertical pile:
alignment rement Tape (Part I/ 1.5 % deviation
Sec2) maximum.
Raker pile: 4%
49 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
19.4 Chipping of 100% Manual

pile top chipping after 3
days of casting.
Pneumatic tools
after 7 days of
casting.
20.0 BENTONITE SUSPENSION:
20.1 Liquid limit Measu >300% Piling
rement <400% Contractor
20.2 Sand content -do- Not more than -do-
of Bentonite 7%
powder
20.3 Density of -do- Hydrometer IS:9556 Between 1.034 -do- Shall be recorded for
freshly and 1.10gm/ initial 10 piles and
prepared ml. subsequently at every
Bentonite 10th pile.
suspension
20.4 Marsh -do- Marsh cone Between 30 -do-
viscosity and 60 sec
50 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
20.5 PH value of -do- PH Between 9 and -do-

Bentonite indicator 11.5
suspension paper strip
20.6 Density after -do- Hydrometer Maximum. -do- Shall be recorded for
mixing with 1.25gm/ ml. initial 10 piles and
deleterious subsequently at every
material 10th pile.
21.0 PILE TESTING
51 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
21.1 Vertical Load Test pile. No of pile to be Testin Dial Gauge IS:2911, Safe load shall Piling
Test ( for tested shall be minimum g (Sensitivity Part-IV be minimum of contractor
both test & job one. of dial the following:
piles ) gauge : (a)2/3rd of final
0.01 mm ) load against
total
displacement of
12 mm. (b)
50% of final
load against
total
displacement of
10% of pile
diameter.
52 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
Working pile. No of piles -do- -do- -do- Maximum -do-

to be tested shall be settlement shall
minimum 1/2 % of total not exceed 12
no of piles. mm against
test load 150%
of working
load.
21.2 Lateral load Optional Testin -do- IS:2911, Safe load shall -do-
test g Part-IV be minimum of
the following:
(a) 50% of the
final load
against total
displacement of
12 mm. (b)
Final load
against total
displacement of
5 mm
53 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
Description ment
of test
21.3 Pull out Test Optional Testin -do- IS:2911, Safe load shall -do- Initial test shall be
g Part-IV be least of the carried out up to twice
following: the estimated safe load.
(a) 2/3rd of
total load Routine test shall be
against carried out to 150% of
displacement of the estimated safe load
12mm. or 12mm total
(b) Half of the displacement.
load at which
load
displacement
curve breaks
54 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
ANNEXURE – 2 TESTING EQIPMENT FOR SITES
SL BROAD CLASS NOMENCLATURE UTILITY TEST PROCEDURE REFERENCE TO BE AVAILABLE

NO DESCRIPTION DOCUMENT AT SITE
1.0 ROUTINE TEST 1.1 Vicat Apparatus Cement consistency & Penetration of Std. Needle IS : 5513 Yes
LAB. EQUIPMENT Penetration
1.2 Lechatelier’s test Cement shrinkage Size variation after curing IS : 5514 Yes
Apparatus of sample
1.3 Mould ( Cement) Cement cubes Cubes made of 1:3 cement IS : 10086 Yes
(70.7x70.7x70.7 mm) : Sand
1.4 Cement Mortar Mould Cube compaction Vibration for fixed IS : 10078 Yes
Vibrator duration
1.5 Concrete Cube mould ( Concrete Cubes - IS : 10086 Yes
150x150x150) mm
1.6 Compressive strength Concrete Cube Test Crushing strength of cube IS : 2505 Yes
Testing machine
1.7 Concrete slump cone Workability Check Drop in cone height of IS : 7320 Yes
concrete
1.8 Coarse aggregate sieves Sieve analysis Sieving IS : 383 Yes
1.9 (a) Soil Core cutter To test compaction of soil Core cut out of soil and IS : 2720 Yes
(b) Proctor Compaction density measured
1.10 Fine aggregate sieves Sieve analysis Sieving IS : 383 Yes
1.11 Sieve shaker Mechanical sieving - - Yes
1.12 Aggregate impact Test Impact value of aggregate - IS : 9377 Yes
Machine
2.0 DIMENSIONAL & 2.1 Theodolite & levelling Levelling and centre line Measurement and - Yes
ALLIED staff marking and verticality recording
MEASURING measurement
EQUIPMENT 2.2 Measuring Tape Dimension - - Yes
Laxmi Narayan AGM (Civil) AK Bajpai AGM (Civil) H Chandnani DGM I/c (Civil) MEC/05/11/QA&QC/SQP -02 – R0
-1-
55 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
ANNEXURE – 2 TESTING EQIPMENT FOR SITES
SL BROAD CLASS NOMENCLATURE UTILITY TEST PROCEDURE REFERENCE TO BE AVAILABLE

NO DESCRIPTION DOCUMENT AT SITE
2.3 Laser Beam apparatus Verticality of structures Centre line alignment - Yes
3.0 PROCESS 3.1 Oven Material Drying for moisture Material to be kept for - Yes
CONTROL control specific duration
ACCESSORIES 3.2 Physical balance Weighing - - Yes
3.3 Air entrainment meter To determine % of air in fresh Samples of fresh concrete IS : 1199 Yes
concrete mix to be taken and tested in
the equipment
4.0 SPECIAL TEST NDT Strength test of concrete Rebound of the ball is - Yes
EQUIPMENT 4.1 Rebound hammer proportional to the strength
of concrete
4.2 Ultrasonic test for concrete Test for porosity for concrete Speed of the ray - Yes
transmitted through the
concrete indicates the
extend of porosity
4.3 Profometer/Micro Location & diameter of Variation in density used to - Yes
covermeter reinforcement detect steel location
D.T. Strength of In-situ concrete Core cut out of concrete - Yes
4.4 Portable electrically tested for strength
operated concrete core
cutter
-2-
56 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
ANNEXURE – 3 WORKMANSHIP CHECKS FOR DIFFERENT SITE ACTIVITIES
SL. Description of Workmanship Checks to be undertaken Remarks

No Site Activity
1 Earth work (a) Classification of Soil, for payments, if required.

(b) Line & level.
(c) Disposal lead.
(d) Levelling at Disposal Yard.
(e) Initial & Final level in Level Book.
(f) Rolling/Tamping/Compaction of Fills, as per IS : 2720
(g) Arrangement for de-watering.
(h) Shoring & Strutting.
(i) Safety (side slopes, ramps, working space around foundation, dumping
at safe distance beyond top edge).
(j) Excess excavation depth properly filled for foundation works.
(k) Foundation bed level, bearing capacity conformance.
57 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
2 Piling Work a) Diameter of Pile.

b) Depth Driver.
c) Sequence of driving in a pile group.
d) Set for last 10 blows or as specified.
e) Type and size of hammer and its stroke, in case of double acting
hammer, No. of blows per minute & stroke.
f) Type and condition of packing on the pile head and or dolly in the
hammer.
g) Driving resistance record through variable strata in case of driven cast-
in-situ pile.
h) Bore log in case of Bored pile.
i) Density of slurry in case of Bentonite slurry pile.
j) Date & time of driving.
k) Date of concreting & time gap between end of driving & concreting.
58 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
l) Standing ground water level.

m) Ground level at the commencement.
n) Length of Pile.
o) Length of Permanent casing.
p) Set at intervals during last 3 Metres.
q) Concrete Mix.
r) Details of Reinforcement.
s) Volume of Concrete supplied to pile against theoretical volume.
t) Water tightness of pile before concreting.
u) Eccentricity
v) Deviation for Verticality.
w) Condition of pile head at cut-off.
x) Routine load test results.
y) Initial load test results.
z) Integrity test results of each pile.
59 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
3 Concreting (a) Check quality and size of coarse aggregate with special reference to
Works undersize/oversize materials, disintegrated/self materials, earth and
other foreign materials beyond limit, organic impurities.
(b) Fineness modulus of sand, silt content, bulkage, foreign materials in
sand.
(c) Check formwork.
(d) Line, level of concrete.
(e) Honeycombed surface in concrete.
(f) Strength of Concrete.
(g) Check Mix Boxes.
(h) Mixing of concrete by hand/machine.
(i) Use of Vibrator.
(j) Slump of concrete.
60 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
4 Formwork a) Line, level and dimensions as per drawing.

b) Cross bracing of supporting framework.
c) Diagonal bracings.
d) Ground support rigidity to avoid settlement.
e) Plumbness of shores.
f) Wedge tightening of shores.
g) Thickness of shutter to withstand pressure of wet concrete.
h) Leakproofness of shutter ( IS : 457 )
i) Demoulding agent/Oiling of shutter.
j) Facility for removal of formwork in proper sequence.
k) Avoid premature removal.
61 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
5 Reinforced a) Sieve analysis of coarse aggregate to check oversize, undersize,

Concrete improperly graded aggregate.
Works b) Check presence of disintegrated/soft or foreign materials in aggregates.
c) Quality of sand, Silt content, Bulkage test.
d) Quality of Cement and age of Cement ( 1st in 1st OUT system )
e) Quality of water for mixing and curing.
f) Slump test.
g) Cube Tests.
h) Cover Block thickness and integrity (cover not reduced more than 2mm
or increased by more than 10mm).
i) Whether reinforcement exposed on removal of forms.
j) Tensile testing of steel reinforcement, as required.
k) Gauge of binding wire and its use at all joints.
l) Reinforcement placement as per drawing and top reinforcement to be
supported by chairs etc.
62 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
m) Spacing of laps and staggering and length of lap.

n) Mix design record/requirements.
o) Rigidity and evenness of centring & shuttering.
p) Finish requirement of surface.
q) Throating and moulding requirements as per drawings.
r) Line and level requirements as per drawing.
s) Expansion joint contraction, joint provisions.
t) Fixing of inserts, conduits, bolts to proper alignment.
u) Hacking of green concrete for future plastering.
v) Adequate curing.
w) Corrosion protection requirements of reinforcement.
x) Drainage provisions on roof surface ( slope & spout )
y) Gangway placement for concreting to be independent of
reinforcement.
z) Rigidity of reinforcement cage to avoid distortion during concreting
63 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
aa) Compaction requirements of concrete by needle vibrators/Form

vibrator etc.
bb) Provisions at construction joint – Waterbar – Nozzles etc.
cc) Provision of dowel bars 12mm Ø 300 long ( 400mm either side ) at 250
C/C on construction joint surface.
64 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
6 Brickwork (a) Quality of bricks for strength, dimensional accuracy, efflorescence

water absorption and evenness of backing.
(b) Sand quality for fineness modulus and Silt content.
(c) Cement quality.
(d) Mixing of Mortar to structural space.
(e) Thickness of joint not exceeding 10mm.
(f) Raking of joints in green stage by raking tool ( 15mm deep )
(g) Filling of vertical joints properly.
(h) Soaking of bricks.
(i) Line and level of brickwork.
(j) Plumbness.
(k) Brick corners are provided with proper brick closer not by brick bat.
(l) Top coarse in plinth, windowsill, below RC slab and parapets are with
brick on edge.
65 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
(m) Type of scaffolding.

(n) Filling of scaffolding potholes.
(o) Brick coarses are in level.
(p) Proper bonding of main wall with cross wall ( No toothing joints )
(q) Brickwork taken-up in layers not exceeding 1 Metre.
(r) Proper provision of reinforcement in brick-wall.
(s) Lateral bonding of brick-wall to steel/concrete columns.
(t) Filling-up voids between brick –wall and door/windows shutter.
(u) Adequate curing of brickwork.
66 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
7 Stone (a) Quality of stone.

Masonary (b) Strength of Mortar.
Work
(c) Mix of Mortar.
(d) Quality of Sand – Silt content & fineness modulus.
(e) Whether joints fully filled with Mortar.
(f) Whether required number of bond stones provided (Marking of bond
stone during construction needed for easy identification ).
(g) Extent of spalls in hearting.
(h) Line, Level, Thickness.
(i) Joint thickness ( whether excessive thick )
67 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
8 Flooring Work
8.1 Cement (a) Aggregates, Sand – refer PCC Works.
Concrete Floor (b) Strength.
(c) Thickness.
(d) Hardener type and mix.
(e) Panel size.
(f) Curing arrangement.
(g) Polishing requirement.
68 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
8.2 Cast in situ a) Aggregates, Sand – refer PCC Works.

Mosaic Floor b) Strength.
c) Thickness.
d) Hardener type and mix.
e) Panel size.
f) Curing arrangement.
g) Polishing requirement.
69 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
8.3 Terrazzo Tile (a) Quality of Lime.

Floor (b) Strength test of tile.
(c) Abrasion test of tile.
(d) Thickness of Joint & Colour matching.
(e) Polishing by 80, 120, 320 Grade Carborandum.
(f) Any hollow sound when tapped.
(g) Curing arrangement.
8.4 Glazed Tile (a) Size of Tile

Floor (b) Thickness of Tile (  0.5 mm )
(c) No glazed surface at edges.
(d) Free from crazing.
70 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
9 Woodwork a) Specified timber is used.

b) Grade of Wood.
c) Free from cracks, dead knots etc. as per grade specification.
d) Seasoning done or not.
e) Moisture content by moisture meter.
f) Lines, level and smoothness of finish & planning.
g) Glue utilised in joints or not and whether bamboo pin (min. 10mm dia.)
used in joint.
h) Tolerance of finished size.
i) Use of preservative against masonry surface.
j) Size of Holdfasts as per Specification.
k) Thickness and dimension of shutter in door panels.
l) Thickness of glass panels and quality of glass.
m) Whether Putty provided between glass-pane and sash bar & glass pane
and beading (No rattling sound when tapped).
71 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
n) Whether healing in flush door is of specified type solid core, hollow,

particle board etc.
o) Quality of Ply and Glue in flush door (Not Urea formaldehyde).
p) Destruction test of flush door (End emersion, Knife test etc.)
q) Fitting quality and number as per Specification.
r) Surfacing of steel fittings as per specification (bright, black Japan, black
enamelled, oxidised) and plate thickness.
s) Anodising thickness of aluminium fittings.
t) Type of brass fittings (Extruded/Cast) with plate thickness.
u) Check whether top & bottom surface of shutter properly painted or
note.
v) Painting of shutter to be done after checking of Knots etc.
w) Provision of Chits and Sand blocks.
x) Quality of Mesh in meshed shutter (No. of mesh/Sq.inch. ) and folding
of mesh at the edges before fixing.
72 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
10 Steel Doors / a) Size of frame and corner welding of frames ( Flush butt welded as per
Windows / specification )
gRILLS
b) Proper fixing of Hinge.
c) Primer Coating.
d) Provision of Tie Rod at bottom of Door frame for proper size
maintenance during fixing.
e) Line, Level & Plumb.
f) Quality of friction hinges.
g) Quantity of Putty ( 185 Gm. Per Meter length ) and painting of Putty
within 2 weeks.
h) Number of glazing Clips ( 4 to 6 ).
i) Provision of metal beadings as per specification.
j) Material of striking plate in windows (brass or not as per specification )
k) Welding of grill before fixing glazing without deformation of frame.
l) Length of screws for fixing grills to windows frames.
73 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
11 Painting Work (a) Name of Manufacturer, Specification, Batch Number, Colour, Date of
Manufacture, ISI Marking on Paint Container.
(b) Cracks, voids, pores on masonry surface properly filled.
(c) Nail-holes, cracks on wood surface properly filled.
(d) Steel surface preparation, sand blasting, derusting etc. as per
Specification.
(e) Soundness and adherence of Old Paint.
(f) Paint quality ( No. adulteration by thinner ) and quality of Primer.
(g) Application of each coat of Paint for uniformity, paint drop, dabs,
brush-marks, waves and variation of colour.
(h) Difficult to reach areas like edges, corners, nuts, bolts etc. are
properly painted.
(i) Spilled Paints on floors & walls properly cleaned.
(j) Painting of fan hooks and exposed surfaces of inserts as per
Specification.
74 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
12 Roofing Works (a) Slope of roof.

(b) Quality of Lime, Waterproofing materials etc. as per Specification.
(c) Size & quality of brick ballast.
(d) Weight & quality of bitumen felt.
(e) Over-lapping of bitumen felts.
(f) Test by ponding with water.
(g) Formation of ridges & valleys.
(h) Drip course provision.
(i) Embedding of felt at vertical wall.
(j) Hollering at the vertical turning point below felt.
(k) Grouting of rainwater pipe.
(l) Proper termination of Tarfelt near RWP.
75 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
13 Water Supply (a) Quality of G.I. Pipe with original colour paint for class of pipe and IS Mark on
& Sanitary surface of pipe.
works
(b) Joining of pipe with white lead and jute yarn on threads.
(c) Pipes are approachable for future maintenance.
(d) Provision of union at each Stop Cock.
(e) Supporting pipes with clamps suitably embedded & jammed in wall
(f) Quality/Weight of water-tap, Stop Cocks, Ball Valves and Water Supply fittings
as per Specification and ISI Mark.
(g) Provision of Vent. Pipe above Overhead Tank to avoid Airlock.

(h) Leading over-flow pipe from Tank upto roof drain spout.
(i) Mosquitoproof cemplings at over flow pipe of Tank & Cisterns.
(j) Quantity of lead provided at Spigot & Socket joints of pipes.
(k) Internal surface of HCI Pipes to have painting with Dr. Angus Smith Solution.
(l) Hydraulic testing of Water Supply system.
76 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)

No Site Activity
(m) Proper quality HCI Pipes used (Dimension, Weight, Finish, ISI Marks etc.) in
Sewage System ( C.I. Rain-water pipes ) are not used in Sewage System.
(n) Flushing test of flushing Cistern.

(o) Hume Pipe Class, makes, dimension and test certificate.
(p) Stone ware pipe make, dimension, finish, glazing and conforming to Class
AA/Class A as per Specification.
(q) Quality of Line and level of system.

(r) Floor tap water-seal to be minimum as per Specification.
(s) Manhole covers, road gully groutings weight, sizes, make & finish.
(t) Commercial quality ceramic fittings are not used.
(u) Brand name, quality, dimension, colour, ISI marking for sanitary fixtures as
per Specification.
(v) Static head water test for HCI Pipe in section ( 4.5 Metres )
(w) Test Performance for Water closets ( six pieces of toilet papers 150 x
115mm flushed completely 3 times out of 4 trials )
Water supply network tested to a pressure of 10 Kg/Cm2 before taking over
the system.
77 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
ANNEXURE – 4 FORMATS FOR SITE RECORDS
FORMAT NO L - 01
DETERMINING THE GRADING OF SAND (FINE AGGREGATE)

Date of Testing:
Weight of samples: gms. Type of aggregate:
SL.NO RETAINED ON WT. RETAINED PERCETAGE WT. CUMULATIVE % WT. PERCENTAGE REMARKS
IS SEIVE NO RETAINED RETAINED PASSING (GRADING ZONE)
1 10 mm
2 4.74 mm
3 2.36 mm
4 1.18 mm
5 600 microns
6 300 microns
7 150 microns
8 75 microns
REFERENCE GRADING ZONES OF FINE AGGREGATE ( IS 383 )

IS SEIVE PERCENTAGE PASSING FOR
DESIGNATION GRADING ZONE I GRADING ZONE II GRADING ZONE III GRADING ZONE IV
10 mm 100 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90 – 100 90 – 100 90 – 100 95 – 100
2.36 mm 60 – 95 75 – 100 85 – 100 95 – 100
1.18 mm 30 – 70 55 – 90 75 – 100 90 – 100
600 micron 15 – 34 35 – 59 60 – 79 80 – 100
300 micron 5 – 20 8 – 30 12 – 40 15 – 50
150 micron 0 – 10 0 – 10 0 – 10 0 – 15
78 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
FORMAT NO L – 02
SIEVE ANALYSIS
METHODS OF DETERMINING THE GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATE
Date of Testing:
Weight of samples: gms. Type of aggregate:
SL.NO RETAINED ON WT. RETAINED PERCETAGE WT. CUMULATIVE % WT. PERCENTAGE REMARKS
IS SEIVE NO RETAINED RETAINED PASSING (GRADING ZONE)
1 40 mm
2 20 mm
3 16 mm
4 12.5 mm
5 10 mm
6 4.75 mm
7 2.36 mm
GRADING ZONES OF COARSE AGGREGATE ( IS 383 )

IS SEIVE PERCENTAGE PASSING FOR GRADED AGGREGATE OF NOMINAL SIZE
DESIGNATION 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
40 mm 95 – 100 100 - -
20 mm 30 – 70 95 – 100 100 100
16 mm - - 90 – 100 -
12.5 mm - - - 90 – 100
10 mm 10 – 35 25 – 55 30 – 70 40 – 85
4.75 mm 0–5 0 – 10 0 – 10 0 – 10
2.36 mm - - - -
79 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
FORMAT NO L - 03
DATE :
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CEMENT CONCRETE
AGENCY :
LOCATIONS :
CUBE SIZE :
DATE OF CAST :
TYPE OF CEMENT :
GRADE OF CONCRETE :
WATER/ CEMENT RATIO :
ADDITION OF PLASTICISER :
WEIGHT OF CUBE :
CUBE TEST 7 DAYS STRENGTH
28 DAYS STRENGTH
SL. NO MARK DATE SLUMP FAILURE STRENGTH FAILURE STRENGTH
LOAD (KN) (Kg/Cm2) LOAD (KN) (Kg/Cm2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
PERIOD SPECIFICATION ACTUAL (AVERAGE)
7 DAYS Kg/Cm2 Kg/Cm2
28 DAYS Kg/Cm2 Kg/Cm2
80 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
FORMAT NO L – 04
DATA SHEET
SITE: REF DRG NO:
PILE DATA:
Pile No: Diameter of pile (mm): Inclination:
Drilling depth (m): Plain drilling (m): Concreted length (m):
Pile: Cased: Partly cased: Un cased:
REINFORCEMENT:
CONCRETE:
Concrete strength/ grade: Cement: Quantity (kg/cbm):
Aggregate: Water/ cement ratio: Additives (% of cement):
Retarder: Setting time (hour)
Slump: Theoretical (cm): From To Actual (cm):
Cubes: Yes No
CONCRETING:
Concrete volume (Cbm): Theoretical: Actual:
Method of concreting:
Tremie: Pump: Other:
CONSTRUCTION TIME:
Construction: Date: Time:
Drilling Start:
End:
Concreting Start:
End:
SIGNATURES:
Representative of piling contractor:
Representative of MECON:
81 of 497
& QUALITY CONTROL
(SITE QUALITY PLAN)
DATE:
82 of 497
MEC/S/05/11/01
SPECIFICATION
FOR
CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS
MECON LIMITED
83 of 497
MECON LIMITED STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REGD. OFF: RANCHI
834002 Civil Section, DELHI
DOCUMENT NO. Page 1 of 1

TITLE Civil Specification MEC/TS/05/11/001 REVISION : 0
EDITION : 1
63(&,),&$7,21)25&,9,/(1*,1((5,1*:25.6

,1'(;
3$*(6
3$57, 0$7(5,$/6 ,,WR,,; ,WR,
3$57,, :25.0$16+,3 ,,,WR,,,; ,,WR,,
3$57,,, 125062)&(0(17&2168037,21 ,,,, ,,,WR,,,

3$57,9 ',0(16,21$/72/(5$1&( ,9WR,9
3$579 0(7+2'2)0($685(0(17 9, 9WR9
3$579,6$)(7<5(48,5(0(176)25 9,WR9,
&216758&7,21:25.

$11(;85( /,672),6 &2'(65()(55(' $WR$
84 of 497
SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORKS
PART – I MATERIALS
85 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
C O N T E N T S
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standard
1.3 Approval and Tests
1.4 Codes
1.5 Rejection of Materials
2.0 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
2.1 Aggregates
2.2 Coarse Aggregates
2.3 Fine Aggregates
2.4 Lime
2.5 Surkhi
2.6 Cement
2.7 Water
2.8 Admixtures for Concrete
2.9 Interval of Routine Test
3.0 STEEL
3.1 For Reinforcement
3.2 For Binding Works
3.3 For Light Structural Work and Insert
I-1
86 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.4 Steel Tubes
3.5 Foundation Bolts
3.6 Steel tubes for Non-structural use
3.7 Threaded Fasteners
3.8 Testing
3.9 Cast Steel
3.10 Conduits
4.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS

4.1 General
4.2 Building Boards
4.3 Flat Sheets
4.4 Pipes and Fittings
4.5 Corrugated and Semi-corrugated sheets
4.6 Asbestos Cement Roof fittings
5.0 BRICK AND STONES

5.1 Bricks
5.2 Handling
5.3 Inspection
5.4 Brick Bats
5.5 Laterite Stone Blocks
5.6 Stones (Granite, trap, sandstone and quartzite etc.)
I-2
87 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.7 Hollow and Solid Concrete Blocks
5.8 Cement, Lime and Water
5.9 Sand for Masonry Mortar
6.0 SAND FOR PLASTERING
7.0 MATERIALS FOR FLOORING & PAVING

7.1 Cement & Binders
7.2 Aggregates
7.3 Tiles
7.4 Pigments
7.5 Red oxide of Iron
7.6 Hardening Agents
7.7 Dividing Strips
7.8 Marble chips
7.9 Marble powder
8.0 TIMBER
8.1 General
8.2 Teak Wood / Sal / Beja Sal / Deodar / Kail and other varieties.
8.3 Storage & Inspection
8.4 Moisture Content
8.5 Allowance for Bulk Timber
I-3
88 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.6 Flush Door Shutters, Shelves
8.7 Wood Particle Board
8.8 Veneered Particle Board
8.9 Plywood for general purpose
8.10 Veneered decorative plywood
9.0 FITTINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS ETC.

9.1 General
9.2 Hinges
9.3 Sliding Door Bolts
9.4 Door Rim Latch
9.5 Tower bolts
9.6 Door Handles
9.7 Mortice locks and Rebated Mortice locks
9.8 Floor door stopper
9.9 Hooks and eyes.
9.10 Casement window handles
9.11 Casement peg stays
9.12 Quadrant stays
9.13 Fan light pivots
9.14 Fan light catch
9.15 Steel Frames for doors

9.16 Putty
I-4
89 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND

ROLLING SHUTTERS
10.1 General
10.2 Steel doors, Windows, Ventilators
10.3 Aluminium Doors, Windows, Ventilators
10.4 Steel Rolling Shutter, Rolling Grills
10.5 M.S. Bolts etc.,
10.6 Hardware
10.7 Mastic
11.0 GLASS
11.1 General
11.2 Plain Transparent Glass
11.3 Ground or Frosted Glass
11.4 Thickness
11.5 Inspection
12.0 PAINT
12.1 General
12.2 Sampling & Testing
12.3 Storage
12.4 Paints for Priming
12.5 Paints for Finishing
I-5
90 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.6 White Wash
12.7 Colour Wash
12.8 Water proof cement Paint
12.9 Distemper
12.10 Varnish
12.11 Polish
12.12 Plastic acrylic emulsion paint
12.13 Creosote oil or Coal tar creosote
12.14 Coal Tar black paint
12.15 Floor polish paste
13.0 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
13.1 Integral Cement water proofing compounds
13.2 Bitumen
13.3 Bitumen Primer
13.4 Bitumen Felt
13.5 Bitumen Mastic
13.6 Bituminous Compounds
13.7 Surface Application Materials
13.8 Polymer based paints
13.9 Fibre glass R.P. Tissue
13.10 P.V.C. Membrane/sheet
I-6
91 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
14.0 WATER BAR
14.1 General
14.2 Jointing
15.0 LEAD
15.1 General
16.0 BUILDING PAPER/GYPSUM MATERIALS

16.1 Building paper
17.0 FILLING MATERIAL

17.1 General
17.2 Mastic Bitumen
17.3 Flexible Boards
18.0 DRAINAGE AND SANITATION (INTERNAL)
18.1 General
18.2 P.V.C Waste Pipe
18.3 Stoneware Pipes
18.4 HCI Pipes and fittings
18.5 Cast Iron Pipes and AC pipes (Rain Water pipes)
18.6 Sanitary appliances (E.W.C. & I.W.C.)
18.7 Wash Hand Basin
18.8 Flat Back Lipped Urinal
18.9 Mirror Frames
I-7
92 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
18.10 Toilet Shelf
18.11 Towel rail
18.12 Soap Container
18.13 CP Flush Valves for E.W.C.
18.14 CP Flush Valves for urinals
18.15 Gully Trap
18.16 C.I. Manhole Cover and frame
18.17 Flushing cistern
18.18 Plastic seat & cover for water closets
19.0 WATER SUPPLY & PLUMBING (INTERNAL)
19.1 General
19.2 G.I. Pipes and Fittings
19.3 RCC, Asbestos, prestressed pipes and fittings
19.4 C.I. Pipes and fittings
19.5 Steel Pipes
19.6 Bib Tap and Stop Tap
19.7 Valves
19.8 Shower Rose
19.9 Storage Tank
19.10 Misc. items
20.0 EXTERNAL SEWERAGE & DRAINAGE

I-8
93 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
20.1 C.I. Pipes
20.2 Washers
20.3 Gaskets
20.4 Caulking Lead
20.5 Salt glazed stoneware Pipes
20.6 Steel pipes
20.7 Cast Iron Manhole Covers and frames
21.0 ROAD AND FENCING

21.1 General
21.2 Soling Stones
21.3 Coarse aggregate for Water Bound Macadam
21.4 Screenings
21.5 Stone Chips for Bituminous Surfacing
21.6 Sand
21.7 Binder
21.8 Kerbs
21.9 Barbed wire
21.10 Chain link fabric
21.11 Concertina Coil fencing

22.0 APPROVED BRAND AND/OR MANUFACTURER'S NAME FOR
SOME OF THE IMPORTANT MATERIALS
23.0 MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED

I-9
94 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope
This part deals with the requirements of materials for use in

construction work with regard to quality, testing, approval and storage,
before they are used on work. This part is supplementary to Part-II:
Workmanship and Other requirements of the Technical Specifications
for civil works.
1.2 Standard
A high standard of quality is required for all materials used in

construction work. They shall be the best of the kind obtainable
indigenously in each case and shall be procured from manufacturers of
repute in order to ensure uniformity of quality and assurance of timely
supply.
1.3 Approval and Tests
1.3.1 All materials to be used in construction shall be subject to approval of

the Engineer. The Contractor shall apply sufficiently in advance with
samples of the materials including the supporting test results from the
approved laboratory and other documentary evidence from the
manufacturer wherever applicable and indicating the types of materials
and their respective sources. The delivery of materials at site shall
commence only after the approval of the quality, grading and sources
of the materials by the Engineer.
1.3.2 The quality of all materials once approved shall be maintained

throughout the period of construction and periodical tests shall be
carried out to ensure that it is maintained. Such routine tests shall be
listed under the different materials and/or as may be ordered by the
Engineer from time to time.
1.3.3 Where a particular "Brand" or "Make" of material is specified in the

Schedule of Items or Technical Specifications, such "Brand" or "Make"
of material alone shall be used on the work. Should it become
necessary for any reason (such as non-availability/ceased to be
produced), to use any material other than the specified "Brand" or
"Make", the Contractor shall submit sample of the same to the
Engineer for approval together with test certificates and other
documents necessary for examining and giving approval thereof.
I-1
95 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Should such change or substitution of materials, subsequently

approved, results in use of material of price lower than that of the
material specified in the Schedule of Items or Technical Specifications,
the rates of work affected by the substitution shall be proportionately
reduced. Similarly, in case the substitution results in use of material of
price higher than that specified in the Schedule of Items or Technical
Specifications, the rates of work affected by the substitution shall be
proportionately increased.
1.4 Codes
1.4.1 The years of publication against various standards, referred in this

specification, correspond to the latest standards as on date of
preparation of this specification. During use of this specification in
future, the latest publication as on date shall be referred to. Where
standards are not yet published by the BIS or IRC, adoptable British
Standards or other International Standards shall apply.
1.4.2 In case of any conflict in meaning between these specifications and

those of BIS or IRC, or British /International Standard; the provisions of
these specifications shall prevail.
1.5 Rejection of Materials
1.5.1 Any material brought to site which, in the opinion of the Engineer is
damaged, contaminated, deteriorated or does not comply with the
requirement of this specification shall be rejected.
1.5.2 If the routine tests or random site tests show that any of the materials,
brought to site, do not comply in any way with the requirements of this
specification or of I.S. Codes as applicable, then that material shall be
rejected.
1.5.3 The Contractor at his own cost shall remove from site any and all such
rejected material within the time specified by the Engineer.
2.0 MATERIALS FOR CONCRETE
2.1 Aggregates
2.1.1 Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of IS: 383-1970

"Coarse and Fine Aggregates for Concrete". They shall be hard,
strong, dense, durable, clean and free from veins and adherent
I-2
96 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
coating, vegetable matter and other deleterious substances; and shall

be obtained from approved sources. Aggregates shall not contain any
harmful material such as pyrites, coal, lignite, shale or similar laminated
material, clay, alkali, soft fragments, sea shells and organic impurities
in such quantity as to affect the strength or durability of concrete.
Aggregates which are chemically reactive with alkalies of cement shall
not be used. Aggregates which are not sufficiently clean shall be
washed in clean fresh water to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2.1.2 Testing
All aggregates shall be subject to inspection and testing. The

Contractor shall submit samples for testing as may be required by the
Engineer. Sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with
IS: 2386-1963 "Methods of Test for Aggregates for concrete".
2.1.3 Grading
The Contractor shall ensure that the full range of aggregate used for
making concrete is graded in such a way as to ensure a dense
workable mix. The delivery of aggregates will commence only when
the Engineer has approved the samples and the quality and grade shall
be maintained consistent and equal to the approved sample. Before
construction commences, the Contractor shall carry out a series of
tests on the aggregates and on the concrete made therefrom to
determine the most suitable grading of the available aggregates. Once
the most suitable grading has been found, the grading shall be adopted
for the construction of the works and periodic tests shall be carried out
to ensure that it is maintained.
2.1.3.1 Size and grading of fine aggregates
The grading shall conform to IS: 383-1970 and shall be within the limits
of Grading Zone-III. The maximum size of particle shall be 4.75mm
and shall be graded down. Sand containing more than 10% of fine
grains passing through 150 micron sieve or having the fineness
modulus less than 2 shall not be used for concrete work.
2.1.3.2 Size and grading of coarse aggregates
The nominal maximum size of the aggregates for each mark of

concrete or for each type of work shall depend upon the description of
the particular item in the Schedule of Items and/or according to
I-3
97 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
relevant clauses of IS: 456-1978. The aggregates shall be well graded

and the grading shall conform to relevant requirements of IS: 383-1970
depending upon the maximum nominal size as specified or as required.
2.1.3.3 Fine aggregate for mortar and grout
The grading of fine aggregate for mortar and grout shall be within the
limits of grading zone III and IV as defined in IS: 383-1970.
2.1.4 Storage & stacking
Care shall be taken in the storage to avoid intrusion of any foreign

materials into the aggregates and where two types of aggregates are
stored close to each other, they shall be separated by a wall or plate. In
case of stockpiling, care shall be taken to avoid forming pyramids
resulting in segregation of different sized materials. The height of the
stacks shall be generally limited to 150 cm.
2.2 Coarse Aggregates
2.2.1 Types
The type of coarse aggregate viz., stone chips, gravel or broken brick
shall be as described in the Schedule of Items. Unless otherwise
specified in the Schedule of Items, stone chips shall be used as coarse
aggregate.
2.2.2 Stone chips
It shall be crushed or broken from hard stone obtained from approved

quarries of igneous or metamorphic origin. The stone chips shall be
hard, strong, dense, durable and angular in shape. It shall be free from
soft, friable, thin, flat, elongated or laminated and flaky pieces and free
from dirt, clay lumps, and other deleterious materials like coal, lignites,
silt, soft fragments, and other foreign materials which may affect
adversely the strength & durability of concrete. The total amount of
deleterious /foreign materials shall not exceed 5% by weight according
to relevant clause of IS: 383-1970. If found necessary the stone chips
shall be screened and washed before use.
2.2.3 Gravel
It can be either river bed shingle or pit gravel. It shall be sound, hard,
clean, irregular in shape and suitably graded in size with or without
I-4
98 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
some broken fragments. It shall be free from flat particles, powdered

clay, silt, loam and other impurities. Before using, the gravel shall be
screened and washed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. However, the
foreign/deleterious materials shall not exceed 5% by weight.
2.2.4 Broken bricks / Brick aggregates
These shall be obtained by breaking well burnt or over burnt dense

brick bats. They shall be homogeneous in texture, well graded in size,
roughly cubical in shape, clean and free from dirt, clay, silt or any other
deleterious matter. Before use, these shall be screened.
2.3 Fine Aggregates
2.3.1 Unless specified otherwise it shall either be natural river sand or pit
sand.
2.3.2 Sand shall be clean, sharp, strong, angular and composed of hard
siliceous material. It shall not contain harmful organic impurities in
such form or quantities as to affect adversely the strength and
durability of concrete. Sand for reinforced concrete shall not contain
any acidic or other impurities which is likely to attack steel
reinforcement. The percentage of all deleterious materials including
silt, clay etc., shall not exceed 5% by weight. If directed, sand shall be
screened or washed before use to the satisfaction of Engineer.
2.3.3 Crusher dust
Crusher stone dust ( that is retained on 300 micron sieve ) may be

used as replacement for certain quantum of sand aiming to improve the
fineness modulus of fine aggregate. The quantum of replacement for
sand shall be arrived at by suitable trial mixes. The Engineer will
decide the final usage of crusher dust depending on the circumstances.
2.4 Lime
Lime for mortars and concrete shall conform to IS: 712-1984 The total
of CaO and MgO content in quick lime shall not be less than 85%
(MgO shall not exceed 5%). Quicklime, after slaking, shall leave a
residue of not more than 5% by weight on IS sieve 85.
2.5 Surkhi
I-5
99 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Surkhi used in lime concrete for flooring, terracing etc., shall conform to
IS: 3182-1986. Surkhi shall be made from well burnt bricks or
brickbats. Surkhi shall pass through I.S. sieve 3.35mm with at least 50
% of it passing through I.S. sieve 1.70mm and be perfectly clean and
free from foreign matter. Surkhi shall not be made from bricks which
have come in contact with any mortar.
2.6 Cement
Ordinary Portland cement / Portland slag cement complying with the

requirements of IS:269-1989 and I.S. 455-1989 respectively shall be
used for making plain and reinforced concrete, cement grout and
mortar.
Other types of cement may be used depending upon the requirements

of certain jobs with the approval of the Engineer. These shall conform
to the following standards :
Portland Pozzolana Cement IS: 1489-1991
Rapid Hardening Portland Cement IS: 8041-1990
43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement IS: 8112-1989
53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement IS: 12269-1987
Hydrophobic Portland Cement .. IS: 8043-1991
High alumina cement for structural work IS: 6452-1989
White portland cement IS: 8043-1989
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement IS: 12330-1988
2.6.1 Testing of samples
The Contractor shall supply a copy of the manufacturer's test certificate

for each consignment of cement supplied by him and consignments
shall be used on work in the order of delivery. The Contractor shall
supply samples of cement to the Engineer as frequently as he may
require for testing. The sampling of cement for testing shall be
according to IS: 3535-1986. All tests shall be in accordance with the
I-6
100 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
relevant clauses of IS: 4031 (Part-I to Part-15) 1988 to 1991 & IS:
4032-1985.
2.6.2 Contractor's responsibility
From the time a consignment of cement is delivered at site and tested

and approved by the Engineer until such time as the cement is used on
the works, the Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the same in
sound and acceptable condition and at his expense and risk. Any
cement which deteriorates while in the Contractor's charge and is
rejected as unsuitable by the Engineer, shall be removed from the site
to outside the limits of work at the cost of contractor within two days of
ordering such removal by the Engineer.
2.6.3 Stock of cement
In order to ensure due progress, the Contractor shall at all times

maintain on the site at least such stock of cement as the Engineer may
from time to time consider necessary. No cement shall be used upon
the works until it has been accepted as satisfactory by the Engineer.
2.6.4 Storage of cement
The cement shall be stored in such manner as to permit easy access

for proper inspection and in a suitable weather-tight, well ventilated
building to protect it from dampness caused by ingress of moisture
from any source. Different types of cement shall be stored separately.
Cement bags shall be stacked at least 15 to 20 cm clear of the floor
leaving a space of 60 cm around the exterior walls. The cement shall
not be stacked more than 10 bags high. Each consignment of cement
shall be stacked separately to permit easy access for inspection.
2.7 Water
Water used for mixing concrete and mortar and for curing shall be
clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salts, sugar,
organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to
concrete or steel. The pH value of water shall generally be not less
than '6'. Water has to meet the requirements mentioned in clause 4.3
of IS: 456-1978. Water shall be obtained from an approved source.
Where it is obtained from a source other than a supply main, it shall be

tested to establish its suitability. Water for construction purpose shall
I-7
101 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
be stored in proper storage tanks to prevent any organic impurities

getting mixed up with it.
2.8 Admixture for Concrete
2.8.1 Approval
Admixtures to concrete shall not be used without the written consent of

the Engineer. When permitted, the Contractor shall furnish full details
from the manufacturer and shall carry out such test as the Engineer
may require before any admixture is used in the work.
2.8.2 Types
2.8.2.1 Integral water proofer
Admixtures used as integral water proofer shall be free of chlorides and

sulphates and shall conform to IS: 2645-1975. The application and
doses shall be as per manufacturer's specification.
2.9 Interval of Routine Test
2.9.1 The routine tests of materials, delivered at site, shall be at the following
intervals :
Aggregates - Fortnightly or for every 200 m3 for each aggregate

whichever is earlier and in other respects generally
as per IS : 2386 (Part 1 to 8)-1963.
Cement - Fortnightly or for each consignment, within 4 days of

delivery and in other respects generally as per IS :
4031-1988.
Water - Once in two months for each source of supply and

in other respects generally as per IS : 456-1978.
Reinforcement - For each consignment within 4 days of delivery in

accordance with I.S. 1786-1985, I.S. 1599-1985 and
I.S. 1608-1972.
I-8
102 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.0 STEEL
3.1 For Reinforcement
Reinforcing bars for concrete shall be round steel bars of the following
types as may be shown on the drawing :
i) Plain mild steel bars conforming to Grade-I of IS : 432-1982 "Mild

Steel & Medium Tensile Steel for Concrete Reinforcement".
ii) "High strength deformed steel bars conforming to IS : 1786-1985

for Concrete Reinforcement".
iii) Reinforcement fabrics conforming to IS:1566-1982 "Hard Drawn

Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement"
All reinforcement bars shall be of uniform cross sectional area and be

free from loose mill scales, dust, loose rust, coats of paint, oil or other
coatings which may destroy or reduce bond. Unit weight of
reinforcement bars conforming to I.S. 1786-1985 is as given below.
Nominal Size (Dia) Mass Per Metre Run

(mm) (Kg)
6 0.222
8 0.395
10 0.617
12 0.888
16 1.580
18 2.000
20 2.470
22 2.980
25 3.850
I-9
103 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
28 4.830
32 6.310
3.2 Binding wire
Binding wire for reinforcement shall be annealed steel wire 20 BWG

conforming to IS : 280 -1978 "Specification for Mild Steel Wire".
3.3 Light structural work and inserts
Steel for light structural work and for preparation of inserts and
embedments shall conform to IS: 2062-1992 "Steel for general structural
purposes - Specification."
3.4 Steel Tubes
Steel tubes for use in light structural work and inserts shall be of light or
medium class (as may be specified in drawings or the schedule of items)
and of grade YST 25 conforming to IS : 1161 - 1979 "Specification for
Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes".
3.5 Foundation Bolts
3.5.1 Bolts to be embedded in concrete shall, unless otherwise detailed in

drawings, conform to IS : 5624-1970 "Specification for Foundation
Bolts". Material for bolts, shall, unless otherwise mentioned in drawings
or the schedule of items, be of steel conforming to IS : 2062-1992.
3.5.2 Nuts and locknuts shall conform to IS : 1363 (Part 1 to 3) -1992

"Specification for Black Hexagon Bolts, Nuts and Lock Nuts (Diameter 6-
39 mm) and Black Hexagon Screws "Specification for Hexagon Bolts
and Nuts (M-42 to M-150)".
3.5.3 Plain washers shall conform to IS : 2016 -1967 "Specification for Plain
Washers and spring washers shall conform to IS : 3063 -1972 "Spring
Washers for Bolts, Nuts & Screws".
3.6 Steel Tubes for Non-structural use
3.6.1 Steel tubes for non-structural use shall conform to IS : 1239 (Part-I) -
1990 "Specification for Mild Steel Tubes, Tubular and Other Wrought
Steel fittings, Part-I : Mild Steel Tubes".
I - 10
104 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.6.2 Fittings for steel tubes used for non-structural purposes shall conform to
IS : 1239 (Part-II) -1992 "Specification for Mild Steel Tubular and Other
Wrought Steel Pipe Fittings".
3.7 Threaded Fasteners
Bolts and nuts for fastening shall conform to IS:1367 (Part 1)-1980
"Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded Fasteners".
3.8 Testing
Test certificates from manufacturer shall be submitted for each

consignment. Any additional test which the Engineer may require shall
be done according to IS : 1786-1985, 1566-1982, 280-1978, 2062-1992,
1161-1979, 2614-1969, 3063-1972, 1239 (Part 1 and 2)-1990 and 1992
and 1367-1980.
3.9 Cast Steel
3.9.1 Quality
Cast steel shall conform to IS : 1030-1989 "Carbon Steel Casting for

General Engineering Purpose". Unless otherwise specified, it shall
conform to Grade2.
3.10 Conduits
3.10.1 Steel for electrical wiring
Rigid steel conduits for electrical use shall conform to IS : 9537 (Part 2) -
1981 for rigid pipes and to IS : 3480-1966 for flexible conduits. Fittings
for conduits shall conform to IS : 2667-1988.
All conduit pipes shall be finished with galvanised or stove-enamelled
surface. All accessories shall be of threaded type and pipes shall be
jointed by means of screwed couplers only. Bend in conduits shall be
made to the dimension shown in drawing, but a minimum of 12 times the
diameter. Where shown in drawing they shall be treated with
anticorrosive preservative as specified.
3.10.2 Non-metallic conduit for electrical wiring
I - 11
105 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Non-metallic conduits for electrical use shall conform to IS : 9537 (Part

3) -1983 for rigid pipes and to IS : 6946 -1973 for flexible pipes. Fittings
shall conform to IS : 3419-1989.
Bends shall be achieved by bending the pipes by inserting suitable solid

or inspection type normal bends, elbows or similar fittings.
4.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT PRODUCTS
4.1 General
Asbestos cement products shall be free from visible defects, uniform in

colour, of required density, length, thickness and diameter within the
allowable tolerance. They shall be obtained from an approved source of
manufacture and stored safely. Methods of test shall be according to
IS:5913-1989 "Method of Test for Asbestos Cement Products."
4.2 Building Boards
These shall be of Class A, B and C with board thickness being 6.5mm ,

5mm and 4mm respectively. The length shall be 2400, 1800 and
1200mm and width in all cases 1200 mm. Building boards shall conform
to IS : 2098 - 1964 "Asbestos Cement Building Boards". They shall,
when tested in two perpendicular directions, take a load of not less than
15 kgf for Class-A and 10 Kgf for Class-B and Class-C boards.The
boards shall show water absorption of not more than 40% of their dry
weight.
4.3 Flat Sheets
Flat sheets shall conform to IS : 2096-1992 "Asbestos Cement Flat

Sheets". They shall have a bending stress of not less than 225 kgf/cm2
& a density of 1.6 kg/dm3 for compressed sheets & a bending stress of
not less than 160 kgf/cm2 and a density of 1.2 Kg/ dm3 for
uncompressed sheets. Nominal thickness shall be 5,6,8,10 and 15 mm ,
length 2400, 1800 and 1200mm and width 1200mm. Water absorption
shall not exceed 28% of dry wt.
4.4 Pipes and fittings
Pressure pipes shall conform to IS : 1592-1989 "Asbestos Cement

Pressure Pipes" and to IS : 9627 -1980 "Asbestos Cement Pressure
Pipes (Light Duty)". Pipes for sewerage and drainage shall conform to IS
I - 12
106 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
: 6908 -1991 "Asbestos Cement Pipes and Fittings for Sewerage and
Drainage ". Building pipes gutters and fittings shall conform to IS : 1626 -
(Part 1 to 3)-1980 to 1991 "Asbestos Cement Building pipes and pipe
fittings".
Pressure pipes shall satisfy Hydraulic test and transverse crushing test
as per IS : 5913-1989.
4.5 Corrugated and Semi-Corrugated Sheets
These shall conform to IS : 459 -1992 "Unreinforced Corrugated and

Semi-Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets". Unless otherwise stated
the sheets shall be corrugated and not less than 6mm thick. The sheets
shall have a load bearing capacity of not less than 5 N/mm width of
specimen and shall not absorb more water than 28% of its dry weight.
Overall width of corrugated sheets is 1050mm and of semi-corrugated
sheet is 1100mm.
4.6 Asbestos Cement Roof fittings
These shall conform to IS : 1626 (Part 3)-1981. Shapes and dimensions

shall be as given in the above mentioned code. All finished products
shall be free from visual defects that impair appearance or serviceability.
Surface of fittings shall be of uniform texture and shall have neatly
trimmed edges. Mean water absorption shall not be more than 28% of
dry mass of the material.
5.0 BRICK AND STONES
5.1 Bricks
Bricks for masonry in foundations, walls and other locations shall be

common burnt clay building bricks having minimum crushing strength of
5 N/sq.mm., or such other strength as may be described in the Schedule
of Items, when tested in accordance with IS : 1077-1992 "Common
Burnt Clay Building Bricks". They shall be sound, hard and thoroughly
well burnt, with uniform size having rectangular faces with parallel sides
and sharp straight right angled edges and be of uniform colour with fine
compact uniform texture. Bricks shall be of uniform deep red cherry or
copper colour. They shall be free from flaws, cracks and nodules of free
lime. Water absorption after 24 hours immersion in cold water shall be
not more than 20% by weight. They shall not absorb more than 10% by
weight of water after immersion for six hours. They shall emit a clear
I - 13
107 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
metallic ringing sound when struck by a mallet and shall not break when
dropped on their face, from a height of 60 cm. Fractured surface shall
show homogeneous, fine grained uniform texture, free from cracks, air
holes, laminations, grits, lumps of lime, efflorescence or any other
defect which may impair their strength, durability, appearance and
usefulness for the purpose intended. Underburnt or vitrified bricks shall
not be used. Samples of bricks brought to the site shall be tested
periodically for compression and other tests according to IS : 3495
(Parts-1 to 4) -1992 "Method of Test for Burnt Clay Building Bricks".
Where the size of bricks is not specifically mentioned, it shall be taken to
mean conventional sizes as is commonly available in the area. In case
modular bricks are to be used, it shall be accordingly specified in
Schedule of Items. The bricks shall be classified on the basis of average
compressive strength as given in table 1 of IS : 1077-1992.
5.2 Handling
Bricks shall be unloaded by hand and carefully stacked and all broken
bricks shall be removed from the site.
5.3 Samples and Inspection
Representative samples shall be submitted by the contractor and

approved samples retained by the Engineer for comparison and future
reference. Bricks shall be obtained from approved manufacturer. All
bricks shall be subject to inspection on the site and shall be to the
approval of the Engineer who may reject such consignment as are
considered by him to be inferior to the quality specified. The Contractor
shall provide all labour and plant required for the inspection and conduct
such test as shall be required by the Engineer without additional
charges.
5.4 Brick Bats
Brick bats shall be obtained from well burnt bricks of approved quality.
5.5 Laterite Stone Blocks
These shall conform to IS : 3620 -1979 "Laterite Stone Blocks for

Masonry". The laterite stone blocks shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 30 kg/cm2 and to be tested as per IS : 1121-1974. The
blocks shall be minimum 15 cm thick but not exceeding 30 cm. They
shall be dressed to the desired sizes and shapes with an axe. Laterite
I - 14
108 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
stones shall be well seasoned by exposure to air before dressing and

using on work.
5.6 Stone (granite, trap, sandstone, quartzite etc.)
5.6.1 Stone used shall be strong, durable, dense, compact, close grained,
homogeneous, fire resistant and shall be obtained from sources
approved by Engineer. Stones shall additionally be hard, sound, free
from cracks, decay and other flaws or weathering and shall be easily
workable. Stones with round surfaces shall not be made use of.
5.6.2 Stones shall have a crushing strength of not less than 200 kg/cm2.
Stones with lesser crushing strength may be used in works with prior
approval of the Engineer. Stones shall be non-porous and when tested
in accordance with IS : 1124 -1974 "Method of Test for Determination of
Water Absorption Etc.," shall show water absorption of less than 5% of
its dry weight when soaked in water for 24 hours. Tests for durability and
wheathering shall be done in accordance with IS : 1126-1974 and IS :
1125-1974 respectively. The working of stones to required sizes and
their dressing shall be as per IS : 1127-1970 "Recommendations for
dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry
work" and IS : 1129 -1972 "Dressing of Natural Building Stones". Stones
especially limestone and sand stones shall be well seasoned by
exposure to air before use in construction works.
5.6.3 Size
Normally stones shall be of size that could be lifted and placed by hand,
between 20 to 30 kg per piece. The length of stones shall not exceed 3
times the height and the breadth on base shall not be greater than 3/4 of
the thickness of wall or less than 15cm. The height of stone may be upto
30cm.
5.6.4 Dressing
5.6.4.1 Random rubble
Stones shall be hammer dressed on the face, the sides, and the beds to
enable it to come into close proximity with the neighbouring stone. The
bushings in the face shall not project more than 4cm on all exposed
faces and 2cm on a face to be plastered, nor shall it have depressions
more than 1cm from the average wall surface.
I - 15
109 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.6.4.2 Coursed rubble - First sort
Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds, and joints, so as to

give them approximately rectangular block shape. These shall be
squared on all joints and beds. The bed joint shall be rough chisel
dressed for atleast 5cm back from the face, and side joints for atleast
4cm such that no portion of the dressed surface is more than 6mm from
a straight edge placed on it. The bushing on the face shall not project
more than 4cm as an exposed face and one cm on a face to be
plastered. The hammer dressed stone shall also have a rough tooling for
a minimum width of 2.5cm along the four edges of the face of the stone,
when stone work is exposed.
5.6.4.3 Coursed rubble - Second sort
Dressing shall be as specified in 5.6.4.2 except that no portion of

dressed surface shall exceed 10mm from a straight edge placed on it as
against 6mm for first sort.
5.6.4.4 Stone for veneering
Stone lining upto 8cm shall be treated as veneering work. The stone
shall be cut into slabs or required thickness along the planes parallel to
the natural bed. Every stone shall be cut to the required size and shape
so as to be free from any waviness and to give truly vertical and
horizontal joints. Adjoining faces shall be fine chisel dressed to a depth
of a 6mm, so that when checked with a 60cm straight edge, no point
varies from it by more than 1mm. All edges shall be chisel dressed to be
true, square and free from chippings. Top and bottom faces shall be
dressed to within 3mm tolerance and vertical faces to within 6mm
tolerance, when checked with a 60mm straight edge. Dressing at the
back shall not be done.
5.7 Hollow and Solid Concrete Blocks
5.7.1 Cement concrete blocks used in the construction of concrete masonry

load bearing as well as non-load bearing walls shall conform to the
requirements of IS : 2185 (Part 1)-1979. Physical properties such as
density, compressive strength, water absorption etc., shall be deter-
mined in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS : 2185 (Part 1) -
1979 and shall conform to the requirement laid therein. When inspected
visually all blocks shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges,
I - 16
110 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
honeycombing and other defects which would interfere with the proper
placing of blocks or impair strength or permanence of construction.
5.7.2 Dimensions and tolerance
The blocks shall be made in sizes and shapes to suit the particular job
and shall include stretcher, corner, double corner or pier, jamb, header,
bullnose and floor units.
5.7.2.1 The nominal dimensions of concrete block shall be as follows :
Length : 400, 500 or 600mm

Height : 200 or 100mm
Width : 50, 75,100, 150, 200, 250 or 300mm
In addition, blocks shall be manufactured in half and other suitable

lengths and shapes to suit Architectural requirements.
5.7.2.2 The maximum dimensional tolerances shall be plus or minus 5mm in

length and plus or minus 3mm in height and width.
5.7.3 Hollow blocks (open and closed cavity)
5.7.3.1 The blocks having solid material about 50% to 75% of total volume of
the block calculated from the overall dimensions shall be termed as
hollow blocks. Grade-A blocks used as load bearing units shall have a
minimum block density of 1500 kg/m3 and shall have minimum average
compressive strength of 3.5, 4.5, 5.5 or 7.0 N/mm2 at 28 days as
specified.
5.7.3.2 Grade-B Blocks used as load bearing units shall have block density less
than 1500 kg/m3, but not less than 1000 kg/m3 and shall have
compressive strength of 2.0, 3.0, or 5.0 N/ mm2 or as specified.
5.7.3.3 Grade-C blocks used as non load bearing units shall have block density
less than 1500 kg/m3, but not less than 1000 kg/m3 and compressive
strength of 1.5 N/mm2 at 28 days.
5.7.4 Solid blocks
The blocks having solid material more than 75% of the total volume of
the be block shall be termed as solid block. Solid blocks (Grade-D) used
I - 17
111 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
as load bearing units shall have a block density of not less than 1800
kg/m3 and compressive strength of 4.0 or 5.0 N/mm2 as specified.
5.7.5 Mix proportion
The concrete mix used for blocks shall not be richer than one part by
volume of cement to six parts by volume of combined aggregates before
mixing.
5.7.6 Surface texture and finish
Surface texture, that is, very fine closed texture or coarse open texture
and finish, whether coloured or not shall be according to the drawing,
description in the Schedule of Items or instructions of the Engineer.
5.7.7 Marking and certificate
The blocks shall be marked permanently indicating the Grade of the unit,
identification of the manufacturer and the year of manufacture.
Manufacturers test certificate shall be supplied with the delivery of each
lot.
5.8 Cement, Lime and Water
Cement, lime and water shall conform to the specification under the
Section Concrete of this part.
5.9 Sand for Masonry Mortar
Sand for masonry mortars shall be natural sand, crushed stone sand or
crushed gravel and shall comply with IS : 2116 - 1980 "Sand for
Masonry Mortars". The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free
from adherent coatings and shall not contain amount of clay, silt and
fine dust more than 5% by wt. Sand shall not contain any harmful
impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalies, salts, coal, mica and organic
matters. The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be
within the limits as specified in Table I of above code.
6.0 SAND FOR PLASTERING
I - 18
112 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Sand for use in mortars for internal wall, ceiling and external plastering
and rendering shall conform to IS:1542 -1992. It shall not contain any
harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica and
organic matters. Percentage of salt and dust shall not be more than 5%
by weight. Grading of sand shall be within the limits specified in clause
no. 5.1 of above code. Fineness modulus of naturally occuring sand
shall not be less than 1.5.
7.0 MATERIALS FOR FLOORING & PAVING
7.1 Cement and Binders
7.1.1 Cement
Cement, fine aggregates, reinforcement and water used shall comply

with the requirements of concrete as per clauses 2.1, 2.3, 2.6 and 2.7
of this part.
7.1.2 Water
Water for construction shall be clean, soft, free from loam, salt and
organic materials. Hard water shall not be used.
7.2 Aggregates
7.2.1 Coarse Aggregate
7.2.1.1 Coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirement as per clauses 2.1
and 2.2 of this part.
7.2.1.2 For granolithic floor the screeded bed shall comprise of aggregates
size 15mm and down graded and topping shall comprise of clean fine
stone chippings, size 4mm and down. For concrete floor with hardener
treatment the topping shall comprise of stone chippings, size 6mm and
down and for in-situ terrazzo flooring, chippings shall be within sizes
12mm to 6mm graded. The marble chips for topping of terrazzo floor
shall be of 3-6mm size and shall conform to Grade-I of IS : 2114-1984
"CP for laying in-situ terrazo floor finish".
7.2.2 Common burnt clay bricks
Common burnt clay bricks shall conform to IS : 1077-1992 and comply

with requirements under the section "Brick and Stones" of this part.
I - 19
113 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.2.3 Rubble
Rubble of approved quality shall be used and shall be clean and free
from dirt. The loose and weathered sections shall be removed before
use. Rubble used as hard core shall have a least lateral dimension
(thickness) between 100mm and 225mm, depending on the thickness
of hardcore.
7.3 Tiles
7.3.1 Terrazzo Tiles
Terrazzo tiles shall be machine made under a minimum pressure of

140 kg/cm2. It shall have a minimum total thickness of 20mm including
a minimum of 6mm thick topping. It shall be of size, texture, colour,
shade and pattern as specified in schedule of item and as approved by
the Engineer.
7.3.2 White Glazed Tile
White glazed tiles shall be of approved manufacture and quality and

shall conform to IS:777 - 1988 "Glazed Earthenware Tiles. They shall
be true in shape, free from hair cracks, crazing spot, chipped edges
and corners and surface shall be perfectly flat without warps and of
uniform colour. The top surface shall be glazed either gloss or matt as
specified. The tiles, normally shall be 149mm x 149mm or 99mm x
99mm size and shall not be less than 5mm thick or as specified. The
tolerance on average facial dimension value shall be plus or minus 0.8
and on thickness plus or minus 0.5mm. The specials such as coves,
internal and external angles, beads, cornices and their corner pieces
shall be of specified sizes and of thickness not less than the thickness
of tiles.
7.3.3 Coloured tiles
Only glaze shall be coloured as specified. The size and specification of

tiles shall be same as for the white glazed tiles.
7.3.4 Marble tiles
It shall conform to IS : 1130 -1960 "Marble (Blocks, Slabs and Tiles)".

Marble for paving and facing work shall be of selected quality, hard,
I - 20
114 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
sound, dense and homogeneous in texture (with crystalline texture)

and free from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws and shall be of kind
and quality, size and thickness as specified in schedule of items. The
samples of tiles shall be got approved by the Engineer before use. The
tiles shall be cut to the requisite dimensions.
7.4 Pigments
Pigments incorporated in mortar or used for grouting shall be subject to

approval of Engineer and as per table I of IS : 2114-1984.
7.5 Red Oxide of Iron
Red oxide of iron where used for "Red Artificial Stone Flooring" shall be
of quality approved by the Engineer, and shall be of uniform tint.
7.6 Hardening Agents
Hardening agents such as ironite used for "Cement Concrete Flooring

with Hardener Treatment", shall be of quality approved by the Engineer
for every work.
7.7 Dividing Strips
Dividing strips shall be of aluminium, glass, brass, copper, plastic or

similar materials as specified in the schedule of item and of quality
approved by the Engineer. Strips shall be 1.5 mm thick unless
otherwise specified penetrating to the full depth of the flooring.
Aluminium strips when used shall have a protective coating of bitumen.
7.8 Marble Chips
It shall be in sizes varying from 1mm to 25mm and in different colours

as per requirement. Marble chips shall be hard, sound, dense and
homogeneous in texture with crystalline and coarse grains. It shall be
uniform in colour and free from cracks, stains, decay and weathering
and shall be obtained from approved source.
7.9 Marble Powder
It shall be clean, free from dust and other foreign materials and of
approved quality, obtained from approved source. It shall pass through
sieve 300 conforming to IS: 460- (Part-1)-1985.
I - 21
115 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.0 TIMBER
8.1 General
All timber used for carpentry and joinery works shall be new. It shall be
well seasoned by a suitable process conforming to IS : 1141-1973
before being planed to the required sizes. It shall be sound, straight, free
from sap, radial cracks, decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch
pockets, borer holes, splits, loose knots, flaws or any other defects and
shall show a clean surface when cut. Timber shall conform to the
requirements of IS : 1003 (Part 1&2)-1983 to 1991. The finished
components shall be given suitable preservative treatment wherever
necessary.
8.2 Teak wood/Sal / Bija Sal / Deodar / Kail

and other varieties of timber
8.2.1 Teak wood
The timber shall be of good quality and well seasoned. It shall be of

fairly uniform colour and shall be free from defects such as cracks,
dead knots, shakes etc. No individual hard and sound knot shall be
more than 15 sq. cm. in size and aggregate area of all such knots shall
not exceed 2 % of the area of the piece. Wood shall be generally free
from sap wood but traces of the same shall be allowed. The timber
shall be fairly grained having not less than 2 growth per cm width in
cross section.
8.2.2 Sal / Bija Sal wood
Timber shall be of good quality and well seasoned. It shall have fairly
uniform colour, reasonable straight grains and shall be free from all
defects as mentioned in previous clauses. No individual hard and
sound knot shall be more than 6 sq. cm. in size and aggregate area of
all such knots shall not exceed 2 % of the area of the piece. There shall
not be less than 5 growth rings per 2 cm of the width.
8.2.3 Deodar wood
The timber shall be of good quality and well seasoned. It shall have
fairly uniform colour, reasonable straight grains and shall be free from
all defects as mentioned in previous clauses. No individual hard and
sound knot shall be more than 15 sq.cm. in size and aggregate area of
I - 22
116 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
all such knots shall not exceed 2 % of the area of the piece. There shall
be at least 3 growth rings per cm width in cross section.
8.2.4 Kail wood
The timber shall be generally as specified in clause 8.2.3 for Deodar

wood. However, there shall not be less than 2 growth rings per cm
width in cross section.
8.2.5 Other varieties of timber
The timber as named in the item of work shall be used. It shall be well
seasoned and generally free from defects such as dead knots, cracks,
shakes, sap wood etc. However, traces of sap wood shall be allowed
and sound and hard knots up to 2 % of the area of the piece shall be
allowed.
8.3 Storage and Inspection
Timber shall be carefully stored and subject to inspection on site, piece

by piece. The Engineer may reject such pieces as are considered by
him not of the quality or meeting the requirements specified herein.
8.4 Moisture Content
Timber shall be accepted as well seasoned if its moisture content does

not exceed the permissible limit as per IS : 287-1973.
8.5 Tolerances for Timber
For timber allowance as specified in the IS : 1003 (Part 1&2) 1983 to

1991 shall be applicable.
8.6 Flush Door Shutters, Shelves
Flush door shutters, shall be wooden, solid core or cellular and hollow
core type, as may be shown in drawing or described in the Schedule of
Items or directed by Engineer. They shall be obtained from an
approved source of manufacture, covered on face with commercial ply,
wood veneer or other finish as may be necessary. Solid core shutters
I - 23
117 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
shall conform to IS : 2202 (Part 1&2)-1983 to 1991 and cellular or

hollow core shutters to IS : 2191 (Part 1&2)-1983. The resin used shall
be phenol formaldehyde. A full size sample door shall be offered for
inspection and approval.
8.7 Wood Particles Boards
Particle boards for general purposes shall be of medium density

conforming to IS:3087-1985. These are of four types, Flat pressed
single layer board (FPSI),Flat pressed three layer board (FPTH),
Extrusion pressed solid board (XPSO) and Extrusion pressed tubular
core (XPTU). Adhesive shall be BWR, WWR or un-extended CWR
type. High density wood particle board shall conform to IS:3478-1966
and are in flat sheets or moulded forms. These shall be of type 1 (BWR
type of resin) or Type 2 (WWR or CWR type of resin). Both types of
boards shall be of Grade A (resin content 20 to 50 percent) and Grade
: (resin content 8-12 percent).
8.8 Veneered Particle Board
These shall conform to IS : 3097-1980 and shall be of two grades.

Exterior (grade-I with BWP or BWR type adhesive) & interior (grade-II
with WWR or CWR type adhesive). Each grade of boards shall be of 4
types, solid core general purpose, solid core decorative, Tubular core
general purpose and Tubular core decorative and accordingly
designated.
8.9 Plywood for General Purpose
Plywood for general purpose shall conform to IS:303-1989. Depending

on type of adhesive used for bonding veneers, it is of 4 grades, BWP
(boiling water proof), B.W.R (boiling water resistant), WWR (warm
water resistant) and CWR (Cold Water resistant). Any species of timber
may be used for plywood manufacture. However list of species, for the
manufacture of plywood is given in Annexure 'B' of the IS : 303-1989
for guidance.
Plywood is classified in 10 different types as per appearance of the

surface. These are type AA,AB,AC,AD,BB, BC,BD,CC,CD and DD as
detailed in IS : 303-1984. It is available from 3 ply to 11 ply with
thickness from 3mm to 25mm.
8.10 Veneered Decorative Plywood

I - 24
118 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
This quality of plywood shall conform to IS : 1328-1982. These plywood

shall be of two types Type 1 and Type 2 as per details given in IS :
1328-1982. Species of timber for decorative face commonly used are
given in Table 1 of IS : 1328-1982 but the purchaser shall specify the
particular veener to be used. Timber for cores and backs shall be either
class I or II as specified in IS : 303-1989. Adhesive used shall be BWR
or WWR synthetic resin.
9.0 FITTINGS FOR DOORS, WINDOWS, ETC.
9.1 General
Fittings shall be of iron, brass, aluminium or as specified. These shall

be well made, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges, corners,
flaws and other defects. Screw holes shall be countersunk to suit the
head of specified wood screws. All hinge pins shall be of steel and their
riveted heads shall be well formed.
Iron fittings shall be finished bright or black enameled or copper

oxidised or painted as specified. Brass fittings shall be finished bright,
oxidised or chromium plated and aluminium fittings shall be finished
bright or anodised as specified. Fittings shall be got approved by the
Engineer before fixing. Screws used for fittings shall be of the same
metal and finish as the fittings. However, anodised cadmium/chromium
plated M.S. screws of approved quality shall be used for fixing
aluminium fittings.
9.2 Hinges
9.2.1 Butt hinges
These shall be mild steel but hinge (medium), brass butt hinges,
extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges or as specified. Type
(light/medium/heavy weight) and size shall be as specified in the
drawing or schedule of items. Brass / Aluminium and M.S butt hinges
shall conform to Indian Standard Specification for butt hinges IS : 205-
1992 and IS : 1341-1992 respectively. Hinges shall be finished bright or
satin polished or anodised.
I - 25
119 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.3 Sliding Door Bolts
Mild steel sliding door bolts shall conform to IS : 281-1991 and are of 2
types, plate type and clip or bolt type. Plate type bolts shall have plates
and straps stove enameled black with hasp and bolt finished bright or
copper oxidized or nickel / chromium plated. Clip or bolt type are
copper oxidized or plated. All screw holes in the M.S bolts shall be
countersunk. Diameter of bolt for plate type is 12mm and for clip type is
16mm.
Non ferrous metal sliding doors are of brass or aluminium alloy and
shall conform to IS:2681-1979. Brass sliding bolts are of 150 to 450mm
size with bolt dia being 16mm for 150 to 300mm and 18mm for 375 and
450 size. Aluminium alloy sliding bolts are of size 200 to 450mm with
16mm bolt dia. Brass quality is finished satin, polished or plated and
aluminium alloy bolts are anodised.
For both ferrous and non-ferrous metal bolts the size of the sliding bolt
is determined by the length of the bolt.
9.4 Door Rim Latch
This shall be of mild steel, brass, aluminium alloy or as specified and of

sizes 75, 100, 125 and 150mm denoted by overall length of the body
measured from outside face of the fore end to the rear end. These are
of type 1 and type 2 and shall conform to IS : 1019-1974.
9.5 Tower Bolts
Tower bolts may be of one of the following types and shall conform to
IS : 204 (Part 1 and 2)-1991 and 1992.
i) Barrel tower bolts
These shall be of bright finished/stove enamelled/ black painted

mild steel tower bolts, brass barrel tower bolts with cast brass
barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt/brass barrel tower bolts
with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or drawn
brass bolt/brass barrel tower bolts with brass sheet barrel and
rolled or drawn brass bolt. Aluminium barrel tower bolts with
barrel and bolt of extruded section of aluminium alloy-bolts and
barrel anodised.
I - 26
120 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ii) Semi-barrel tower bolts
These shall be mild steel semi barrel tower bolts full cover/open
type with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and cast iron/mild steel
bolt. Bolt bright finished other parts stove enameled black.
iii) Rivetted or spot welded tower bolts
These shall be mild steel tower bolts rivetted type with black flat
and mild steel/cast iron bolt and open staple.
iv) Skeleton tower bolts
These shall be of bright finished / stove enameled / black

painted mild steel or brass bright finished skeleton tower bolts
with cast brass/extruded sections plate and staples and rolled or
drawn brass bolt or Aluminium skeleton tower bolts with plates
staples and bolt or extruded sections of Aluminium alloy plate
and staple anodised.
9.6 Door Handles
Door handles shall conform to IS : 208-1987 and shall be of 4 types.

Type 1 is cast Iron / Brass / Aluminium or zinc alloy die casting and
available in 75,100,125 150mm sizes. Type 2 is mild steel pressed oval
in 75, 100,115 and 135mm sizes. Type 3 is mild steel present half oval
in 75,90 and 100mm sizes. Type 4 is fabricated (brass / aluminium
alloy) in 75,100 and 125mm sizes. The size of the handle shall be
determined by inside (grip) size overall size and internal depth of the
handles shall be as detailed in IS : 208-1987.
Finish for type 1 shall be satin/nickel plating, copper oxidising and

bronze finish for cast-brass and zinc die cast handles and stove
enamelled black or copper oxidized for cast iron handles. Aluminium
handles shall be anodized. Type 2 and 3 handles shall be stove
enamelled black. For type 4 it shall be satin finish, nickel plating,
copper oxidized and bronze finish for brass handles and anodizing for
aluminium handles.
9.7 Mortice Lock and Rebated Mortice lock
Mortice lock with latch and pair of lever handles shall have body of
steel, Aluminium alloy or brass and shall be right or left handed as
I - 27
121 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer. It shall be of the

best Indian make of approved quality and shall conform to IS: 2209 /
6607-1976/1972. The shape and pattern shall be approved by the
Engineer. The size of the lock shall be determined by its length. The
lock for single leaf door shall have plain face and that for double leaf
door a rebated face. Lever handles with springs shall be mounted on
plates and shall weigh not less than 0.5 kg per pair. These shall be of
brass, finished, bright chromium plated or oxidised. The locks shall be
of 65, 75 and 100 mm sizes.
9.8 Floor Door Stopper
These are for the use of the door shutters of 30, 35,40 & 45mm
thickness. It is made of aluminium alloy/ brass with springs of phosphor
bronze or hard drawn steel wire and tongue of aluminium/brass/nylon/
plastic. The floor door stoppers shall conform to IS : 1823-1980 and
shall be best Indian make of approved quality. Width of cover plate is
40mm but its overall length is 140mm for 30 and 35mm thick shutters &
150mm for 40 and 45mm shutters. The body shall be cast in one piece
and fixed to cover plate by brass or M.S screws. On the extreme end
there shall be rubber cushion to absorb shocks. The extension of the
door stopper shall be in flush with floor and be finished
bright/satin/chromium plated or anodised.
9.9 Hooks and Eyes
These shall be of mild steel or hard drawn brass and shall generally
conform to IS : 207-1964.
9.10 Casement Window Handles
These shall be made of cast brass, steel protected against rusting,

aluminium, pressed brass or as specified. Casement handles for single
leaf window shutter shall be left or right handed and shall weigh as
specified.
9.11 Casement Peg Stays
These shall be made of cast brass, steel protected against rusting,

aluminium, cast alloy or as specified. The stay shall be made from a
channel section and shall be 300mm long with steel peg and locking
bracket. The peg stay shall have three holes to open the window in
three different angles. The shape and pattern of stays shall be
I - 28
122 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
approved by the Engineer. The peg stay shall be minimum 2mm

thickness in case of brass and aluminium and 1.25 mm in case of steel.
9.12 Quadrant Stays
These shall be made of cast brass, aluminium alloy, CP iron or as

specified. The shape and pattern shall be approved by the Engineer. It
shall weigh as specified.
9.13 Fan Light Pivots
These shall be made of mild steel, cast brass or aluminium alloy or as

specified and shall generally conform to IS : 1837-1966.
The pattern and the shape of the catch shall be as approved by the
Engineer and size and finish shall be as specified.
9.14 Fan light catch
These shall be made of mild steel, cast brass, aluminium alloy or as

specified and shall generally conform to IS : 364-1993. Steel springs of
the catch shall be 0.90 mm dia, 6 coils, 12 mm internal diameter and
20 mm long. The pattern and the shape of the catch shall be as
approved by the Engineer.
9.15 Steel Frames
These shall conform to IS:4351-1976. The frames shall be

manufactured from commercial mild steel sheets of 1.25mm thickness
and are suitable for door shutters 30 to 40mm thick. The door frames
are designated as per profile A, B and C.
Profile A Size 105x60mm : rebated for one set of shutters

Profile B Size 125x60mm : rebated for one set of shutters
Profile C Size 165x60mm : rebated for two sets of shutters.
Miscellaneous Items :
9.16 Putty
I - 29
123 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The material shall be homogeneous paste and shall be free from dust
and other visible impurities. Putty shall conform to IS : 419-1967 for
wood work.
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS, VENTILATORS AND

ROLLING SHUTTERS
10.1 General
Materials used in the fabrication of doors, windows, and ventilators

shall be the best procurable and conforming to relevant Indian
Standards.
10.2 Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators
Steel sections used for fabrication of doors, windows and ventilators

shall be standard rolled steel sections specified in IS : 1038, IS : 1977,
IS : 1361 or IS : 7452 year 1983, 1975, 1978 and 1990 respectively as
appropriate or as specified in drawing and Schedule of Items. Rivets
shall conform to IS : 1148-1982.
10.3 Aluminium Door, Windows and Ventilators
Aluminium sections for fabricating doors, windows, ventilators,

partitions etc., shall be extruded sections conforming to IS : 1948-1961
& IS : 1949-1961 or as manufactured by Indian Aluminium Company
Limited or approved equivalent The alloy used shall conform to
Designation HE 9 - WP of IS : 733-1983.
10.4 Steel Rolling Shutters, Rolling Grills
These shall conform to IS : 6248-1979.
10.5 M.S. Bolts etc.
M.S. bolts, nuts, screws, washers, peg stays and other mild steel
fittings shall be treated for corrosion. Putty for glazing shall conform to
IS : 419-1967. Glass panes and glazing shall conform to the
specification detailed under this series.
I - 30
124 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
10.6 Hardware and fixtures shall be as specified in the drawings or

Schedule of Items. All hardware and fixtures shall be able to withstand
repeated use. Door closers shall be suitable for doors weighing 61 80
kg, unless otherwise stated. Each closer shall be guaranteed against
manufacturing defect for one year and any defect found within this
period shall be rectified or the closer replaced free of charge.
Concealed door closers shall be either floor mounted or transom
mounted, suitable for installation with metal doors. It shall conform to
the performance requirements and endurance test stated in IS : 3564
1986 Appendix-A.
10.7 The mastic for caulking shall be of best quality from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer. In general, the mastic for fixing of metal
frames shall conform to IS : 1081-1960 and/or as approved by the
Engineer.
11.0 GLASS
11.1 General
Plain, ground, frosted or rough cast wired glass shall be used as shown
on the drawing or as specified in the Schedule of Items. It shall be
procured from a reputed source of manufacture and be of the best
quality. All glass panes shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles etc.
Glass panes shall be of thickness 3mm or more as required. Weight of
3mm thick glass pane shall not be less than 7.5 Kg//sqm. The
tolerance of glass panes, except wired glasses, in length and width
shall be plus or minus 2 mm for 3 to 6.3 mm glass sheets. Tolerance in
thickness of glass sheets shall be +/- 0.2mm for 3mm and 4mm thick
glasses and +/- 0.3mm for 4.8, 5.5 and 6.3mm thick glasses.
11.2 Plain Transparent Glass
Plain transparent glass for glazing and framing shall conform to IS:
2835-1987. It shall be free from flaws, specks, bubbles or distortions.
11.3 Ground and Frosted Glass
I - 31
125 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Glare reducing or heat absorbing glass shall be "Calorex" or approved

equivalent and special care shall be taken to grind smooth and round
off the edges before fixing.
11.4 Thickness
Glass shall have the following thickness, unless otherwise stated in the
Schedule of Items or drawings
Upto 60 cms x 60 cms ... 3 mm

do- of larger size ... 4 mm and 4.8mm
Sheet glass for doors ... 5.5 mm
Rough cast wired ... 6.4 +/- 0.4 mm
11.5 Inspection
All glasses shall be subject to inspection on the site. Glass found to

suffer from defects shall be rejected. Samples submitted for inspection
shall be selected so as to be representative of the consignment.
12.0 PAINTS
12.1 General
All paints, varnishes, distemper or other surface coating materials shall

be of approved quality conforming to the appropriate Indian Standard,
wherever such standard is available, and be obtained from a
manufacturer of repute. If there is more than one quality for one
particular product, only first quality shall be used unless otherwise
stated in the Schedule of Items.
12.2 Sampling and Testing
The Engineer may, at his discretion, require samples of paint to be

tested. In such cases testing will be according to IS : 101 (Part 1 to 8) -
1964 to 1993.
12.3 Storage
I - 32
126 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Paints, primers, distempers and varnishes shall be delivered in sealed

containers. They shall be stored in cool dry condition to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
12.4 Paints for Priming
Ready mixed paints for priming coats of steel and iron work shall either
comply with IS : 2074-1992 "Ready Mixed Paint", "Red Oxide Zinc
Chrome Priming" or Red Oxide metal primer as specified. For wood
work it shall be pink/white wood primer as specified by the
manufacturer of the synthetic enamel paints, conforming to IS : 3536-
1966.
12.5 Paints for finishing
Ready mixed oil synthetic enamel paint of approved manufacturers like

Berger, Jenson & Nicholson, Shalimar, I.C.I., Asian, Garware and
Goodlass Nerolac paints only shall be used unless otherwise specified.
Paint shall be of first grade quality of the above manufacturers ie.,
Luxol Brolac, Superlac, Dulox gloss, Apocolite, Garcoat and Nerolac
respectively.
If for any other reason, thinning is necessary, the brand of the thinner
recommended by the manufacturer, shall only be used with the specific
permission of the Engineer.
Aluminium paint for general purpose shall be in Duel Containers. It

shall be of manufacturers as for synthetic enamel paints above.
12.6 White wash
White was shall be prepared from freshly burnt fat, white in colour lime
slaked on spot, conforming to IS : 712-1984 mixed and stirred with
sufficient water to make a thin cream. Best and approved quality gum
and ultra marine blue only shall be used in lime wash.
12.7 Colour wash
Colour wash shall be prepared by adding mineral colours, not affected

by lime, to white wash.
12.8 Water proofing Cement Paint

I - 33
127 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Cement paints shall comply with IS: 5410-1992 and shall be of

approved brand and manufacture like Snowcem India Ltd., Berger,
Jenson & Nicholson & Shalimar paints. The shade shall be approved
by the Engineer before its application.
12.9 Distemper
Dry/synthetic washable distemper of approved brand and manufacture

like Berger, Jenson & Nicholson, Asian, Shalimar, Garware & Goodlass
Nerolac shall be used. The shade shall be approved by the Engineer
before application of the distemper. and shall comply with IS : 427-
1965 and IS : 428-1969.
12.10 Varnish
Varnish for the finishing coat shall be copal finish or synthetic class
varnish of approved brand. Varnish for the under coat shall be flatting
varnish of the same make as the top coats and shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
12.11 Polish
French spirit polish shall be of an approved make conforming to IS:

348-1968. In case it is to be prepared on site, the polish shall be made
by dissolving 0.7 kg of best, shellac in 4.5 litres of methylated spirit
without heating. To obtain required shade pigment may be added and
mixed. Shallac shall conform to IS : 5467-1986.
12.11.1 Wax polish for Wood work
The polish shall consist mainly of waxes and Organic solvents with or
without water and shall be of smooth consistency, homogeneous,
Semi-Solid mass and free from gritty materials. It shall not flow at
ordinary temperature. It may be tinted with an oil soluble colour. The
polish shall not crumble or dry too rapidly and shall produce non-tacky
polished surface. The polish shall be amenable to smooth spreading on
the furniture surface and the gloss shall appear on gentle rubbing with
a soft polishing cloth.
The wax polish shall conform to IS : 8542-1977.
I - 34
128 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.11.2 Where wax polishing is to be prepared at site, it shall be prepared by

heating two parts of "Bee Wax" two parts of boiled linseed oil over a
slow fire. When dissolved but still warm, one part of turpentine is to be
added. The boiled linseed oil, bees wax and turpentine used shall be of
approved quality and complying with IS : 77-1976, IS : 1504-1974 and
IS : 533-1973 respectively.
12.12 Plastic (Acrylic) emulsion paint
Plastic emulsion paint of approved manufacturers like Jenson &

Nicholson, Goodlass Nerolac, Shalimar, Berger, Asian and Garware
paints only shall be used unless otherwise specified and shall comply
with IS : 5411 (Part 1)-1974 & (Part 2)-1972 as applicable. Cement
primer used for priming work both for oil bound distemper and plastic
emulsion paint shall be of the same manufacture as that of distemper
or plastic emulsion paint used. For dry distemper priming, whiting of
approved quality shall be used.
12.13 Creosote oil or Coaltar Creosote
It is primarily used for preservation of wood. It shall be a homogeneous

liquid and shall liquify completely on being warmed to 38 degree C with
stirring and shall remain liquid on cooling down to 32 degree C and on
standing at that temperature for 2 hours.
The material shall conform to IS : 218-1983. All persons handling the

creosote oil should be fully aware of the hazards involved in handling .
Skin should be protected from coming in direct contact and eyes
should be protected by using safety goggles while handling the
material.
12.14 Coaltar Black Paint
Coaltar paint film protects surfaces by serving as a barrier against the

action of moisture and other corrosive agents. Coaltar black paint is
generally used as a protective and anti corrosive paint of iron and steel
as well as protection of other building surfaces. For this it has to be
applied under proper condition and on suitably prepared surface.
Coaltar should be applied by brush only and is not recommended for
locations which are not likely to be well ventilated. Coaltar paint shall
conform to IS : 290 1961.
I - 35
129 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The material is of two types : Type A Quickly drying and Type B Slow
drying. It shall be a homogenous black solution type paint consisting of
a base prepared by blinding suitable grades of Coltar pitch, washed
free from ammoniacal liquor, tar acid bases etc. Consistency,
permeability, thickness and surface preparation etc. shall be as per
para 5 and A-2 of the above code.
12.15 Floor Polish - Paste
The polish shall consist mainly of waxes and organic solvents with or
without water.
The paste floor polish shall be of smooth consistency, homogenous,

semi-solid-mass and free from gritty material. It shall not flow at
ordinary temperature. It shall be so constituted and prepared that on
application by means of a clean cloth, it shall spread easily and evenly
and shall give with minimum buffing a firm and glossy surface free from
greasiness or tackiness. The polish film after spreadng with a cloth
shall not take more than 10 minutes to dry. The polished floor shall
neither be slippery nor show any resistance to easy walking.
Floor polish paste shall conform to IS : 8591-1977.
13.0 WATER PROOFING MATERIALS
13.1 Integral Cement Waterproofing Compounds
Integral cement waterproofing compounds, i.e. admixture for

waterproofing purposes shall fully comply with the requirements of IS :
2645-1975. Properties like permeability, setting time, compressive
strength shall be in accordance with the requirements of this code
when tested as per procedure laid therein. Calcium chloride content of
the product used shall be made known to Engineer before use.
13.2 Bitumen
The bitumen bonding material for waterproofing shall conform to the

requirements laid down in IS : 702-1988 or IS : 93-1992 or IS : 217-
1988 or IS : 454-1961 depending upon whether industrial bitumen,
paving bitumen or cutback bitumen is used. For selecting the particular
type and grade of bitumen to be used the relevant item in Schedule of
Items shall be referred to.
I - 36
130 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
13.3 Bitumen Primer
Bitumen primer used for application to concrete and masonry surfaces

and bitumen for the purpose of waterproofing shall conform to
requirements given in IS : 3384-1986 and pass tests in accordance
with the procedure laid down in appropriate IS mentioned in Table-I of
IS : 3384-1986. Bitumen primer should be free from water and shall
preferably ;be made from the same grade of bitumen as used in
bonding.
13.4 Bitumen Felt
Bitumen felts used for water proofing purposes shall be as specified in

IS: 1322-1982. Physical properties shall conform to the requirements
and tests shall be carried out as per procedure laid down in IS :1322-
1982. Base, (whether fibre or Hessian), type and grade of felt shall be
as mentioned in the relevant items under Schedule of Items. Unless
otherwise stated, hessian base felt Type-3, Grade-2 shall be used.
13.5 Bitumen Mastic
Bitumen mastic used for water proofing of roofs shall have the physical
properties as mentioned in IS : 3037-1986 when tested with the
procedure laid down in appropriate IS mentioned in IS : 3037-1986.
13.6 Bituminous Compounds
Bituminous compounds when used for waterproofing of porous

masonry, concrete floors, walls and roofs shall conform to the
requirements of IS : 1580-1991. Physical properties shall be governed
by the requirements of this code when tested in accordance with the
procedure laid therein.
13.7 Surface Application Materials
Waterproofing material for application on mortar or concrete surface

shall conform to IS: 9862 1981. The primer shall be suitable for spray
or brush application. It shall have properties enabling it to penetrate
through pores or cracks and fill them up, making the surface
impervious.
13.8 Polymer based paints
I - 37
131 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The materials used shall be high polymer based chloride and sulphide
free cement and waterproofing additions and epoxy based
waterproofing paints as per manufacturer's specification and approved
by Engineer.
13.9 Fibre glass R. P. Tissue
The fibre glass R.P. tissue is a thin flexible uniform mat, composed of
glass fibre in an open porous structure bonded with a suitable inert
material compatible with coal tar, asphaltic enamel and oil plastic
based wall paint. The fibrous glass mat is reinforced with continuous
filament glass yard at 3/8" (10mm) pitch in the longitudinal direction.
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
i) Weight The average weight of fibre glass R.P.

tissue shall not be less than 50
gms/sq.sm.
ii) Thickness The fibre glass R.P. tissue shall have a

thickness not less than 0.4mm.
iii) Tear Strength The tear strength shall be not less than
900 grams in the transverse direction.
iv) Breaking Strength This shall have a minimum breaking

strength of 13 lb/in (2.32kg/cm) in the
longitudinal direction.
v) Porosity This shall have a porosity when related to

pressure difference across the sample of
not less than 0.022" (0.56mm) and not
more than 0.76" (1.92mm) of water
guage at an air velocity of
200fpm.(100cm/sec.).
vi) Pliability There shall be no cracking of the tissue

mat when bent over a 1/8" (3.2mm)
radius after immersing for 10-15min.
through a 90 degree arc.
vii) Temperature The fibre glass tissue shall be Resistance
under a load of hot bitumen at 530
degree F (276 degree C) for one minute.
I - 38
132 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
13.9.1 Primer
Primer shall conform to requirements laid down in IS : 3384-1986. It is
to be prepared by blending turpentine and blown grade bitumen in the
ratio of 60:40 by weight.
13.9.2 Blown Materials
Blown grade bitumen shall be conforming to IS : 702-1988 and residual

grade bitumen conforming to IS:73 respectively. This shall be prepared
by heating to correct working temperature.
13.9.3 Surface finish
Pea sized gravel/grit 6mm and down.
13.10 P.V.C. Membrane/Sheets
Polyvinyl chloride sheets for the purpose of water proofing and other
underground use are specially developed sheets made from the
compounded resin of grade MP/DP/CR-02 and shall be resistant to the
passage of gross water and water vapour. It shall be corrosion
resistant and resistant to a wide range of acidic and alkali reagents,
saltpetre action, salt water and ultra violet rays etc. PVC sheets
manufactured by approved and reputed firms like Maxlok Polymer Ltd.
shall only be used
The sheets shall consist of Knobs or Lugs jutting out of the sheets in a
grid fashion so as to provide a perfect grip in the mortar and concrete.
Sheet thickness, spacing of the knobs and their projection from the
sheet shall be as specified in the item. The sheets shall be of maximum
practicable length and width unless otherwise specified.
The adhesive used for jointing shall be of approved quality and of

grade C-02.
The sample of the material shall be got approved before use.
13.10.1 Properties
i) Chemical Composition : Resin Plasticiser Inhibitor

Stabiliser UV Barrier.
ii) Thickness : Not less than 0.25 mm
I - 39
133 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
iii) Rupture/Tensile : Not less than 225Kg/cm2

Strength
iv) Adhesive bond Strength : : Not less than 7.1 Kg/cm
[width]
v) Elongation at Break : 130%
14.0 WATER BAR
14.1 General
Water bar for use in construction/expansion joints in concrete and

reinforced concrete structures shall be of copper sheet, galvanised
steel sheet, rubber or PVC as shown in drawing or described in the
Schedule of Items. It shall be subject to approval of Engineer.
14.2 Jointing
The water bar shall have dimensions as shown in drawing. Where

water bars are required to be lengthened or otherwise jointed the
joining shall be done in such a way as to achieve a perfectly watertight
joint.
15.0 LEAD
15.1 General
Lead for joints in cast iron spigot and socket pipes shall be melted from
pure soft pig lead conforming to Type-I of IS : 782-1978. "Caulking
Lead". Where lead wool is allowed for caulking, it shall be equal to or
better than Type-II of IS : 782-1978. Lead flashing shall conform to IS :
405 Part I&II-1992.
16.0 BUILDING PAPER
16.1 Building paper shall be bitumen impregnated paper conforming to IS:

5134 1977, or such other as may be approved by the Engineer.
17.0 FILLING MATERIAL
I - 40
134 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
17.1 General
Filling material shall conform to what is shown in drawing, described in

the Schedule of Items or otherwise directed by the Engineer. Earth or
sand for filling under floors shall correspond to those described
elsewhere in these specifications.
17.2 Mastic Bitumen
Mastic Bitumen shall conform to IS : 3037-1986 or IS : 5871-1987 as

appropriate.
17.3 Flexible Boards
Flexible boards for use in expansion joints shall correspond to the

description given in drawing or the Schedule of Items or the instruction
of Engineer.
18.0 DRAINAGE & SANITATION (INTERNAL)
18.1 General
All materials, pipes, specials, fittings, fixtures etc., to be used in the

works shall be of best quality and class specified in relevant IS Code.
Where specified these shall be of specific manufacture and quality and
shall be procured from manufacturer or their accredited stockists and
be marked with manufacturers' names and trade mark. Contractor shall
submit to the Engineer samples of all materials, pipes, specials, fittings
fixtures for approval before use in the works. Such approved samples
shall be retained by the Engineer till completion of works. Pipes and
Specials may be any or combination of following types:-
i) PVC Pipes
ii) Stone Ware Pipes
iii) Sand Cast Iron Pipes for soil waste & Ventilation
iv) CI Pipes for rain water
v) AC Pipes for rain water
vi) R.C.C Pipes
18.1.1 High density PVC pipes and fittings
I - 41
135 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
This shall conform to IS : 4984-1987 and IS : 8008 (Part 1 to 7)-1976

unless otherwise specified.
18.2 PVC Waste Pipe
This shall conform to IS : 4985-1988 unless otherwise specified.
18.3 Stoneware Pipes & Fittings
All stoneware pipes, bends, gully traps and sewer traps shall be of the
best salt glazed variety inside and outside, hard burnt dark grey colour,
perfectly sound, free from fire cracks and imperfection of glaze, truly
circular in cross section, perfectly straight, of standard nominal length
and depth of socket and barrel. These shall be of approved manu-
facture and shall comply with the requirement of IS: 651-1992. These
pipes shall be of grade AA unless otherwise specified.
18.4 Sand Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings conforming to IS : 1729-1979
All soil waste and vent pipes and fittings used in the work shall be cast
iron and shall conform to IS: 1729-1979. The pipes shall have spigot
and socket ends, with bead on spigot end and shall be with or without
ears. The pipes shall be free from cracks and other flaws. The interior
of the pipe and fittings shall be clean, smooth painted inside and
outside with DR Angas smiths solution or other approved anti-corrosive
paint.
The standard weights and thickness of pipe shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 1729-1979. The tolerance on wall thickness and
weight shall be minus 15 percent and minus 10 percent respectively.
Pipes weighing more than the nominal weight given below may be
accepted provided they comply in every other respect.
Nominal size Weight per piece in Kg. excluding ears

Overall length
1500 mm 1800 mm 2000 mm
50 9.56 11.41 12.65
75 13.83 16.52 18.37
100 18.14 21.67 24.15
150 26.70 31.92 35.66
I - 42
136 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Specials and Fittings shall include bends, offsets, branches of various

types, junctions etc., as required for the work which shall be provided
according to drawings and directions of the Engineer. B.M. trap shall
have water seal as per I.S. provisions.
The specials and fittings shall be provided with access doors where so
specified or directed by the Engineer. The access door fittings shall be
of proper design so as not to form cavities in which the filth may
accumulate. Doors shall be provided with 3 mm thick rubber insertion
packing, and when closed and bolted they shall be water tight. The
access doors shall have MS studs and bolts or screws or bolts and
nuts.
18.5 Cast Iron Pipes & A.C. pipes : Rainwater pipe
18.5.1 Pipes shall be of approved manufacture, true, smooth and cylindrical,

their inner and outer surfaces being as nearly as practicable concentric
and shall conform to IS : 1230-1979. These shall be sound and uniform
casting, free from laps, pin holes or other imperfections and shall be
neatly finished inside and outside. The ends of pipes shall be
reasonably square to their axis.
18.5.2 Dimensions
CI rain water pipes shall be of the dia specified in the description of the
item and shall be in full lengths of 1.8 metres including socket ends of
the pipes, unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings.
The pipe lengths shall in each case be with sockets. The pipes shall be
supplied without ears unless otherwise specifically mentioned.
The pipes supplied shall be factory painted with a tar based

composition both inside and outside which shall be smooth and
tenacious unless specified otherwise.
Every pipe shall ring clearly when struck all over with a light hand
hammer. When shorter pipes are cut from full lengths they shall be cut
with a hacksaw.
Where the pipes are to be embedded in masonry they shall be of Class

of pipes as are used for soil and vent pipes. For the weights of different
sizes of these pipes, the specifications under SCI and vent pipes may
be referred to.
I - 43
137 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
18.5.3 A.C. pipes and fittings the pipes and fittings shall be of approved
manufacture and shall conform to IS:1626. These shall be
homogeneous and free from cracks and other defects. The pipes shall
be straight, smooth and regular in thickness.
The diameter of the pipe shall be as specified. The fittings like heads,
bends of different degrees, offsets of different projections, shoes and
junctions shall be of the type, diameter and size as required for the
work. The pipes shall be used in full lengths as far as possible.
18.6 Sanitary appliances
Sanitary appliances like I.W.C/E.W.C pans, wash basin, urinals and

sinks etc. shall be made of vitreous china or fire clay as specified.
These shall be of Hindustan Sanitary ware or Parry ware make unless
otherwise specified and to be approved by the Engineer. These shall
conform to A class quality of IS : 2566 (Part 1 to 15)-1972 to 1985 and
IS : 771 (Part 1 to 15) –1979 & 1985 respectively.
18.6.1 European Pattern W.C.
Unless otherwise specified, these shall comprise of :
a) White 'glazed earthenware wash down closet set with 'S' or 'P'
trap of standard size.
b) 'Duco' spray painted 12.5 litres mosquito proof low level M.S or
C.I flushing cistern with valveless siphon, 15 mm ball cock, C.P.
brass unions & couplings for the 32 mm dia flush pipe, 20 mm
dia overflow PVC pipe with mosquito proof cover etc.
c) 'Duco' spray painted 1 1/4" (32 mm) dia G.I. telescopic flush
pipe with buffer clamp, holder bat clamp and 38mm dia PVC
pipe or 35/40mm O.D. high density polythene flush pipe with
buffer clamp, holder bat clamp.
d) Approved quality solid plastic W.C. seat and cover, bar hinges,
screws bolt, rubber buffers conforming to IS : 2548 (Part 1&2)-
1983.
e) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings at both ends

and 15 mm brass CP cock.
I - 44
138 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
f) Hard wood wooden blocks or other suitable fixing arrangement

with screws and detofix for fixing WC in floor and putty joint with
flush pipe and soil pipe.
18.6.2 Indian Pattern W.C.
Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of :-
a) White glazed earthenware WC pan back entry type.
b) White glazed earthenware 'P' or 'S' trap with or without vent.
c) 12.5 litres approved make mosquito proof M.S.high level

flushing cistern with valveless siphon, 15 mm ball cock,
galvanised iron chain handle, cast iron brackets with wall plugs,
brass unions and couplings for flush pipe, 20 mm dia overflow
PVC pipe with mosquito proof cover etc.,
d) 32 mm dia GI telescopic or 35/40 mm O.D high density PVC

flush pipe with holder bat clamps.
e) One pair of white glazed earthen ware foot rest set in cement
mortar 1:3.
f) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings at both ends

and 15 mm brass stop cock.
18.7 Wash Hand basin
Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of :-
a) White glazed earthenware basin with 2 nos. Concealed Cast

Iron Brackets with wall plugs.
b) 1 no. 15 mm C.P. brass pillar tap.
c) 32 mm C.P. brass waste fitting, C.P. brass chain and rubber

plug.
d) 32 mm PVC waste pipe with brass couplings/32 mm C.P. bottle

trap.
I - 45
139 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
e) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings and 15 mm

brass stop cock.
18.8 Flat Back Lipped Urinal
Unless otherwise specified these shall comprise of:-
a) White glazed earthenware urinal basin back type.
b) CI/M.S mosquito proof high level automatic flushing cistern of

capacity as specified in the Schedule of Quantities with all
accessories, cast iron brackets with wall plugs, brass unions and
coupling for flush pipe, 20 mm dia overflow pipe with mosquito
proof cover.
c) 25 mm dia CP brass flush pipe and spreaders with wall clips and
brackets.
d) 15 mm PVC connection pipe with brass couplings joint at both

ends and 15 mm brass stop cock.
e) 32 mm C.P. brass outlets complete with PVC waste.
18.9 Mirror Frames
Mirror frame where specified shall be of fibre glass of approved shape,

size, colour and make.
18.9.1 Mirror shall be of superior glass with edges rounded off or leveled as
specified. It shall be free from flaws, specks or bubble and its thickness
shall not be less than 5.0 mm. The glass for the mirror shall be
uniformly silver plated at the back and shall be free from silvering
defects. Silvering shall have a protective uniform covering of red lead
paint.
18.10 Toilet Shelf
18.10.1 Glass shelf unit shall consist of an assembly of glass shelf, anodised
aluminium / CP brass guard rail and supporting brackets. The shelf
shall be of glass of best quality with edges rounded off and shall be
free from flaws, specks, bubbles and of thickness not less than 5.0
I - 46
140 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
mm. The shelf shall have guard rail, resting on rubber washers on
glass plate.
18.10.2 Ceramics shelf shall be of shape, size and design as specified in the
Schedule of Items.
18.11 Towel Rail
Towel rail shall be of CP brass / anodised aluminium with two brackets

of same material, diameter and length as specified.
18.12 Soap Container
Soap container shall be of C.P brass, PVC with cp brass brackets of

approved make and design.
18.13 CP Flush Valves for EWC
The CP flush valve for EWC shall be of "Jaquar" brand of Jaquar &
Co., 'ACCO' brand of Asia Continental Metallwaren Fabric or equivalent
quality.
18.14 CP Flush Valve for Urinals
CP flush valve for urinal shall be of "Jaquar" brand of Jaquar & Co.,
'ACCO' brand of Asian Continental Metallwaren Fabric or of equivalent
quality.
18.15 Gully Trap
Each gully trap shall have one C.I. grating 150 mm x 150 mm and one
water tight pre-cast R.C. cover 300 x 300 x 40 mm thick with 1:1 1/2:3
mix concrete (one cement: one and half sand : 3 stone chips 20 mm
down) including neat cement finish.
18.16 CI Manhole Covers & Frames
These shall be of light or medium duty (LD or MD) as specified in

Schedule of Items and of cast iron with raised chequered design, lifting
key and key hole and shall be coated with black bituminous base
material,. Light duty covers and frames shall be of either rectangular
type, single seal, pattern 1 and 2 having minimum weight of cover and
frame 38 Kg and 25 Kg. respectively or with double seal, minimum
I - 47
141 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
weight of cover and frame being 52 Kg. These may be of square type
also. Single seal with clear openings of 455 and 610 mm with minimum
weight of cover and frame being 20 Kg and 38 Kg respectively, double
seal of same openings shall have minimum Wt. of cover and frame 30
Kg and 55 Kg respectively. Medium duty covers and frames shall be
either of circular type with 500 and 560 mm clear openings and
minimum Wt. of cover and frame 116 Kg and 128 Kg respectively or of
rectangular type with minimum Wt. of cover and frame 144 Kg.
The C.I. manhole covers and frames shall conform to IS : 1726-1991.
18.17 Flushing Cisterns
Manually operated high level and low level flushing cisterns are of 5
litre and 10 litre capacities, both single flush and dual flush type. The
cisterns shall conform to IS : 774-1984 and be made of Cast Iron,
Vitreous China or enamelled pressed steel. The cisterns shall be
mosquito-proof.
The thickness of the body including cover shall be not less than 5 mm
for Cast Iron and 6 mm for Vitreous China Cisterns. Steel and lead
flush pipe shall have internal diameter of 32 plus or minus 1 mm for
high level cisterns and 38 plus or minus 1mm for low level cisterns. For
high density polyethlyne and unplasticised PVC pipes the outside
diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm. In case of PVC plumbing pipes
the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40mm for high level and
50mm for low level cisterns. Steel flush pipes shall be hot dip
galvanized electroplated or vitreous enameled.
The flush pipe shall be securely connected to the cistern outlet and
made airtight by means of a coupling net. Float valve shall conform to
IS : 1703-1977 or IS : 12234-1988. Polyethylene float valve shall
conform to IS : 9762-1981.
Cast Iron Cisterns shall be painted and finished in accordance with

recommendation made in IS : 1477 (Part 1&2)-1971 or shall have a
coating of enamel.
In general, Materials Construction and operational and performance

requirements shall be as specified in para 3, 4 and 6 of IS : 774-1984.
18.18 Plastic Seats & Covers for Water Closets

I - 48
142 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
These shall conform to IS : 2548 (Part 1&2)-1983 and shall be either of

thermo-set or of thermo-plastic quality.
Thermo-set Seats and Covers are moulded from phenolic plastics

(Type A) or Urea Formaldehyde (Type B). Thermo-plastic Seats and
Covers are also of Type A, moulded from Polystyrene or Type B,
moulded from Polyprophlene.
Underside of the seats may be either flat or recessed and colour shall
be as agreed. Table Dimesions of the seats and covers shall be as per
Table-I of the Code (both Part 1&2). Hinging device may be either of
the following materials :
i) Bronze or Brass with Nickel Chromium Plating

ii) Mild Steel with Nickel Chromium Plating
iii) Aluminium alloy with anodic coating
iv) Suitable plastic with reinforcement.
19.0 WATER SUPPLY & PLUMBING (INTERNAL)
19.1 General
This section deals with the specification of material for pipes, fittings,
fixtures etc., to be used in water supply works.
All materials, pipes, fittings, fixtures to be used in the works shall be of

the best quality and of the class specified in various clauses herein
under. Where specified these shall be of specific manufacture and
quality and shall be procured from the manufacturer or their accredited
stockist and be marked with manufacturers name and trade marks. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer samples of all pipes, fittings,
fixtures for approval before being used in the works. Such approved
samples shall be retained by the Engineer till completion of works.
Pipes and pipe fittings may be of any or combination of following types:
i) Wrought iron galvanised pipe

ii) PVC pipes
iii) Cast iron pipes
I - 49
143 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
iv) Steel pipes coated with bitumen composition inside and

galvanised outside.
v) Reinforced concrete pipes
vi) Asbestos cement pipes
vii) Pre-stressed concrete pipes
viii) Lead pipe (not to be used for potable water)
19.2 Galvanised Iron Pipes and Fittings
Generally pipes for installations in buildings shall be medium quality

malleable steel galvanised pipe 'B' class for cold water supply and 'C'
class for hot water supply, having threaded ends with socket at one
end.
The details of standard medium quality "B" class pipes and sockets
regarding nominal bore thickness and weight in kg/m are given below:-
Pipe Dia Dimension of Pipe Thick Dimension of ordinary Wt. of

(Nominal -- socket Pipe
Bore) Max. (outside Min. ness Outside dia Min. plain
dia) (approx.) length end
mm mm mm mm mm mm Kg/m
15 21.8 21.0 2.65 26.90 34 1.21
20 27.3 26.5 2.65 33.70 36 1.57
25 34.2 33.5 3.25 42.00 43 2.42
32 42.9 42.0 3.25 51.00 48 3.11
40 48.8 47.9 3.25 57.00 48 3.59
50 60.8 59.7 3.65 70.00 56 5.07
65 76.6 75.3 3.65 88.00 65 6.49
80 89.5 88.0 4.05 101.60 71 8.43
Note :- Manufacturing tolerances shall be permitted on tubes and sockets in

addition to above as per IS : 1239 (Part 1&2) 1990 to 1992.
I - 50
144 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The galvanised iron pipes shall be of approved make and conform to

IS:1239 (Part 1&2) 1990 to 1992 and of tested quality. The GI pipes
shall be of threaded ends with a socket at one end only. The fittings for
GI pipes shall be either galvanised wrought iron or galvanised
malleable iron.
19.3 R.C.C, Asbestos, Prestressed Pipes and Fittings
These shall be of approved manufacture and quality and shall conform

to IS : 458 1988, IS : 1592 1989, IS : 9627 1988 & IS : 784 1978
respectively.
19.4 Cast Iron Pipes and Fittings
The cast iron pipes shall be of approved manufacture and quality and
shall conform to IS: 1536 1989 "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) iron
pressure pipe and/or IS : 1537 1976". Vertically Cast Iron pressure
pipe for water, gas and sewage. CI fittings shall conform to IS : 1538
(Part 1 to 23) 1976.
19.5 Steel Pipes
This shall conform to IS: 1239 (Part 1&2) 1990 to 1992) and IS : 3589-
1991. Steel pipes shall be coated with bituminous composition inside
and galvanised outside.
19.6 Bib Tap and Stop Tap
Bib tap and stop tap for water services shall be of brass screw down
type and shall conform to IS: 781. Minimum finished weight of bib and
stop taps shall be as given below:
No. of size Bib taps Stop tap

(mm) (kg) (kg)
10 0.30 0.35
15 0.40 0.40
20 0.75 0.75
25 1.25 1.30
32 - 1.80
I - 51
145 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
40 - 2.25
50 - 3.85
The taps shall be tested under internal hydraulic pressure of at least 20

kgf/cm2 and maintained at the pressure for a period of at least two
minutes during which period it shall neither leak nor sweat.
19.7 Valves
Unless otherwise mentioned in the Schedule of Quantities these shall

be copper alloy gate, globe and check valve of nominal sizes 8 to
100mm and shall conform to IS : 778 1984. Valves shall be of class 1
and class 2, suitable upto a temp. of 45 degree C and can sustain non
shock working pressure upto 1.0 and 1.6 MPA respectively. They shall
have screwed or flanged ends. All the metal parts shall be of
brass/brass alloy except hand wheel of Cast Iron or other approved
quality.
19.8 Shower Rose
The shower rose shall be of heavy quality chromium plated brass with
flat bottom, of diameter 100 mm or as specified with uniform
perforations.
19.9 Storage Tank
Storage tank shall be either pressed steel, Galvanised iron, R.C.C or

PVC of specified sizes, capacities, make, manufacture as specified in
Schedule of Items. It shall have facilities for connecting inlet, outlet
overflow and washout pipes and a top cover. Where tanks are to be
fabricated by the Contractor the fabrication/R.C.C detailed drawings
shall be got approved by Engineer.
19.10 Miscellaneous items
19.10.1 Half round channel
This shall be made of vitreous china channel with or without outlet/stop

end as specified in Schedule of Items and shall be of approved
manufacture.
I - 52
146 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
19.10.2 Urinal partition
This shall be made of vitreous china or R.C.C. with mosaic finish or

marble as specified and shall be of approved make and quality.

Unless otherwise specified CI pipe and specials, caulking lead, SW pipe,
RCC pipe shall conform to the following.
20.1 C.I. Pipes
i) C.I. pipe shall conform to IS : 1536 - 1989 or/and IS : 1537 –

1976 of class as specified in Schedule of Items.
ii) C.I. pipe fittings shall conform to IS : 1538 (Part 1 to 23) -1976
as specified in Schedule of Items.
iii) Bolts and nuts shall be hexagonal bolts and nuts conforming to
IS : 1363 (Part 1 to 3) - 1992.
20.2 Washers
Spring washers conforming to IS : 3063 - 1972 shall be used near the

pumps to take care of vibration. In other places plain washers
conforming to IS : 2016 - 1967 shall be used.
20.3 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be reinforced rubber sheet or compressed fibre board

conforming to IS : 638 - 1979 of thickness between 1.5mm to 3mm or as
specified.
20.4 Caulking Lead
Lead for the spigot and socket joints shall conform to IS : 782 - 1978.
20.5 Salt Glazed Stone Ware Pipes
Salt glazed stone-ware pipes used shall conform to IS : 651 - 1992 and
shall be laid as per IS : 4127 - 1983. The pipes shall be of grade AA
unless otherwise specified.
I - 53
147 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
20.6 Steel Pipes
Steel pipes and fittings used for encasing shall conform to IS : 1239
(Part 1&2) - 1990 to 1992 medium Class upto 150 mm dia and as per
IS : 3589 - 1991 for pipes of dia 200 mm and above. For pies of dia
200 mm and above fittings, if required shall be fabricated from pipes
itself.
20.7 Cast Iron Manhole Covers & Frames
These shall be of medium or heavy duty (M.D. or H.D.) as specified in

Schedule of Item and of Cast Iron with raised chequered design, lifting
key and key hole and shall be coated with black bituminous base
material. Medium duty covers and frames shall be either of circular type
with 500 mm clear opening and minimum weight of cover and frame 116
Kg and 128 Kg respectively or of rectangular type with minimum weight
of cover and frame 144 Kg.
Heavy duty covers and frames shall be either of circular type with clear
openings of 500 and 560 mm and 170 and 208 Kg weight respectively or
of double triangular type with clear openings of 500 and 560 mm and
229 and 255 Kg weight respectively.
The CI manhole cover and frames shall conform to IS : 1726 - 1991.
21.0 ROAD
21.1 General
Roads shall be understood to include road bed, the wearing surface,

berms, foot-paths, kerbs, culverts and bridges.
21.2 Soling Stones
Material for soling shall be natural stone boulders or crushed blast

furnace slab. Stones for soling shall be of height equal to thickness of the
soling with tolerance of plus or minus 25mm and shall not have a base
area of less than 250 sq.cm. nor more than 500 sq.cm. and the smallest
dimension of any stone shall not be less than half the largest dimension.
Stones shall be tough, angular, durable and generally free from flat,
elongated, soft and disintegrated particles. They shall also be free from
dirt or other objectionable matter and be obtained from quarries
I - 54
148 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Crushed slag obtained from air-cooled blast furnaces slag shall be

angular, of reasonably uniform quality and density and generally be free
from any thin, elongated, and soft pieces, dirt or other objection able
matter. The density of slag should not be less than 1.12 gm/cc and
glassy material shall not exceed 20%. Water absorption when
determined in accordance with IS:2386 (Part-III) - 1963. "Methods of
Tests for Aggregates for Concrete : Specific Gravity, Density Voids,
Absorption and Bulking", shall not exceed 10%.
21.3 Coarse Aggregate for Water Bound Macadam
Coarse aggregate for water bound macadam shall be natural gravel,

crushed stone obtained from approved quarries or crushed blast furnace
slag. Crushed stone shall be hard, durable, tough and of uniform quality,
generally free from flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated particles. It
shall have sharp edges and also not have excess of dirt and other
objectionable matter. When tested as per IS: 2386 (Part-IV) - 1963 for
Los Angeles Abrasion Value or Aggregate Impact Value, the limiting
values shall be 50% and 40% respectively for base course and 40% and
30% respectively for surfacing course. The flakiness index shall not
exceed 15% when tested in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-I)-1963
"Methods of Test for Aggregates for Concrete : Particle size and Shape".
Crushed slag aggregates shall meet the requirements given for soling
stones from blast furnace slag.
Size and grading requirements of coarse aggregates shall be as

specified in Table-2 of IRC : 19 - 1981, "Standard Specification and
Code of Practice for Water Bound Macadam". The grading number of
the table shall correspond to the following layer thicknesses :
Grading Number Size Range Layer Thickness
1 90 mm to 40 mm More than 90 mm
2. 63 mm to 40 mm 90 mm to 75 mm
3. 50 mm to 20 mm 75 mm to 50 mm
21.4 Screenings
Screenings used for filling voids in coarse aggregates for water bound
macadam shall generally be of the same material as the coarse
I - 55
149 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
aggregate. Non-plastic materials such as Kankar nodules, moorum or

gravel (other than river bore rounded aggregates) may be used, provided
that the liquid limit and plasticity index are below 20 and 6 respectively.
The fraction passing 75 microns sieve shall not exceed 10%. Size and
grading of screenings shall be as specified in Table-3 of IRC-19 - 1981.
Type-A screening shall be used for grade number 1 coarse aggregate.
Type-B screenings shall be used for grade number 3. Either Type-A or
Type-B screenings may be used for grade number 2.
21.5 Stone Chips for Bituminous Surfacing
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag or

crushed gravel (Shingle) retained on 2.36 mm sieve. The aggregates
shall be clean, strong, durable and fairly cubical, free from disintegrated
pieces, organic and other objectionable matter. The aggregates shall
preferably by hydrophobic and of low porosity. The mechanical
properties and grading shall be in accordance with IRC-29 - 1988
"Tentative Specifications for 4 cm Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course",
having aggregate impact value 30%, Flakiness Index 25% and graded
between 20mm and 2.36 mm.
21.6 Sand
Sand for use as fine aggregate in bituminous surfacing shall consist of

crushed screenings, natural sand or a mixture of both, passing a
2.36mm sieve and retained on 75 micron sieve. It shall be clean, hard,
durable, uncoated and dry, free from injurious, soft or flaky pieces and
organic deleterious substances.
21.7 Binder
Binding material for water bound macadam shall consist of fine grained
material such as stone dust, kankar modules or moorum. The plasticity
index shall be between 4 to 9 when water bound macadam is to be used
as surface course and upto 6 when used as sub/base or base course.
21.7.1 Paving Bitumen
It shall conform to IS : 73 - 1992 and shall be of the specified type and

grade. The material shall be homogeneous and shall not foam when
heated to 175 degree C. Various properties like specific gravity, flash
point, softening point, penetration etc. shall be as given in the above
code.
I - 56
150 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
21.7.2 Bitumen Cut Back
Bitumen cut-back shall conform to specification given in IS : 217 - 1988.

It shall be of three types, Rapid Curing (RC), Medium Curing (MC) and
Slow Curing (SC). These shall comply with the requirements specified in
Table - 1, 2 and 3 respectively of the above code.
The above three types of cutback bitumens shall be classified into

different grades on the basis of Kinematic viscosity. Rapid curing type
shall be used with aggregates containing practically no fine aggregates
passing through 2.36 mm sieve. Medium curing bitumen shall be used
with aggregates containing less than 20 per cent of fine aggregates
passing through 2.36 mm sieve. Slow curing type shall be used with
aggregates containing more than 20 per cent of fine aggregate passing
through 2.36 mm sieve.
Medium curing bitumen of 30 grae i.e. MC 30 shall be used as primer.

Manufacturer shall indicate source and type of the bitumen.
21.8 Kerbs
Kerbs may be of stone, concrete or brick as may be shown in drawing or

otherwise directed by Engineer.
21.8.1 Stone kerbs
Stones shall conform to the dimensions and shapes given in drawing.
Exposed faces shall be dressed to lines.
21.8.2 Concrete kerbs
Shape and dimension shall conform to the drawing. They shall be pre-
cast and the road side top corner shall be given a chamfer.
21.9 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire for Fencing
These shall be of two types A&B. In both types Barbs shall have 4 points
formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns. In type A (Iowa type)
twisting is done around both line wings and in type B (Glidden type)
around one line wire, in both cases making altogether four complete
turns. It shall conform to IS : 278 - 1978 and shall have the diameter of
I - 57
151 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
line and point wire as described in schedule of item. Galvanized mild

steel wire shall conform to IS : 280 - 1978.
Line and point wire shall be circular in section, free from scales and shall
be uniformly galvanized. Line wire shall be in continuous length and shall
not contain any welds other than those in rod before it is drawn.
21.10 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fabric
It will conform to IS : 2721 - 1979. It shall be of width, mesh and wire dia
as per description of Item. For chain link fabric having width upto 2.00 M,
of all mesh sizes, two line wires shall be provided. Whereas for width of
2.40 M and mesh size exceeding 50mm three line wires shall be
provided. These shall be provided at top and bottom of the fabric, but
wherever three line wires have been specified, these shall be provided at
top, bottom and middle of fabric.
The mesh wire and line wire of the fabric shall be manufactured from
Galvanised steel conforming to IS : 280 - 1978. It will have zinc coating
of type medium as given in IS : 4826 - 1979. " Specification for Hot
dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires". Unless otherwise
mentioned in the description of item fabric with both ends twisted shall be
used.
The galvanised steel pipe posts shall consists of 80 mm and 50 mm

nominal diameter. The pipe posts shall conform to IS : 1161 and shall be
of medium grade and galvanised.
Angle iron post and strut shall be as specified in Clause3.3 Part I of

specification. Concertina Coil fencing shall be dia 600 mm (having 50
nos. round per 6 metre length), spring core(2.5mm thick) wire of high
tensile strength of 165 kg/sq.mm with tape(0.52 mm thick) and weight
43.478 gm/metre.
22.0 LIST OF MATERIALS OF APPROVED BRAND AND/OR

MANUFACTURE
I - 58
152 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Unless otherwise specifically mentioned in the Schedule of Items,

Contractor has to use materials as listed below, of only these brand
names/Company's names, which are mentioned in the approved list for
civil, water supply and sanitary items thereon.
Sl Items/Name of Makes / Brands / Manufacturers

No Products
1. Reinforcement Steel TATA,SAIL,RINL,IISCO,RATHI

2. Cement Ambuja,ACC,JK,Grasim,Ultratech,Birla,L&T,Cement
Corporation of India,Maihar
3. Structural Steel TATA,SAIL,RINL,IISCO,ESSAR, ISPAT
4. Pre- engineered Kirby Building system India ltd ,Interach Building
building (PEB) firms Product limited, Tata blue scope steel ,Lloyd Insulation
India ltd, Everest Industries. Ltd.
Modern Prefab System Pvt Ltd,Aster Building Solution
Pvt.Ltd, Octamec Engineering Ltd,Jindal Mectec Pvt
Ltd,Fedders Lioyd Corporation Ltd.
5. Structural Steel Tubes TATA, JINDAL , SURYA , SWASTIK
ISI Marked
6. (a) Zincalume (a)Tata Blue scope, Dongbu Steel ,Union Steel, JSW
colour coated STEEL Ltd.
steel
sheet(COIL) Kirby Building system India ltd ,Interach Building
(b) Profile of Product limited, Tata blue scope steel ,Lloyd Insulation
Sheet(as per India ltd, Everest Industries. Ltd.
tender Modern Prefab System Pvt Ltd,Aster Building Solution
specification) Pvt.Ltd, Octamec Engineering Ltd,Jindal Mectec Pvt
Ltd,Fedders Lioyd Corporation Ltd
7. Polycarbonate Sheet Sabic Innovative Plastic , Everest
8. Mineral wool for Rock wool (india) Ltd. Minwool Rock Fibres Ltd., Lloyd
thermal insulation of Insulation,
ceilings
( Under deck insulation
)
9. Rolling shutters(ISI Swastic, Hercules, Shubdwar, M/s Bharat Rolling
marked) Shutters Industries Agra, Bengal Rolling Shutter
Rama Rolling Shutter Works, Gandhi Entrance
Automations Private Limited
10. Wind driven air Apurva Enterprises (Mumbai),
Ventilators SVS Wind Driven Turbo Ventilator(Ahmadnagar),Real
Green Engineers Pvt.Ltd. Bangalore;Sun Green
Ventilation system Pvt.Ltd. Mylapore-Chennai,Citadel
I - 59
153 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Mumbai, Multi colour, Anchit Ispat Pvt Ltd.

(Faridabad),
11. Synthetic Enamel Paint ICI Paint (Dulux), Asian Paint (Apcolite), Berger Paints
(1st quality only) (Luxol).
Goodlass Nerolac Paints (Nerolac), Jenson &
Nicholson Paints Ltd (Borolac), Shalimar, Garware &
Goodlass
12. G.I SHEET ESSAR,JSW,,SAIL
13. Sheeting Screw Corroshield, Buildex,
14. Chemical for DE- NOCIL Bombay, Pest Control of India, Trishul
Antitermite treatment
15. Factory made Panelled M/s Goel Brothers Raipur New Industrial Area Raipur
Door shutter (CG)
M/s Hindustan Housing factory Ltd- New Delhi
M/s Delhi Construction Eqpt Sadar Bazar Delhi
M/s Joinery manufacturing Co Calcutta
M/s Goyal Industries Faridabad
M/s Surbhi Metal (India) Ltd Jodhpur
M/s Jain wood Industries Sonipat/Rohini Delhi (HO)
M/s Poineer Timber Products, Chandigarh
16. Flush doors IS-2191, M/s Mysore Wood Products
2202 M/s Laxmi Doors, Faizabad Road, Chinhat, Lucknow
M/s Merino flush doors
M/s Poineer Timber Products, Chandigarh, M/S Goyal
Industries Faridabad
M/s National
M/s Century Plyboards (i) Limited.
17. Fly proof doors (Made M/S Laxmi Doors, Faizabad Road, Chinhat, Lucknow,
out of solid block Northern doors Kanpur
marine grade)
18. Natural Fibre Thermo Durosam
Composite
door/window shutter &
frames, roofing sheets
etc
19. PVC Panel Door ( Rajshri Plastiwood Limited, Sintex, Hindopan, Marino
Solid Core )
20. Pressed steel door M/s SAIL,
frames/ cupboard and M/s TATA
window frames
(manufacturers)
21. Pressed steel door M/s Loyal safe works Mayapuri, N/Delhi
I - 60
154 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
frames/ cupboard and M/s Multiwyn Industrial Corpn Calcutta

window frames M/s Metal Window Corpn N/Delhi
(fabricators) M/s Chhabra Steel Udyog, 260 Sadar Bazar, Meerut
Cantt
M/s Delite safe works, Rani Jhansi Road, N/Delhi
M/s Ishwar Industries, 175/A Bombay Bazar, Meerut
Cantt
M/s Chandni Industries, J-142, Patel Nagar 1st,
Ghaziabad.
22. Steel Windows, M/S Multiwyn Industrial Corpn Calcutta
Ventilators(as per IS- M/S Metal Window Corp N/ Delhi
1038 of 1983) & Govind Enterprises, Delhi
frames pressed steel M/S Chhabra Steel Udyog 260, Sadar Bazar, Meerut
door/window Cantt, Agent steel MFG Pvt Ltd, Ahmedabad, Godrej,
M/S Chandni Industries, J-142, Patel Nagar 1st,
Ghaziabad
23. AI Section for AI Door/ Hindalco, Indal, Ajit India, Jindal
Window/ Partitions
24. AluminumI Door/ M/s Ahlcon
Window/ Glazing M/s Alumilite Pvt Ltd,
Fabricated and M/s Ajit India Pvt Ltd,
Anodized M/s Ramniklal S Raste Agra, Argent Industries,
M/s Aluminium Tech Industries, I-2249 DSIDC Narela,
Delhi,
M/s VR Associates, GH-14/242 Paschim Vihar, Delhi
25. Aluminium door and M/s Elite Enterprises C/6 Shalimar Hardware 133,
windows Fittings Jarg Mahal, Dhobitalao Mumbai 400002.
M/s Mohan Metal Industries 178/2-A, Bhole Nath
Nagar, Shahadara, Delhi 110032.
Mepro, Argent New Delhi, Classic, New Delhi.
Jindal,
Argent New Delhi,
Golden Industries Pvt. Ltd.
ECIE
26. Automatic Glass Door Ditec (Gandhi)
27. Aluminium Grill Alu Grill, Arihant Aluminium Corporation, Decogrille
28. Door Closer Everite, Golden, Gandhi
29. Floor Spring Prabhat,Everite
30. Builders Hardware M/s Golden Industries Pvt. Ltd., Everite, Solo,
Hardwyn
31. Plywood for general National Plywood Inds Pvt Ltd, S Fancy lane, 8th floor
purpose Calcutta-700001,
(IS-303) Merino Plywood, Archid Ply, Kitply,Swastik,Universal
I - 61
155 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
32. Pre laminated Particle Kitply, Bhutan board, Ecoboard, Novapan, Archid ply,
board Merinova, Merino
33. Laminated Sheets Formica, Merino Lam, Greenlam, National
34. Modular Partitions Godrej, Blowplast
35. False Ceiling (Mineral Armstrong, , Daiken, Luxalon, Llyods,
Fibre Board) Gypboard,Trac,Aerolite
36. False Ceiling (POP/ Gypboard, Anchor ceiling tiles, LA
Gypsum Board)
37. Aluminium False Lloyds,Armstrong,Luxlon,Trac
Ceiling
38. Flooring Tiles ( Mosaic M/S Mehtab Tiles, NITCO, Royal Tiles, Gem Tiles,
/ Terrazzo / PCC ) Hindustan Tiles, M/S National Tiles & Industries, Ultra
(1st quality only) Tiles
39. Glazed Ceramic Tiles, Kajaria, Somany, NITCO. Murudeshwar Ceramic Ltd (
Non-Skid (Floor/Wall), Navin Diamond tile ), Johnson ( Marbonite ), Marbito,
(1st quality only) Somany, Orient, Asian
40. Vitrified/ Designer Asian, Marbonite (Johnson), Kerrogres (Kajaria),
Vitrified Tiles NITCO, Orient
(1st quality only)
41. PVC Tiles/Flooring (IS Marblex Tiles, Krishna Tiles, Polyfin, Armstrong,
3461) Wonder floor.
(1st quality only)
42. False Flooring Godrej or equivalent
43. Glass Mosaic Tiles Paladio, Coral, Accura, Bisazza, Italia, Mridul.
(1st quality only)
44. Designer Paver Tiles/ Pavit, Ultra, Hindustan, Eurocon, Vyara, National
Interlocking tiles ISI Tiles, Gem, Unistone, Konkrete, Unitile
marked/ Grass-jointed
Tiles
(1st quality only)
45. Glass reinforced Paver Unistone or equivalent
block
46. Wall care Putty for Birla Wall care putty, Berger, Jenson & Nicholson, JK
Base preparation White
(1st quality only)
47. White Cement Birla, JK
(1st quality only)
48. Cement based Paints Super Snowcem, Duracem, Super Acrocem.
(1st quality only)
49. Dry Distemper / Oil Goodlass Nerolac Paint, Shalimar Paint, Jenson &
bound Distemper Nicholson, Asian Paint, Berger. ICI Dulux
I - 62
156 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(1st quality only)

50. Acrylic Washable Asian, Berger, ICI Dulux, Jenson & Nicholson,
Distemper Nerolac,Shalimar,Garware & Goodlass
(1st quality only)
51. Plastic Emulsion Paint Asian, Berger, ICI, Nerolac, Jenson & Nicholson,
(1st quality only) Shalimar,Garware & Goodlass
52. Exterior Acrylic ICI (Weathercoat), Excel (Nerolac), Apex (Asian),
Emulsion Berger, Jenson & Nicholson, Shalimar,Garware &
(1st quality only) Goodlass
53. Polymer based Paint STP,CICO
54. Textured Paint / Wall Unitile, Heritage, Spectrum, Iokos, Acropaints, Asian
Tile
(1st quality only)
55. Flexible board for STP or equivalent
Expansion joint
56. Grout Shrinkomp,Fosroc,Fairmate
57. Integral water proofing STP, Pidilite, Fosroc, CICO, Sika.
compound
58. Concrete Admixture Pidilite, Fosroc, CICO, Sika.
59. Water proofing for Acrocrete & Acrocote, CICO, Fosroc, STP
cementitions surface
IS-2645
60. Bituminous Product M/s Faridabad Spinning & Woolen Mills Pvt Ltd, 837,
SP Mukherjee Marg Delhi,
M/s STP Ltd (Formerly Shalimar Tar Products)
M/s Bitufelt Pvt Ltd 123/377 Fazalm Ganj Kanpur
208012, Texas, Texas India Ltd, Multiplas, IWL
Chennai
61. Hardeners Ironite, Ferrok, Hardonate
62. Construction Choksey, CICO, Forsroc, Sika
Chemicals
63. Non Metalic Surface CICO, Fosroc, STP, Sika
Hardners
64. Corrugated, Semi M/s Everest Bldg Products Ltd Jata Sankar Bosa Marg
Corrugated & AC Muland (west) Bombay 400080,
Sheets (IS-459- M/s Ramco AC Sheets “SWASTIK”,
1970,IS-2098) M/s Eternit Everest Ltd, UP Asbestos Ltd
65. GI Sheet ISI Marked Multicolor, TATA, Bluescope, JSW, Colour Plus,
Interarch, Lloyds, Jindal, Everest
66. Sheet Glass /Structural Hindustan Pilkington Glass Works, Saint Gobain, Modi
Glazing Float, Triveni Float Glass, ASI, Fresca, Emirates.
I - 63
157 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
67. Multiell / Multiwall M/s Coxwell Domes Engineering , Delhi,

Polycorbonate Panel M/s Lexan , M/s Gallina India Pvt. Ltd.
M/s Vijaynath Interiors & exteriors products
68. Stainless Steel Jindal
Cladding
69. Punch Tape Global Technocrat, S.G.Engineers Delhi
Concertina Coil
70. Punch Tape In Plastic Global Technocrat, S.G.Engineers Delhi
Spool
71. Stainless Steel Railing Jindal

72. FRP/ HDPE Garbage Sintex, Swift, Nutech, Sheetal
Bins
73. Thermoplastic Road Shalimark (STP)
Marking Paint
74. Bollard STP
75. Cateye TATA, STP
76. Readymade Speed STP
Breaker
77. Fountain Ripples, Green Evolutions, Agritech Services, Premier
78. Multi-Vent Multicolor
79. Sanitary ware Neycer Kermag (standard), Hindustan Sanitary Ware
(Ist quality), Parryware (superfine), Cera (Ist quality),
Classica (Ist / standard)
80. WC seat cover ISI Parryware, Neycer Kermag (standard), Hindustan
Marked Sanitary Ware (Ist quality), Cera (Ist quality), Classica
(Ist / standard)
81. PVC Flushing Cistern Parryware, Hindustan Sanitary Wares, Cera.
IS: 774-1984 (ISI
Certified)
82. Faucets & Taps, Stop Gem, Parko, Parryware, HSW, Jaquar,Orient
Valves & Pillar Taps,
Surgical basin mixer,
Shower rose etc.
83. Kitchen Stainless Steel Diamond, Nirali, Neel Kanth, Jayna
Sink
84. Looking Mirror Saint Gobain, Modi Float, Triveni Float Glass, Crown,
Atul,Ashai
85. Ready made Bathroom Commander Gratings (I) Pvt Ltd, Gratolite Cabinet, A-
Cabinets 4 Sector Viii Noida-202701, Alpina, Cera.
I - 64
158 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
86. Float Valve Leader, Bombay Metal & Alloy Co, Bombay superflow.
87. SGSW Pipes (IS-651) Perfect Agra, Devraj Ind Gaziabad, Buran, RK, Prince,
ISI Marked ,Supreme pipe and Fittings.
88. CI (Centrifugally Cast) NICCO, SRIF, A-1 Singhal Casting Co Agra, Jindal
Pipes for sewage Saw, Kesoram, NECO
disposal ISI marked
89. PVC rain Reliance, Finolex, Supreme, Kisan, Prince,Hindustan
water/sewage pipes Plastic & machine corporation,Polypack industries (P)
(IS-4985) Ltd.
90. HDPE Water storage Sintex, Swift, Nutech, Sheetal

tanks
( Rotational Moulded)
91. Cast Iron Pipes and Hindustan Engineering Products Company Calcutta,
Fittings S..L.C., Standard approved manufacturers of any
other brand of fittings having ISI marking,RIF,BIS
92. RCC Pipes Indian Hume Pipe Company, Delhi / Allahabad /
Chandigarh / Lucknow; Hindustan Pressure Pipes,
Kolhapur; Dhere Concrete Products, Pune or any
other approved manufacturer conforming B.I.S.
Standard
93. Brass Fittings Leader Engineering Works, Jalandhar; L & K Mathura;
Luster Sanitary, Jalandhar; Annapurna Metal Works,
Calcutta; Neta Metal Works, Jalandhar; Honey
Industrial Corporation, Bombay.
94. C.P. Fittings Ego Metal Works, Ballabhgarh; Jaquar Industries,
Delhi; Soma Plumbing Fixtures Limited, Calcutta; Gem
Sanitary Appliances Pvt. Ltd.,Delhi; Essco Sanitations,
Delhi; Bilmet, Bombay.
95. Stone Ware Hind Ceramics Limited, Orissa; Ceramic Industries
(Salt-Glazed) Pipes Limited, Sambalpur; Shrikamakshi Agencies, Madras;
Binary Udyog Pvt. Limited, Howrah; Tirumati Moulds
Limited, Nagpur; Kiran Potteries, Hyderabad; Perfect
Sanitary Pipes, Bharatpur.
96. Asbestos Cement Ganga Asbestos Limited, U.P.; Hyderabad Asbestos
Pipes and Fittings Cement Products Limited; J.K. Super Pipe Industries,
Nanded; Konark Cement and Asbestos Limited,
Orissa; Maharashtra Asbestos Limited, Bombay;
Poddar Industrial Corporation, Patna; Sarbamangala
Mfg. Company, Calcutta
97. HDPE pipes and ORI-PLAST,HASTI
fittings
I - 65
159 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
23.0 MATERIALS NOT SPECIFIED
Any materials not fully specified in these specification and which may be
offered for use in the works shall be subject to approval of Engineer,
without which it shall not be used anywhere in the construction works.
I - 66
160 of 497
PART – II WORKMANSHIP
161 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Standard
1.2 Supervision
1.3 Temporary Works
1.4 Codes
1.5 Base Lines and Bench Marks
1.6 Setting Out
1.7 Dewatering
1.8 Safety of Existing Work
1.9 Protection of Existing Services
1.10 Handing Over of Work Site
2.0 EARTH WORK
2.1 Scope
2.2 General
2.3 Setting Out
2.4 Site Clearance and demolition
2.5 Classification of Soil
2.6 Method of Excavation
2.7 Excavation of Soils Other than Hard Rock
2.8 Excavation in Hard Rock
2.9 Cutting and Filling for Site Levelling
II - 1
162 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
2.10 Excavation for Trenches
2.11 Excavations for Foundations
2.12 Excess Excavation
2.13 Disposal of Excavated materials
2.14 Backfilling of Trenches
2.15 Backfilling of Foundations
2.16 Filling Under Floors
2.17 Load Bearing Fills
2.18 Turfing
3.0 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
3.1 Scope
3.2 Execution
3.3 Acceptance Criteria
4.0 CONCRETE (PLAIN & REINFORCED)
4.1 Scope
4.2 Materials
4.3 Grades of Concrete
4.4 Mix Design
4.5 Water/Cement Ratio
4.6 Workabilitiy
4.7 Durability
4.8 Trial Mixes
II - 2
163 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.9 Nominal Mix Concrete
4.10 Volumetric Mix concrete
4.11 Batching of Concrete
4.12 Water
4.13 Mixing and Transportation of Concrete
4.14 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation
4.15 Placing and Compaction of Concrete
4.16 Construction Joint & Cold Joints
4.17 Requirements for Concreting in Special cases
4.18 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete
4.19 Curing of Concrete
4.20 Testing of Concrete
4.21 Steel Reinforcement
4.22 Shuttering
4.23 Damp Proof Course Concrete
4.24 Grout
4.25 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures
4.26 Application of Live Load
4.27 Foam Concrete
5.0 MASONRY
5.1 General
II - 3
164 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.2 Materials
5.3 Selection of Mortars
5.4 Cement Mortar
5.5 Brick work
5.6 Stone masonry
5.7 Hollow Concrete Block Masonary
6.0 PLASTERING AND POINTING
6.1 Materials
6.2 Plastering
6.3 Cement Pointing
6.4 Rough Cast Concrete Facing
6.5 Punning with Lime or Plaster of Paris
7.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING
7.1 Scope
7.2 Materials
7.3 General
7.4 Sub-base
7.5 Subgrade
7.6 Cement Concrete Flooring with Integral Finish
7.7 Concrete Flooring with Granolithic Finish (Artificial Stone

Flooring)
7.8 Dado & skirting Work (Grey Cement Skirting / Dado)
II - 4
165 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.9 Flooring & Facing with Redoxide of Iron (Red Artificial Stone
Flooring)
7.10 Terrazzo Flooring & Facing
7.11 Glazed Tile Finished Flooring & Facing
7.12 Marble Flooring
7.13 Marble in Facia or Dado
7.14 Flooring/Paving with Hardener like Ironite.
7.15 Chemical resistant tile flooring/facing
7.16 Chemical resistant In-Situ Finished Flooring / Facing
8.0 WOOD WORK
8.1 General
8.2 Joinery
8.3 Shrinkage & Tolerance
8.4 Fixing
8.5 Tarring
8.6 Fittings
8.7 Doors
8.8 Panelled Shutters
8.9 Glazed Shutters
8.10 Flush Door Shutters
8.11 Other type of shutters
II - 5
166 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.12 Inspection
9.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS
9.1 General
9.2 Fixing
9.3 Fittings
9.4 Normal Steel Plate Doors
9.5 Pressed Steel Doors
9.6 Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators, etc.,
9.7 Collapsible Gate (Steel)
9.8 Steel Rolling Shutters and Grills
9.9 Guarantee
9.10 Aluminium Doors. Windows, Frames
10.0 GLAZING
10.1 General
10.2 Doors, Windows and Ventilators.
10.3 Northlight Glazing
11.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING & PAINTING
11.1 Scope
11.2 Materials
11.3 White Washing, Colour Washing
11.4 Cement Primer Coat
11.5 Water Proof Cement Paint
II - 6
167 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
11.6 Oil Bound distemper
11.7 Dry Distemper
11.8 Plastic Emulsion Paint
11.9 Bitumen Painting
11.10 Tarring
11.11 Painting to Timber & Steel Surface
12.0 INTERNAL WATER SUPPLY, PLUMBING, DRAINAGE AND

SANITATION
12.1 Scope of work
12.2 Water Supply & Plumbing
12.3 Drainage and Sanitation (Internal)
13.1 Scope of work
13.2 Materials
13.3 Excavation of trenches and pits
13.4 Cast Iron pipes
13.5 Stone ware glazed pipelines (S.W.G)
13.6 Man holes
13.7 Marker plates
14.0 ROAD WORK
14.1 General
14.2 Trenching and Preparation of Subgrade
II - 7
168 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
14.3 Ash Carpet
14.4 Boulder Soling
14.5 Kerbs
14.6 Water Bound Macadam Surfacing
14.7 Preparation of Base and Shoulders
14.8 Spreading Coarse Aggregates
14.9 Rolling
14.10 Application of Screenings
14.11 Sprinkling and Grouting
14.12 Application of Binding Material
14.13 Setting and Drying
14.14 Surface Evenness
14.15 Bituminous Pavements
14.16 Berms
14.17 Kerbs
14.18 Bridges and Culverts
14.19 Boulder Pitching
14.20 Scarifying & Dismantling
14.21 Diversions
15.0 WATERPROOFING TO ROOFS & BASEMENTS & WATER

PROOFING PAINTS
15.1 Scope
II - 8
169 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
15.2 Material
15.3 General Workmanship
15.4 Painting with Hot Bitumen
15.5 Painting with Bitumen Emulsion
15.6 Waterproofing of Roof
15.7 Waterproofing for Basement
15.8 Surface Application
15.9 Guarantee
15.10 Waterproofing course with fibre glass R.P. tissue.
15.11 Waterproofing course with PVC sheets/membrane
15.12 Waterproofing with Non-shrink polymeric waterproof grouting

compound.
16.0 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 False Ceiling
16.2 Wall Panelling & Wooden Partition
16.3 Expansion and Isolation Joints
16.4 Barbed Wire Fencing
16.5 Concertina Coil Fencing
II - 9
170 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Standard
A high standard of workmanship in all trades will be required. The

Contractor shall ensure that only skilled and experienced workmen are
employed.
1.2 Supervision
The Contractor's supervising staff shall be fully qualified and

experienced in the types of work being carried out under their
supervision and shall be capable of ensuring that work is executed
efficiently and as per specification.
1.3 Temporary works
Where required, the Contractor shall furnish such details of his

temporary works as may be called for by the Engineer and the
Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer as to their safety and efficiency.
The Engineer may direct that temporary works, which he considers
unsafe or insufficient, shall be removed and replaced in a satisfactory
manner.
1.4.0 Codes
1.4.1 The years of publication against various standards, referred in this

specification, correspond to the latest standards as on date of
preparation of this specification. During use of this specification in
future, the latest publication as on date shall be referred to. Where
standards are not yet published by the BIS or IRC, adoptable British
Standards or other International Standards shall apply.
In case of any conflict in meaning between these specifications and

those of BIS or IRC, or British/International Standards, the provisions of
these specifications shall prevail.
1.5 Base lines and bench marks
The Contractor shall establish and maintain, to the satisfaction of

Engineer, the base lines and bench marks, based on which the works
are set out. Where such base lines and bench marks are provided by
II-1
171 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
the Engineer, the Contractor shall maintain these throughout the period
of construction without causing any disturbance to them.
1.6 Setting out
The Contractor shall set out all the works to be executed by him, in
line with the standard base lines, levels, position and bench marks and
truly as per drawings within the accepted tolerance limits at no extra
cost to Owner. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the
setting out of all the works, to be executed by him and the approval of
such setting out by the Engineer shall in no way absolve the Contractor
his responsibility for carrying the work to the true lines, levels and
positions as per drawings.
1.7 Dewatering
The Contractor shall carry out all the works, in dry and workable
condition and maintain the same in dry condition till the final handing
over of works at no extra cost to the Owner. For this the Contractor
shall make all the necessary provisions of dewatering, wherever
necessary, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.8 Safety of existing work
Before taking up any construction adjoining other property or existing

work, the Contractor shall take all steps necessary for the safety and
protection of such property or work at no extra cost to the owner.
1.9 Protection of existing services
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to prevent damage

to or interference with underground or overground services such as
cables, drains, piping or piles, whether shown on drawings or not.
Equipment etc., mounted in position shall be protected against falling
debris etc., by means of tarpaulin or such other material at no extra
cost to the owner.
1.10 Handing over of work site
On completion of work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris,

surplus materials, temporary work etc., from the site. The site shall be
II-2
172 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
handed over in a tidy and workmanlike manner at no extra cost to the

owner.
2.0 EARTH WORK
2.1 Scope
This chapter deals with earth work and excavation for civil works in site,
formation/oversite leveling, foundations, cutting and grading for
roads/pavement and railways, canals, embankments other than water
retaining embankments trenching for drainage and other burried
services and the like.
2.2 General
The Contractor shall carry out the excavation strictly to the lines and
levels, in conformity with the drawings or instructions of the Engineer.
2.3 Setting out
Before commencement of earthwork block levels of existing ground

shall be taken by the Contractor jointly with the Engineer, plotted and
signed in token of acceptance of ground levels. Excavation shall not
be commenced until the initial ground levels have been recorded and
accepted. Reference lines, bench marks and base lines shall be set
out by the Contractor for control of earthwork operation. Setting out
shall be done with pegs, blocks, bamboo poles or rails, marking
boundaries or centre lines, as the case may be, and the same
maintained for reference and future checking. Chainaie stones at
regular intervals shall be set up for embankments. All setting out
operations shall be got checked and approved by Engineer. However,
such checking and approval by the Engineer shall in no way absolve
the Contractor of his responsibilities for carrying out the work to the
true lines, levels and positions as per drawing, and in case any error is
noticed at any stage in the contractor's work, it shall be
corrected/rectified by him without any cost to the Owner.
2.4 Site clearance and demolition
The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, roots, brush wood,
bushes and other objectionable materials. Useful and saleable
material, if any, shall be the property of the owner and shall be stacked
properly as directed by the Engineer. The areas to be covered with
II-3
173 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
embankments shall be stripped of top soil to required depths to expose

acceptable founding strata. Top soil unsuitable for use in embankment
construction and other fills shall be disposed off as directed. All
combustible materials shall be stacked and burnt in locations
sufficiently remote to eliminate all danger of fire hazards. All old
concrete, brick works and drains which interfere with construction
works shall be dismantled with the approval of the Engineer taking all
necessary precautions prescribed in safety specification. Top soil
which is suitable for use in construction work shall be stockpiled for
later use. Other objectionable materials such as trash, debris, stones,
brick, broken concrete, scrap metal etc., shall be disposed off as
directed by the Engineer. Payment for cutting and removal of trees,
stumps, dismantling existing structures and stripping shall be regulated
by the description in the Schedule of Items or Part V of these
specifications.
2.5 Classification of soil
The Engineer will decide the class of any particular soil. Classification
of soil shall be as under and the decision of the Engineer shall be
binding on the Contractor :
A) Ordinary Soil
Soils which yield to ordinary application of pick and shovel,

phawra rake or other ordinary digging implements (including
earth moving equipment such as bulldozer, shovels without
resorting to blasting) without offering much resistance, shall be
classified as ordinary soil. This includes organic soil, turf, sand,
gravel, loam clay, mud, peat, black cotton soil, soft shale and
loose moorum etc.
B) Hard Soil
This comprises of all soils that cannot reasonably be excavated

by the above mentioned digging implements, but can be
excavated with close application of pick axe or scarifiers or
jumpers to loosen. This includes compact moorum, stiff clay,
hard shale, cobble stone etc.,
C) Soft /Decomposed Rock
II-4
174 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
This comprises of rock or boulders which may be quarried or

split with crow bars, pavement breakers etc., This include lime
stone, sand stone, weathered rocks and hard conglomerates etc
.and existing structures embedded in earth and tarred macadam
roads, pavements, met in the excavation. The fact that
contractor resorts to blasting for his own reasons shall not mean
that the rock is hard and classified as hard rock.
D) Hard Rock
This comprises of rocks which require blasting for excavation.

Where blasting is prohibited, excavation has to be carried out by
chiseling, wedging or any other agreed methods.
2.6 Method of excavation
The Contractor may carry out excavations, filling and compaction by

any method considered most suitable, and befitting the site conditions
subject to any stipulations contained in the contract and the specifica-
tions. All excavations shall be required to be kept completely free from
water, from whatever source it may come, during the construction. No
foundation work shall be taken up until the surfaces are properly
drained.
2.7 Excavation of soils other than hard rock
Excavation shall be carried out in the most expeditious and efficient

manner to the lines and levels as indicated in drawings or as directed
by Engineer. Prior approval of the Engineer shall be taken for the
method to be adopted for excavation including dimensions, side slopes,
dewatering, shoring etc., Such approval shall not make the Engineer
responsible for any consequent damage or loss caused. All
precautions shall be taken to preserve the material below and beyond
line of excavation in soundest condition. All damages done beyond
limits of excavation shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
cost in a manner approved by the Engineer. All excavated materials
shall be removed to spoil heaps, dumping yards or transported for
filling as may be necessary. When soil heaps are formed for future
use, heaps shall be protected from washing away due to rain or
surface run off. The sides of excavation shall be maintained in stable
condition by adequate stepping and batter. To prevent entry of surface
water and accumulation of subsoil water in excavated areas, suitable
drainage arrangements as may be needed and directed by Engineer,
II-5
175 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
shall be provided and maintained. Pumped out water shall be drained

off properly avoiding damage to other existing works. If any pipelines,
cables or service lines are likely to be exposed, excavation around
these services shall be carried out manually and all such services shall
be adequately supported and protected at no extra cost.
Excavation shall be carried out in any material encountered including

road surfaces, pavements, burried parts of old foundations, pits or
other structures. Excavated materials shall be placed beyond 1.5
metres of the edge of the excavation pit/trench or half the depth of the
pit/trench whichever is more or further away as directed by the
Engineer. Sumps made for dewatering must be kept clear of the
foundations.
In firm soil the sides of the trenches shall be kept vertical upto a depth
of 2.0m from the bottom and for a greater depth, trench shall be
widened by allowing steps of 50cm on either side after every 2.0m
depth from the bottom, so as to give a vertical side slope of 1/4 : 1.
Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, the width of the steps shall be
suitably increased or sides suitably sloped or suitable shoring and strut-
ting provided as directed by the Engineer. For trenches deeper than
2.0m, the Contractor shall obtain detailed instruction from the Engineer
in writing regarding the stepping, sloping of sides or shoring and
strutting to be done. For these bye-works, no extra cost will be paid to
the Contractor.
2.8 Excavation in hard rock
Where hard rock is met and blasting is considered necessary for its
excavation, the Contractor shall intimate the Engineer in writing.
Excavation in hard rock shall be done either by blasting or chiseling or
by such other agreed methods as may be required. Levels of hard
rock surface shall be taken and got approved by Engineer before start
of excavation. Blasting shall be permitted only when proper precau-
tions are taken for protection of persons, works and property. The
Contractor shall obtain the necessary licence for procuring, storing and
using explosives.
Blasting operations shall be carried out by a licensed Blaster. The

quality and quantity of explosives, size and spacing of holes depth of
holes etc., shall be such that they will neither open seams nor damage
or shatter the rock beyond the specified lines of excavation. A
tolerance of 150 mm will however be allowed beyond the excavation
II-6
176 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
lines. As excavation approaches final stages, the depth of holes and

the amount of explosives used shall be reduced progressively to avoid
over breakage or damage to founding strata. Any fissures, cracks and
voids below prescribed depth of excavation shall be corrected by
removing loose pieces, shattered or affected rock and replaced by lean
concrete of M-5 grade or (1:5:10) cement concrete in the case of
foundations. Where excavated surface is to receive structural
concrete, the surface shall be cleaned of dust and other objectionable
materials.
In cases where blasting, though otherwise required, is prohibited

because of any reason, the excavation shall be carried out by chiseling,
wedging or such other agreed methods. All materials excavated from
blasting, chiseling or any such methods shall be stacked for
measurement as directed by Engineer.
2.9 Cutting and filling for site leveling
Excavation and filling operations for site leveling shall be so planned

and executed, that transportation and re-handling are minimised. The
sides of excavation and fills shall be maintained in stable condition by
adequate batters, stepping and dewatering. Materials not desirable
shall be disposed off in area indicated by Engineer. When it is required
to blend the material, it shall be done by selective excavation and filling
operation. Wells, ponds, cesspools and water logged areas shall be
emptied of water and deslushed before filling. Filling shall be done in
horizontal layers not exceeding 300mm in thickness as specified or as
directed by the Engineer. All clods shall be broken before placing the
fill. Earth moving equipment shall be allowed to ply over the fill to
permit compaction. Adequate allowance shall be made for subsidence
of fill material. Levels shall be taken and excess or shortfall shall be
made good by appropriate cutting or filling.
2.10 Excavation for trenches
Excavation for trenches shall be carried out in materials encountered to

enable laying of service lines or drainage channels or any other desired
purpose. Excavation shall be done to lines and levels shown in
drawings and shall be done providing adequate measures for stability.
Vertical wooden sleepers or light rails shall be erected at uniform levels
at places where changes of direction and gradients occur. Centre lines
shall be marked on horizontal sleepers or rails, laid across the
trenches. Depths of excavation and pipe invert levels shall be checked
II-7
177 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
by means of boning rods of appropriate lengths. Trench beds shall be

trimmed and rammed with sprinkling of sand or moorum to required
gradients for continuously supporting the pipelines. Trenches shall be
locally deepened and widened to receive sockets and permit joints to
be inspected.
Timbering
In case of trenches, tunnels, channels, drains, manholes, chambers,

basement and other places where the soil is not capable of being
retained without the support, timbering as directed by the Engineer
shall be resorted to. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
take all the necessary steps to prevent the sides from collapsing.
2.11 Excavations for foundations
Excavation for foundation shall be done to the lines and levels

indicated in the drawings. Excavated material shall be transported and
stored at convenient spots for reuse in back filling of foundations and
other fills. Surplus material shall be transported, spread and levelled at
dumping areas. Side slopes of excavation and/or shoring shall be
adequate from consideration of stability and working space. When so
required and authorised by Engineer, the sides of excavation shall be
protected with proper shoring, strutting, sheeting and sand bags etc.,
These shall be removed only when work in the pit is completed, with
the approval of the Engineer. When it is felt that removal of supports
may result in side collapse or settlement of adjoining ground or
endanger adjoining structures and foundations, they shall be left
permanently in position. The last 150 mm of excavation shall be done
and the bottom trimmed to the required levels only when concreting is
imminent. If at any point the natural ground is disturbed or loosened
for any reason, it shall be consolidated by tamping or rolling or made
up with concrete of M-5 grade, or (1:5:10) cement concrete if so
ordered by the Engineer at no extra cost. Where the soil encountered
at depths indicated in drawings is loose or weak, it shall be further
excavated to levels of firm strata as may be directed by the Engineer
and filled with lean concrete of M-5 grade/(1:5:10) cement concrete or
sand as directed. If the bottom of excavation has been left exposed
not through neglect or fault of the Contractor and it has become
deleteriously affected by atmospheric action and water, such portion of
deteriorated foundation material shall be removed and made good by
lean concrete of grade M-5/(1:5:10) cement concrete or sand as
directed and such extras will be paid for.
II-8
178 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
2.11.1 For deep excavation in the proximity of existing buildings, foundations,

streets, railway tracks, underground cabling, gas piping, water and
drainage lines, and the like, adequate appropriate precautions shall be
taken to protect such structures or works from damage, displacement
or settlement, either as an immediate result of the excavation or as
after effect, discernible with the passage of time. The method of
protection of existing structures and services may include sheet piling,
shoring, strutting slinging or any other method including dewatering.
Payment for such protective work shall be governed by the description
given in the Schedule of Items for the particular work.
2.11.2 For excavation adjoining existing piles care shall be taken to ensure
that no pile under any circumstances is exposed from the top for a
height exceeding 2 metres. No strutting shall be done against exposed
piles, nor exposed piles ever used for tying guy ropes or supports
either temporarily or permanently.
2.12 Excess excavation
All excavation done beyond the specified limits or directions of

Engineer shall be considered as excess excavation. They shall be
made good as prescribed below by the Contractor at his cost:
i) Excess excavation in case of site leveling shall be made good

by filling and compacting with material same as the surrounding
material. Degree of compaction shall be at least the same as
the surrounding material.
ii) Excess excavation in case of trenches shall be made good by

filling and compacting with selected earth to the same
compaction as the surrounding material or as directed by
Engineer. This shall be done in layers not exceeding 150 mm
thick, moistened and thoroughly compacted by tamping.
iii) Excess excavation in case of foundation beyond required depths

shall be made good by filling with lean concrete of M-5
grade/(1:5:10) cement concrete.
2.13 Disposal of excavated materials
Excavated materials that are unsuitable for use in construction works

or in excess of construction requirements shall be disposed off in
II-9
179 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
dumping yards or in locations indicated by Engineer. Waste

piles/heaps shall be located in such places where they will not interfere
with natural flow of rain water access or transport or with the access to
nearby structures. When required, they shall be levelled and trimmed
to such lines and levels as indicated by Engineer.
2.14 Back filling of trenches
Trenches shall be backfilled after pipes or service lines are tested and
approved. Filling shall be done with earth in 150 mm thick layers free
from unwanted material and well rammed. Soft material shall be used
in bottom of trenches upto a level of 150 mm above the top of pipes
before backfilling with other fill materials. All clods and lumps shall be
broken before placement. Care shall be taken not to disturb, break or
damage the pipes during backfilling and compaction process.
2.15 Backfilling of foundations
Backfilling of foundations shall be done using suitable soils from

excavations. Soil shall be free from organic matter and other materials
which would affect the stability of the fill and shall be free from
boulders, brick bats wood pieces and other injurious materials, lumps
and clods. Before commencement of backfilling of foundations. all
shoring and formwork, bits of timber, cement bags and all other rubbish
shall be removed. Hydro-insulation, Bitumen painting or application of
anti-corrosive protective and anti-termite treatments shall have been
completed. Backfilling operation shall not commence without approval
of Engineer. Backfilling shall be carried out in well compacted layers of
150 mm thickness. Each layers shall have near optimum moisture
content. Layers will extend to the entire width of excavation and shall
be sprinkled with water during compaction process. Ramming shall be
done to achieve firm compaction. Backfill shall be trimmed and
finished to lines and levels indicated in the drawings and/or as directed
by the Engineer. Mechanical equipment like vibratory roller, vibro earth
rammer or vibratory compactor shall be used for compaction.
2.16 Filling under floors
Material for filling under floors shall be soil free from harmful minerals,
vegetable matter etc., and shall not be expansive soils. Filling shall be
done in well compacted layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness.
Each layer shall be compacted to 95% Standard Procter Density.
Sufficient soaking shall be done before compaction. The entire area to
II-10
180 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
be covered by flooring shall be finally dressed and trimmed to required

levels. Mechanical equipment like vibratory roller, vibro earth rammer
or vibratory compactor shall be used for compaction.
2.17 Load bearing fills
Load bearing fills include embankments for roads and railways and
such other earth fills above ground levels provided for protection of fuel
oil tanks, pads for storage tanks, drain, bunds and the like. Fill
materials shall either be selected earth obtained from excavations for
site leveling, trenches and foundations or from selected borrow areas
as may be required. Soils selected for filling in embankments shall be
of uniform quality and free from boulders, organic materials and other
objectionable matter. Soils having high silt and clay content and
having laboratory maximum dry density less than 1.44 gms per c.c.
shall not be used for load bearing fills. For fills greater than 3 m in
height soils shall have laboratory density not less than 1.52 gms per
c.c. Soils for top 500 mm of fills for roads and railways shall have
laboratory density not less than 1.65 gms per c.c. and shall not have
marked swelling and shrinkage properties.
Foundation preparation for embankments shall be done as prescribed

under site clearance. The founding strata shall be compacted as much
as possible by rolling or tamping before placement of fill material. The
water content of founding strata should be same as that specified for
embankment fill. Any pockets of loose material or depressions left in
founding strata as a result of clearing operation shall be filled and
compacted with the same material as the surrounding founding strata.
When an embankment is to be placed on steep sloping ground the
surface of the ground shall be trenched in steps or trenched or broken
up in such a manner that the new materials bonds well with the
founding strata.
Fill material shall not be placed until foundation has been inspected
and approved by Engineer. Material shall be placed in even,
continuous, horizontal layers over full width of embankment in well
compacted layers not exceeding 200 mm thickness. Each layer shall
be compacted by means of smooth rubber tyred rollers, sheep-foot
rollers, tractors, tampers or other mechanical means as may be found
suitable for the location. Before rolling, the water content shall be
checked and corrected by sprinkling with water or adding dry material
or aeration as may be required. This shall be followed by mixing and
the layer left for soaking before compaction. The water content shall
II-11
181 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
be within plus or minus 2% of Standard Proctor Optimum. Density of

compacted layers shall be determined by sand replacement method.
Average compacted density shall be at least 95% of Standard Proctor
Density. The number of tests to be conducted for determination of
moisture content and density shall be as prescribed by the Engineer.
Side slopes of embankments shall be formed along with the main
embankment. No side dumping shall be done for the formation of
slopes. When required the width of each layer shall be constructed
slightly in excess of required width and slopes trimmed to remove loose
edge materials and completed to lines shown in drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. Subgrades for road works shall be thoroughly
wetted sufficiently in advance of placing of any base course and it shall
be ensured that it is firm and moist for at least 50 mm below the
surface. Should the subgrade for any reason be loose or have density
less than required, it shall be recompacted and refinished. Excessive
loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling and/or
scaling. No traffic or hauling equipment shall be permitted to ply on fin-
ished subgrade and any damage caused to such portion shall be made
good by the Contractor at his own cost.
2.18 Turfing
The slopes of embankment shall be dressed to line and slightly

roughened to bond and hold a surface dressing consisting of 150 mm
humus layer of soil. The entire surface shall then be covered with turf
consisting of blocks or strips of grass of approved species. The sod
shall include a net of roots and earth at least 75 mm thick. The sod
shall be laid on slope in close contact and then tamped in place so as
to close and fill the joints between blocks.
Immediately after placing the turf, slope shall be thoroughly wetted and
kept wet for a sufficient period to assure plant growth. Watering shall
be continued until the grass takes root firmly and the whole area
presents a uniform appearance. In the event that the plant growth has
not taken place within the period of maintenance such areas or patches
shall be redone by the Contractor at his own cost.
II-12
182 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.1 Scope
The scope of work includes setting up a chemical barrier against attack

by subterranean termites while the building is under construction.
3.2 Execution
3.2.1 General
Unless otherwise specified all work shall in general be executed as

specified in IS : 6313 Part-II -1981 and as per approved specification of
the agency having special know-how for the job.
All necessary work to ensure uniform distribution and proper

penetration of treating solution shall be done according to the
instruction of the Engineer.
Soil treatment shall not be done when it is raining or when the soil is
wet with rain or subsoil water. Once formed, the treated soil barrier
shall not be disturbed.
3.2.2 Chemicals and rate of application
Chemical like chlorpyriphos 20% EC (Conforming to IS 8963 - 1978) in

1% emulsion shall be applied by pressure pumps, uniformly over the
area treated. (1 part chemicals + 20 parts water = 1% emulsion).
3.2.2.1 Treatment of pits, trenches & basement excavations
Foundations, basements etc. may either be fully enveloped by the

chemical barrier or the treatment may start 500 mm below ground
level. The bottom surface and sides of excavation (upto a height of
about 300mm) for column pits, walls, trenches and basements shall be
treated with emulsion @ 5 liters per sq.m. of surface area. Backfills
around columns, walls, etc., shall be treated @ 7.5 liters per sq.m. of
the vertical surface. Treatment shall be done in stages following the
compaction of earth in layers. The treatment shall be carried out after
the ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at 150mm centers
closed to the wall surface and spraying the emulsion in the specified
dose.
II-13
183 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.2.2.2 Treatment of top surface of plinth filling
Holes 50 mm to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centres both ways shall be

made with crow-bars on the surface of compacted plinth fill. Emulsion
at the rate of 5 litres per sq.m of surface shall be applied prior to laying
soling or subgrade. Special care shall be taken to maintain continuity
of the chemical barrier at the junction of vertical and horizontal
surfaces.
3.2.2.3 Treatment of doo rs, windows & soil surrounding pipes, Wastes
and conduits.
Special care shall be taken at the points where pipes and conduits
enter the building and the soil shall be treated for a distance of 150 mm
and a depth of 75 mm at the point where they enter the building. All
the wooden door/window frames on the ground floor of the buildings
shall be treated with the insecticidal solution.
3.2.2.4 Treatment of expansion joints
These shall receive special attention and shall be treated in a manner

The Contractor shall give a 10 year service guarantee in writing

supplemented by a separate and unilateral guarantee from the
specialised agency for the job to keep the building free of termites for
the specified period at no extra cost to the Owner.
4.0 CONCRETE PLAIN & REINFORCED
4.1 Scope
This chapter covers the workmanship, special requirements &

regulations with which the contractor must comply to achieve the
following two objectives :
(a) The provision, at all locations on the site, of dense workable

concrete, having the specified characteristic strength.
(b) The placing of concrete at all elevations, well compacted by

vibrations, in well aligned and well fixed formwork ensuring the
II-14
184 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
internal and external dimensions of structures as per drawings

and maintaining the size, shape number and locations of
reinforcements, inserts etc., as specified in the drawings
providing the surface finish after stripping off the formwork to
ensure the structural configurations as per drawings as well
within the specified tolerance limits, curing and guaranteeing the
characteristic strength, all as specified.
4.1.1 The mixing, placing, compacting, curing and finishing of concrete shall
be done according to IS: 456-1978 "Code of Practice for Plain and
Reinforced Concrete".
4.2 Materials
For materials, reference to Part - I (Materials) shall be made.
4.3 Grades of Concrete
The grades of concrete unless otherwise specified shall be in

accordance with the following table. The grade of concrete to be used
in each section of work will be shown in the drawings or in the schedule
of items :
Grade off Characteristic Strength i.e. Nominal Maximum

Concrete Compressive Strength of 15 cm Aggregate Size (mm)
cubes at 25 days
(N/mm2
M-5A 5 63
M-5B 5 40
M-7.5A 7.5 63
M-7.5B 7.5 40
M-10A 10 63
M-10B 10 40
M-10C 10 20
M-10D 10 12
II-15
185 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Grade off Characteristic Strength i.e. Nominal Maximum

Concrete Compressive Strength of 15 cm Aggregate Size (mm)
cubes at 25 days
(N/mm2
M-15A 15 63
M-15B 15 40
M-15C 15 20
M-15D 15 12
M-20A 20 63
M-20B 20 40
M-20C 20 20
M-20D 20 12
M-25C 25 20
M-25D 25 12
M-30C 30 20
M-30D 30 12
M-35C 35 20
M-35D 35 12
M-40C 40 20
M-40D 40 12
Notes : A,B,C,D mentioned along with grade of concrete correspond to the

maximum size of coarse aggregate being 63mm, 40mm, 20mm &
12mm respectively.
II-16
186 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Unless otherwise specified in the drawings or schedule of items the

maximum nominal size of coarse aggregates for different grades of
concrete shall be as under :
a) For concreting in very narrow space or in very small 12 mm

thickness
b) For all reinforced concrete work except in massive 20 mm
foundations
c) For all ordinary plain concrete & massive reinforced 40 mm &
foundations 63 mm
4.4 Mix Design
4.4.1 General
At the commencement of the contract the Contractor shall make

preliminary tests to determine the proportions by weight of cement, fine
aggregates, coarse aggregates and water necessary to produce
required grades of concrete. The mix proportions shall be selected to
ensure that workability of the fresh concrete is suitable for the
conditions of handling and placing and when concrete hardens, it shall
have the required strength, durability and surface finish. The
Contractor shall get approval of Engineer to such proportions before he
starts concreting. However, such approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility to produce concrete having compressive
strengths as laid down in the foregoing Table.
No departure from the approved proportions will be permitted during

the works unless and until the Engineer gives written authorisation for
any change in proportion. The Engineer shall have authority at any
time to check whether the mixing of concrete is being carried out
according to the approved proportions.
4.4.2 For the all major and important R.C. works and for all special works,
the design of mixes shall be made by the Contractor at his own cost,
for each grade of concrete as well as for various workability. The
design of mixes shall be made according to I.S. 10262-1982 or any
other approved standard methods.
II-17
187 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.4.3 The concrete made by designing the mix is termed hereinafter as

"Design Mix Concrete".
4.4.4 The cement content for various grades of concrete shall be based on
design mix. However, irrespective of requirement of cement found out
from design mix, the minimum cement content & maximum cement
content of concrete shall be in accordance with Clause No. 8.2.4.1 &
Clause No. 8.2.4.2 of I S 456 -2000 respectively.
4.5 Water/Cement Ratio
4.5.1 Where a particular water/cement ratio is stipulated in the design or

drawing along with the characteristic grade of concrete the design of
mix shall be carried out by adjusting the other variable factors to obtain
the characteristic strength of concrete with stipulated water/cement
ratio.
4.5.2 In the structures where the impermeability and shrinkage of concrete

have an important bearing on the durability and serviceability of the
structures, such as water retaining structures, basements, underground
premises, tunnels, pump houses, exposed structures near sea side or
deserts, prestressed structure, thin precast members etc. the water
cement ratio shall be kept low and preferably not exceeding 0.45.
4.5.3 The water cement ratio, as achieved in the Mix Design, or as specified
in the drawings shall be adhered to strictly and shall not be varied
without the permission of the Engineer.
4.6 Workability
4.6.1 The workability of fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is just
suitable for the conditions of handling & placing so that after
compaction if becomes completely consistent and homogeneously
surrounds all the reinforcement and completely fills the formwork.
4.6.2 The workability of fresh concrete at the place of batching/mixing shall

be measured by compacting factor test and at the place of disposition
by means of slump test. During the finalisation of Trial Mixes, the
relationship between compacting factor and slump test shall be
established for each grade of concrete as well as for various levels of
workability. The workability tests shall be carried out in accordance with
IS:1199-1959.
II-18
188 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.6.3 Normally, in the condition of low water cement ratio as well as for
medium/high workability, the workability shall be achieved by
increasing the cement content, in consistent with added water.
4.6.4 In cases where the cement content is to be limited to reduce the heat
of hydration, and the water/cement ratio is also to be kept low to
reduce the permeability or due to other requirements the desired
workability may be achieved with use of limited doses of plasticiser or
air entraining agent. In such cases the method of mixing and dosage
of the plasticiser/air entraining agent shall be according to the
manufacturer's specification and with the approval of the Engineer.
4.6.5 The usual limits of consistency for various types of structures are given
below :
Limits of consistency
Degree of Slump in mm with Use for which concrete is

Workability Standard - Cone suitable as per IS : 1199
Minimum Maximum
Very low 0.0 25.0 Large mass concrete
structure with heavy
compaction equipment,
roads and the like.
Low 25.0 50.0 Uncongested wide and

shallow R.C.C structures
Medium 25.0 75.0 Deep but wide R.C.C

structures with congestion of
reinforcement and inserts
High 75.0 125.0 Very narrow and deep R.C.C

structures with congestion
due to reinforcement and
inserts
Note : Not withstanding any thing mentioned above, the slump to be obtained
for work in progress shall be as per direction of the Engineer. With the
permission of the Engineer, for any grade of concrete, if the water has
to be increased in special cases, cement shall also be increased
proportionately to keep the ratio of water to cement same as adopted in
II-19
189 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
trial mix design for each grade of concrete. No extra payment will be
made for this additional cement.
4.7 Durability
The durability of concrete, depending on the exposure condition, is to

be taken into account while designing the mix. For given aggregates,
the cement content should be sufficient to make sufficiently low water
cement ratio and Appendix A of IS: 456-1978 shall be taken as
guideline for durability considerations.
4.8 Trial Mixes
4.8.1 After approval of the Mix Design by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
make in presence of Engineer the Trial Mixes for each grade of
concrete as well as for required workability.
4.8.2 Before starting the trial mixes, necessary preparatory works like sieve
analysis of the aggregates, determination of densities of different
ingredients and moisture contents in the aggregates, shall be
completed according to the I.S. Codes 383-1970 and 2386-1963.
4.8.3 Each trial mix shall be handled and compacted by the method which
the Contractor proposes to use for that mix in the works and the mixes
shall not show tendency of inadequate compaction by the method
proposed.
4.8.4 The compacting factor and the slump of each trial mix shall be
determined immediately after mixing and the values shall not exceed
the maximum value obtained in the mix design.
4.8.5 Six numbers of 150 mm test cubes shall be made from each trial mix.
These shall be cured and tested in accordance with relevant I.S.
codes. In order to have the specified characteristic strength in the field,
the concrete mix as designed in the Design Mix shall have higher
average compressive strength depending on the degree of quality
control at site. If the size and special requirement of the work so
warrants, the trial may be extended to cover larger ranges of mix
proportions as well as other variables such as alternative source of
aggregates, maximum size and grading of aggregates and different
type and brands of cement.
II-20
190 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.8.6 Before commencement of the concreting works of particular grade of

concrete, the Contractor must complete the work of trial mixes and
subsequent testing of the test cubes obtained therefrom the design of
the Approved Mix for that particular grade of concrete.
4.8.7 The entire cost of all the trial mixes including all the preparatory works
for trial mixes, preparation of test cubes and their testing shall be borne
by the Contractor.
4.9 Nominal Mix Concrete
4.9.1 Nominal mix concrete may be used for all concrete of Grade M-10 and
below. If design mix concrete cannot be used for any reason for Grade
M-15 & M-20, nominal mix concrete may be used with the permission
of Engineer, Nominal mix concrete shall not be used, in any case for
Grade of concrete above M-20.
4.9.2 The proportioning of materials for nominal mix concrete shall be in

accordance with Table-3 of clause 8.3 of I.S. 456-1978. The
stipulations of Clauses 8.3.1 & 8.3.2 of IS: 456-1978 shall also be
taken into consideration.
4.10 Volumetric Mix Concrete
Where concrete is specified in volumetric proportions such as 1:4:8,

1:3:6, 1:2:4, 1:1 1/2:3, 1:1:2 etc., in the schedule of items, coarse and
fine aggregates shall be measured by volume and cement by weight.
The water cement ratio shall be within 0.45 to 0.70 depending upon the
workability.
4.11 Batching of Concrete
4.11.1 Cement
Cement shall always be batched by weight. A separate weighing

device shall be provided for weighing cement. Where the weight of
cement is determined by accepting the weight per bag, number of bags
shall be weighed separately to determine the average net weight of
cement per bag and the same shall be checked regularly
4.11.2 Aggregates
II-21
191 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.11.3 For both Design Mix concrete and Nominal Mix concrete, the
aggregates (coarse and fine) shall be batched by weight.
4.11.4 In particular cases, or where weigh-batching is not possible

proportioning by volume batching may be allowed by the Engineer,
provided the Contractor guarantees the uniformity of aggregates
through out the period of construction. For this purpose, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer sufficient data indicating the weight/volume
relationship of aggregates for different types of concrete and after such
approval, periodic checks on the weight/volume relationship of the
aggregates shall be made by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Where aggregates are moist and volume batching is
adopted, allowance shall be made for bulking in accordance with I.S.
2386 (Part-III)-1963.
4.11.5 Suitable adjustments shall be made for the variation in the weight of
aggregates due to variation in their moisture contents.
4.12 Water
4.12.1 Water may be measured either by weight or by volume. When

measured by volume, it shall be by well calibrated conical shaped jar or
vessel or from a calibrated tank fitted to the mixer.
4.12.2 Adjustment of w ater due to moisture contents in coar se and f ine

aggregates
It is very important to maintain the water cement ratio constant at its

correct value. For the correct determination of amount of water to be
added in the concrete mix, to maintain the water cement ratio constant,
the amount of moisture content in both coarse and fine aggregates
shall be taken into consideration, be as frequently as possible, the
frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer according
to weather conditions.
4.12.3 Determination of moisture content in the aggregates
Determination of moisture content in the aggregates shall be according

to I.S. 2386 (Part-III)-1963. Where tests are not conducted, the
amount of surface water may be estimated from the following table :
II-22
192 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Aggregates Surface water carried by Aggregates
% by weight Lit / m3
Very wet sand 7.5 120
Moderately wet sand 5.0 80
Moist sand 2.5 40
Moist gravel & stone chips** 1.25 - 2.5 20-40
** - Coarser the aggregate, less the water it will carry.
4.12.4 Admixtures
Any solid admixture, to be added, shall be measured by weight, but

liquid or semi-liquid admixture may be measured by weight or volume.
4.12.5 Accuracy of batching
The accuracy of batching shall be within the following tolerance:
Cement within plus or minus 2% by weight.

Aggregate within plus or minus 5% by weight.
Water within plus or minus 0.5% by weight.
4.13 Mixing & Transportation of concrete
4.13.1 Mixing of Concrete
4.13.1.1 Machine mixing
Concrete shall always be mixed in mechanical mixer. Water shall not,

normally, be charged into the drum of the mixer until all other
ingredients are already in the drum and mixed for at least one minute.
Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of materials
and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. The mixing time
II-23
193 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
from the time of adding water shall be in accordance with IS: 1791-
1985 but in no case less than 2 minutes or at least 40 revolutions.
4.13.1.2 Hand mixing
When hand mixing is permitted by the Engineer it shall be carried out

on a water tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing
is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. In
case of hand mixing 10% extra cement shall be added to each batch at
no extra cost to the Owner.
4.13.2 Transportation of concrete
4.13.2.1 Concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of
placing concrete as rapidly as practicable by such means which will
prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintain
the required workability. No water shall be mixed with the concrete
after it has left the mixer.
4.13.2.2 Where concrete is transported over long distances, the Contractor shall
provide suitable means by which different grades of concrete are
readily identifiable at the place of final deposit.
4.13.3 Actions before placement of concrete
4.13.3.1 Programme of works
At the beginning of every fortnight, the contractor shall give his detailed
concreting programme for that fortnight to the Engineer. Such
programmes, shall specify all information such as the locations where
concrete is to be poured, type/grade of concrete, volume of concrete to
be poured, number and Type of vibrators proposed to be used as well
as proposed to keep as standby, number of skilled technicians and
supervisors proposed to be engaged, the proposed time and period of
pouring etc.
4.13.3.2 Checking & approval
Before placement of concrete, the contractor shall get all the form
works, reinforcements, inserts, conduits, openings, surface preparation
etc., checked and approved by the Engineer. To facilitate such
checking, the contractor shall complete all his works according to the
drawings and specifications well in advance before placement of
II-24
194 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
concrete at least 36 hours for all major/important/complicated works

and 24 hours for all minor/ordinary/simple works. The checks are
purely in the interest of the work and to draw the contractor's attention
to his contractual obligations to execute the works according to the
drawings/specification and do not relieve the contractor from his
responsibility in getting the end results for the quality & strength of
concrete and for maintaining the shape, level & dimensions of the
finished concrete, as well as the inserts, openings, other features within
the tolerance limits.
4.14 Preparatory Works/Surface Preparation
4.14.1 For concrete directly on earth foundation
4.14.1.1 Earth foundation on which direct placement of concrete is specified,

shall be rammed and consolidated as directed by the Engineer such
that it does not crumble and get mixed with concrete during or after
placement. If the foundation is quite wet, the same shall be kept dry
and then sufficiently consolidated, if necessary, a thin top layer of the
wet soil shall be removed and replaced by sand or other suitable
materials as directed by the Engineer without any extra cost to the
Owner. Care shall also be taken that earth from the sides also does
not get mixed with the concrete, during or after placement, before it has
sufficiently set and hardened.
4.14.1.2 The earth foundation, over which concrete is to be placed direct, shall
not be kept abandoned at the specified level and concrete shall be
placed immediately following the final preparation of the formation
otherwise suitable measures shall be taken, as directed by the
Engineer without any extra cost to the Owner.
4.14.2 For construction joints
All such joints shall have continuous square bond grooves to produce a
substantial and water-tight key. Where the placement of concrete has
to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be roughened,
cleaned by wire or bristle brushing, compressed air, water jet etc., and
thoroughly wetted. For vertical construction joints a neat cement slurry
shall be applied on the surface immediate before the placement of
concrete. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of freshly mixed mortar about 10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement
and sand in the same proportion as the cement and sand in the
concrete mix and applied immediately before placing of the concrete.
II-25
195 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
On this surface (i.e. on the surface of joints) a layer of concrete not

exceeding 150 mm in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well
rammed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners and
close spots. To ensure water tightness, care shall be taken to punn
concrete properly against the old surface.
4.14.3 (a) On vertical surfaces of masonry
When the concrete is placed on the vertical surface of masonry

(as in the case of thin concrete fins projected from the vertical
masonry surface), a groove of dimension as directed by the
Engineer shall be cut in the masonry to ensure a proper bond
and the surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Before the
placement of concrete, the surface shall be kept moist by
spraying water at least for the period of 2 hours and a thick coat
of cement slurry shall be applied immediately before the
placement of concrete.
b) Over walls
Building paper over average 12mm thick cement sand bearing

plaster of 1:4 mix with neat cement finish shall be provided at
the bearings of slabs over walls as directed by the Engineer.
4.14.4 Inside the formwork (cleaning, surface preparation etc.,)
The interior of the form works, where the concrete is to be placed, shall
be thoroughly washed by high pressure water jet or air jet to completely
clean the entire volume from all sort of dirts, grease/oil, foreign and
deleterious materials etc. The reinforcement shall be completely clean
and free from all sorts of dirts, grease/oil, rust, foreign/deleterious
materials etc., Before placement of concrete, the form works coming in
contact with concrete, shall be coated with form oil or raw linseed oil
material or provided with any approved material to prevent adhesion of
concrete to the form work, but utmost care shall be taken so that such
oily material do not come in contact with the reinforcement.
4.15 Placing and Compaction of Concrete
4.15.1 The concrete shall be placed and compacted before setting commences
& should not be subsequently disturbed. No water shall be mixed with
the concrete after it has left the mixer. Method of placing should be such
as to preclude segregation. Approved mechanical vibrator shall be used
II-26
196 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
for compacting concrete, and concrete shall not be over vibrated or

under vibrated.No concrete shall be placed until the place of deposit has
been thoroughly inspected and approved by the Engineer. all inserts and
embedments properly secured in position and checked and forms
properly oiled. No concrete shall be placed in the absence of the
Engineer.
4.15.2 Concrete shall be placed on clean bed having the designed level. The
bed shall be cleaned of all debris and other objectionable materials.
Seepage water, if any, shall be controlled or diverted.
4.15.3 Concreting shall not be carried on during rains unless all precautions
have been taken by the Contractor and necessary permission has
been given by the Engineer. Suitable measures shall be taken to
control the temperature of concrete.
4.15.4 Where plums are permitted in massive concrete, they shall be washed
and carefully placed. No stone shall be closer than 30 cm to an
exposed face, nor nearer than 15 cm to an adjacent stone.
4.15.5 Concrete shall not be dropped from a height of more than 2m except
through a chute, the design and type of which shall be subject to
approval of the Engineer.
4.15.6 The concrete shall be placed, spread and compacted by approved

mechanical vibrator. Vibrators shall not be used for pushing concrete
to adjoining areas.
4.15.7 For members involving vertical placing of concrete (eg. columns, walls
etc.,), each lift shall be deposited in horizontal layer extending the full
width between shutterings and of such depth that each layer can be
easily and effectively vibrated and incorporated with the layer below by
means of compaction.
4.15.8 For member involving horizontal placing of concrete (e.g. slabs, beams
etc.,) the concrete shall be placed along the line of starting point in
such quantities as will allow members to be cast to their full depth
along the full width between side shuttering and then gradually brought
towards the finishing point along its entire front parallel to the starting
line. Vibration and surface finish shall follow behind the placement as
closely as possible.
II-27
197 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.15.9 Utmost care shall be taken to avoid the displacement of

reinforcements/embedded parts or movement of formwork or damage
to faces of the form work or transmission of any harmful
vibration/shocks to the concrete which has not yet hardened
sufficiently.
4.15.10 All members shall be concreted at such a rate that no cold joint is
formed and fresh concrete is placed always against green concrete
which is still plastic and workable.
4.15.11 Should any unforeseen occurrence results in a stoppage of concreting

for one hour or such other time as might allow the concrete, already
placed, to begin to set before the next batches can be placed, the
Contractor shall make at his own cost, suitable tongue, and groove
construction joint, as approved by the Engineer. Any additional
reinforcement required as directed by the Engineer shall also be
provided by the Contractor at his own cost. Before placement of new
batches of concrete over that construction joint, the surface preparation
according to this specification stipulated earlier, shall be done by the
Contractor at his own cost.
4.15.12 The concrete shall be worked well up against whatever surface it

adjoins and compacted to such a degree that it reaches its maximum
density as a homogeneous mass, free from air and water holes and
penetrates to all corners of moulds and shuttering and completely sur-
rounds the reinforcement. All measures shall be taken to make the
shape, size, and location of the finished concrete including its
embedments, holes, openings etc., well within the accepted tolerance
limit.
4.16 Construction Joint & Cold Joints
4.16.1 Construction joints
4.16.1.1 Normally, the construction joints including crank inducing joints shall be
constructed as per locations and details indicated on the drawings.
4.16.1.2 Where the location of the joint is not specified in the drawings, it shall
be in accordance with the following guide lines :
(a) In Columns
II-28
198 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(i) In case of Projection from basement slab, 300 mm from

the top of base slab or 75 mm from the top of the
haunches whichever is higher.
(ii) In framing of beam at different elevation, 75 mm below

the lowest soffit of the beam and in case of projection
from beams and slabs 75 mm from the top surface of the
beam/slab or at the top surface of beam/Slab whichever
facilitates formwork.
(iii) For columns under flat slabs 75 mm below the lowest

soffit of the slab.
(b) In walls (horizontal construction joints)
(i) Walls projecting from base : 300 mm from top of base

slab slab
(ii) Walls supporting the : 75 mm from the lowest
suspended slab soffit of the slab
.
Note :
In the case of water retaining structures and structures under

the influence of ground water, approved water bars of suitable
size shall be provided to make the joint completely water-tight.
(c) In beams
Beams shall be cast, as a rule, without a joint. But if provision of

a joint is unavoidable, the joint for simply supported beam shall be
vertical and at the middle of the span ; in continuous beam, the
same shall be at the point of minimum shear force.
(d) In suspended slabs
(i) In slab of small span, there shall be no construction

joints.
(ii) In slabs of large span and continuous slabs, construction

joint, if allowed by the Engineer shall be vertical at the
middle of span and at the right angles to the principal
reinforcement.
II-29
199 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(e) In walls (Vertical construction joint)
As a rule, walls shall be cast monolithically without any vertical

construction joint, unless specified in the drawing. However, for
a long wall, the Engineer may allow vertical construction joint
and the same shall be at the place of minimum shear force. In
water retaining structures and in structures under the influence
of ground water approved water bars of suitable size shall be
provided to make the joints completely water tight.
(f) In slabs resting on ground
(i) For Plain concrete
Concreting shall be done in alternate panels not

exceeding 10 sq.m in area. The largest panel dimension
shall be 5 m.
(ii) For nominally reinforced slab
The area of pour shall not exceed 40 sq.m and the

maximum panel dimension shall not exceed 8m.
(i) For the basement slabs which act as structural

member
There shall be no construction joint.
(g) In ribbed beam
The beams shall be cast monolithically with the slab in one

continuous operation.
4.16.1.3 In all construction joints the reinforcements shall pass through as per
drawings and the same shall not be disturbed in any way.
4.16.1.4 The vertical construction joints shall be provided by insertion of board

keeping provision for passage of reinforcement/fixtures / embedments.
All construction joints shall be made to form a tongue and groove joint.
II-30
200 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.16.2 Cold joint
An advancing face of a concrete pour, which could not be covered

before expiry of initial setting time for unexpected reasons, is called a
cold joint. The Contractor shall remain always vigilant to avoid cold
joints. If however, a cold joint is formed due to unavoidable reasons,
the following procedures shall be adopted for treating it :
(a) If the concrete is so green that it can be removed manually and

if vibrators can penetrate the surface without much effort, fresh
concrete can be placed directly over the old surface and the
fresh concrete along with the old concrete shall be vibrated
systematically and thoroughly.
(b) In case the concrete has hardened a bit more than (a), but can
still be easily removed by a light hand pick, the surface shall be
raked thoroughly and the loose concrete removed completely
without disturbing the rest of the concrete in depth. Then a rich
mortar layer of 12 mm thickness, shall be placed on the cold
joint and then the fresh concrete shall be placed on the mortar
layer and vibrated thoroughly, penetrating deep in to the layer of
concrete.
(c) In case the concrete at the joint has become so stiff that it
cannot be remoulded and mortar or slurry does not rise in spite
of extensive vibration, a tongue and groove joint shall be made
by removing some of the older concrete and the joint shall be
left to harden at least for 12-24 hours. It will then be treated as
regular construction joint and the surface preparation of the
same, before placement of concrete, shall be as described in
the appropriate clauses of these specifications.
4.17 Requirements for Concreting in Special Cases
4.17.1 Concreting in deep lifts
Placing of concrete in lifts exceeding 2 M in columns and walls is in the

category of deep lifts.
4.17.1.1 Before commencement of work, the contractor shall submit for the
approval of the Engineer, the details of the methods he proposes to
adopt for concreting.
II-31
201 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.17.1.2 The placement of concrete shall preferably be by tremie, chute or any

other approved method.
4.17.1.3 In structures of heavy/complicated reinforcement or in complicated

form works, the contractor shall provide sufficient number of windows
in the form works as directed by the Engineer to check the placement
and compaction of concrete in different stages. Such windows shall be
closed as soon as the concreting reaches the bottom level of the same.
4.17.2 Concreting under water
When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the special

requirements, over and above those of this specification shall be in
accordance with Clause 13.2 of IS: 456-1978.
4.17.3 Cold weather concreting
When conditions are such that the ambient temperature may be

expected to be 4.5 C degree or below during the placing and curing
period, the work shall conform to IS: 7861 (Part-II)-1981.
4.17.4 Hot weather concreting
When concreting in very hot weather the Contractor shall take all
precautions as stipulated in IS: 7861 (Part-I)-1975 and stagger the
work to cooler parts of the day to ensure that the temperature of wet
concrete used, specially in massive structure, does not exceed 38
degree 'C'.
Positive temperature control by methods like pre-cooling, post cooling

or cooling of concrete by circulating cold water through small
embedded pipe lines inside concrete, if required, shall be specified and
shall be undertaken.
4.18 Finishes to Exposed Surfaces of Concrete
The Contractor is to include in his quoted rate for concrete, the

provision of normal finishes in both formed & unformed surfaces as and
where required by the Engineer without any extra cost to the owner.
Some common finishes are indicated below:
4.18.1 Surface which do not require plastering

II-32
202 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Surface in contact with casings shall be brought to a fair and even

surface by working the concrete smooth against casings with a steel
trowel while it is being deposited and also by working over the surface
with a trowel immediately after the removal of the casings or
centerings, removing any irregularities and stopping air holes, etc. Use
of mortar plaster is not permissible for correcting levels, removing
unevenness etc. However, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such
plastering is unavoidable then the thickness of plaster shall in no case
exceeds 5 mm and the plastering shall be in cement and sand
mortar.(1:3).
4.18.2 Exposed surfaces which need plastering
Surfaces of beams/columns flushing with the block work or other

structures where intended to plaster, shall be hacked adequately as
soon as the shuttering is stripped off so that proper bond with the
plaster can develop.
4.18.3 Surface for non-integral finish
Where a non-integral finish such as floor finish is specified or required,

the surface of the concrete shall be struck off at the specified levels
and finished rough.
4.18.4 For monolithic finish
Where no more finishing course is to be applied as in the case of

basement floor, industrial flooring or the screed concrete flooring etc,
the concrete shall be completed and struck off at the specified levels
and sloped with a screed, board and then floated with a wooden float.
Steel troweling is then started after the concrete has hardened enough
to prevent the excess of fines and water to rise to the surface but not
hard enough to prevent proper finishing. Troweling shall be such that
the surface is flat, smooth and neatly finished.
4.19 Curing of Concrete
4.19.1 General
The purpose of curing is to prevent loss of moisture from the concrete

itself so that the cement inside the concrete is sufficiently hydrated
which of course is slow and prolonged process. As soon as the
II-33
203 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
concrete has hardened sufficiently the curing shall be started. To cure

the concrete properly and sufficiently is also the sole responsibility of
the contractor.
4.19.2 Different methods of curing
Any one of the following methods may be used for curing as approved
by the Engineer.
(a) Curing by direct water.
(b) Curing by covering the concrete with absorbent material and

kept damp.
4.19.3 Curing by direct water
This is done either by ponding or spraying water.
(a) Ponding
Ponding is widely used for curing slab and pavements. Earth

bunds are formed over the slabs and water is pumped or poured
into them and the same is replenished at interval to make up for
the loss of evaporation. As this type of curing is one of the best
methods, 10 days of curing after final setting is sufficient.
(b) By spraying water
Curing is done by spraying water by suitable means at approved

time intervals. While spraying, it shall be ensured that the
complete area is covered. In order to avoid cracking, cold water
shall not be applied to massive members immediately after
striking the form work, while the concrete is still warm.
Alternate wetting and over drying shall be avoided.
Curing by spraying water shall be continued at least for 18 days

after final setting.
4.19.4 Curing of concrete with absorbent material kept damp
II-34
204 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The entire concrete surface is covered either with hessian, burlap,

sawdust, sand, canvas or similar material and kept wet continuously for
at least 12 days after final setting.
4.20 Testing of Concrete
4.20.1 General
The Contractor shall carry out, entirely at his own cost, all sampling
and testing in accordance with the relevant I.S. standards and as
supplemented herein. The Contractor shall get all tests done in
approved Laboratory and submit to the Engineer, the test result in
triplicate within 3 days after completion of the test.
4.20.2 Consistency test (tests of fresh concrete)
4.20.2.1 At the place of deposition/pouring of the concrete, to control the

consistency, slump tests and/or compacting factor tests shall be carried
out by the Contractor in accordance with I.S. 1199-1959 as directed by
the Engineer.
4.20.2.2 The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall be recorded
in a register for reference duly signed by both the Contractor and the
Engineer. That register shall be considered as the property of the
Owner and shall be kept by the Contractor at site in safe custody.
4.20.2.3 The results of the slump tests/compacting factor tests shall tally, within
accepted variation of plus or minus 12% with the results in the
respective design mix, in case of mix design concrete and with the
values indicated in the table under clause 6.1 of IS: 456 in case of
nominal mix concrete.
4.20.2.4 For any particular batch of concrete, if the results do not conform to the
requirements as specified in 4.20.2.3 or do not conform to any
requirement of this specification, the Engineer has the right to reject
that batch and the Contractor shall remove the same immediately from
the site, at no cost to the Owner.
4.20.3 Strength test of concrete
4.20.3.1 While placing concrete, the Contractor shall make 6 nos. of 15 cm test
cubes from particular batches of concrete as desired by the Engineer.
II-35
205 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The frequency of taking test cubes shall be either according to clause

14.2 of IS: 456-1978 or as directed by the Engineer.
4.20.3.2 The cubes shall be prepared, cured and tested according to IS: 516-
1959. Out of 6 nos. of test cubes 3 shall be tested for compressive
strength at 7 days after casting and the remaining 3 at 28 days after
casting.
4.20.3.3 A register shall be maintained at site by the Contractor with the

following details entered and signed by both the Contractor and the
Engineer. That register shall be considered as the property of the
Owner.
(a) Reference to the specific structural member
(b) Mark on cubes
(c) The grade of concrete
(d) The mix of concrete
(e) Date and time of casting
(f) Crushing strength at 7 days
(g) Crushing strength at 28 days
(h) Any other information directed by the Engineer.
4.20.4 Acceptance criteria for test cubes
The acceptance criteria of concrete on strength requirement shall be in

accordance with the stipulations under clause 15 of IS: 456-1978.
4.20.5 Non-destructive tests on hardened concrete
4.20.5.1 If there is doubt about the strength or quality of a particular work or the
test results do not comply with the acceptance criteria as stipulated
under clause 15 of IS: 456-1978, non-destructive tests on hardened
concrete like core test and/or load tests or other type of non destructive
tests like ultrasonic impulse test etc. shall be carried out, as may be
directed by the Engineer, by the Contractor at entirely his own cost.
II-36
206 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.20.5.2 The core tests and load tests shall comply with the requirements of
clause 16.3 and 16.5 of IS: 456-1978 respectively. In case of other
types of special tests like ultrasonic impulse test etc., the stipulation of
clause 16.6 of IS: 456-1978 shall be applicable.
4.20.6 Concrete below specified strength
In case of failure of test cubes to meet the specified requirements the

Engineer may take one of the following actions:-
1) Instruct the Contractor to carryout additional test and/or works to

ensure the soundness of the structure at Contractor's expense.
2) Reject the work and instruct that section of the works to which
the failed cubes relate shall be cut out and replaced at
Contractor's expense and the resultant structures affected due
to such rejection shall be made good at contractor's expense.
3) Modification/remedial measures if approved by the engineer to

be carried out at contractor's expense.
4) Accept the work with reduction in the rate in appropriate item

subject to the provisions of clause 15 of IS 456-1978 provided it
is technically acceptable. The reduction in the rate shall be as
given below :-
i) When test strength of the sample is above 90% of the

characteristic strength, payment shall be made 10% less
than the contract rate.
ii) When test strength of the sample is between 80-90% of

the characteristic strength, payment shall be made 25%
below than the contract rate.
4.20.7 Concrete failed in non-destruction tests
In case the test results of the core tests or load tests in a particular
work do not comply with the requirements of respective clause (16.3 for
core test and 16.5 for load tests) of IS: 456-1978 the whole or part of
the work concerned shall be dismantled and replaced by the Contractor
as may be directed by the Engineer at no extra cost to the Owner and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No payment for the dismantled
concrete including relevant form work, reinforcement, embedded
II-37
207 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
fixtures etc. shall be made. In the course of dismantling if any damage

occurs to the adjacent structure or embedded item, the same shall be
made good, free of charge by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
4.21 Steel Reinforcement
4.21.1 Material
Material shall be as specified in the respective schedule of Items. The

specifications of materials shall be as per Part-I.
4.21.2 Storage
Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a manner that they are not
in direct contact with ground. Bars of different classifications and sizes
shall be stored separately. In cases of long storage or in coastal areas,
reinforcement shall be stacked above ground level by at least 15 cm,
and a coat of cement wash shall be given to prevent scaling and
rusting at no extra cost of the owner.
4.21.3 Bending and placing
Bending and placing of bars shall be in conformity with IS: 2502-1963

"Code of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement" and IS: 456 -1978 "Code of Practice for Plain and
Reinforced Concrete".
4.21.4 Welding of Reinforcement
Welding of mild steel reinforcement bars conforming to IS:432 (Part-I)-

1982 shall be done in accordance with IS: 2751 -1979 "Code of
Practice for Welding of Mild Steel Bars used for Reinforced Concrete
construction" with additional precaution that for lap welded joints the
throat thickness of weld beads shall be at least 3 mm or 0.6 times the
nominal size of weld (which is the radius of bar) whichever is more.
Welding of cold worked high strength deformed bars conforming to IS:

1786-1985 shall be done using electric arc welding process using low
hydrogen electrodes (Ferro Weld- I or Ferro Weld-II or equivalent).
Oxy-acetylene welding shall not be used.
II-38
208 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Butt welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter for vertical splices shall be

done either by single bevel groove weld or double bevel groove weld,
with bevel angle 45 degree. Butt welding of bars upto 32 mm diameter
for horizontal splices shall be done either by single Vee-groove weld or
double Vee-groove weld with chamfered angle of 45 degree to 60
degree. The diameter of welded joint shall be 1.2 times the diameter of
bar. Edge preparation for butt welding shall be done by shearing,
machining and grinding. Oxy-acetylene flame shall not be used for
cutting. Chamfered faces shall be smooth finished by hand file if
required.
Lap welding of bars upto 20 mm diameter shall have a minimum bead

length of 12 times the diameter of bar or 200 mm whichever is more
arranged on one or both sides. The throat thickness of weld beads
shall be 5 mm or 0.75 times the nominal size of weld (which is the
radius of bar) whichever is more. In case of unsymmetrical lap weld
with weld bead on one side only, the maximum length of each weld
bead shall be 6 times the diameter of bar or 100 mm (whichever is
more), separated by an equal length in between weld beads. Splice
bars used in symmetrical weld joint shall have same diameter as the
parent bars. Lap joint with single splice bars shall have weld beads on
both sides.
Lap welding of bars above 20 mm shall be done using splice plate or

splice angle. Thickness of splice plate shall not be less than 0,65 times
the diameter of bar and width shall not be less than twice the diameter
of bar. The size of splice angle shall be such that its area of cross
section is at least 1.62 times the area of bar being spliced.
More than one third of the bars shall not be welded at any one section
and welded joints shall be staggered at a distance of 50 times the
diameter of bars. Welding shall not be done at bends or curved parts
of bars and it shall be located at least at a distance of 50 times the
diameter of bar from bends.
Tests
Test pieces of welded bars shall be selected and tested in accordance
with the provisions of IS: 2751-1979. The number of tests will be as
laid down in IS: 2751-1979 or such larger number as the Engineer may
decide having regard to the circumstances.
4.21.5 Cleaning
II-39
209 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
All steel for reinforcement shall be free from loose scales, rust
coatings, oil, grease, paint or other harmful matters immediately before
placing the concrete. To ensure this, reinforcements with rust coatings
shall be cleaned thoroughly before bending/placement of the same.
4.21.6 Placing in position
All reinforcements shall be accurately fixed and maintained in positions

as shown on the drawings and by adequate means like mild steel
chairs and/or concrete spacer blocks as required. Bars intended to be
in contact at crossing points, shall be securely tied together at all such
points by 20G annealed soft steel wire or by tack welding in case of
bars larger than 25 mm dia, as may be directed by the Engineer.
Binders shall tightly embrace the bars with which they are intended to
be in contact and shall be securely held. The vertical distance between
successive layers of bars shall be maintained by provision of mild steel
spacer bars. They should be spaced such that the main bars do not
sag perceptibly between adjacent spacers.
4.21.7 Clear cover
Clear cover shall be as specified in the drawings. If nothing is specified

in the drawing the clear cover shall be in accordance with the relevant
clause of IS: 456-1978.
4.21.8 Light structural work and embedded metallic parts, conduits
4.21.8.1 Fabrication of metallic parts & light structural works
Fabrication of all structural steel work shall be done in accordance with

IS: 800 -1984 "Code of Practice for use of Structural Steel in General
Building Construction". Workmanship shall match to the best practice
in modern structural shops. Greatest accuracy shall be observed in the
manufacture of every part and all identical parts shall be strictly inter-
changeable. Steel work shall be shop fitted and shop assembled as far
as practicable to minimise site work and to meet transport restrictions.
All materials shall be straight and if necessary before being worked
shall be straightened of flattened by pressure and shall be free from
twists. Shearing or flame cutting may be used and the resulting edges
shall be clean and straight. Flame cut edges shall be planed/cleaned
by chipping or grinding. Sheared members shall be free from distortion
at sheared edges. Welding and welded work shall conform to IS: 816 -
II-40
210 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1969 "Code of Practice for use of metal arc welding for General
Construction in Mild Steel". Mild steel electrodes conforming to IS:
814-1991 "Specification for covered electrodes for metal arc welding of
mild steel shall be used.
4.21.8.2 Transportation and Storages
All pieces shall be properly identified and bundled for transportation to

work site. Care shall be exercised in the delivery, handling and storage
of material to ensure that material is not damaged in any manner.
Materials shall be kept free of dirt, grease and foreign matter and shall
be stored properly on skids or any other suitable supports to avoid
contact with ground, damage due to twisting, bending etc.
4.21.8.3 Erection of light structural work
Erection of light structural work shall be carried out in accordance with

the provisions of IS: 800-1984. No component which is bend or twisted
shall be put in place until the defects are corrected. Components
seriously damaged during handling shall be replaced. No riveting,
permanent bolting or welding shall be done until proper alignment has
been completed. Whenever field welding is to be done it shall be in
accordance with the requirements of shop fabrication. Shop paints
shall be removed before field welding for a distance of at least 50 mm
on either side of the joints.
4.21.8.4.1 Erection of embedded metallic parts, inserts, conduits
Bolts and inserts shall be securely fixed in position as shown in the

drawings, before commencement of concreting. Bolts shall be checked
for accuracy in alignment on both the axes. Limits of tolerance in
alignment and level shall be as shown in the drawing or described
elsewhere in these specifications.
Where bolts are housed in sleeves, special care shall be taken after
concreting is over and has partly set to ensure that the bolts move
within the sleeves. The annular space of the sleeve shall be plugged
with suitable stoppers to prevent the ingress of water, grout, dust,
rubbish or other foreign material into it, both during and after
concreting. Opened conduits shall be plugged similarly. Where
channels, Unshapely profiles or other similar inserts are required to be
II-41
211 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
placed in concrete, special care shall be taken to keep the grooves of

such profiles free from the ingress of concrete, slurry etc., by suitable
packing material, if necessary.
All threads for bolts and inserts shall be greased at intervals and kept
covered to prevent damage.
4.21.8.4.2 Necessary templates, jigs, fixtures, supports shall be used as may be

specified or required or directed by the Engineer free of cost to the
Owner.
Exposed surfaces of embedded materials shall be painted with one

coat of anticorrosive paint or bituminous paint, as desired, without any
extra cost to the Owner. If welding is to be done subsequently on the
exposed surfaces of the embedded parts, the painting for a length of
50mm beyond each side of the weld line shall be cleaned off.
4.22 Shuttering
4.22.1 General
All shuttering, formwork, supports and staging shall be designed by the

Contractor and be subject to approval by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall submit drawings and calculations to the Engineer for scrutiny
when called upon to do so. The shuttering shall be designed for a live
load of 400 Kg/m2 in addition to the weight of the green concrete, or
such other load as the Engineer may specify. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the correctness and strength of the formwork including
its supports and centering and approval by the Engineer will not relieve
him of his responsibilities.
4.22.2 Material
The staging and supports may be of round or sawn timber or tubular or

other shapes in steel. Round timber shall preferably extend over the
full height in one piece. These shall be securely jointed or otherwise
fastened and spaced at suitable intervals as the design may warrant
and shall be suitably braced at regular intervals horizontally and
diagonally.
The form work shall be of steel plate on steel frame, wooden boards
with steel sheet lining, or plywood or seasoned timber board. Where
II-42
212 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ornamental and curved surfaces are required the material shall be very
good seasoned timber or plywood which can be shaped correctly.
4.22.3 Fixing
The shuttering shall conform to the shapes, lines, levels and

dimensions shown in the drawing. It shall be fixed in perfect alignment
and securely braced so as to be able to withstand, without appreciable
displacement, deflection or movement of any kind, the weight of all
construction, movement of persons and plant. It shall be so
constructed as to remain rigid during the placing and compacting of
concrete without shifting or yielding and shall be sufficiently water tight
to prevent loss of slurry from the concrete.
All props shall be supported on sole plates and double wedges. At the
time of removing props these wedges shall be gently eased and not
knocked out. The form work shall be so designed that the sides are
independent of the soffits and the side forms can be removed easily
without any damage or shock to the concrete.
4.22.4 Wrought shuttering
Wrought shuttering shall be such as to produce a first class fair face on

the concrete free from board marks or any other disfigurements. This
shall be used for exposed surfaces where specified or directed by the
Engineer. It may be made of heavy quality plywood or steel sheets
having smooth, plain surface.
The joints in shuttering shall be arranged in a regular pattern approved

by the Engineer. Wrought shuttering shall be aligned within a tolerance
of 3 mm.
4.22.5 Rough shuttering
Rough shuttering shall be used for all surface of concrete walls,

footings etc., which are not exposed in the finished work or which are
to receive plaster and as directed by the Engineer. It may be made of
timber, ordinary plywood or steel sheets.
4.22.6 Special provision
4.22.6.1 Wherever concreting of narrow member is required to be carried out

within shutters of considerable depth, temporary openings in the sides
II-43
213 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
of the shutters shall, if so directed by the Engineer, be provided to

facilitate cleaning, pouring and consolidation of concrete.
4.22.6.2 In liquid retaining structures and structures below ground water level,
through bolts for the purpose of securing and aligning the form work
shall not be used.
4.22.6.3 Forms shall be given an upward camber, if so desired by the Engineer,

to ensure that long beams do not have any sag. The camber may be 1
in 250 or as the Engineer may direct.
4.22.6.4 The joints in form work shall be sealed by adhesive tapes or by other
means, to prevent any leakage of slurry or mortar if so directed by the
engineer.
4.22.7 Preparation for concreting
Before any concreting is commenced the shuttering shall be carefully

examined for dimensional accuracy and safety of construction. The
space to be occupied by concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned out to
remove rubbish, debris, shavings and saw dust. The surface in contact
with concrete shall be coated with an approved substance such as
mould oil or other non-staining mineral oil to prevent adhesion. Where
necessary the surface shall be wetted to prevent absorption of
moisture from concrete. Care shall be taken to avoid the
reinforcements coming in contact with shutter oil.
4.22.8 Removing
4.22.8.1 Removal of forms shall never be started until the concrete has
thoroughly set and aged to attain sufficient strength to carry twice its
own weight plus the live load that is likely to come over it during con-
struction
4.22.8.2 Removal of forms shall not entail chipping or disfiguring of the concrete
surface. Shuttering shall be removed without shock or vibration and
shall be eased off carefully in order to allow the structure to take up its
load gradually.
4.22.8.3 Under normal circumstances (generally where temperatures are above

21 degree 'C'), and where ordinary portland cement is used shuttering
may be struck after the expiry of the following periods :-
II-44
214 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
i) Walls, columns & vertical faces 24 to 48 hours as may be

directed by the Engineer.
ii) Bottom of slab upto 4.5 m span 7 days
iii) Bottom of slab above 4.5 m span, 14 days
bottom of beam and arch, rise upto 6
m span
iv) Bottom of beam and arch rise over 6 21 days
m span
These periods may be increased at the discretion of the Engineer.

Special care shall be taken while striking the shuttering of cantilevered
slabs and beams, portal frames etc.,
4.22.8.4 Before removing the form work, the Contractor must notify the
Engineer to enable him to inspect the condition of the finished concrete
immediately after the removal of the form works.
4.22.9 Contractor's responsibility
Any damage resulting from faulty preparation, premature or careless

removal of shuttering shall be made good by the Contractor at his own
expense.
4.22.10 Irrecoverable shuttering
In cases where the shuttering cannot be removed without damaging

the structure itself or where removal of shuttering is rendered
impossible due to the nature of construction or where the Engineer
may so instruct, such shuttering shall be classified as irrecoverable
shuttering. However, such abandoning of shuttering will be permitted
only in situations where it will not remain exposed or otherwise cause
damage of any kind.
4.22.11 Metal Forms
Where permanently left-in-place metal forms or deck are shown in

drawings or otherwise ordered to be provided by the Engineer, they
shall satisfy the requirements with regard to load carrying capacity.
The metal forms shall be obtained from a reputed manufacturer, whose
performance guarantee shall be obtained and submitted to the
II-45
215 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Engineer. Designs and drawings giving full details shall be submitted

to the Engineer in advance for approval.
4.23 Damp Proof Course Concrete
4.23.1 Thickness
It shall be as specified in the drawings or in the items.
4.23.2 Mix
The grade of mix shall be as specified in the drawing or schedule of

quantities. If nothing is specified, the mix shall be 1 part of cement : 1
1/2 part of coarse sand : 3 parts of stone chips. The stone chips shall
be 12 mm down graded.
Approved water proofing admixture shall be mixed with cement as per

manufacturer's specifications. The water cement ratio shall be as low
as possible to increase the impermeability of concrete and in no case
more than 0.5.
4.23.3 Preparation of base surface
The base surface shall be well roughened by chipping and brushing

with steel brush and shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust, grease, oil and all
other foreign & deleterious materials. Then the surface shall be well
moistened with water.
4.23.4 Placing and compaction
Just prior to placement of D.P.C. Concrete, a thick coat of cement

slurry shall be applied on the base surface. The placement shall be as
specified for the concrete in beams. The concrete shall be well com-
pacted to make it dense.
4.23.5 Finishing
When the concrete has set enough but remains still green, the top
surface shall be marked in regular pattern by steel trowel so as to have
proper bond with the future work.
4.23.6 Curing
II-46
216 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The D.P. course shall be kept continuously moist at least 10 days.
4.24 Grout
4.24.1 Scope
The scope covers the grouting under base plates, grouting between the
joints of precast concrete, grouting the pockets/holes/opening etc.
4.24.2 Grouting under base plates
Grouting under base plates of equipments/structures shall be of

cement mortar 1:2 for thickness upto 25 mm. For thickness exceeding
25 mm, concrete of grade specified in the drawing or minimum M-20
grade using 10 mm down graded aggregates shall be used. The grout
shall be placed in position well rammed until the whole space is
completely filled with concrete. No vibrators shall be used. Quick
setting cements shall be used in the preparation of mortar or concrete,
where so specified.
The grout shall either be "dry" concrete or mortar or "wet expanding"

concrete or mortar as the Engineer may direct. A dry grout shall have
a slump not exceeding 6 mm. It shall be rammed under the horizontal
surface with the aid of suitable tools. A "wet expanding" grout shall
have a slump of at least 125 mm but not exceeding 225 mm. To this
shall be added an expanding admixture approved by the Engineer and
in accordance to the Manufacturer's instructions.
4.24.3 Grouting the pockets/holes in concrete
Depending upon the size of the pockets/holes in the concrete, the mix
of the grout shall be either of concrete or of cement sand mortars.
Normally the grade of such concrete/mortar shall be M-20 unless
specified otherwise. In filling the holes of foundation bolts and
expanding admixture of approved type shall be used as per
manufacturer's specification.
4.24.4 Workmanship
4.24.4.1 The surface of the concrete over which grouting is to be applied shall
be thoroughly prepared to provide a clean rough surface. If necessary,
chipping shall be carried out on such surface to make it completely
II-47
217 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
rough. Then the surface shall be wetted. Bolt pockets shall be

cleaned immediately before the base plate is placed in position. Before
grouting the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed
air/water jet.
4.24.4.2 Before placement of grout, the surfaces (except in the case of bolt
holes) shall be wetted with cement slurry. In case of bolt holes/pockets
water from such pockets shall be thoroughly removed by some suitable
means and no cement slurry shall be applied.
4.24.4.3 Hand mixing is not permitted and the grout shall always be machine
mixed. If however in some special cases where the quantity of grout is
so small that it cannot be machine mixed, hand mixing may be allowed
but the same shall be done under the strict supervision of an
experienced supervisor of the Contractor.
4.24.4.4 The grout shall be placed within 30 minutes of being mixed. The grout
shall be poured and then worked into position by suitable means until
the space is completely filled. The Contractor shall take all possible
measures during grouting so that the grout fills the space completely
and thoroughly. Where the gap is very small or unapproachable for the
placement of concrete, the Contractor shall grout by pressure grouting
and in that case the mix may be of cement sand mortar of the
appropriate grade but in any case the water cement ratio shall be as
low as possible. Neither "Dry" grout (having slump 6mm or less) nor
expanding wet grout shall be grouted with any type of vibrating
machine
4.24.5 Curing
After 10 hours of grouting, the same shall be covered with wet gunny
bags and the surface shall be kept continuously moist at least for 10
days.
4.25 Concreting in Water Retaining Structures
General requirements
The basic specifications as regards 'mix' design, placing, compacting,

curing etc. shall conform to the requirements as specified herein before
II-48
218 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
in this Chapter. Over and above the materials and workmanship shall
conform to the stipulations of IS: 3370 (Part-I & II)-1965 to make dense
and impervious concrete. As specified herein before all the con-
struction joints shall be provided with approved water bars. The
expansion and construction joints, if any, shall be provided with the
requirements as specified in the drawing or as directed by the En-
gineer.
4.26 Application of Live Load
The designated live load shall be allowed on any structure only after 28
days, after proper curing is carried out on the last concrete poured in
structure.
4.27 Foam Concrete
This shall be of average 50mm thickness or as specified or as shown

on the drawings. This may be laid in in-situ in suitable panels or in
precast blocks. The insulating properties shall be such that the thermal
conductivity shall not exceed 0.125 Kcl m/m2h/degree C. The weight of
the insulating material shall be from 0.5 to 0.75 gm/cm3, strength not
less than 5 Kg/sq.cm or (0.5N/sq.mm.). In general, the main
ingredients of Foam Concretes are cement, fly ash and foaming agent
and the work shall be carried on by specialised Agencies/Companies.
Before starting the laying of foam concrete sample shall be prepared at
site and got tested for approval of the Engineer.
The foam concrete laid shall be sufficiently strong to take the usual
work loads and standard loads expected on the roof. Any damaged
portion shall be removed and replaced forthwith. Approval of the
Engineer shall be taken before laying the waterproofing over the
insulation.
While laying the foam concrete, sample batches of mix shall be kept for
test if so desired by the Engineer.
5.0 MASONRY
5.1 General
This specification deals with masonry and allied works in foundation,
plinth and superstructure.

II-49
219 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.2 Materials
For specifications of materials Part-I shall be referred.
5.3 Selection of Mortars
Mortar for masonry shall conform generally to IS: 2250-1981 "Code of

Practice for Preparation and Use of Masonry Mortars", and proportion
shall be as specified in the drawing or in the Schedule of Items.
5.4 Cement Mortar
5.4.1 Cement mortar shall be prepared by mixing cement and sand in

specified proportion. It is convenient to take unit of measurement for
cement as a bag of cement weighing 50 Kg equivalent to 0.035 cubic
metre. Sand is measured in boxes of suitable size (say of 40 x 35 x
25 cm). It shall be measured on the basis of dry volume. In case of
damp sand, the quantity shall be increased suitably to allow for bulkage
in accordance with IS:2386-1963 (part-III) or by any approved method.
5.4.2 The mixing of the mortar shall be done preferably in a mechanical

mixer. This condition may be relaxed by the engineer taking into
account the nature, magnitude and location of the work.
If mixed in the mixer, cement and sand in the specified proportion shall
be fed in the mixer and mixed dry thoroughly, water shall be then
added gradually and wet mixing continued for at least 3 minutes. In
case of hand mixing also after mixing dry on a water-tight masonary
platform, water shall be added and the mortar turned over and over,
backward and forward several times.
5.4.3 Fresh mixed mortar, in case becoming stiff due to evaporation of water
may be retempered by adding water as frequently as needed to restore
the requirement of the consistency but this shall be permitted only upto
a maximum of 2 hours from the time of addition of cement in the
mortar.
5.5 Brick Work
5.5.1 Storage and handling bricks
II-50
220 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They shall be carefully handled and
carefully stacked in regular tiers to avoid breakage and defacement of
bricks and prevent contamination by mud or other materials. The
supply of bricks shall be so arranged that as far as possible at least two
days' requirement of bricks is available at site at any time. Bricks
selected for different situations of work shall be stacked separately.
5.5.2 Soaking & Cleaning bricks
Bricks required for masonry shall be cleaned to be free from dirt, dust
and sand and fully soaked in clean water by submerging in vats before
use, till air bubbling ceases. The bricks shall not be too wet at the time
of use. After soaking they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently
early so that at the time of laying they are skin dry and stacked on a
clean space.
5.5.3 Setting out
The building lines shall be set out by the Contractor as per clause 7 of
IS: 2212-1991 and got checked by the Engineer.
5.5.4 Laying of bricks
5.5.4.1 Brickwork in general shall be as per IS 2212-1991. Bricks shall be laid

in English bond, unless otherwise specified, with frogs upward over a
full bed of evenly laid mortar, and slightly pressed and tapped into final
position to the lines levels and shape as shown in the drawing fully
embedded in mortar. All joints including inside faces shall be flushed
and packed. Not more than 8 courses shall generally be laid in a day.
The first course itself shall be made horizontal by providing enough
mortar in the bed joint to fill up any undulations. The horizontality of
courses and the verticality of wall shall be checked very often with spirit
level and plumb bob respectively.
5.5.4.2 Horizontal joints shall be truly horizontal and vertical joints shall line up
in every alternate course. The joints shall not exceed 10 mm in
thickness and shall be well finished and neatly struck. The joints shall
be kept uniform throughout the brick work. All the brick joints of the
face works shall be neatly raked out to a minimum depth of 15 mm with
the help of raking tools and the faces of brick wall cleaned with wire
brush to remove any splashes of mortar before the close of the day's
work, while the mortar is still green and the last brick layer shall be
cleaned with wire brush and the frogs free from mortar.
II-51
221 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.5.4.3 Walls coming in contact with R.C.C. structures shall perfectly be

bonded with M.S. inserts or lugs where shown on drawings and the
sides butting against the R.C.C structures neatly and efficiently flashed
and packed with rich mortar & cement slurry at no extra cost (cost of
M.S. inserts or lugs used shall be measured and paid separately under
relevant items). Where such lugs are not required to be provided, brick
work shall be built tightly against columns, slabs or other structural
parts, around door and window frames with proper distance to permit
caulked joint. Where drawings indicate structural steel column or beam
to be partly or wholly covered with brick work, bricks shall be built
closely against all flanges and webs, with all spaces between steel and
brick work filled solid with mortar not less than 10 mm thick.
5.5.4.4 Damaged or broken brick or brick bats shall not be used in brick work.
Cut bricks may be used to complete bond or as closers or around
irregular openings.
5.5.4.5 Bricks shall not be thrown from heights to the ground, but shall be
handled carefully and put gently in position to avoid damaging their
edges.
5.5.4.6 Selected bricks of regular shape and dimension shall be used for face
work.
5.5.4.7 Making of grooves, sleeves and chases shall be done, during the
construction, to the lines, levels and position as shown in the drawing
or as instructed by the Engineer. Such sleeves shall slope outward in
external walls so that their surface cannot form channels for the easy
passage of water inside.
5.5.4.8 Fixtures, plugs, frames,pipes, inserts etc., if any, shall be built in at the
right places to the lines & levels as shown in the drawings while laying
the course and not later by disturbing the brick work already laid.
5.5.4.9 Brick walls of one brick thick or less shall have one selected face in
true plane and walls more than one brick thick shall have both the
faces of wall in true plane.
5.5.4.10 All connected brick work shall be carried out simultaneously with
uniform heights throughout the work, and in exceptional cases, with the
approval of the Engineer, the brick work built in any part of the work
may be lower than another adjoining wall/connected wall by a
II-52
222 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
maximum of one metre and the difference in height of adjoining

wall/connecting wall shall be raked back according to bond by stepping
at an angle not steeper than 45 degree, without sacrificing the
necessary bond, horizontality of layers, verticality of joints and the wall.
Toothing shall not be allowed in brick work, for raking back. The top
layer just below the R.C.C slab or beam shall be laid with frogs down
over a layer of mortar on full width.
5.5.4.11 Openings in brick work
Openings shall be made in brick work, which may be of any shape,

size, at all levels, heights or depths, including round openings, as
shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer, maintaining the
necessary bond using a minimum of cut bricks. Openings in external
face walls, the sills, jambs, soffits of opening may be rebated and the
sill shall be sloped slightly for drainage of rain water.
5.5.4.12 All exposed brick work shall be rubbed down, thoroughly washed,
cleaned and pointed as specified. Where face bricks of specific quality
are used the same shall be rubbed with carborundum stone.
5.5.5 Half-brick masonry
5.5.5.1 Half-brick work shall be done in the same manner as for brick work
except that all courses shall be laid in stretchers. Both faces shall be
true to plane and the joints raked on both faces.
Where reinforcement is considered necessary or specified and shown

in drawing, M.S. bars or hoop iron shall be provided as stipulated in the
Schedule of Items or as directed by the engineer. The reinforcement
shall be cleaned of rust and loose scale with a wire brush, and shall be
laid straight on the mortar and lapped with the dowel bars provided in
the column, securely anchoring them at their ends where the half-brick
wall butts. The batching of mortar usually shall be in the proportion of
1:4 or as stipulated in the Schedule of Items. Half of the mortar for the
joints shall first be laid and the other half laid after the reinforcement is
laid in position, so that the reinforcement is fully embedded in position.
5.5.6 Brick on edge masonry
The work brick on edge masonry wall in superstructure shall be done in

the same manner as mentioned for brick work except that it shall
always be reinforced with wire mesh netting of approved variety as
II-53
223 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
specified in the item and embedded in cement mortar at interval as

specified in the Schedule of Items. The wire netting shall be
continuously laid and securely anchored with the dowel bars provided
& projecting from the walls/RCC structure or steel structures at their
ends where brick on edge wall butts. The batching of mortar usually
shall be in the proportion of 1:3 or as stipulated in the Schedule of
Items.
5.5.7 Protection of brick work
The brick wall shall be protected and covered with gunny bags or
water proof sheets from the effects of inclement weather, rain, frost,
etc., during the construction and until the mortar sets. Care shall be
taken during construction that the edges of jambs, sills and soffits of
openings are not damaged.
5.5.8 Curing
All brick works shall be kept moist for 10 days after laying.
5.5.9 Scaffolding
5.5.9.1 Necessary and suitable scaffolding shall be provided at all heights to

facilitate the construction of brick wall. Scaffolding shall be sound,
strong and all supports and other members shall be sufficiently strong
and rigid, stiffened with necessary bracings and shall be firmly
connected to the walls securing them against swing or sway. Planks
shall be laid over the scaffolding at required levels. Scaffolding shall
preferably be of tubular steel, although the Engineer may permit other
material, depending upon the circumstances.
5.5.9.2 Scaffolding shall be double, having two sets of vertical supports,

particularly for the face wall and all exposed brick work. Single
scaffolding may be used for buildings upto two storeys high or at other
locations, if permitted by the Engineer. In such case the inner ends of
horizontal members shall rest in holes provided in header course only.
Such holes shall not be allowed in pillars under one metre in width, or
immediately near the skew backs or arches. The holes thus left in
masonry shall be filled with bricks set in rich mortar and the surface
made good on removal of scaffolding.
II-54
224 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.5.9.3 If for any reason the Contractor is required to erect scaffolding in

property other than that belonging to the Owner, including municipal
corporation or local bodies, necessary permission shall be obtained by
the Contractor from the appropriate authorities and necessary licensing
fees if any shall have to be borne by him.
5.5.9.4 All scaffoldings once erected shall be allowed to remain in position,

efficiently maintained by the Contractor, till all the finishing works
required to be done are completed and shall not be removed without
the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall allow workmen of other trades to make

reasonable use of the scaffolding without any extra cost.
5.6 Stone masonry
5.6.1 General
All aspects of the work shall be in conformity with the "Code of Practice
for Construction of Stone Masonry, IS: 1597 (Part-I & II)-1992.
Relevant clauses under brick work, such as setting out, making
chases, openings, fixing frames and plugs, protection, curing,
scaffolding etc., shall apply to stone masonry and concrete block
masonary.
5.6.2 Mortar
The mortar used shall be as specified in the Schedule of Items or

drawing.
5.6.3 Holes and Plugs
Holes in stone walls shall be left for water supply, plumbing, sanitation,
electrification, etc., where shown on drawings or ordered by the
Engineer as the work proceeds. These holes shall, on completion, be
made good to match with the adjoining wall. The Contractor shall
provide and fix wooden plugs, water supply piping and electric conduit
pipes etc. where so specified.
5.6.4 Random rubble masonry
II-55
225 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.6.4.1 Laying
All stones shall be wetted and cleaned of all dust and loose materials
before laying. Stones shall be laid on their natural beds, fitted carefully
to the adjacent stones to form neat and close joints fully packed with
mortar and chips and spalls of stone may also be used wherever
necessary to avoid thick mortar bed or joints. Walls shall be carried to
plumb or to the specified batter. Stones may be brought to level
course at plinth, window sills and roof levels and the leveling shall be
done with concrete comprising of 1 part of the mortar as used for the
masonry and 2 parts of 20 mm down graded hard stone chips at no
extra cost. Bond shall be provided by fitting in closely the adjacent
stones and by using bond stones running through the thickness of wall
in a line from the face to back with at least one bond stone, or a set of
bond stones, for every 0.5 sq.m. of the wall surface. Face stones shall
extend and bond well into the backing. These shall be arranged to
break joints as much as possible, and to avoid long vertical lines of
joints.
5.6.4.2 Quoins
Quoins shall be of selected stones, neatly dressed with hammer or

chisel to form the required angle and laid header and stretcher
alternately. No quoin stone shall be smaller than 0.025cum (25dcum in
volume and it shall also not be less than 300mm in length, 25% of them
being not less than 500mm in length).
5.6.4.3 Joints
The stones shall be so laid that the joints are fully packed with mortar
and chips and face joints shall not be more than 20 mm thick. When
plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall be
struck flush and finished at the time of laying, otherwise the joints shall
be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during the
progress of work, when the mortar is still green.
5.6.5 Coursed rubble masonry - First sort
5.6.5.1 Laying
All stones shall be wetted before use. The walls shall be carried up
truly plumb or to specified batter. All courses shall be laid truly
II-56
226 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. The height of
each course shall not be less than 15 cm nor more than 30 cm.
Face stones shall be laid alternate headers and stretchers. No pinning

shall be allowed on the face. No face stone shall be less in breadth
than its height and at least one third of the stones shall tail into the
work for length not less than twice their height.
The hearting or the interior filling of the wall shall consist of stones
carefully laid on their proper beds in mortar, chips and spalls of stone
being used where necessary to avoid thick beds of joints of mortar and
at the same time ensuring that no hollow spaces are left anywhere in
the masonry. The chips shall not be used below the hearting stone to
bring these upto the level of face stones. The use of chips shall be
restricted to the filling of interstices between the adjacent stones in
hearting and these shall not exceed 10% of the quantity of stone
masonry. The masonry in a structure shall be carried up regularly but
where breaks are unavoidable, the joints shall be raked back at an
angle not steeper than 45 degree. Toothing shall not be allowed.
5.6.5.2 Bond Stones
Bond stone or a set of bond stones shall be inserted 1.5 to 1.8 metres
apart, in every course.
5.6.5.3 Quoins
The quoins, shall be of the same height as the course in which these
occur. These shall be at least 45 cm long and shall be laid stretchers
and headers alternately. These shall be laid square on the beds, which
shall be rough-chisel dressed to a depth of at least 10 cm. In case of
exposed work, these stones shall have a minimum of 2.5 cm wide
chisel drafts at four edges, all the edges being in the same plane.
5.6.5.4 Joints
All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints
shall be fully packed with mortar, face joints shall not be more than one
cm thick.
When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall

be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints
II-57
227 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during the

5.6.6 Coursed rubble masonry - Second sort
5.6.6.1 Laying
Shall be as specified in 5.6.5.1 except that the use of chips shall not
exceed 15% of the quantity of stone masonry, and stone in each
course need not be of the same height but more than two stones shall
not be used in the height of a course.
5.6.6.2 Bond stone, quoins
Shall be as specified for first sort respectively.
5.6.6.3 Joints
All bed joints shall be horizontal and all side joints vertical. All joints
shall be fully packed with mortar, face joints shall not be more than 2
cm thick.
When plastering or pointing is not required to be done, the joints shall

be struck flush and finished at the time of laying. Otherwise, the joints
shall be raked to a minimum depth of 20 mm by raking tool during the
5.7 Hollow concrete block masonry
5.7.1 Construction of hollow concrete masonry shall be done in accordance

with procedures laid down in IS: 2572-1963. General procedures for
construction shall conform to IS: 2212-1991 except for the following :
5.7.2 Storage, handling and preparation
The blocks shall be stored in stable stacks over planks or other

supports with sufficient care taken to prevent ingress or moisture.
Blocks shall be handled carefully to avoid cracking. All damaged units

shall be rejected and removed from site.
II-58
228 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Blocks need not be wetted before or during placement. Unless the

climatic condition so require, the top and sides may be slightly wetted.
5.7.3 Mortars
Mortar for use in hollow concrete block masonry shall be made from
cement, slaked lime and sand unless otherwise specified. The mix
preparation shall be as recommended in Table-I of IS: 2572-1963.
Preparation of mortar shall be in accordance with IS: 2250-1981.
5.7.4 Laying
Laying of block for first and subsequent courses and requirements of

horizontal and vertical joints shall be as described in IS: 2572-1963.
Use of hollow blocks in foundations shall be avoided. Use of blocks
filled with sand and blocks filled with 1:3:6 concrete for foundation
courses, plinths and basements shall be done with approval of
Engineer. Closure blocks of superstructure shall have all openings
battered with mortar. A course of solid concrete block masonry shall be
provided under door and window openings or a 10 cm thick precast
concrete sill block shall be provided under windows. This course shall
extend at least 20 cm beyond the openings on either side. Solid
blocks or hollow blocks filled with 1:3:6 concrete shall be used for
jambs or fixing of hold fasts etc., Similarly solid blocks or U-shaped
blocks filled with 1:3:6 concrete shall be used for roof course. They
shall be finished smooth at top with 1:3 cement mortar and covered
with a coat of crude oil, craft paper or oil paper for free roof movement.
5.7.5 Bond
Wherever two walls intersect, bond between at least 50% of the units
intersecting shall be provided. If intersecting walls are laid separately
pockets shall be left in the first wall at a maximum vertical spacing of
20 cm for the corresponding course of second wall to be built into these
pockets.
Pilasters shall be of twice the thickness. Hollow blocks shall not be

used for isolated piers unless they are filled with 1:3:6 concrete.
6.0 PLASTERING AND POINTING
6.1 Materials
II-59
229 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The specification of materials shall conform to the requirements as

specified in Part-I.
6.2 Plastering
6.2.1 General
Plastering shall be done in accordance with provisions of IS: 1661-

1972. Mix proportions of mortar for plastering and thickness of plaster
shall be as given either in the drawing, or as per Schedule of Items or
as directed by the Engineer. For special plaster work, necessary
admixtures shall be added to mortar in required proportion as per
manufacturer's specifications or as specified herein. The thickness
mentioned in the Schedule of Items shall be minimum thickness.
6.2.2 Preparation of surface
The surface to be plastered shall be cleaned of all extraneous matter

and rubbish. In masonry the joints shall be raked to a minimum depth
of 12 mm and cleaned with wire brush. Concrete surfaces to be
plastered shall be roughened and hacked to form key for plastering. All
plastered surfaces shall be finished smooth with a wooden float in one
plane and all internal angles shall be finished slightly rounded. If
desired by the Engineer, any unevenness shall be rubbed down by
carborundum stones. The surface to be plastered shall be wetted
evenly before the application of plastering. Trimming of projections on
brick/concrete surfaces wherever necessary shall be done.
For one coat plastering the plaster shall be laid slightly thicker than the
specified thickness and the surface then leveled with flat wooden float
to the required thickness. For two coat plaster work, the first coat
(usually half of total thickness) shall be applied as detailed above
except that the surface shall be left rough and keys formed for the
application of second coat. The second coat shall be laid on with a
wooden float to the specified thickness and shall be applied a day or
two after the first coat has set, but has not dried up.
Cement mortar for plastering work shall be used within 30 minutes after
adding water to cement and should be kept agitated at intervals of 20
minutes.
If specified cement punning shall be done over the plastered surface

by sprinkling neat cement powder evenly on the surface and rubbed
II-60
230 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
smoothly with a trowel to give a fine coating. The plaster shall be kept
wet for at least seven days and protected from extreme temperature
and weather during this period
The arises of doors and windows shall have richer mortar 1:3 in a width
of 75 mm on either side or as required at respective location.
6.2.3 Concrete beams, slabs, columns etc. framing into masonry are to be
plastered along with masonry walls with these edges wrapped with
chicken wire mesh of gauge 24. Overlapping of mesh shall be minimum
75 mm on either side of the edge of the concrete element. Minimum lap
for chicken wire mesh shall be 50 mm.
6.3 Cement Pointing
6.3.1 Where shown on drawing, Schedule of Items, or as directed by the

Engineer, exposed brick faces shall be cement rule pointed. The
mortar shall be raked out of the joints to a depth of 12 mm. The dust
shall be brushed out of the joints and the wall well wetted.
Unless otherwise specified the pointing shall be made with cement and
sand mixed in proportion 1:3. The joints of the pointed work shall be
neatly finished truly vertical and horizontal or as directed and the lines
shall be kept wet till the cementing material has set and become hard.
If required, the whole brick face shall be rubbed and polished with fine
grade of carborundum stones. Particular care shall be taken to see
that no brick face or brick edge is damaged during this work.
6.3.2 Flush pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished flush
and levelled. The edges shall be neatly trimmed with trowel and
straight edges.
6.3.3 Ruled pointing
The joint shall be initially formed as for flush pointing and then, while
mortar is still green, a groove of required shape and size shall be
formed by running a forming tool straight along the centre line of the
joint till a smooth and hard surface is obtained. The vertical joints shall
also be finished in similar way. The pointing line shall be uniform in
width and truly horizontal in case of floors and ceilings.
II-61
231 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
6.3.4 Cut or weather struck pointing
The mortar shall first be pressed into joints. The top of the horizontal
joints shall then be neatly pressed back by about 3mm with the pointing
tool so that the joint is sloping from top to bottom. The vertical joint
shall be ruled pointed. The junctions of vertical joints with the horizontal
joints shall be at true right angles.
6.3.5 Raised and cut pointing
This type of pointing shall project from the wall facing with its edges cut
parallel so as to have a uniformly raised band about 6mm raised and
width 10mm or more as directed. The pointing shall be finished to a
smooth but hard surface. the superfluous mortar then shall be cut off
from the edges of the lines and the surface of the masonry shall also
be cleaned off all the mortar.
Curing
The pointing shall be kept wet for 7 days. During this period it shall be
suitably protected from all damages.
6.3.6 Pointing on brick flooring
Specification for this shall be conforming to under sub head "Pointing".
6.3.7 Pointing on random rubble stone masonry
In such pointing, the mortar shall be simply struck off with a trowel and
the work left showing the natural irregularities in line and surface of the
stones themselves. Other specifications shall remain same as per para
8.3 under sub head "Pointing".
6.4 Rough Cast Concrete Facing
6.4.1 The surface shall be prepared as for Cement plaster and then 2 cm
backing coat of cement sand mortar 1:3 shall be applied.
Subsequently, when the backing coat is in plastic state, a top coat 12
mm average thick cement and stone chips mixture in proportion 1:3
(stone chips 10 mm size and below) shall be applied by dashing the
mixture on top with trowel to produce uniform rough texture. The mix
shall again be dashed over the vacant spaces if any. The surface shall
afterwards be cured for 10 days. After curing, the surface shall be
II-62
232 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
brushed with hard wire brush to remove loose chips from the surface.
A coat of cement wash shall then be applied, the cost of which shall be
included in the rate of the item.
6.4.2 Rendered sand faced cement plaster
The surface shall be prepared as for cement plaster. The backing coat
shall be 12 mm thick of cement plaster proportion 1:4 (1 cement and 4
sand) and keys shall be formed on the surface. After curing this coat
sufficiently, the finishing coat 6 mm thick consisting of grey cement and
screened coarse sand to required gradation (1:3) shall be applied and
finished to the desired te texture to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The surface afterwards shall be cured for 7 days.
6.4.3 Plaster moulding
Where specified, plaster moulding shall be strictly as per drawings and

details, and shall run clean and true from proper templates and moulds,
to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. Rates shall include for brick
or concrete cores and for any necessary dabbing in cement mortar or
brick or metal lath curing and final finish as desired. Where desired, all
angles in internal moulding work shall be covered to a radius of 50 mm
or as directed without any extra charges.
6.4.4 Floating coat with neat cement
When the plaster has been brought to a true surface with the wooden
straight edge, it shall be uniformly treated over its entire area with a
paste of neat cement and rubbed smooth so that whole surface is
covered with neat cement coating. Smooth finishing shall be completed
with a trowel immediately and in no case later than half an hour of
adding water to cement.
6.4.5 Pebble dash plaster
Specification shall be same as that for rough cast concrete facing vide
8.4.1 except that pebbles or graded crushed stone, of size 10mm to
20mm or as specified/directed by the Engineer, shall be well washed
and drained and then dashed/thrown wet on the plaster surfaces while
it is still plastic, using strong whipping motion at right angles to the face
of wall, pressed flat and filling uncover parts by hand so that finished
surface represents homogeneous look. The finished surface shall be
lightly tapped with a trowel to ensure good bond.
II-63
233 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
6.5 Punning with Lime or Plaster of Paris
6.5.1 Lime Punning

Lime punning shall be carried out with best quality approved lime. Lime
shall be properly stirred, tempered with water to form a homogeneous
mass and strained through fine cloth. The punning shall be laid and
rubbed and troweled to an uniform smooth even finish using special
trowels. Any unevenness shall be rubbed down with fine sand paper.
The plaster must be dry before the lime punning is applied. The
punning shall be kept wet for a period of 7 days. The lime paste shall
be kept wet until use and no more quantity than can be consumed in
10 days shall be prepared at a time. No portion of the surface shall be
leftout initially to be patched up later on.
6.5.2 Plaster of Paris punning
This shall be provided by using the best quality of plaster of Paris from
approved manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified same procedure
as for lime punning shall be followed for getting uniform smooth finish.
7.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING
7.1 Scope
Flooring, Paving and facing includes flooring, skirting and dado of

various types encountered in plants, buildings, pavements etc. as
described under respective heads. For the items which have not been
covered up in this chapter completely or covered up only partly,
specifications suggested by the manufacturers for the materials,
surface preparation, workmanship and all other byeworks etc., shall be
strictly followed. In addition to this the entire job will have to be carried
out as per direction of the engineer, which shall be final.
7.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to Part-I of this series.
II-64
234 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.3 General
Flooring, skirting & dado may have to be done in discontinuous strips

or areas to suit the needs of erection and commissioning of equipment.
Flooring shall be done in close co-ordination with erection of equipment
or other services and shall keep pace with the demands in respect of
commissioning of individual equipment. No claims for extra shall be
tenable for reasons of discontinuity of work or delay in having areas
available for work.
Unless otherwise specifically included in the Schedule of Quantities or

stated in the description of work, no extra shall be payable for works
such as forming coves at internal angles, nosing at plinths, steps,
window sills and stair treads, dishing in bath rooms, toilet & other
places and cutting to line and fair finish to top edge of skirting and
dado. Thickness mentioned shall be the minimum.
7.4 Sub-base
Flooring at ground level having sub-base of sand or earth as specified

shall be laid in layers of 15 cm, watered and consolidated by rolling
with hand roller or ramming with iron rammer and with butt ends of the
crow bars. When filling reaches the required level, the surface shall be
flooded with water for 24 hours, allowed to dry and then rammed and
consolidated to avoid any settlement later. The thickness of the sub-
base shall be as specified either in the drawing or in the Schedule of
Items.
7.5 Subgrade
The surface shall be brought to the desired level before subgrade is

laid, loose pockets shall be filled up and whole surface shall be
consolidated by tamping. Vegetable growth and other decomposed
matter, rubbish etc., shall be removed.
7.5.1 Hard core subgrade
Where hardcore subgrade is specified, stone/slag boulders/laterite

boulders shall be laid closely stacked together, the longer edge being
laid vertically. All interstices shall be filled with smaller particles of the
same material or with gravel or red earth. The top surface shall be
spread with loose moorum sufficient to cover the gap and to achieve
II-65
235 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
uniform top surface. The surface shall then be adequately watered and
rolled by roller.
Hard core shall be laid to form the desired slope in the finished floor.
7.5.2 Brick Khoa subgrade
Over burnt bricks shall be used for getting brick khoa as per sizes
described in Schedule of Items. The khoa shall be laid uniformly and
rammed in dry and wet conditions so as to get a uniform compact
surface.
7.6 Cement Concrete Flooring with Integral Finish
Cement concrete shall be mixed, laid, consolidated and cured as

described in Chapter "Concrete". Laying of concrete shall be done in
alternate panels. The size and division of panels shall be as per
direction of Engineer. The mix or grade of concrete shall be as
specified in Schedule of Items.
The finished surface may be rendered smooth by trowel finishing to

provide an appearance of fine and smooth textured surface and in
panels or in geometric pattern as specified in Schedule of Items or as
directed by Engineer.
7.7 Concrete Flooring with Granolithic Finish

(Artificial Stone Flooring)
Granolithic finish shall either be laid monolithically over base concrete

or separately over hardened base concrete. The subgrade shall be
either brick khoa/lime concrete/cement concrete, as specified. Flooring
shall be laid and finished according to IS : 5491-1967.
7.7.1 Thickness
Unless otherwise mentioned the thickness of flooring including topping

shall be either 25 mm or 40 mm or 50 mm as shown on
drawing/Schedule of Items. The net thickness of topping shall be 6
mm for 25 mm thick floor, 10 mm for 40 mm and 12 mm for 50mm thick
floor. An additional allowance of 2mm in thickness of topping shall be
made for cutting and grinding margin wherever polishing is specified in
the item. The rate of the item will be inclusive of this.
II-66
236 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.7.2 Mix
For base or under bed course, the mix shall be 1:2:4 concrete, unless
specified otherwise. The mix of the topping shall consist of 1 part
cement :1 part coarse sand : 1 part coarse aggregated by volume or 1
part cement and 1 part stone chips. The coarse aggregate shall very
hard like granite and well graded and size of chips shall be 3mm for
6mm topping & 6mm to 3mm for 10mm or more thick topping.
Minimum quantity of water to get workability shall be added.
7.7.3 Laying
a) Laying of monolithic topping
The concrete base or underbed shall be laid as per specification

"Cement Concrete" and levelled upto the required grade. The
surface shall remain sufficiently rough to take the finish.
To prevent construction cracks, the panels shall be divided in

square or rectangular pattern. For floor finish of 40mm thickness
or above, the maximum panel area shall be 2.5 sq.m. with none
of the sides exceeding 2.5m, however for lesser thickness these
shall be 1.5sq.m. and 2.5m respectively. The dividing strip may
be aluminium or glass or as specified and shall have the same
depth as that of floor. Within about 2 to 3 hours of laying the
base while it is still fully 'green' the topping shall be laid evenly to
proper thickness and grade. The topping shall be pressed firmly
and rigorously to form full bond with the base/underbed.
The laitance brought to the surface during compression shall be

removed carefully without disturbing the stone chips. The
surface shall then be lightly troweled to remove all marks and
shall be left for sometime till moisture disappears from it. Fresh
quantity of cement @ 2.2 Kg per sq.m. of the flooring shall be
mixed to form a thick slurry and spread over the surface while
concrete is still green. The cement slurry then shall be floated
even & smooth. Polishing, if specified, shall be done with
polishing machine and the portion where machine cannot be
used manually to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If specified so
the surface of the flooring shall be finished ribbed, chequered or
laid in slope without any extra cost unless specified so in the
item. On completion, the floor shall be kept flooded with water
II-67
237 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
for 10 days and shall be adequately protected before it is

sufficiently hard.
(b) Laying of topping separately on hardened base
The sub base shall be laid as in clause 7.7.3. The surface of the
base concrete shall be thoroughly brushed and cleaned free
from all dirt, mortar droppings and laitance etc.. Where the
surface has hardened too much, chipping or hacking of the
surface may be necessary. The surface shall then be wetted
with water for several hours and surplus water mopped. Neat
cement slurry at 2.75Kg/sq.m. of surface shall be brushed into
the clean surface. The topping then shall be laid as described in
clause 7.9.3.
7.7.4 General
The junction of the floors with all plaster dado or skirting shall be
rounded of with 1:1 cement sand mortar & polished, if specified or
shown in drawing.
7.7.5 Curing
Immediately after laying, the finish shall be protected against rapid

drying. As soon as the surface had hardened sufficiently, it shall be
kept continuously moist for at least 10 days by means of wet gunny
bags or ponding of water on the surface. The floor shall not be
exposed to use during this period.
7.7.6 Grinding & finishing
Where grinding is specified, it shall start only after the finish has fully
set. The grinding shall be done with carborundum stone of No. 60,
then No. 80 and then 120 as per the method as specified in in-situ
mosaic flooring. After final polishing, the floor shall be rubbed with
oxalic acid and then wax polished.
7.8 Dado & Skirting Work (Grey Cement Skirting/Dado)
A backing coat of 12 mm thick and 15 mm thick shall be applied on

walls after proper dabbing of the surface for a finished thickness of 18
mm and 21 mm thick respectively, with cement plaster of proportion 1:4
II-68
238 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(1 cement and 4 approved quality sand) or as specified. Over this a

top coat 6mm/7mm thick consisting of one cement to one stone chips 3
mm nominal size shall be applied. If grinding and polishing specified,
the same shall be done as per granolithic flooring with carborundum
stones.
7.8 Flooring & Facing with Redoxide of Iron

(Red Artificial Stone Flooring)
It shall consist of an underbed or base course and topping over already

laid & matured concrete subgrade.
7.9.1 Thickness
Unless otherwise specified the total thickness of the flooring shall be

either 40 mm or 25 mm of which the topping shall not be less than 6
mm (net) for 25 mm thickness and 10 mm (net) for 40 mm thickness.
The topping shall be of uniform thickness, the underbed may vary in
thickness to provide necessary slopes. For vertical surfaces the total
thickness shall be 18 mm, of which the topping thickness shall be 6
mm (net). Where grinding (cutting) & polishing is specified a minimum
allowance of 2 mm shall be kept for cutting & polishing so that the net
specified top thickness is achieved. All junctions of vertical with
horizontal shall be rounded neatly to uniform radius of 25 mm or as
shown in the drawing.
7.9.2 Mix
i) Course or base course
The underbed for floors and similar horizontal surfaces shall

consist of a mix of 1 pert cement, 2 parts coarse sand and 4
parts 10 mm down graded stone chips by volume. For vertical
and similar surfaces the mix shall consist of 1 part cement to 3
or 4 parts coarse sand by volume as specified in the item.
ii) Topping course
For the topping white cement and red oxide of iron pigment
powder shall be dry mixed thoroughly (generally 10:1 by weight)
to produce the desired colour when laid. The mix shall then be
prepared with 1 part white cement (mixed with pigment) and 3
parts coarse sand by volume. The whole quantity required for
II-69
239 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
each visible area shall be prepared in one batch to ensure

uniform colour.
7.9.3 Laying
The underbed shall be laid in panels of maximum area 2.5 sq.m. each
and no side shall be more than 1.5m long. For outdoor locations the
maximum area shall be 2.0 sq.m. or as specified. The forms for the
panels shall have perfectly aligned edges to the full depth of the total
thickness of finish. Aluminium or glass dividing strips shall be used as
forms. The underbed shall be laid compacted, levelled and brought to
proper grade with a screed or float. The topping shall be placed after
about 24 hours while the underbed is still somewhat 'Green' but firm
enough to receive the topping.The surface of the underbed shall be
roughhead for better bonding. The topping shall be rolled for
horizontal areas and thrown and pressed for vertical areas to extract all
superfluous cement and water to achieve a compact dense mass fully
bonded with the underbed. The topping shall then be levelled up by
troweling and finished smooth with a slurry made with already prepared
cement and pigment mixture. About 2.0 kg of the mixture shall be
consumed/per sq.m. for horizontal surface, and 1.0 kg for vertical
surface.
7.9.4 Grinding & polishing
Where grinding & polishing specified, the same shall be done 36 hours
after laying when the surface has hardened sufficiently. It shall be
polished with polishing stone, in sequence of different grades of
carborundum stones (first No. 60, then No. 80 & then No.120) till a
smooth shiny surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer is achieved.
After final polishing, the finished areas shall be rubbed with oxalic acid
and then wax polished.
7.10 Terrazzo Flooring & Facing
General
The terrazzo work shall be done by approved firm or specialists.

Marble chips used for facing coat of terrazzo work shall be of best
quality (from Dehradoon or other approved source) and of uniform tint
and colour and shall be approved by the Engineer before using in the
work. All terrazzo work shall be polished on completion followed by a
final wax polish of approved quality.
II-70
240 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Terrazzo work shall be done either cast-in-situ or with precast tiles as

specified in the Schedule of Quantities Unless otherwise specified
thickness for cast-in-situ terrazzo work shall be 25 mm including base
course and for tiles 20 mm excluding mortar bed.
7.10.1 Cast-in-situ terrazzo flooring
It shall consist of an underbed and a topping laid over an already

matured concrete subgrade.
7.10.1.1 Thickness
Unless specified otherwise, the total thickness of the finished flooring

shall be either 25 mm or 40 mm of which the topping shall be minimum
6 mm (net) for 25 mm and minimum 10 mm net for 40 mm flooring. A
minimum allowance of 2 mm in the topping shall be kept for grinding
and polishing so as to achieve the minimum specified thickness of
topping. All junctions of vertical with horizontal planes shall be rounded
neatly to uniform radius of 25 mm or as shown in the drawings.
7.10.1.2 Mix
i) Underbed course
The underbed for floors and similar horizontal surface shall

consist of a mix of 1 part cement, 2 parts sand and 4 parts stone
chips by volume. The sand shall be coarse. The stone chips
shall be 10 mm down well graded. Only minimum water to be
added to give a workable consistency.
ii) Topping
Topping shall consist of cement (grey or white) as specified with

or without colour pigment, marble powder and marble chips.
The proportion of cement and marble powder shall be 3 parts of
cement to one part of marble powder by weight. The proportion
shall be inclusive of any pigments added to the cement. The
proportion to which pigments are mixed with grey or white
cement to obtain various shades for the binder, shall be as
specified in Table-I of IS : 2114-1984.
II-71
241 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The proportion of marble chips and cement marble powder mix

shall be 7 parts of marble chips to 4 parts of cement marble
powder mix mixed by volume. Care shall be taken to ensure an
even and uniform disposition of the marble chips.
7.10.1.3 Laying
i) Laying of underbed
The underbed shall be laid in panels in the same manner as that

for artificial stone flooring. The panels shall not be more than 2
sq.m. in area of which no side shall be more than 2.0 m long.
Cement slurry @ 2.75 kg/sq.m. shall be applied before laying
over cement concrete/RCC surface/ plastered surface.
Dividing strips made of aluminium or glass shall be used for

forming the panels. The strips shall exactly match the total
depth of underbed plus topping. In case of in-situ dado work,
the sections shall not be more than 60 cm x 60 cm and the
aluminium, glass or any other material strips provided similarly.
ii) Laying of topping
After laying, the underbed shall be leveled compacted and

brought to proper grade with screed or float. The topping shall
be laid after about 24 hours while the underbed is still somewhat
'green' but firm enough to receive the topping. A slurry of the
mixture of cement and pigment already made shall be spread
evenly and brushed in just before laying the topping. The
topping shall be rolled for horizontal areas and thrown and
pressed for vertical areas to extract all superfluous cement and
water and to achieve a compact dense mass fully bonded with
the underbed. The terrazo surface shall be tamped, troweled
and brought true to the required level by straight edge and steel
floats in such a manner that maximum amount of marble chips
come up and are spread uniformly over the surface and no part
of the surface is left without the chips. Excessive troweling
should be avoided in early stages lest too much cement may
come up the surface leading to surface cracking and requiring
more grinding to expose marble chip.
II-72
242 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.10.1.4 Curing
The surface shall be left dry for air curing for about 12 to 18 hours and
then cured by allowing water to stand on the surface or by covering
with wet sack for seven days.
7.10.1.5 Grinding & polishing
Grinding and polishing shall be done either by hand or by machine. In

case of manual grinding, the process of grinding shall begin after 2
days while in case of machine grinding the process shall start after
seven days after completion of laying. First grinding shall be done with
carborundum stone of 60 grit size. The floor shall then be washed and
cleaned to remove mud and grindings, a grout of cement and colouring
pigment in same proportion of the topping shall be applied to cover the
pin holes. The surface shall be cured for 5 to 7 days and then ground
with machine fitted fine grit blocks (No. 120). The surface shall be
again cleaned and repaired as mentioned above and shall be cured for
3 to 5 days. Finally the third grinding shall be done with machine fitted
with fine grit blocks (No. 320) to get even and smooth surface without
pin holes. The finished surface should show the marble chips evenly
exposed.
Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible/ possible rubbing

and polishing by hand shall be done in the same manner as specified
for machine polishing except that carborundum of coarse grade (No.
60, 80 and 120) for first, second & final polishing. After the floor is
polished to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be rubbed with
oxalic acid and finally wax polished with 'Mansion' or similar approved
floor polish to the entire satisfaction of Engineer. For good result, wax
polishing shall be applied on the surface with the help of soft linen over
a clean and dry surface and then the polishing machine fitted with bobs
shall be run over it. Clean saw dust shall be spread over the floor
surface and the polishing machine again operated so as to remove
excess wax and leave glossy surface. Floor shall not be left slippery.
7.10.2 Terrazzo cast-in-situ facing, skirting and dado
The work shall be carried out in the same manner as that for terrazzo
cast-in-situ floors except that the base or bedding course shall consist
of 1:3 cement mortar (1 cement & 3 medium sand) of 12 mm or 15 mm
or 20 mm thickness for total thickness 18 mm or 21 mm or 26 mm
respectively. As specified earlier, the bedding course shall be laid in
II-73
243 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
panel (not more than 60 cm x 60 cm) divided by glass/ aluminium

strips. The topping shall be of 6 mm thick finished and shall be laid
when the backing plaster is still green. Special care shall be taken to
see that the surface are properly cured.
7.10.3 Terrazzo tile finished flooring/facing
The work will consist of manufactured terrazzo tile and an underbed.
7.10.3.1 Thickness
Unless otherwise specified, the total (net) thickness including the

underbed shall be 40 mm for flooring and other horizontal surface and
32 mm for vertical surfaces like dado/skirting. The necessary
allowance for cutting and grinding shall be kept to have the specified
finished thickness.
7.10.3.2 Tiles : Tterrazzo
The tiles shall, unless specifically permitted in special cases, be

machine made under quality control in a shop and shall be subjected
to minimum hydraulic pressure of 140 kg. per sq. cm.
The tiles shall be composed of a backing and topping. The finished

thickness of upper layers shall not be less than 5mm for size of marble
chips upto 6m size and not less than 6mm for size of marble chips upto
20mm size.
The ingredients for topping shall be same as cast-in-situ terrazzo. The

thickness of the topping, as specified above, shall be net after grinding
& polishing. First grinding shall be given to the tiles at the shop before
delivery.
The manufacturer shall supply along with the tiles the grout mix
containing cement and pigment in exact proportions as used in topping
of the tiles.
7.10.3.3 Mix : Underbed
The underbed for floor and similar horizontal surfaces shall be 1 part
lime putty : 1 part surkhi : 1 part coarse sand or 1 part cement : 3/4
parts coarse sand mixed with sufficient water to form a stiff workable
mass. The thickness of underbed for the flooring shall be 20mm unless
II-74
244 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
otherwise specified. For skirting and dado and all vertical surface it
shall be about 12 mm thick and composed of 1 part cement 3 parts
coarse sand.
7.10.3.4 Laying
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper

grade and consolidated to a smooth surface. The base surface shall
be roughened for better bond. Before laying the underbed, over the
base/subgrade, a coat of cement slurry shall be applied over the sub-
grade. Before the underbed has time to set and while it is still fairly
moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted over it or cement slurry
applied at 4.4Kg of cement per sq.m. and the tiles shall immediately be
placed upon and firmly pressed by wooden mallet on to the underbed
until it achieves the desired level. The tiles shall be kept soaked for
about 10 minutes just before laying. The joints between tiles shall be
as close as possible and not more than 1.5 mm wide.
Special care shall be taken to check the level of the surface and the
lines of the joints frequently so that they are perfect. When tiles are
required to be cut to match the dimensions these shall be sawn and
edges rubbed smooth. The location of cut tiles shall be planned in
advance and approval of the Engineer taken.
At the junction of horizontal surface with vertical surface the tiles on the
former shall enter at least 12 mm under the latter.
After fixing, the floor shall be kept moistened allowed to mature

undisturbed for 7 days. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed. If desired
dividing strips as specified under Cl. 7.10.1.3 may be used for dividing
the work into suitable panels.
7.10.3.5 Grinding and polishing
Procedure shall be same as in-situ terrazzo finished flooring. Grinding

shall not commence earlier than 14 days after laying of tiles.
7.11 Glazed Tile Finished Flooring & Facing
This finish shall be composed of glazed earthen tiles with an underbed

laid over a concrete or masonry base.
7.11.1 Thickness
II-75
245 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Unless specified the total thickness shall be 21 mm for flooring & 18

mm for dado/skirting for the underbed.
The necessary cutting into the surface receiving the finish, to

accommodate the specified thickness shall be done.
7.11.2 Tiles : Glazed
These shall conform to the requirement of IS : 777. The tiles shall be of

earthenware, covered with glazed white or coloured, plain or with
designs, of 149 mm x 149 mm or 99mm x 99mm nominal sizes and
5,6 & 7 mm thick unless otherwise specified. Specials like internal and
external angles, beads, covers, cornices, corner pieces etc., shall
match. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed with a gloss or
matt unfading stable finish as desired by the Engineer. The tiles shall
be flat and true to shape. The colour shall be uniform, and fractured
section shall be fine grained in textures, dense and homogeneous.
The coloured tiles, when supplied, shall preferably come from one
batch to avoid difference in colour.
7.11.3 Mix : Underbed
The mix for the underbed shall consist of 1 part cement and 3 parts
coarse sand mixed with sufficient water or any other mix if specified
and shall be 12mm thick minimum or as specified.
7.11.4 Laying & finishing
The underbed mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper

grade and consolidated to a smooth surface. Before laying the
underbed, over the base/subgrade a coat of cement slurry shall be
applied over the subgrade. Before the underbed has time to set and
while it is still fairly moist but firm, cement shall be hand dusted over it
and the tiles shall immediately be placed upon and firmly pressed by
wooden mallet on to the underbed until it achieves the desired level.
The joints shall be practically invisible and filled with non-staining white
cement/white cement mixed with pigment for coloured tiles. Internal
angles shall be provided with `specials'. Drains shall be provided with
`specials'. The tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion. The
tiles shall be laid to the slope specified in the drawings and truly vertical
on walls when used as skirting.
II-76
246 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.11.5 Curing & cleaning
After flush pointing the joints, the surface shall be cured for 7 days by
keeping it wet. The surface shall be then cleaned with soap or suitable
detergent, washed fully and wiped with soft cloth to prevent scratching
before handing over.
7.12 Marble Flooring
7.12.1 Thickness
Unless specified otherwise the underbed shall be average 20 mm for

flooring and 12 mm thick for vertical surfaces. The slabs may be 20
mm, 25 mm, 30 mm or 40 mm thick as specified.
7.12.2 Marble slab
The slabs shall be made from selected stock which are hard, sound,
homogeneous and dense in texture and free from flaws, angles and
edges shall be true, square, free from chipping and surface shall be
plane. The slabs shall preferably be machine cut to the required
dimensions. Tolerance of plus or minus 5 mm in dimensions and plus
or minus 2 mm in thickness will be allowed. Unless specified the slabs
shall be minimum 300 mm x 300 mm. The stone slabs shall come from
specific regions and in specified quality with top surface fine chisel
dressed. All sides shall also be fine chisel dressed to the full depth to
allow finest possible joints.
The slabs shall be delivered to the site well protected against damages
and stored in dry place under cover.
7.12.3 Mix : Underbed
The underbed, unless specified otherwise for floor and similar

horizontal surfaces shall be 1 part lime putty : 1 part surkhi : 1 part
coarse sand or 1 part cement : 4 parts coarse sand mixed with
sufficient water to form a stiff workable mass and shall be on 20mm
thick bed. For skirting and dado and all vertical surfaces it shall be 12
mm thick and composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts coarse sand.
7.12.4 Laying
II-77
247 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The sides and top surface of the slabs shall be machine rubbed with
coarse sand stone and washed clean before laying. The underbed
mortar shall be evenly spread and brought to proper level on the area
under each slab. The slab shall be laid over the underbed, pressed
and tapped down with wooden mallet to the proper level. The slab
shall then be lifted and the underbed corrected as necessary and
allowed to stiffen a little. Next, a thick cement slurry at 4.4 Kg of
cement per sq.m. shall be spread over the surface. The edges of the
slab shall be buttered with slurry of cement, grey/ white/mixed with
pigment matching the colour of the stone slabs. The slab shall be
gently laid and tapped with wooden mallet to bed properly to a very fine
joint and to the required level. All surplus cement slurry shall be
removed and the surface mopped clean with wet soft cloth. The laid
finish shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
7.12.5 Polishing, finishing
Fine chiseling shall be done to remove the slight undulations that

usually exist at the joints. The polishing and finishing shall be done as
specified under terrazzo flooring. However, the joints shall be so fine in
the case of stone slabs that grouting shall not be called for.
7.13 Marble in Facia or Dado
Marble tiles of approved shade, variety, size and thickness as specified

in the item shall be used. They shall be of selected quality, dense,
uniform and homogeneous in texture and free from cracks or other
structural defects. The exposed face shall have no unsightly stains,
veins and defects. They shall have uniform milky white or coloured
shade or patterns of colours approved by the Engineer before ordering
the tiles. The surface shall be fine polished and sides machine cut,
true to square.
When a single course of marble slab is to be fixed as in dado etc., the

slabs shall be fixed as described below :
Mortar pads of 1:3 C.M. (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) of uniform width

shall be stuck on to the wall at close intervals and the marble slabs
shall be pressed on to them firmly. The remaining cavities if any shall
then be filled with thin grout of cement mortar of the same proportion.
The sound coming, on gently tapping of the slab, will indicate if there
are hollows. When the hollow cannot be filled with grout and the fin-
ished slab continues to give a hollow sound on tapping, the slab shall
II-78
248 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
be removed and reset. For the facia work where more than one course
is required the marble slabs shall be of matching stand and veins to
form architectural pattern as per drawings and shall be fixed in the
same way as described above except for the horizontal joints of the
slabs, where adjacent slabs shall be held together by a brass pin
passing through a hole drilled into the slabs. In addition, wrought
iron/dowels shall be provided to anchor the slabs to the wall. The
metal cramps shall be counter sunk into the joints of the slab and it
shall be located about a metre apart subject to a minimum of one for
each slab for each horizontal joint.
The facing shall be fixed truly in plumb and in perfect line or curves as
shown on the plans. The courses and joints shall be as directed by the
Engineer. The surface shall be protected from sun and rain and cured
for 10 days and shall be finally polished with carborundum stones as
for skirting & dado of cast-in-situ terrazzo.
7.14 Flooring/Paving with Hardener like Ironite
This will consist of a topping (incorporating iron particles) to bond with

concrete base while the latter is 'Green'.
7.14.1 Thickness
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Items, the total thickness

of the floor with metallic hardener finish shall be 40 mm or 50 mm of
which the topping shall be 10 mm (net) for 40 mm & 12 mm (net) for
50 mm
7.14.2 Material (metallic hardener)
The hardening compound shall be uniformly graded iron particles free

from non-ferrous metal impurities, oil, grease, sand soluble alkaline
compounds or other injurious materials. When desired by the
Engineer, actual samples shall be tested.
7.14.3 Mix
Unless otherwise specified, the mix for underbed shall be of 1:2:4

concrete and stone chips shall be 12 mm down grade. For topping the
proportion of the metallic hardener shall be as specified or as indicated
by the manufacturer. However, in absence of any such direction 1 part
metallic hardener shall be mixed dry with 4 parts cement, by weight.
II-79
249 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
To this mixture 6 mm nominal size stone chips shall be added in

proportion of 1 part cement (mixed with hardener) to 2 parts of stone
chips by volume and uniformly mixed. Minimum quantity of water shall
be added to make it workable.
7.14.4 Laying & finishing
The under bedding course of base course shall be laid as per

specification of laying underbed for Red artificial stone flooring. The
surface shall be roughened by wire brush as soon as possible. The
finish top coat shall be laid while the concrete base is still fairly 'green'
within about 3 hours of laying of the later. The finish shall be of
uniform and even dense surface without trowel marks, pin holes etc.
This topping layer shall be pressed firmly and worked vigorously and
quickly to secure full bond with the concrete base. Just when the initial
set starts the surface shall be finished smooth with steel trowel.
7.14.5 Curing
The finished floor shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
7.15 Chemical Resistant Tiles Flooring / Facing

(Either of natural stone or prepared tiles)
This shall include all varieties of special tiles used for specific chemical
resistance function and an underbed over already laid concrete or
masonry. The Contractor shall get it done by specialised manufacturer
& get guarantee of its performance.
7.15.1 Tiles
The chemical resistant tiles as detailed in the Schedule of Items shall

be of the best indigenous manufacture unless otherwise specified and
shall be resistant to the chemical described in the Schedule of Items.
The tiles shall have straight edges, uniform thickness, plain surface,
uniform non-fading colour and textures.
Usually the chemical resistant tiles shall not absorb water more than
2% by weight. The tiles shall have at least compression strength of
700 kg/cm2. The surface shall be abrasion resistant and durable.
7.15.2 Laying
II-80
250 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The mortar used for setting or for underbed the tiles shall be durable
and strong. The grout which shall be to the full depth of tile shall have
same chemical resistant properties as that of tiles. Joints shall be
pointed if so desired. The setting and fixing shall be according to the
manufacturer's specification approved by the Engineer.
7.16 Chemical Resistant in Situ Finished Flooring/Facing
Chemical resistant in situ finish shall be as called for in the Schedule of

Items. About its performance the Engineer shall have to be fully
satisfied by test results and examination of similar treatment already in
existence. The Contractor shall get it done by a specialised
manufacturer, get guarantee of performance from the organisation and
pass it on to the owner in addition to his own guarantee.
The Contractors shall satisfy the Engineer specially for the

workmanship of the following finished floor :
(a) Level, slope, plumb as the case may be

(c) Alignment of joints, dividing strip etc.
(d) Colour, texture
(e) Surface finish
(f) Thickness of joints including the workmanship in joints.
(g) Details at edges, junctions etc.
(h) Performance
(i) Precautions specified for durability.
(j) Effluent treatment plant
8.0 WOOD WORK
8.1 General
Wood work shall be neatly and truly finished to exact dimensions and
details as per drawings, without patching or plugging of any kind.
Rebates, roundings and mouldings as shown in drawings shall be
II-81
251 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
made before assembling. Exposed work shall be finished smooth with

well planed faces.
All assembly of shutters of doors, windows, ventilators and frames

thereof shall be exactly at right angles. In the case of frames, the right
angle shall be checked from the inside surfaces of the respective
members.
All door and window frames shall be clamped together so as to be

square and flat at the time of delivery. Door frames without sills shall
be fitted with temporary stretchers.
Horns of frames and other parts that go into or butt against the
masonry, shall be protected against moisture and decay with two coats
of coal tar or other approved protective material.
All surfaces of the door, window and ventilator frames and shutters
which are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered evenly by
brush with a priming coat of approved primer. In the case of doors to
be polished or varnished, a priming coat of approved polish or varnish
shall be given before delivery. No primer shall be applied to the wood
work until it has been inspected and passed by the Engineer.
8.2 Joinery
All heads, posts, transoms and mullions etc., of doors, windows and
ventilators shall be made out of single pieces of timber only. The
heads and post shall be through- tenoned into the mortices of the jamb
posts to the full width of the latter and the thickness of the tenon shall
be not less than 1.25 cm. The tenons shall be close fitting into the
mortices and pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins not less than 8
mm diameter or with wood dowels not less than 10 mm diameter. The
depth of rebate in frames for housing the shutters shall in all cases be
1.25 cm and the rebate in shutters for closing in double shutter doors
or windows shall be not less than 2 cm. Unless otherwise specified, all
joints shall be mortice and tenon joints with the ends of the tenons
exposed to view. Joints shall fit truly and fully without fillings. The
contact surfaces of tenons and mortices shall be treated, before putting
together, with an approved adhesive conforming to I.S :848- 1974 and
851-1978.
8.3 Shrinkage & Tolerance
II-82
252 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The arrangement, joining and fixing of all joinery work shall be such
that shrinkage in any part and in any direction shall not impair the
strength and appearance of the finished work.
The tolerance on overall dimensions shall be within the limits

prescribed in IS : 1003 (Part 1 & 2)-1983 to 1991.
8.4 Fixing
Door and window frames shall generally be built in at the time the walls
are constructed. Alternatively, where permitted by the Engineer, the
frames may be subsequently fixed into prepared openings for which
purpose holes to accommodate the holdfasts shall be left at the time of
construction. Where the frames are subsequently fixed into prepared
openings in the wall such openings should be 25 mm more than the
overall width of the door, window or ventilator frame to allow minimum
12mm plaster on each jamb. The height of the unfinished opening
shall depend upon whether a threshold is required or not. While fixing
the door care shall be taken to see that at least 6 mm space is left
between the door and the finished floor. The M.S. clamps fixed to the
frame shall be inserted in the holes and jammed in cement concrete M-
15 or (1:2:4 mix) with 20 mm down graded stone chips after holding the
frame in proper position to the line, level and plumb.
The size of the concrete block shall be 250 x 125 x 85mm unless
otherwise specified.
8.5 Tarring
Timber in contact with earth, concrete, plaster or masonry shall be

treated with boiling coal tar or 2 coats of wood preservative treatment
like hot solingnum or creosite oil etc. before fixing the frame in position.
8.6 Fittings
Unless otherwise specified, three holdfasts shall be fixed on each side

of a door frame, one at the centre point, and the other two at 30 cm
from the top and the bottom of the door frames. In the case of
windows and ventilators, a pair on each side shall be fixed at quarter
points of the frames. Unless otherwise specified the hold-fasts shall be
of mild steel plate 40 x 3 x 225 mm long, fish tailed at one end and
screwed to the frame in the formed rebates.
II-83
253 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Generally, each door shutter shall be fixed to the frame with three
hinges of approved manufacture, one at the centre and the other two
approximately 24 cm from the top and bottom of the shutter. Each
window shutter shall be fixed to its frame with two hinges at the quarter
points.
Locks, handles, door closers, stoppers etc., shall be fitted as shown in

drawing or described in the Schedule of Items.
8.7 Doors, windows & ventilators etc.
Dimensions of the various components of doors, windows and

ventilators shall be in accordance with IS : 1003 (Part 1&2)-1983 to
1991 Table- III or as shown on the drawings. The work shall be carried
out as per detailed drawing. The wooden members shall be planed,
smooth and accurate. They shall be cut to the exact shape and size
without patching or plugging of any kind. Mouldings, rebates, curves
and roundings etc. shall be done as shown in the drawing before the
pieces are assembled into the shutter.
The thickness of stiles and rails etc shall be as per IS: 1003 (Part
1&2)-1983 to 1991 unless otherwise specified in the item of works.
These shall be properly and accurately mortised and tenoned. Rails
which are more than 180mm in width shall have 2 tenons. Stiles and
rails shall be made out of single piece upto 200mm in width. In case
more than one piece of timber is used for members exceeding 200mm
width, they shall be joined with a continuous tongued and grooved joint,
glued together and reinforced with rust proof metal dowels or headless
pins. The tenons shall pass clear through stiles. the stiles and rails
shall have a 12mm groove, unless otherwise shown in the drawing, to
receive the panel. In case of double shutters the rebate at the closing
junction of the two shutters shall be as per clause 5.5 of IS: 1003-1991
or as shown in the drawing. Primer coat shall not be put before shutters
are passed by the engineer.
8.8 Panelled Shutters
These shall conform to IS: 1003 (Part I)-1991. Timber panelled shutters
shall be constructed in the form of timber frame work of stiles and rails
with panel inserts of timber, plywood, block board, veneered particle
board, hard board or asbestos cement board.
II-84
254 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Stiles, rails and panels in door shutters shall be of the same species of
wood.
Timber panels shall be of minimum width of 150mm. When made from

more than one piece, the pieces shall be jointed with a continuous
tongued and grooved joint, glued together and reinforced with metal
dowels. No single panel shall exceed 0.5 m2 in area. Timber panels
shall be fixed only with grooves but additional beadings may be
provided either on one side or both sides.
Unless otherwise specified thickness of panel for 35mm thick shutter

shall be 15mm and for 40mm and above thick shutter, it shall be
20mm. For 25mm thick shutter, panel thickness shall be 12mm.
Apart from timber panels other materials like plywood, Block board,
particle board, Hard board and Asbestos cement may also be used for
panelling purpose and shall be fixed with grooves or beading or both as
per provisions made in IS:1003 (Part-1)-1991.
Timber suitable for manufacture of door shutter have been grouped

under class a,b,c & d in Table 1 of IS: 1003 (Part-1)-1991.
8.9 Glazed Shutters
The openings for glazed shutters shall be rebated and moulded out of
solid timber. Plain sheet glass for panels shall be of approved quality
as specified. Wherever specified, ground glass or frosted glass of
approved quality shall be used in place of plain sheet glass. Unless
otherwise specified glass panes shall be fixed by means of moulded
beads and suitable MS panel pins. A thin layer of putty shall be applied
between glass panes and sash bars and also between glass panes &
beading.
8.10 Flush Door Shutters
Unless otherwise specified, flush door shutters shall have a

solid/cellular core, a teak wood frame, and shall be faced with
approved quality of plywood on both faces. The core and stock shall
be made from well seasoned approved timber and treated with ap-
proved preservatives. The plywood faces shall be glued on to the
solid/cellular core with waterproof glue under pressure and heat. The
construction of flush doors shall be such that no difficulty should arise
in fixing mortice locks, hydraulic door closers etc. The shutters shall
II-85
255 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
be rebated in the case of the double leaf doors. Where specified flush
doors shall be provided with vision panels, rectangular/ round or
louvered.
If specified so, the flush door shall be solid block board core or solid
particle board core construction. The workmanship and overall finish
shall be of very high standard and shall conform to IS:2191 (Part 1&2)-
1983 & 2202 (Part 1&2)-1983 to 1991. The shutters shall be procured
from approved manufacturer bearing IS certification mark only.
8.11 Other types of shutters
8.11.1 Wooden hand rails
Wooden hand rails shall be of approved quality teak wood fixed to

concrete or metal balustrade with concealed steel or metal lugs and
bolts as per drg. Joints will be made with concealed crews and dowels.
All bends, mitres, coves, moulds etc. will be strictly to proper profile
and finally smoothened by sand paper. The hand rail shall be finished
with wax or french polish or painting as per direction of the engineer.
8.11.2 Hardware fittings for door, windows & ventilators
All mortice or rim locks, latches, cabinet and wardrobe locks, hydraulic
door closers, floor springs etc. shall be of Godrej, Everite make or of
similar approved make. The rate shall include for all necessary screws,
other adjuncts, fixing in position and is for the completed work. the
finish shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. Door, window
and ventilator fittings shall be as per specifications already described.
The rates for doors, windows and ventilator shutters shall include the
cost of fixing the fittings, with the necessary screws to the shutters and
the frame. The cost of fittings only shall be paid separately. Where
specified in the schedule of quantities, the cost of fittings shall be
included in the rates for doors, windows and ventilators shutters. In
such case the contractor shall supply and fix the various fittings strictly
to the standard laid down in the schedule of hardware fittings and no
separate payment for this shall be made.
8.12 Inspection
The Contractor shall provide all facilities to the Engineer for the
inspection of the goods at his premises. No primer shall be applied
until the wood work has been inspected and passed by the Engineer.
II-86
256 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The Engineer shall have the option of rejecting any article or asking for
replacement of any article found to be defective or not complying with
the requirements of this specification and the relevant Schedule of
Items.
9.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS AND ROLLING SHUTTERS
9.1 General
Doors, windows and ventilators etc., shall be truly square and flat, i.e.
free from twist and warp. The general fabrication shall conform to
IS:1038-1983 & IS : 1361-1978 as applicable.
9.1.1 Frames shall be constructed of sections which have been cut to length
and mitred. They shall be morticed, reinforced, drilled and tapped for
hinges and lock and bolt strikes. Where necessary, frames shall be
reinforced for door closers. Flash butt welding or any other suitable
method which gives the desired requirement, with mitred corners shall
be used. Rubber door silencers shall be furnished for the striking jamb.
Loose "T" masonry anchors shall be provided. Frames shall finish
flush with floor and adjustable floor anchors shall be supplied. Frames
shall be brought to site with floor ties/weather bars installed in place.
All frames shall be square and flat. Door thresholds shall be provided
as shown on drawing. Doors without threshold shall have bottom tie of
approved type.
9.1.2 The Contractor shall first submit for the approval of the Engineer, the
name and address of the manufacturer whose metal casements and
doors and windows he intends to use, together with typical drawings
and specifications, describing the details of construction for each type
of door/window/ventilator etc.
9.1.3 All steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be either galvanised or
painted. All steel surfaces shall first be thoroughly cleaned free of rust,
scale or dirt and mill scale by pickling or similar process and then shall
be painted with one coat of an approved primer conforming to IS : 102-
1962 before despatch. Alternatively they may be galvanised by the
"Hot Dip" zinc spray or electro- galvanizing process as described in IS :
1361-1978.
9.2 Fixing
II-87
257 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Doors, windows and ventilators shall not be built in at the time the walls
are constructed but shall be subsequently fixed into prepared openings,
as laid down in IS : 1081-1960. Holes to accommodate the fixing lugs
are to be left or cut, and the casements fixed after all the rough
masonry and plaster work have been finalised. The lugs of the
casement shall be jammed in cement concrete (15C Mark)/(1:2:4) mix
after holding the casement in proper position, line and level.
The width of the clear unfinished opening in the wall should be 25 mm

more than the overall width of the door frame to allow for plaster on
each jamb. The height of the unfinished opening shall depend upon
whether a threshold is required or not. While fixing the door, care shall
be taken to see that at least 6 mm space is left between the door and
the finished floor.
9.3 Fittings
Hardware shall be fixed as late as possible, preferably just before the

final coat of paint is applied. It shall be fitted in a workmanlike manner,
so that it may not work loose and in such a way that screws and pins
are not marked and mutilated by hammers and screw drivers. It shall
be tested for correct operation. Where specified, doors shall be fitted
with a three-way bolting device which can be operated from outside as
well as inside, and a locking system, which can similarly be operated
from either side. Solid steel bolt handles shall be provided, one on the
outside and one on the inside of each shutter. In case of doors
provided with a service door, the lock shall be fitted on the service
door. All materials shall be the best procurable and shall be approved
by the Engineer.
9.4 Normal Steel Plate Doors
Steel doors may be of the hinged type or sliding/ folding type, single
shutter or double shutter, and of single-walled or double walled
construction, as specified on the drawings or Schedule of Items. All
doors shall be provided with a sturdy frame and hold fasts for fixing into
the wall. Unless otherwise specified, the frame shall be prepared from
mild steel angles of size not less than 65 x 65 x 6 mm electrically
welded at the corners and the shutter shall be made from flat steel
sheet of 18 gauge or 1.25mm thickness with a frame of mild steel
angles not less than 50 x 50 x 6 mm all round, suitably braced. The
whole shutter shall be of welded construction and shall be hung at the
sides by means of three or four hinges as specified.
II-88
258 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.4.1 Double Plate flush door shutters
Door shutters shall be 45 mm thick, completely flush design and shall

comprise of two outer sheets or 18G or 1.25mm thick steel sheets,
rigidly connected and reinforced inside with continuous vertical 20G or
0.99mm thick stiffeners, spot welded in position at not more than 150
mm on centres. Both edges of doors shall be joined and reinforced full
height by steel channels placed immediately inside and welded to the
door faces. Top and bottom of doors shall be reinforced horizontally by
steel channels running full width of door. Doors shall not have more
than 2.5 mm clearance at jambs and head, shall have proper level on
lock stiles and rails and shall be reinforced at corners to prevent
sagging or twisting. Pairs of double doors shall have meeting style
edges bevelled or rebated. Where shown on drawing, or in the Sched-
ule of Items, the doors shall be sound-deadened by filling the inside
voids with mineral wool or other suitable approved materials. Doors
shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped in shop for hinges,
locks and bolts. They shall also be reinforced for closers, push-plates
and other surface hardwares where necessary. Any drilling and
tapering required for surface hardware shall be done at site. Where
shown in drawing, provisions, shall be made for fixing glazing, vision
panels, louvres etc. Glazing mouldings shall be of 18G or 1.25mm
thick steel or extruded aluminium sections with profiles shown in
drawing and suitable for fixing 6 mm glass. Louvre blades shall be V or
Z shaped sections.
9.4.2 Single sheet door shutters
Single sheet doors shall be made from best quality 18g/1mm mild
steel sheets, and shall present a flush surface on the outside. The
inside shall be stiffened with a semi-tubular edge and central stiffening
rail which shall convey the lock and other fixture. The frames shall be
made from best quality steel sections. Wherever required or shown on
drawings, provision for fixing glass panes, louvres etc., shall be made.
The manufacturing shall done as specified in "Double Plate Flush Door

Shutters".
9.5 Pressed Steel Doors
All pressed steel doors shall be obtained from an approved

manufacturer. The frame and shutters shall be fabricated from cold
II-89
259 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
rolled or pressed steel sections. Unless otherwise specified, the

thickness of all sheets used for frames shall be not less than 5 mm.
The shutters shall be made of sheet steel of 2 mm thickness for single
shutter doors and double shutter doors with or without service door.
The plates shall be adequately stiffened with suitably placed stiffeners
The double-walled door shutter shall consist of two plates each 2.5 mm
thick, separated by a gap of 33 mm in between making an overall
thickness of 38 mm or as shown in drawing. The plates shall be
adequately stiffened by means of suitably spaced horizontal steel
stiffeners.
9.6 Steel Windows, Sashes, Ventilators, etc.
These shall conform to IS : 1038-1983 and IS : 1361-1978 as

appropriate and as shown in drawings. The details as called for in the
above codes shall be applicable for coupling mullions, transoms,
weather bars, pivot arrangements for ventilators, etc.
9.6.1 Where composite unit openings are shown in drawings, the individual
window units shall be joined together with requisite transoms and
mullions. Where aluminium glazing beads are specified, they shall be
extruded aluminium channel 9.5 mm x 1.6 mm (Indal Section No. 2209)
unless otherwise shown in drawings.
All welds at the corner of casement shall be done by flash butt welding
process or any other suitable method which gives the desired
requirement and dressed flush on all exposed and contact surfaces.
9.7 Collapsible Gate (Steel)
Mild steel collapsible gates shall be obtained from an approved

manufacturer. These shall be of mid bar type made out of double
channels each 20 x 10 x 2 mm with 20 x 5 mm diagonals and shall be
top hung with roller bearings, and fitted with locking arrangement.
Collapsible gates under 3.0 metre height shall generally have 3 sets of
lattices and those over 3.0 metre height, 4 sets of lattices. Guide
tracks shall be fitted at the top and bottom, of T-iron 40 x 40 x 6 mm
with 40 mm dia bearings in every fourth double channel
9.8 Steel Rolling Shutters and Grills
II-90
260 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.8.1 Unless otherwise specified the shutters shall conform IS:6248-1979.

Laths for rolling shutters shall be made from tested bright cold rolled,
annealed M.S. strips, not less than 0.9 mm thick for shutters upto 3.5 M
wide and not less than 1.25 mm thick for shutters above 3.5 M wide
and machine rolled at 75 mm rolling centres, interlocking with each
other. The profile will be such as to prevent excessive deflection under
specified wind load.
9.8.2 Rolling grills shall be constructed out of 6/8 mm dia rods at 35

mm on centres running horizontally flexible connected with vertical links
spaced not more than 200 mm centres. Alternatively, rolling grills shall
be made from perforated laths of approved design reinforced with 6
mm dia rods. End locks shall be heavy type and shall be provided at
each end of alternate laths unless specified otherwise. Bottom bars
shall be finished with two angles not less than 6 mm thick for external
shutters. When shown in drawings, a flexible weather strip shall be
applied to make tight contact with the floor. Guides shall be of such
depth as to retain the shutter under a wind pressure of 150 kg/sq.m. or
as specified. Shafts shall be of steel pipe of sufficient size to carry the
torsional load with a maximum deflection of 1/360 th of span. Grease
packed ball bearings or bushings shall be provided for smooth trouble
free operation.Hoods shall be formed of not less than 20 gauge or 0.90
mm thick sheet mild steel, suitably, reinforced to prevent sag. Locks
shall be slide bolt and hasp, or cylinder lock operable from both sides.
Provision for securing hand chain with padlock, removable handle for
hand cranks etc, shall be made as described in scheduled of items and
as directed by the Engineer.
9.8.3 Laths for rolling shutters shall be made from tested brig ht cold
rolled, annealed M.S. strips, not less than 0.9 mm thick for
shutters upto 3.5 M wide and not less than 1.25 mm thick for
shutters above 3.5 M w ide and machine rolled at 75 mm rolling
centres, interlocking with each other. The profile will be such as
to prevent excessive deflection under specified wind load. Rolling
grills shall be constructed out of 6/8 mm d ia rods at 35 mm on
centres running horizontally flexible connected with vertical links
spaced not more than 200 mm centres. Alternatively, rolling grills
shall be made from perforated laths of ap proved design rein-
forced with 6 mm dia rods.
9.8.3 End locks shall be heavy type and shall be provided at each end of
alternate laths unless specified otherwise. Bottom bars shall be
finished with two angles not less than 6 mm thick for external shutters.
II-91
261 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
When shown in drawings, a flexible weather strip shall be applied to

make tight contact with the floor. Guides shall be of such depth as to
retain the shutter under a wind pressure of 150 kg/sq.m. or as
specified. Shafts shall be of steel pipe of sufficient size to carry the
torsional load with a maximum deflection of 1/360 th of span. Grease
packed ball bearings or bushings shall be provided for smooth trouble
free operation. Hoods shall be formed of not less than 20 gauge or
0.90 mm thick sheet mild steel, suitably, reinforced to prevent sag.
Locks shall be slide bolt and hasp, or cylinder lock operable from both
sides. Provision for securing hand chain with padlock, removable
handle for hand cranks etc, shall be made as described in scheduled of
items and as directed by the Engineer.
9.8.5 Manually operated shutters/grills
Manually operated shutters shall be easily operable by one person.

The speed of operation shall be about 0.3 metres per second. In
general, manually operated shutters shall be push pull type for
openings upto 9 sqm in area. Larger shutters shall be either chain and
gear operated or crank and gear operated. The crank/handle shall be
removable. All shutters shall be lockable from one or both sides as
described in Schedule of Item or as desired by the Engineer.
9.8.6 Priming coat of shop coat
Shutters shall be painted with one coat of red lead or zinc chromate
primer after they are inspected and found in order and acceptable.
Where specified, doors shall be galvanized and subsequently painted
one coat of zinc chromate for adhesion of field coat.
9.8.7 Erection
Door shall be installed by the manufacturer or his authorised

representative and all work shall be as per manufacturer's instructions.
Any drilling or cutting to concrete, masonry etc., shall be made good
after erection of shutters and all abrasion to shop coat shall be touched
up. All electrical work shall be in strict accordance with prevailing Indian
Electricity Rules.
9.8.8 Inspection
II-92
262 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
After completing the manufacture of the different components of the

rolling shutter, an arrangement for shop inspection by the Engineer
shall be made to check the conformity with approved shop drawings.
9.8.8.1 Field inspection
After installing the shutters, the Contractor shall test the performance of
the shutter in the presence of the Engineer. The doors shall be
smoothly operable under all ambient conditions. All control and locking
devices shall give fault-free performance.
9.9 Guarantee
The Contractor shall give one year's guarantee for the successful
operation of the shutters. This shall be supported by a separate and
unilateral guarantee from the manufacturer of the shutters.
9.10 Aluminium Doors, Windows, Frames
9.10.1 Anodised tubular aluminium doors shall be of approved make and shall
be of size and design as per relevant drawing. Unless otherwise
specified, the door frame shall be of 101.4mm x 44.6mm and shutter of
50mm tubular extrusions, 3mm thick. The opening arrangement shall
be single action or double action as shown in drawing with spring
hinges in floor. The glazing shall be 5.5mm thick plain glass panes
fixed with necessary gaskets and aluminium beading strip. The door
shall be provided with one security lock. The shutters shall be provided
with 1.6mm thick 300x150mm push plates and 1.6mm thick 300mm
wide kick plate of anodised aluminium for full width of door inside and
outside.
The door frames shall be polished and anodized with approved colour.
The average thickness of anodic coating shall not be less than 15
microns as per IS: 1868-1982. Door frame shall be provided with
approved anchors @ 90 cm c/c maximum for fixing.
9.10.2 Aluminium windows
Aluminium windows and ventilators shall conform to IS:1948-1961 or

equivalent as approved by the Engineer. Fixed frame shall be
II-93
263 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
manufactured from aluminium alloy conforming to ISS-HE-9 WP. The

fixtures like handles, stoppers, stays, etc., shall also be anodized
aluminium and shall be of approved make. Glazing shall be 4mm thick
plain glass and shall be fixed with glazing clips and metal putty. It shall
conform to IS:1081-1960. Average anodizing coating to windows,
ventilators and fixtures shall not be less than 15 microns as per IS :
1868 - 1982.
9.10.3 All work shall be fitted and shop assembled to a first job, and ready for
erection. Shop joints shall be made to hair lines and then welded or
braced by such method as will produce a uniform colour throughout the
work. Wherever possible, joints shall be made in concealed locations
and on edges of doors. Field connections of all work may be made with
concealed screws or other approved type of fasteners. Glazing beads
shall be shape fit type without visible screws and shall be of sizes to
accommodate glazing. All work shall be adequately braced and
reinforced as necessary for strength and rigidity.
10.0 GLAZING
10.1 General
Glazing shall be done with plain, frosted, ground glass or wired cast
glass, laminated safety glass or toughened glass etc. as shown on
drawings, described in the Schedule of Items or approved by the
Engineer. The method of glazing adopted shall be such that movement
of the structure, to which the securing is done, does not transmit strain
to windows, doors or ventilators as the case may be. The work shall
generally conform to IS:1081-1960 "Code of Practice for Fixing and
Glazing of Metal Doors, Windows & Ventilators". The material for
putty shall consist of whiting and linseed oil, raw-mixed in such
proportion as to form a paste conforming to IS : 419-1967.
10.2 Doors, Windows and Ventilators
Windows and ventilators shall be designed for putty glazing fixed from
outside and glazed doors for fixing from inside. In addition, spring type
glazing clips shall be provided at intervals of 30 cm, or as shown
otherwise on drawings or described in the Schedule of Items. These
shall be inserted into holes drilled in the shutters or frames as the case
may be.
II-94
264 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
All glazing shall be puttied to the shutters of frames with good quality
putty in addition to glazing clips. Glass panes shall not be placed
directly against the metal/timber. A thin layer of putty shall be even
spread over the glazing rebate and the glass pressed firmly against it.
It shall be secured in position by means of teak wood beads for
wooden shutters. Glass panes shall be set without springing & shall be
bedded in putty and back puttied, except where moulding or gasket are
specified. Putty etc. shall be smoothly finished to even lines. Figured
glass shall be set with smooth side out. After completion of glazing
work, all dirt stains, excess putty etc., shall be removed and the glass
panes shall be left in perfectly acceptable condition. All broken cracked
or damaged glass shall be replaced by new ones at the Contractor's
cost.
10.3 Northlight Glazing
This shall consist of aluminium or steel glazing bars as shown on

drawings or described in the Schedule of Item and be subject to
approval of Engineer.The glazing parts shall be securely fixed in their
frame and shall be weather-proof. All glazing shall be flashed to the
surrounding so as to be weather-proof. Glass shall be fixed to the a
astragals with glazing clips and putty.
11.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING AND PAINTING
11.1 Scope
This chapter deals with white washing, colour washing, distempering,

cement washing, emulsion painting, silicate painting etc., to concrete
and masonry surfaces and painting to the wood works and steel works.
For the items which have not been completed or partly covered in this
chapter, specifications suggested by the manufacturers for the
materials, surfaces preparation, workmanship and all bye works shall
be strictly followed and shall be carried out as per direction of the
Engineer.
11.2 Materials
Materials shall conform to Part - I
11.3 White Washing, Colour Washing
11.3.1 General
II-95
265 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Wherever scaffolding is required/necessary, it shall be erected on

double support tied together by horizontal pieces, over which the
scaffolding planks shall be fixed. No part of it shall rest on or touch the
surface which is being washed/painted. Where ladders are used,
pieces of old gunny bags shall be tied on their tops to avoid damage or
scratches to walls. For white washing the ceiling, proper stage
scaffolding shall be erected. The surface on which wash is to be
applied shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar droppings and
foreign matter.
11.3.2 White Wash
The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime of approved
quality and shall be thoroughly slaked on the spot mixed and stirred
with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall be allowed to
stand for 24 hours and then shall be screened through a clean coarse
cloth. 4 Kg of gum dissolved in hot water shall be added to each cubic
metre of the cream.
The approximate quantity of water to be added in making the cream will

be 5 litres of water to 1 Kg of lime. Indigo/ultramarine blue upto 3 gm
per kg of lime dissolved in water shall then be added and wash stirred
well. Water shall then be added at the rate of about 6 litres per kg of
lime to produce a milky solution. The white wash shall be applied with
approved brushes to the specified number of coats. The operation for
each coat shall consist of stroke of brush given from the top
downwards, another from the bottom upwards over the first stroke and
similarly one stroke horizontally from the right and another from the left
before it dries. The white washing on ceiling shall be done prior to that
on walls.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied and
shall be subjected to inspection and approval by the Engineer. No
portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.
The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of cracking and
peeling nor shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed. Doors,
windows, floors and such other parts of the building not to be white
washed shall be protected from being splashed upon.
11.3.3 Colour Wash
II-96
266 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
A priming coat of white wash with lime shall be applied before applying
two or more coats of the colour wash (as specified). Entire surface
should represent a smooth and uniform finish. Sample of colour wash
shall be duly approved by the Engineer before application. Same
specification as that of white wash shall be followed for colour wash
also using necessary amount of colouring ingredient of approved tint.
11.3.4 White Washing with Whiting
Whiting (ground white chalk) shall be dissolved in sufficient quantity of

warm water and thoroughly stirred to form a thin slurry which shall then
be screened through a clean coarse cloth. 2 Kg of gum and 0.4 Kg of
copper sulphate dissolved separately in hot water shall be added for
every cum. of slurry which shall then be diluted with water to the
consistency of milk so as to make wash ready for use. Other
specification remains same as per white washing with lime.
11.4 Cement Primer Coat
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, mortar, droppings etc.,

and shall be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours. It shall then be
rubbed thoroughly be sand paper to give a smooth and even surface.
Any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty, made of plaster
of paris mixed with water on the entire surface including filling up the
undulation and then sand papering the same after it is dry. The
cement primer shall preferably be applied by brushing and not by
spraying. Horizontal strokes shall be given first and vertical strokes
shall be applied immediately, afterwards. This entire operation will
constitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as smooth as
possible, leaving no brush marks.
11.5 Water-proof cement paint
The prepared surface shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water

before water proof cement paint is applied. The paint shall be
prepared strictly as per manufacturer's specifications, in the absence of
which it shall be mixed in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of
2 parts of water proof cement paint and one part of water stirred
thoroughly and allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care shall be taken to
add the paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The second
stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and
stirring thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform
II-97
267 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
consistency. The paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be

used up within an hour of its mixing.
Paint shall be applied with brushes or spraying machine The solution

shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be
applied as far as possible on the surface which is on the shady side of
the building so that direct heat of the sun on the surface is avoided.
Painted surfaces shall be sprinkled with water 2 or 3 times a day. This
shall be done between coats and for at least 2 days following the final
coat. The curing shall be started as soon as paint has hardened so as
not to damage by sprinkling of water say about 12 hours after the
application. A uniform shade should be obtained after application of
paint. Cement paint shall not be applied on surfaces already treated
with white wash, colour wash, distemper, varnish paint etc., and on
gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.
11.6 Synthetic washable distemper
The surface shall be prepared as for Cement Primer Coat. A primer

coat of cement or distemper primer shall be applied as specified in the
description of the item. Unevenness in the plaster shall be made good
by applying plaster of Paris putty mixed with distemper of the colour to
be used on the entire surface including filling up the undulations. The
surface shall then be rubbed down with a fine grade sand paper and
made smooth. After the primer coat has dried for at least 48 hours, the
surface shall be lightly sand papered to make it smooth, taking care not
to rub the priming coat out. All loose particles shall be dusted off. One
coat of distemper properly diluted with thinner, shall be applied with
brushes/rollers in horizontal strokes followed immediately by vertical
ones which together constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall
be applied in the same way. Two or more coats of distemper as are
found necessary shall be applied to obtain an even shade. A time
interval of at least 24 hours shall be allowed between consecutive
coats. The brushes shall be of 15 cm. double bristled type. They shall
be maintained in proper condition and those that are dirty or caked will
not be allowed to be used. The finished surface shall be even and
uniform without patches, brush marks, distemper drops etc. Sufficient
quantity of distemper shall be mixed to finish one room for applying one
coat in one operation.
11.7 Dry Distemper
II-98
268 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The surface shall be prepared in the same manner as for synthetic

washable distemper. A primer coat using approved whiting shall be
applied over the prepared surface. Distemper prepared as per
manufacturer's direction shall be applied and each coat shall be
allowed to dry before subsequent coat is applied. The finished surface
shall be free from chalking when rubbed, even, uniform and shall show
no brush marks.
11.8 Plastic emulsion paint
The surface on which plastic paint has to be laid must be thoroughly

cleaned and prepared and all defects rectified and finally prepared in
the same manner as for synthetic washable distemper. The surface
shall be dry and rubbed smooth by means of sand paper to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. One coat primer and two coats of plastic
emulsion paint are to be applied. The work is to be carried out under
direct guidance and instructions from the manufacturers whose expert
advise and supervision are to be made available in order to achieve the
high grade finish. The painters employed for this work must be
capable of producing the highest standard of workmanship required. If
the finish is of doubtful nature, the contractor shall have to rectify at his
own cost to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.
11.9 Bitumen painting
Bitumen painting to concrete surface shall be done as follows :
(i) Hot application
The surface shall be cleaned of all mud etc., before painting. The
honey-combs and other defects of concrete surfaces to be painted shall be
rectified properly. Any projection of binding wire shall be cut to keep it 10 mm
inside the concrete surface and then filled with mortar. Before application the
surface shall be absolute dry.
Bitumen of standard quality as specified shall be heated to the

temperature specified by the maker and then applied hot with brushes on the
prepared surface. The surface shall be allowed to cool before applying the
second coat.
(ii) Cold application
II-99
269 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The surface shall be prepared in the same way as for hot application.
The bitumen emulsion of approved quality shall be applied with special
brushes. Where acid resistant treatment is specified such surface shall be
covered with approved acid resisting coating to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Before the coating is applied, the surface shall be properly cleaned
and prepared in the manner described above.
11.10 Tarring
(i) Timber surfaces in contact with earth/concrete/ plaster shall be

treated with one coat of hot tar or as specified in schedule
before fixing.
(ii) If required steel work in holdfasts and the like shall be treated as
above and sanded in addition before being fixed in position.
11.11 Painting to Timber & Steel Surface
11.11.1 General
The priming coat for steel/wood work shall be applied after the surface
has been prepared. After the priming coat has dried, all nails, screw
holes and cracks shall be filled with putty and surface smoothened with
sand paper.
All surfaces must be thoroughly dry before painting work is started and
painting in exterior/exposed parts shall not be taken up in wet/humid or
otherwise unfavourable weather.
All stains of paint to glasses, walls, fittings and fixtures etc. shall be
cleaned thoroughly by applying required turpentine or thinner. The
contractor's rate shall include all these.
11.11.2 Painting to timber
(i) Unless otherwise specified, all timber surfaces shall be treated

with one priming coat, one under coat and one finishing coat.
Under coat and finishing coat shall be synthetic enamel or as
specified. Priming coat shall be of approved primer. In case the
surface is to be polished or varnished, a priming coat as
approved or specified shall be given. No primer shall be
applied to wood work until it has been inspected and passed by
the Engineer.
II-100
270 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(ii) Polishing
The surface to be polished shall be prepared in the same manner as

specified under painting.
(iii) French Spirit Polish
After preparation of the surface it will be well dusted and then the pores
of the wood shall be filled up with a filler made of a paste of whiting in water or
methylated spirit with a pigment if so required. The spirit polish shall be
prepared by dissolving pure shellac in methylated spirit, @ 0.75 Kg of shellac
to 5 litres of spirit, with the addition of pigment if so required.
The polish shall be applied with a pad consisting of cotton wool inside a
clean white cloth. Several coats shall be applied with light sand papering from
time to time and cleaning the dust before applying next coat except the final
coat. The final coat of the polish shall be rubbed thoroughly until the wood
feels perfectly dry when touched and gives a satisfactory smooth shining.
(iv) Wax Polishing
After preparation of surface wax polish will be applied. The polish shall
be prepared by heating together 2 parts of pure bees wax and boiled linseed
oil each over a slow fire. When the wax is completely dissolved the mixture
shall be cooled till it is just warm and one part of genuine turpentine is to be
added and entire mixture shall be well stirred.
Polish shall be applied in the same manner as specified for spirit

polish.
11.11.3 Painting to Steel Surface
11.11.3.1 General
All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, grease, rust and mill
scale. Areas which become inaccessible after assembly shall be
painted before assembly after cleaning the surfaces as described
above. The surfaces shall be perfectly dry before painting.
Wherever shop primer painting is damaged, the surfaces shall be

thoroughly cleaned and touched up with corresponding primer.
II-101
271 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when

humidity is such as to cause condensation on the surface to be
painted.
11.11.3.2 Steel Structures
Unless otherwise specified all structures shall be painted with two coats
of primer. One coat shall be applied at shop and the second coat at
site. All structures after erection shall be given two coats of finishing
paint and shall be of synthetic enamel of approved colour. The under
coat shall have different tint to distinguish from the finishing coat.
11.11.3.3 Galvanized Iron Sheets
All plain and CGI sheets requires surface pre-treatment or use of other
patented primer to ensure adhesion of paint to zinc coated surfaces.
Such pre-treatment shall be as per manufacturer's specifications.
Where pre-treatment is adopted one coat of primer paint of suitable
quality shall be applied. Unless otherwise specified the finishing coats
shall consist of an under-coat of an aluminium paint having blue tint
and a second coat of aluminium paint having aluminium colour.
11.11.3.4 Structures embedded
Exposed surfaces of embedded parts shall be given two coats of red

lead graphite primer at shop and finished with two coats of anti-
corrosive paint at site after embedment. Type of paint and procedure
of painting shall be as per manufacturer's specification. Surfaces to be
field welded shall have no paint applied within 100 mm of the welding
zone.
12.0 INTERNAL WATER SUPPPLY PLUMBING, DRAINAGE &

SANITATION
12.1 Scope of Work
The work comprises supply, laying testing, commissioning etc. of water

supply, plumbing, drainage & sanitation.
The work includes the following activities connected with the job :
i) Supply and delivery of all required pipes and other materials.
II-102
272 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ii) Earthwork in excavation for trenches, pits/chambers/manholes

etc.
iii) Civil works connected with the laying/erection of pipe lines such
as making holes in the wall etc. and repairing them after pipe
erection, construction of pipe supports, valve chambers,
manholes, bedding and covering of pipe laying wherever
required.
iv) Laying and jointing of pipe lines as specified in this chapter
v) Testing of pipe lines after laying as per standard tests specified

in this chapter.
vi) Back filling of trenches after successful and satisfactory testing.
vii) Disinfection of the complete piping system in the case of water

supply.
viii) Commissioning of entire network.
ix) Safe custody of the pipes/materials/equipment/work and other

obligation stated elsewhere in the specification.
x) Any other activities which are not mentioned above but essential
and required.
12.1.1 Materials
The materials shall conform to Part-I of this series.
12.2 Water Supply & Plumbing
12.2.1 General
12.2.1.1 General Requirements
The Contractor shall lay all the pipes and fittings in the best workman
like manner by skilled workmen and licensed plumbers in conformity
with the regulations and requirements of the local appropriate
authorities and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Unless otherwise
specified water supply works in buildings shall be carried out in
II-103
273 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
accordance with IS:2065-1983 "Code of Practice for Water Supply in

Buildings" & IS:2064-1993 "Code of practice for selection, installation
and maintenance of sanitary appliances".
12.2.2 Installation
All works like earth work, masonry, concrete, steel work, cutting holes,
chases in brick, concrete & RCC works, cutting of roads, repairs and
rectifications associated directly with the installation of water supply
system shall come under the scope of the contractor and shall be
governed by the specification of the relevant chapter.
12.2.3 Laying
Before lowering down for laying in the trenches, the pipes shall be
checked against crack by means of light hammering and for any other
damage. All fixing shall be carefully aligned and spaced at a distance
from the main structure to give reasonable all round access for
maintenance and inspection and laid true to line plumb and level. Any
deviation shall need approval of the Engineer. Meticulous care shall be
taken to avoid chances of airlock and water hammer.
Pipes shall be laid on continuous unyielding surface holder or on

reliable supports at least one near each joint and spacings as directed
by the Engineer. The support must be strong, neat and shall have
provisions for securing the pipes in every direction and easy
maintenance. If situation requires, pipes shall be encased or concealed
in masonry or concrete if shown on drawing or directed by the
Engineer. Pipes embedded in floors and wall shall be securely bound
so as not to allow any movement due to expansion and contraction.
adequate width shall be provided to lay the pipes as per standard
practice.
Excavation below the required level is not permitted. The contractor

shall make good any excess excavation as directed by the Engineer.
Soft spots in the bottom of beds for pipe lines in rock shall be leveled
with sand or soft soil or concrete as approved by the Engineer and the
thickness of the layer shall not be less than 100mm.
12.2.4 Excavation for pipe lines in trenches
II-104
274 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Excavation shall comply with chapter 2. The sides of pits and trenches
shall be adequately supported at all times, except where otherwise
12.2.5 Underground piping in and around building
Underground piping shall be laid at such a depth that it is not likely to

be damaged by traffic and other loads and frost, where applicable, and
as shown in the drawing and instructed by the Engineer. The thrust
blocks shall be provided wherever required.
The size and depth of the trench shall be as approved by the Engineer.
Backfilling in trenches shall be done with selected fine earth, unless
otherwise permitted, in 150mm layers and carefully consolidated and
well treated so that it does not set as a drainage channel. Special care
shall be taken while filling in the vicinity of the pipe to avoid damages.
Before backfilling the laid pipe shall be fully tested and approved.
12.2.6 Concealed piping
Where desired by the Engineer or shown on the drawings the pipes

shall be concealed in masonry or concrete of the adjoining structure by
making chases in walls/floors and these shall be secured by hooks and
the chases filled with concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement, 2 sand and 4
aggregate). The contractor will rectify, if required the chases, openings
and pipes, supplement and make good after laying and testing of the
concealed pipelines.
12.2.7 GI.Piping
12.2.7.1 The pipes shall be fixed in longest lengths possible with all
necessary
bends, tees, couplings, reducing ockets, short piece, jamnut and
tees
etc. in perfect straight lines both vertically and horizontally.
12.2.7.2 All exposed GI pipes shall be fixed at least 15mm clear of wall face with
holder bat clamps at suitable places not exceeding (2.5 metres) centre
to centre. Where the pipes are laid in chases in walls as shown in the
drawing, these shall be secured to walls by hooks. Chases in walls and
floors shall be filled in with cement concrete 1:2:4. Where the pipes are
to be run underground these may be laid at least 60 cm below ground
level.
II-105
275 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.2.7.3 The joints of pipes and fittings shall be sealed with red lead paint and
fine spun yarn. Joints must be perfectly water tight when put under
maximum test pressure.
12.2.7.4 Unless otherwise specified the exposed portion of pipes and fittings
shall be given two coats of approved synthetic enamel paint over a
coat of approved priming. Pipes laid underground or concealed in
walls/floors shall be treated with two coats of bituminous paint.
12.2.8 Jointing of pipes
The interior of all pipes and joints shall be cleaned before jointing
commences. Jointing of pipes shall be done in such a manner as to
render them completely leakproof and durable. Instruction of the
manufacturer shall be followed unless desired otherwise by the
Engineer. However, the general norms and recommended practices for
different types of pipes are given below for guidance :
(a) Cast Iron
i) Spigot and socket joints :
Interior surface of bells and exterior surface of smooth

ends of pipes shall be cleared of redundant insulating
cover and other foreign materials particularly of oil,
burning off materials from bells and smooth pipe ends.
Sharp rises on interior bell surface shall be smoothed out.
Bells should be lined up, in compliance with direction of

pipe. Laying work shall be started from lower points.
ii) Lead and Flanged Joint :
Lead joints shall be made as per Sl. 15.4.6.1 and flanged

joints as per Sl. 15.4.6.2 of chapter 15.
b) Steel Pipes
Plain ended steel pipes may be jointed by welding. Screwed and

socketed joints shall be carefully tightened. Care shall be taken to remove
II-106
276 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
burring from the ends of the pipes. Jointing compound, if used, shall be lead
free and approved by the Engineer.
c) G.I Pipes
Threads shall be cut with, sharp tools, and before jointing all scale shall
be removed from pipes by suitable means. The screw threads of the pipe
shall be cleaned out and the joint made by screwing the fitting after treating
the threads with approved pipe jointing compound. Once a joint has been
screwed up it shall not be backed off unless threads are recleaned and new
compound applied.
d) Asbestos cement pipes
Socket and spigot ended pipes shall be jointed by caulking with tarred
gaskets and grouted with 1:3 cement sand mortar.
12.2.9 Precautions
a) All water supply pipes shall be so laid and so fixed and

maintained as to be and remain completely water tight.
b) During installation open ends of each pipe shall be protected by

suitable covers or plugs so that the ends, thread, sockets or
spigot are not damaged and no foreign materials can make its
way into the pipe line.
c) Due care should be taken to ensure that there shall be no cross

connection whatsoever between a pipe or fitting for conveying or
containing wholesome water and a pipe or fitting containing
impure water or water liable to contamination or of an uncertain
quality of water which has been used for any other purposes.
d) Fittings and fixtures liable to be stolen shall be fitted and fixed

just before testing and handing over.
12.2.10 Painting
When mentioned in the schedule of item underground steel and cast

iron pipes shall be treated with 2 coats of anticorrosive bituminous paint
on the outside surface after cleaning the surface from soil, dust,
II-107
277 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
moisture, rust, scales soot etc. When painting is to be done for pipes
above ground, G.I. pipes shall be given a coat of zinc chromate primer,
C.I. & M.S. pipes shall be given one coat of red lead or zinc chromate
primer over which at least 2 coats of paint of best quality and
manufacture as approved by the Engineer shall be provided or as
specified in the schedule of item.
12.2.11 Ferrule and stop cock box with chamber
Square cast iron surface box 15 cm square and 22.5 cm deep weighing
not less than 4.54 Kg with hinged lid shall be provided in masonry
chamber. Top of box shall be made flush with the finished level of the
chamber. The chamber 25cm x 25cm inside shall be with half brick wall
in cement mortar 1:4 over a cement bed concrete of 75mm thick in
proportion 1:4:8 with stone chips. The inside wall faces shall be
plastered with 12mm thick cement mortar 1:4 finished smooth with a
floating coat of neat cement.
The exposed surfaces of cast iron box and cover shall be treated with
two coats of bituminous paint.
12.2.12 Inspection, Testing and Acceptance
12.2.12.1 Pipes, fittings and fixtures before laying
All pipes, fittings and appliances shall be inspected, before delivery at

the site to see whether they conform to accepted standards. The pipes
and fittings shall be
inspected on site before laying and shall be sounded to disclose

cracks. Any defective items shall be clearly marked as rejected and
forthwith removed from the site.
12.2.12.2 Testing of pipes after laying
General
II-108
278 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
a) The contractor shall ensure the safety of the pipe work under
test and provide all necessary stoppers, testing apparatus etc.
that are required for testing.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for any damage done to pipe

work and ancillary work while testing and shall replace any pipe
or fitting which does not satisfactorily withstand the test.
c) The contractor shall give written notice of the times at which

tests are to take place. On completion of each test two copies of
the complete records shall be given to the Engineer.
d) The work will not be considered complete until the tests are
found satisfactory and a certificate issued by the Engineer.
After laying and jointing, the main shall be slowly and carefully charged
with water, so that all air is expelled from the main by providing a
25mm inlet with a stop-cock, allowed to stand full of water for a few
days if time permits and then tested under pressure. The test pressure
shall be 6Kg/cm2 or double the maximum working pressure,
whichever is greater The pressure shall be applied by means of a
manually operated test pump, or in the case of long mains or a large
diameter, by a power driven test pump, provided that pump is not left
unattended. In either case due precaution shall be taken to ensure that
the required test pressure is not exceeded. Pressure gauges shall be
accurate and shall preferably have been re-calibrated before the test.
The pump having been stopped, the test pressure shall maintain itself
without measurable loss for at least five minutes. The end of the main
shall be closed by fitting a water-tight expanding plug and the plug shall
be secured by struts to resist the end thrust of the water pressure in the
mains.
12.2.12.3 Testing of service pipes and fittings
The service pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water
allowing all air to escape avoiding all shock or water hammer. The
service pipe shall then be inspected under working conditions of
pressure and flow. When all draw-off taps are closed, the service
pipes shall be absolutely watertight. All pipings, fittings and appliance
shall be checked for satisfactory support and protection from damage,
corrosion and frost.
12.2.13 Storage Tank

II-109
279 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.2.13.1 Pressed steel tank
Pressed steel water storage tanks shall be of nominal size and capacity
as mentioned in the Schedule of Item and fabricated with all flanges
external / internal or bottom flange internal and side flanges external,
as shown on drawings or schedule of items. Inlet, overflow, vent pipes
and manholes shall be arranged and provided as shown in drawing or
mentioned in the schedule. Unless otherwise specified, the outlet pipe
shall be 50mm above the bottom of the tank and there shall be 150mm
free board at the top of the tank. The fabricator shall supply 5 prints of
fabrication drawing to the Engineer for prior approval showing
thickness of plates, method of jointing the plates. All supports, stays,
gussets etc. Pads, cleats etc., required for supporting the tanks shall
also be supplied by the manufacturer.
All tanks shall be supplied with mosquito-proof top with manhole not
less than 450mm diameter. Tanks deeper than 1.00 Metre shall be
provided with M.S. internal access ladder adjacent to the manhole.
Meter level indicator shall be provided if asked for. Two coats of
anticorrosive paint over a suitable primer shall be applied to both
internal a external surface of tanks. The paint shall be so selected as
not to impart any taste or odour of water and be of lead free
composition.
12.2.13.2 G.I. Water Tank
G.I. water tanks shall be procured from a reputed manufacturer. The

design shall be good enough to withstand the loads safely. Galvanized
iron water storage tank shall be made of minimum 16 gauge galvanized
iron sheet. Unless otherwise specified plain sheets shall be fixed at the
corner to angle iron frames by means of 6 mm rivets at 40 mm pitch for
tanks upto 1000 litres capacity and 8 mm rivets at 35 mm pitch for
tanks above 1000 litres capacity. Tanks above 1000 litres shall have 20
mm dia. galvanised iron stays, one fixed to angle framing at topand two
in the body of the tank for extra strength. Holes for rivetting shall be
drilled and not punched. Lead shall be applied to the joints before
rivetting.
Tanks shall have 400 mm dia. holes at the top with hinged covers. The
covers shall be made of galvanised iron sheet with angle iron frame.
The cover shall be just loose but close fitting to keep out dust and
II-110
280 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
mosquito and will not be airtight. It shall be complete with lockable

arrangement.
Tanks unless otherwise specified shall be provided with rising main

inlets of 40 mm dia. galvanised iron pipe or as shown on drawing and
40 mm dia. G.I. overflow pipe and 25 mm washout with plug. If
specified the rising main shall be connected to the tank with a ball valve
near the top which disconnects the supply when tank is full up to the
point of overflowing.
The ball valve shall permit the entry of water when the tank is empty
and disconnect the supply when the tank is full. It consists of a hollow
floating ball made of copper, plastic or hard rubber, 110 mm in
diameter attached to an arm which is so pivoted that the end near the
pivot close the orifice of the main when the ball is raised to the required
height of water in the tank and opens the main as soon as the ball
drops with the fall of water level as it is drawn off through the
distribution. The ball valve shall be fixed to the tank in such a position
that the body of the ball valve submerge when the tank is full upto the
water line. The ball valve shall be so adjusted as to limit the level of
the water in the tank below the lip of the over-flow pipe, and above the
maximum water filled level shall be as per the standard norms for GI
water tank.
12.2.13.3 Water reservoirs made of concrete or masonry shall be governed by

the specification in the relevant chapter. It shall have, inlet, outlet,
overflow and wash out with plug and a top MS/CI cover as per
schedule of items and drawings.
12.3 Drainage and Sanitation (Internal)
12.3.1 Scope
This section covers the layout and construction of drains for waste
water, surface water and sewage together with all fittings and fixtures
inclusive of ancillary works, such as connectins, manholes and
inspection chambers used within and around the building and the
connection to a public sewer upto treatment work, septic tank and
soak pit. All sewerage and drainage works shall be executed in
accordance with specifications given for different works. All sewerage
and drainage works shall be executed by a licensed plumbing
supervisor or a licensed plumber and in accordance with IS : 1742-
II-111
281 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1983 "Code of Practice for Building Drainage" unless otherwise

specified.
12.3.1.1 Installation
All pipe lines, locations of fittings and fixtures, etc. shall be as per
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Correctness of lines, plumbs,
orientation, symmetry and levels shall be strictly ensured. All items
shall be fully secured against movement in any direction and shall be
located so as to allow easy maintenance.
All pipelines, fittings and fixtures shall be installed leakproof; when the
works under scope of this specification are linked up with works
executed by others, the connections shall be such as to prevent any
splashing or spilling or emission of foul odour and gasses.
12.3.2 Rainwater Downcomers
Rainwater downcomers shall be standard cast iron or asbestos cement

pipes. In case where specifically desired, M.S. pipes may also be
used. M.S. pipes shall be painted outside with two coats of anticorro-
sive paint over a coat of primer. Rain water downcomers shall run
along and be secured to walls columns, etc. Where desired by the
Engineer these may have to be installed in chases cut in the structure.
All pipes shall be well secured and supported by adequately strong
brackets. The brackets may be wrought iron clamp type, split ring type
or perforated strap iron type as approved by the Engineer. For vertical
runs each pipe shall hang freely on its brackets fixed just below the
socket. Suitable spacer blocks shall be provided against the vertical
surface to which the pipe is fixed. Roof and floor drains and yard
gullies shall be installed, if required, by cutting into the structure and
grouted with 1:2:4 cement concrete. All gutters shall be provided with
removable gratings. All horizontal pipes shall have a minimum fall of 1
in 100.
12.3.3 Gutter
The gutters shall be made of G.I. or A.C. Gutters shall be supplied by

reputed specialised firms. Each section shall be sufficiently rigid,
edges and corners straight and the slopes perfectly uniform. GI gutters
shall have the edges strengthened by suitable means. The joints may
be made by rivetting, bolting or soldering.
II-112
282 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Unless specified otherwise the gutters shall have a minimum fall of 1 in

120. Adequate number of string supports shall be provided so that
there is no deflection even when the gutter is full. Each joint must have
a support. Unless otherwise specified the supports shall be fabricated
of MS brackets. All junctions shall be thoroughly watertight. The joints
may be made by rivetting, bolting or soldering. All joints between
successive lengths of gutters shall have an overlap of at least 5 cm.
The drop in the overlap shall always be in the direction of the fall of the
gutter. Ends of gutters shall be closed watertight. Junction with
rainwater downcomers shall be made fully watertight and secured.
12.3.4 Soil and Drainage Pipes
12.3.4.1 Gradients
If not specified the minimum gradients of soil and drainage pipe line
shall be as follows :
100 mm nominal dia : 1 in 35

12.3.4.2 Relation with water supply pipe lines
Unless specifically cleared by the Engineer, under no circumstances

shall drainage and soil pipes be allowed to come close to water supply
pipelines.
12.3.4.3 Laying
Each separate pipe shall be individually set for lines and levels. Where
lengths of sewer or drain pipes are laid in trench, properly painted sight
rails shall be fixed across the trench at a height, equal to length of the
boning rod to be used, above the required invert level of the drain or
sewer at the point where the sight is fixed. More sight rails shall be re-
quired at manholes, change of gradient and intermediate positions if
the distance for sighting is more than 16 m apart. The excavation shall
be boned in at least one in every 2 m. The foot of the boning rod shall
be set on a block of wood of the exact thickness of the wall of the pipe.
II-113
283 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Each pipe shall be separately and accurately boned between sight

rails.
12.3.4.4 Support and protection on pipelines
All pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill. Preferably the pipe
shall rest on solid and even foundations for the full length of the barrel.
However, the pipe manufacturer's instruction as approved by the
Engineer shall be followed in the matter of support and jointings.
Where pipes are not bedded on concrete, the bed shall be left slightly
high and carefully placed so that the pipe barrels rest on undisturbed
ground. If anywhere the excavation has been carried too low packing
shall be done in concrete. Where laid on rock or very hard ground
which cannot be easily excavated to a smooth surface, the pipes shall
be laid on a cradle of sand or gravel as desired by the Engineer. PVC
or similar pipes shall be laid directly on stable soil and packed with
selected soil.
The minimum support and protection for glazed stoneware pipes shall
be as follows :
a) When cover is less than 1 metre and where pipes are

unavoidably exposed above ground surface, the pipes shall be
completely encased surrounded with concrete as per IS:4127-
1983.
b) Where pipes are laid on soft soil with the maximum water table
laying at the invert of the pipes, the sewer shall be bedded on
concrete 1:4:8 mm with 20mm down aggregates as per IS:4127-
1983.
c) Where the pipes have to be laid on soft soil with the maximum
water table rising above the invert of the pipe, but below the top
of the barrel, the pipe sewer shall be haunched with concrete
1:4:8 mm with 20mm down aggregates as per IS:4127-1983.
d) Where maximum water table is likely to rise above the top of the
barrel the pipe sewers shall be completely encased/surrounded
with 1:4:8 concrete with 20mm down aggregate as per IS:4127-
1983.
II-114
284 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Vitrified clay pipes shall be laid on a bed of 150mm thick cement

concrete (1:3:6) nominal mix by volume.
Cast iron pipes and concrete pipes may be supported on suitable

concrete or brick support, where specified. The support shall be
unyielding and strong enough. At least one support shall be located
close to ends. Spacing of intermediate supports shall be as decided by
the Engineer. Pipes shall be secured to the supports by approved
means.
Anchoring of pipes where necessary shall be achieved by suitable

concrete encasing designed for the expected thrust.
12.3.4.5 Entry into structures
For entry of the pipes lines into any building or structure suitable
conduits under the structure or sleeves shall be used. The conduits
and sleeves shall be such as to allow easy repairs and replacement of
the pipes. Where openings or chases are required to be made in the
structure for entry of pipe lines, locations and sizes shall be marked
and checked by the Engineer. After laying of the pipeline, the openings
and chases shall be mended.
12.3.4.6 Traps and Ventilating pipes
a) Pipes carrying the sewage from water closets and waste water
and overflow water from baths, wash basins, sinks shall be
trapped immediately beneath such fixtures. Traps shall have
minimum water seal of 50mm and shall be ventilated whenever
such ventilation is necessary to maintain water seal of the trap.
Ventilating pipes shall be carried up vertically from the drain to a
height of at least 600mm above the outer covering of the roof
top of the building or as shown on drawings. All vertical
ventilating, anti-siphonage and similar pipe shall be covered on
top with a cowl. The cowl shall be made of C.I. unless desired
otherwise by the Engineer.
Connecting to existing sewer lines shall be through a manhole.
b) Sand Cast Iron Spigot and Socket pipe and fittings
II-115
285 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
All soil waste and vent pipes and fittings used in the work shall
be cast iron and shall conform to IS:1729-1979. The pipes shall
have spigot and socket ends, with bead on spigot end and shall
be with or without ears. The pipes shall be free from cracks and
other flaws. The interior. of the pipes and fittings shall be clean
and smooth and painted inside and outside with Dr. Angus
Smith's solution or other approved anticorrosive paint. Fittings
shall include bends, offsets, branches of various types, junctions
etc. as required for the work which shall be provided according
to drawings and directions of the engineer.
The fittings shall be provided with access doors where so

specified or directed by the engineer. The access door fittings
shall be of proper design so as not to form cavities in which the
filth may accumulate. Doors shall be provided with 3mm thick
rubber insertion packing, and when closed and bolted they shall
be watertight. The access doors shall have MS studs and bolts
or screws or bolts and nuts.
Fixing
The pipes and fittings shall be fixed to wall by means of MS holder bats
clamp of approved type and steel bolts or by pipe nails, bobbins etc. as
the case may be, keeping the pipe clear from the finished surface of
the wall. The holder bat nails shall be fixed to the wall in wooden block.
The soil pipe shall be supported at the foot upon a bed of cement
concrete of proportion 1:3:6 and firmly attached to the wall.
The pipes shall be laid truly vertically or along the line as shown in the
drawing. Connection between main pipe and branch pipe shall be
made by using branches and bends with access door for cleaning.
All vertical soil waste, ventilating and anti-siphonage pipes shall be

carried up above the roof and provided with suitable C.I. cowl on top.
Pipes outside the building shall be laid underground for which trenches
shall be excavated as required for the work. The trenches shall be
back-filled with excavated material after the drainage system has been
tested and passed.
Jointing (Lead Caulked Joint)
II-116
286 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Unless otherwise specified, the pipes and fittings shall be jointed with
lead joints as described below :
The annular space between the socket and spigot will be first well
packed in with tarred gasket or hemp yarn leaving 25mm from the lip of
the socket for the lead. The joint may be leaded by using proper
leading rings or if they are not available by wrapping a ring of hemp
rope covered with clay round the pipe at the end of the socket, leaving
a hole through which lead shall be poured in (for pipes with sockets
facing a upwards 15mm high small clay band on socket edge may be
used).
The lead shall be rendered thoroughly fluid and each joint filled in one
pouring. Before caulking, the projecting lead shall be removed by flat
chisels and then the joint caulked round with proper caulking tools and
a hammer of 2 to 3 pounds in weight in such manner as to make the
joint quite sound. After being well set up the joint is to be left flush neat
and even with the socket.
Lead for caulking shall conform to IS:782-1978.
Painting
All the exposed CI pipes and fittings shall be painted to match the
colour of the surroundings. The surface of the pipes and fittings to be
painted shall be cleaned thoroughly and painted 2 coats with approved
paint over and including 1 coat of approved primer. Pipes laid
underground shall be painted with 2 coats of anti-corrosive paint.
12.3.4.7 Cutting of pipes
Manufacturer's instructions shall be followed for cutting of pipes where

necessary. Suitable and approved tools shall be used for the cutting so
as to leave surface clean and square to the axis of the pipe.
12.3.4.8 Jointing
Jointing of laid pipes shall be so planned as to avoid completely any

movement or strain to the joints already made. If any joint is suspected
to be damaged it shall be opened out and redone.
All joints between pipes, pipes and fittings and manholes shall be gas
tight when above ground and watertight when underground. Method of
II-117
287 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
jointing shall be as per instructions of the manufacturer and as

approved by the Engineer. However, in the absence of any instruction
available from the manufacturer the methods as detailed hereunder
shall be used.
(a) Sand Cast Iron Pipes
Jointing of cast iron pipe shall be done as described in Sl. No.

12.3.4.7(b).
(b) Concrete pipes
i) Spigot & Socket Joint
The opening of the joint shall be filled with stiff mixture of

cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 fine sand) which shall
be rammed with caulking tool.
ii) Collar Joint
Joint shall be done by slipping the collar over an d clear of

the end of the pipe. The recess at the end of the pipe
shall be filled with jute braiding dipped in hot
bitumen. Care shall be taken that no off-set of the
jute braiding shall be visible either outsid e or inside
the pipe. The collar shall be then set up over the joint
covering equally both the pipes and leaving an even
caulking space all rou nd. cement and sand mortar
(1:1.5) shall then be w ell punched o r pressed home
with a caulking tool.
(c) Glazed stoneware pipes
Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry shall

first be placed round the spigot of each pipe and the spigot shall
then be placed into the socket of the pipe previously laid. The
pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in the correct position and
the gasket caulked tightly so as not to fill more than 1/4 of the
socket. The reminder of the socket shall be filled with a stiff
mixture of cement mortar of 1:1 proportion. When the socket is
filled, a fillet shall be formed round the joint with a trowel,
II-118
288 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
forming an angle of 45 degree with the barrel of the pipe. The

newly made joints shall be protected, until set, from sun and rain
and shall be covered with damp sacking or other suitable
materials.
12.3.5 Trenches and other excavations
Excavation shall be carried out according to chapter-2, Earthwork.
Width of the trench at the bottom shall be such as to provide 200 mm

clearance on either side of the pipe for facility of laying and jointing.
Excavated material shall be stacked sufficiently away from the edge of

the trench. The spoil bank shall not be allowed to endanger the stability
of the excavation. Spoil may be carted away and used for filling the
trench behind the work. Turf, top soil or other surface material shall be
set aside, turf being carefully rolled and stacked for use in
reinstatement. All excavations shall be properly timbered, where
necessary. Efficient arrangements for dewatering during excavation
and keeping it dry till back filling shall be made to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Sumps for dewatering shall be located away from the pipe
layout.
Where the excavation proceeds through roads necessary permissions

shall be secured by the contractor from the appropriate authorities.
Special care shall be taken not to damage underground services,

cables etc. These when exposed shall be kept adequately supported
till the trench is backfilled.
The backfilling shall be done only after the pipeline has been tested
and approved by the Engineer. Special care shall be taken for packing
with selected material in areas 300 mm around the pipe. At least 300
mm over the pipe shall also be filled with soft earth or sand.
Consolidation shall be done in 150 mm layers. The surface water shall

be prevented from getting into the filled up trench. Traffic shall not be
inconvenienced by heaping up unduly the backfilling material to com-
pensate future settlement. All settlements shall be made good
regularly to minimise inconvenience or traffic where applicable.
12.3.6 Installation of fittings & fixtures
II-119
289 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.3.6.1 General
All fittings & fixtures shall be laid out as per drawings and in proper line,
level and shall be firmly secured to floors with screws and ditto fix and
to walls with wall plugs and screws. Unless otherwise specified only
C.P. Brass screws shall be used for fixing sanitary fittings to wall plugs
and floors.
12.3.6.2 European pattern WC
Water closet shall be fixed with floor by means of 75 mm long, 6.5 mm

diameter counter sunk bolts & nuts embedded in floor using rubber or
fibre washers so as not to allow any lateral displacement.
12.3.6.3 Indian Patttern W.C.
The water closet pan shall be sunk into the floor and embedded in a
cushion of average 150 mm cement concrete 1:4:8 (1 cement, 4 sand
and 8 broken brick ballast of 40 mm size). The concrete shall be left
about 125 mm below the top level of the pan so as to allow for flooring
and its bed concrete. The joint between the pan and trap shall be
made with C.M. 1:1 and joint between trap and CI soil and waste pipe
to be made with lead. All the joints shall be leak proof. The WC floor
shall slope towards the pan. The foot rest shall be set in cement
mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand).
The cast iron cistern, brackets and flush pipe etc. shall be painted with
two coats of approved paint, over and including a coat of approved
priming.
12.3.6.4 Wash basin
Wash basin shall be fixed to C.I./R.S. brackets fixed in cement mortar

1:3 (1 cement :3 sand). The brackets shall be fixed to approved
wooden wall plugs with screws. C.P. brass trap and union shall be
connected to waste pipe if specified.
12.3.6.5 Urinals
The urinal shall be fixed to the walls with C.P. Brass screws fixed to
wooden wall plugs. Urinal partitions shall be fixed to walls by making
chases in walls and grouting the same in 1:2:4 cement concrete.
II-120
290 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.3.6.6 Mirror
Fixed type mirror shall be screwed to wall plugs with CP brass screws
and shall have a backing of asbestos or similar material as
specification in the item.
Swivel type mirror shall be fixed with C.P. brackets which shall be fixed
to wall plugs with CP brass screws
12.3.6.7 Soap tray / toilet paper holder
This shall be of flush mounting design and shall be housed in walls by

making chases and grouting the same in cement mortar 1:3 unless
otherwise specified. All other fittings shall be fixed with screw or as per
manufacturer's specification
12.3.6.8 Towel rail & Toilet glass-shelf unit
This shall be fixed with CP Brass screws which shall be fixed to wall
plugs.
12.3.6.9 Gully trap
This shall be fixed on 100 mm thick bed and encasement of size

600mm x 600mm x full height of trap shall be provided with cement
concrete of proportion 1:4:8 with 40mm stone aggregate. The gully
outlet shall be jointed to the branch drain as specified or directed by the
Engineer.
12.3.6.10 Masonry chamber for Gully Trap
After fixing and testing gully and branch drain, a brick masonry
chamber 300mm x 300mm x 450mm deep or as specified (internal
dimensions) in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement and 4 sand) shall be built
with half brick thick wall round the gully trap from the top of the
concrete. The internal faces of the chamber shall be finished smooth
with 15 mm thick cement plaster (1:4) and neat cement finish. Brick
wall exposed to outside shall be finished with 12 mm thick cement
plaster 1:4. P.C.C. (1:2:4) band 100 mm thick shall be provided over
the brick work with suitable grooves for accommodating R.C.C. cover
II-121
291 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
to be supplied as per drawing and made water tight by providing

suitable beading in the band.
12.3.6.11 High level flushing cistern - (fixing flush pipe & cistern)
The W.C. pan shall be connected to the cistern by G.I. 32mm dia or
40mm (O.D) high density polythene flush pipe with holder clamp and
brass coupling.
12.3.6.12 Low level flushing cistern
Unless otherwise specified, it shall be connected to the closet by

means of 40mm dia white porcelain enameled flush bend using rubber
adaptor joints.
12.3.7 Septic tank and effluent disposal
12.3.7.1 Septic tank
Septic tank shall consist of the tank itself with inlet and outlets
therefrom complete with all necessary earthwork and backfilling. The
details of septic tank shall be as shown on drawing. This item shall also
include ventilating pipe of at least 100mm dia whose top shall be
provided with a suitable mosquito proof wire mesh and cowl. Generally
ventilating pipe shall extend to a height of about 2 metres when the
septic tank is at least 15 metres away from the nearest building and to
a height of 2 metres above the top of building when it is located closer
than 15 metres. Ventilating pipes can be connected to the normal soil
ventilating system of the building where allowed.
12.3.7.2 Effluent disposal
The effluent from the septic tank shall be disposed by allowing it into an
open channel or a body of water if the concerned authority approves or
into a soak pit for absorption by soil or shall be allowed to be absorbed
by soil through open jointed S.W pipes laid in a trench filled with broken
bricks.
12.3.7.3 Soak Pit
Shall be complete as shown on drawing. In absence of a detailed

drawing it shall consist of a 900mm dia pit 1000mm in depth below the
invert level of the inlet pipe. The pit shall be lined with stone, brick or
II-122
292 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
concrete blocks with dry open joints backed with at least 75 mm of

clean coarse aggregate. The lining above the inlet level shall be set in
cement mortar (1:6). The pit shall be filled with brick bats. Inlet pipe
shall be taken down to a depth of 900mm from the top as an anti-
mosquito measure.
12.3.7.4 Open jointed S.W pipes
Minimum dia of the S.W pipes shall be 200mm nominal. The trench for
laying the pipes shall be minimum 600x600mm. The joints of the pipes
shall be left unsealed.
12.3.7.5 Commissioning septic tank
After the septic tank has been proved water-tight and the sewage
system is checked, the tank shall be filled with water to its outlet level
before the sewage is let into the tank. It shall be seeded with well
digested sludge obtained from septic tank or sludge digestion tank. In
the absence of digested sludge a small quantity of decaying organic
matter such as digested cow dung may be introduced.
12.3.8 Manhole/Inspection chambers
Necessary excavation as required for the manhole shall be done true to

dimensions and levels as shown in the drawing. The manhole chamber
shall be built with brick work in C.M. 1:4 with minimum one brick thick
on a base of 100mm thick cement concrete 1:4:8 with 40mm down
aggregate or as specified. The concrete bed shall extend beyond the
external face of brick work on all sides by at least 75mm . The
thickness of wall shall be as indicated. The work shall be carefully built
in English bond, the jointing faces of each brick being wall buttered
with cement mortar before laying so as to ensure a full joint.
The inside of the walls shall be plastered with 15mm thick cement
mortar 1:4 and finished with a floating coat of neat cement and outside
shall be plastered with 12mm thick C.M. 1:4.
The channels and benching shall be done in cement concrete 1:2:4

with 20mm down stone aggregate and finished with 12mm thick
cement plaster in C.M. 1:3. The channels shall be semicircular in the
bottom half and of diameter equal to the sewer. Above the horizontal
diameter the top edge shall be suitably rounded off. The Branch
channels shall also be similarly constructed with respect to benching
II-123
293 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
but at their junction with the main channel an appropriate fall suitably
rounded off in the direction of flow of the main channel shall be given.
The benching at the sides shall be carried up in a slope of 1 in 3.
All angles shall be rounded to 75mm radius with cement mortar 1:4
and shall be rendered smooth. The internal surfaces shall have a hard
impervious finish obtained by using a steel trowel.
The manhole chamber shall be covered on top with RCC (1:2:4) slab
with necessary reinforcement as per drawings. Unless otherwise
specified circular type light duty M.H. cover with single seal weighting
25 kg. will be provided in each RCC cover.
12.3.9 Testing and acceptance
12.3.9.1 Inspection before installation
All pipes, fittings and fixtures shall be inspected, before delivery at the
site to see whether they conform to accepted standards. The pipes
shall again be inspected on site before laying by sounding to disclose
cracks. All defective items shall be clearly marked and forthwith
removed from the site.
12.3.9.2 Testing of pipelines
Comprehensive tests of all pipe lines shall be made by simulating

conditions of use. The method of actual test shall be decided by the
Engineer. All test data shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer
for review and instruction. The Engineer's discretion regarding
tolerance shall be final.
General guidance for the tests are given below :
12.3.9.3 Smoke Test
Soil, waste, vent and all other pipes, when above ground, shall be
tested for gas tightness by a smoke test conducted under a pressure
of 25mm water gauge and maintained for 15 minutes after all trap seals
have been filled with water. The smoke is produced by burning oily
waste or tar paper or similar material in the combustion chamber of a
smoke machine. Chemical smokes are not satisfactory.
12.3.9.4 Water Test

II-124
294 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
For pipes other than cast iron Glazed ware and concrete pipes shall be
subjected to a test pressure of at least 1.5m head of water at the
highest point of the section under tests. The tolerance figure of two
litres per centimetre of diameter per kilometre may be allowed during a
period of 10 (ten) minutes. The test shall be carried out by suitably
plugging the low end of the drain and the end of connections, if any,
and filling the system with water. A knuckle bend shall be temporarily
jointed in at the top end and a sufficient length of the vertical pipe joint-
ed to it so as to provide the required test head or the top end may be
plugged with a connection to a hose ending in funnel which could be
raised or lowered till required head is obtained and fixed suitably for
observation.
Subsidence of test water may be due to one or more of the following

causes :
a) Absorption by pipes and joints.

b) Sweating of pipes or joints
c) Leakage at joints or from defective pipes
d) Trapped air
Allowance shall be made for (a) by adding water until absorption has
ceased and after which the test proper should commence. Any leakage
and the defective part of the work shall be cut and made good.
12.3.9.5 For cast iron pipes
Cast iron sewers and drains shall be tested as for glazedware and
concrete pipes. The drain plug shall be suitably strutted to prevent their
being forced out of the pipe during the test.
12.3.9.5.1 For straightness
i) By inserting at the high end of the sewer or drain a smooth ball

of a diameter 13mm less than the pipe bore. In the absence of
obstruction, such as yarn or mortar projecting through the joints,
the ball will roll down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the
lower end and;
II-125
295 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ii) By means of a mirror at one end of the line and lamp at the
other. If the pipe line is straight, the full circle of light may be
observed. The mirror will also indicate obstruction in the barrel if
the pipeline is not straight.
12.3.9.6 Testing septic tank
The septic tank shall be tested for water tightness. It shall be filled up
with water and allowed to soak for 24 hours. Then, it shall be topped up
and allowed to stand again for 24 hours and loss of level recorded. The
fall shall not be more than 15mm.
12.3.9.7 Fixtures etc.
All fixtures and fittings shall be connected by watertight joints. No

dripping shall be accepted.
13.1 Scope of Work
The work comprises supply, laying, testing, commissioning etc., of

sewerage & drainage network as specified.
The work includes the following activities connected with the job.
i) Supply and delivery of all required pipes and other materials

including erection.
ii) Earth work in excavation for trenches and pits/ manholes.
iii) Civil works connected with the laying/erection of pipe lines such
as making holes in the walls etc., and repairing them after pipe
erection, construction of pipe supports, brick / concrete
manholes, preparation of concrete bedding and covering for pipe
laying wherever required etc.
iv) Laying and jointing of the pipelines as specified in this chapter
v) Testing of the pipelines after laying as per standard tests as

specified in this chapter.
II-126
296 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
vi) Back filling of the trenches after successful and satisfactory

completion of tests for the pipeline laid.
vii) Cleaning, painting/coating and wrapping etc of pipes and fittings

etc.
viii) Commissioning of entire network laid.
ix) Safe custody of pipes/material/equipment/work and other

obligations stated elsewhere in the specification.
x) Any other activities which are not mentioned above but essential
and required.
xi) If specified, at road crossing the pipe shall be laid in encasing

pipes, wrapped & coated M.S pipes shall be used as encasing
pipes. The encasing pipe shall project beyond the berm or both
sides of the road. The encasing pipe shall be supported on
P.C.C saddles if the site condition warrants so.
13.2 Materials
The materials shall conform to part-I of this series. Sewerage net work
in Township shall generally be of R.C.C/S.W.G pipes, R.C.C pipes
being used normally for pipe sizes of 400mm dia and above. In plant
area, at road crossings etc Cast Iron Pipes may be used.
13.3. Excavation of trenches & pits
Excavation shall be carried out according to Chapter of Earthwork.
Before starting earth work in excavation, temporary drainage

arrangement shall be provided to prevent surface water entering the
trenches and pits at the cost of Contractor.
Excavation of trenches and pits for pipelines shall be carried out in

shortest possible time so as to avoid sinking of ground and consequent
damage to the pipelines.
Excavation of trenches for pipelines and surface drains, shall be in

exact accordance with the plans and section, alignment, levels and
gradients as indicated on the drawings or as directed at site by the
Engineer. The final bed must be dressed, levelled or trimmed to proper
II-127
297 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
gradient and rammed with sprinkling of sand and got passed by the
Engineer. No excavation shall be made below the specified levels
without written permission of the Engineer. Should any excavation be
taken below the specified level due to carelessness of the Contractor,
he will fill in such excavation at his own expense as specified in clause
2.12.
13.4 Cast Iron Pipes
I.S 3114-1985 has to be followed in general for Laying and jointing of

pipes unless otherwise specified.
13.4.1 Back filling
For the purpose of back filling, the depth of the trench shall be
considered as divided into the following three zones from the bottom of
the trench to its top.
ZONE-"A" From the bottom of the trenches to the lev el of the center
line of the pipe.
ZONE-"B" From the level of the center line o f the pipe to a level 300
mm above the top of the pipe.
ZONE-"C" From a level 300 mm above the top to the top of the trench.
Trenches shall not be back filled until the pipe joints have been tested,
alignment and gradient passed by the Engineer but back filling shall be done,
at least from the bottom of the trench to the level of the center line of the pipe
(ZONE "A") leaving 450 mm on either side of the joints uncovered, with earth
till testing is completed. These joints should however be kept covered with
mats, gunny, straws etc., to avoid damage to joints by temperature effects.
While back filling care should be taken to ensure that no damage

should be done to the pipeline. All back fill materials shall be free from
cinders, ashes, slag, refuse, rubbish, vegetables or organic material,
lumpy or foreign material, boulders, rocks or stones or other materials
which in the opinion of the Engineer is unsuitable or deleterious.
However, materials containing stones up to 20 cm as the greatest
dimension may be used in Zone-"C" unless specified otherwise herein.
Backfilling in Zone-"A" shall be done by hand with sand, fine gravel or

other approved material placed in layers of 80 mm and compacted by
II-128
298 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
tamping. The back filling material shall be deposited in the trench for
its full width of each side of the pipe, fitting and appurtenances
simultaneously.
Backfilling in Zone-"B" shall be done by hand or approved mechanical

methods. Special care being taken to avoid injuring or moving the
pipes. The type of back fill materials to be used and the method of
placing and consolidating shall be prescribed by the Engineer to suit
individual locations.
Back filling in Zone-"C" shall be done by hand or approved mechanical

methods. The type of back fill materials and method of filling shall be
as prescribed by the Engineer.
Paving and metaling shall be reinstated in as good order as before

removal and the Contractor shall do adequate ramming and watering of
under layers to guard against subsequent settlement all at his cost.
13.4.2 Custody of pipes
The Contractor shall remain responsible for the safe custody of pipes,
specials and other materials supplied by him/issued to him either free
or on cost recoverable basis till these are laid installed, tested, back
filled etc., and handed over to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall verify the conditions of the pipes, specials etc., at
the time of receipt from sources and shall be responsible for all
damages during handling, transporting, laying, installing, testing etc.,
and the cost of such damages shall be borne by the Contractor.
13.4.3 Erection/laying of pipelines
i) Erection of all equipment shall be carried out with highly skilled

workers.
ii) The pipelines shall be laid and supported properly and it shall be
deemed as a contractual obligation that the lines are not thrown
out of alignment or lifted off during commissioning and
subsequent operation.
13.4.4 Pipeline erection
II-129
299 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
All the underground pipelines shall be laid in accordance with IS :

3114-1985.
13.4.5. Handling of pipes & fittings
Unloading of pipes & fittings
While unloading, pipes shall not be dropped down from trucks on hard
surface. This should be done with the help of a steadying rope and
timber skids. Pipes should not be dragged, specially to the spigot end
along hard surface.
Lowering of pipes & fittings
Proper implements, tools etc. shall be provided and used by the

contractor while lowering pipes & fittings in the trenches and in no case
these should be dropped. Pipes over 300mm dia shall be handled with
the help of chain pulley blocks with tripod supports.
Detection of cracks in pipes and fittings
The pipes and fittings shall be inspected for defects and cracks by
ringing with a light hammer preferably while suspended. Smearing the
outside with chalk dust helps location of the crack. If doubt persists,
pouring a little Kerosene on the inside of the pipe at the suspected spot
will confirm it as it will seep through.
Cleaning of pipes and fittings
All foreign materials shall be cleaned from the socket and spigot ends
both from inside and outside. Every precaution shall be taken to
prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being laid.
When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be
closed suitably.
Cutting of pipe
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces shall
be done in a neat manner without damage to the pipe. Pipe cutting
machine may be used for this purpose and in case it is not available,
for large diameter pipes electric arc cutting method using a carbon or
steel rod may be adopted. The pipes can be cut by using chisels also
depending on the circumstances.
II-130
300 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Permissible deflection at socket and spigot joints
Direction
On level ground the socket ends should face the upstream. When the
line runs uphill the socket ends should face the upgrade.
Permissible deflection
In case it becomes necessary to deflect pipe from a straight either in

the vertical or horizontal plane, due to obstructions or where long
radius curve is permitted, the following norms shall be adhered to:-
Lead joint 2.5 degrees Rubber joints
for nominal bore 80 to 300mm 5 degrees

Anchor and thrust blocks
Suitable concrete thrust blocks shall be installed, wherever the thrust is

appreciable, specially at dead ends and bends. In case of unbalanced
also this may be required. In case of steep gradients and under
influence of temperature change also thrust blocks may be required for
rigidly joined pipes.
It is advisable to avoid sharp bends above 45 degrees. In soft ground

as far as possible two bends should not be put together and be
separated by at least one length of straight pipe.
Anchor or thrust blocks shall be generally as per IS : 5330-1984 and

thrust resistant design pressure shall be equal to the test pressure.
13.4.6 Pipe jointing
The type of jointing will be defined in the detailed working drawing and
Schedule of items i.e. whether they should be (i) socket and spigot with
molten lead or lead wool joint or (ii) flanged joint.
13.4.6.1 Socket & spigot joints
II-131
301 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
a) Molten lead joints
Unless otherwise specified, socket and spigot joints shall be

done with molten lead.
The spigot shall be cleaned of the coating, carefully entered in

the socket of the adjacent pipe by one or more laps of white
hampen spun yarn, sufficient yarn only being driven into the
socket to leave the depth of the lead specified. The proper
depth of each joint shall be tested before running the lead by
passing completely round it a wooden gauge, notched out to the
correct depth of lead, the notch being held close up against the
face of the socket. The pipes shall be carefully packed
underneath so that they shall bear properly throughout their
whole length.
The lead shall be carefully skinned of all scale when melted in a cast
iron pot or patent melting machine. The joints must be perfectly dug before
being run with lead. The pipes shall again be examined for line and level and
the space left in the socket shall be filled in generally by pouring in melted
lead. This may be done best by using proper loading rings or if these are not
available, by wrapping a ring or hemp rope, covered with clay round the pipe
at the end of the sockets leaving a hole into which lead shall be poured. For
large pipes, it is also necessary to leave one or more air vents around lower
half of the joints. The lead shall be rendered thoroughly fluid and each joint
shall be filled at one pouring. If the pipe is too large for the joint to be filled
from one ladle, two or more ladles shall be used. It is to be noted that the
lead should be heated to such a temperature as will ensure that it flows
completely around the joint. Overheating of lead shall be avoided.
After a section of convenient length has been laid, lead caulking

shall be commenced. The lead shall be freed from the loading
pipe outside the socket of the other pipe with a flat chisel, and
then caulked around 3 separate times, with proper caulking tools
of increasing thickness and a hammer 2 to 3 kg in weight in
such a manner as to make the joints sound and water tight.
After being well and evenly set, the joint is to be left flush neat
and even with the socket. The approximate weight of lead and
spun yarn for different size of cast iron pipe socket and spigot
joints, as per IS : 3114-1985 are given in the Table-I.
II-132
302 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
TABLE – I
QUANTITY OF LEAD AND SPUN YARN

FOR DIFFERENT SIZES OF PIPES
Nominal Lead / Joint kg
of pipe mm
80 1.8
100 2.2
125 2.6
150 3.4
200 5.0
250 6.1
300 7.2
350 8.4
400 9.5
450 14.0
500 15.0
600 19.0
700 22.0
750 25.0
800 31.5
900 35.0
1000 41.0
1100 46.0
1200 50.0
1500 66.5
II-133
303 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Note : The quantities of lead given are provisional and a variation of

20% is permissible either way.
b) Lead wool joint
In the event of the Engineer specifying or permitting the use of

lead wool the joint shall be made as follows :
Hempen spun yarn shall be driven into the socket and

thoroughly caulked with suitable caulking tools. Lead wool shall
then be introduced and this caulking shall be repeated with each
turn of lead wool under which the socket is full within 3 mm and
the wool of the lead wool is compressed into dense mass. The
joint shall then be finally pressed with finishing tool. The table
giving the quantity of lead wool and yarn to be used in different
sizes of pipes is given in the Table-2
TABLE – 2
Nominal Internal dia Lead wool weight Spun yarn weight

in mm in kg in kg
80 1.30 0.17
100 1.70 0.23
150 2.41 0.34
175 2.89 0.37
200 3.37 0.57
225 3.63 0.64
250 4.11 0.74
300 4.82 0.82
350 6.04 1.17
375 6.52 1.25
400 7.00 1.33
450 9.64 1.84
500 10.86 1.99
II-134
304 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Nominal Internal dia Lead wool weight Spun yarn weight

in mm in kg in kg
600 12.79 2.83
750 15.68 3.52
825 17.12 3.88
900 18.80 4.25
1200 28.44 6.01
Note : Higher tolerance may be permitted under special

circumstances depending upon site condition for
quality of lead wool and spun yarn.
13.4.6.2 Flanged joints
Flanged joints should be made by painting the facing of the flanged

with graphite or red lead freely. Packing should be of rubber insertion
sheet or compressed fibre board and of approved thickness. The
packing should be of full diameter of the flange with proper pipe hole
and bolt holes cut out and even at both the inner and outer edges. All
the bolts shall be tightened up evenly on all sides keeping the longi-
tudinal axes of adjoining pipe in exactly the same straight line.
The interior of the pipe must be checked carefully so as to be free from

all dust and other foreign matters as the work proceeds. For this
purpose a disc plate or brush sufficiently long to pass two or more
joints from the end of the pipe last laid shall be continuously drawn
forward as the pipes are laid. The ends of the pipes must be securely
protected preferably with wooden plugs during the process of the work.
The pipes laid must not be made receptacles either for tools, cloth or
any other material during progress of the work.
13.4.7 Inspection & testing
a) If required all materials shall be inspected by the Engineer

before dispatch to site. All the tests shall be carried out in the
manufacturer's works and necessary test certificates shall be
furnished as proof of such testing. The Contractor shall intimate
the Engineer at least two weeks in advance for any such
II-135
305 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
inspection / testing. All facilities for inspection / testing including

necessary test certificates shall be provided by the Contractor at
his own cost.
b) After completion of erection all pipelines shall be inspected by

the representative of the Contractor and the Engineer. Any
discrepancy, defect pointed out during this inspection shall be
made good by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer without additional cost.
c) All pipes with valve and fittings shall be tested to 1.5 times
maximum working pressure. The pressure should remain
constant for a period of 8 hours. All arrangements for testing
shall be done by the Contractor. Any defect found during testing
shall be made good by the Contractor to the entire satisfaction
of Engineer and the test shall be repeated till acceptable results
are achieved. Any special tools, instrument or equipment
required for these tests shall be provided by the Contractor for
tests only.
d) All oils, lubricants and other consumables required during tests

and trials of different equipment shall be supplied and arranged
by the Contractor at his own cost.
13.4.8 Painting
i) All equipment, valves and other exposed steel parts shall be

given a coat of red oxide, zinc chromate or red lead and two
coats of final approved quality paint according to the colour
scheme of the Purchaser.
ii) All the exposed pipes and fittings shall be painted with two
coats of paints of approved quality.
13.4.9 Commissioning
After pressure testing the main, it should be flushed with water of

sufficient velocity to remove all dirt and foreign materials.
The system shall be commissioned after all necessary tests have been
conducted successfully. All lubricants, oils, and other consumables
required for commissioning of the system shall be supplied by the
II-136
306 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Contractor at no extra cost. Commissioning of the equipment to be

supplied, if any, by the Owner, shall be carried out by the Contractor
under guidance of the representatives of the supplier of these
equipment and Engineer. Any adjustment and/or changes/
rectifications that may be found necessary during commissioning of
these equipment shall be carried out by the Contractor at his cost.
13.5. Stoneware Glazed Pipelines (S.W.G)
13.5.1 Back filling
Trenches shall not be back filled until the pipe joints have been tested,
alignment and gradient passed by the Engineer, but back filling shall be
done at least for a depth equal to the diameter of the pipe or 300 mm
whichever is greater over the pipes leaving 450 mm on either side of
the joints uncovered with earth till the testing is completed. These
joints should however be kept covered with mats, gunny bags, straws
etc., to avoid damage to joints by temperature effects.
While back filling care should be taken to ensure that no damage is

done to the pipelines. The first 300 mm of filling material immediately
over and around the pipe should be of soft material free from clods
and stones etc. The remainder of the filling materials shall be watered
and rammed in layers not exceeding 250 mm at a time.
Paving and metalling shall be reinstated in as good order as before

laying of the pipelines.
Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, there shall be a minimum

cover of 700 mm over the pipes and at road crossing etc., it shall not
be less than 900 mm.
13.5.2 Laying of pipes
The laying of the pipelines shall commence only after the levels of the
bottom of the trench at various points have been checked by the
Engineer. Cracked pipes whether at the socket or in the body shall be
rejected. All SW pipes shall be fitted together on the surface of the
ground to ensure a proper fit before they are lowered. The spigots and
sockets shall be properly cleaned and brushed, if necessary & then
lowered by hand to the bottom of the trench.
II-137
307 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The pipes shall be carefully laid to the alignment, levels and gradients
shown on the plans and sections, and great care shall be taken to
prevent, sand, earth or other matter from entering the pipes during
laying. As it is not permitted to rectify errors of grade by packing up
underneath with earth, care should be taken in excavating and slight
scraping, if necessary, done to bring to grade. The pipes between
manholes shall be laid truly in straight lines without vertical or
horizontal undulations.
Bedding, haunching or encasing of the pipes during laying shall be in

accordance with IS : 4127-1983 and shall be done with cement
concrete in proportion (1:4:8) to prevent ground water from entering the
pipelines.
All inverts shall be laid from site rail fixed at the true levels, with proper
boning rod. The sight rails and boning rods shall be provided, fixed
and maintained by the Contractor at his own expense.
The pipes shall be laid, sockets facing up the gradient, beginning at the
lower end, and with the sockets, resting in the socket rest holes cut in
the trench bottom. Each pipe shall be laid singly and no pipe shall be
laid until the trench has been excavated to its required depth to a
distance of twenty yards in front of the pipes to be laid.
No pipes of any description shall be covered until they have been

passed by the Engineer.
13.5.3 Jointing of pipes
(a) Cement joint
The stoneware pipes shall be cement jointed normally. In case,

if specified so, bituminous joints shall be used. In each joint,
spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry or gasket of tarred yarn
shall be passed round the joint and inserted in it by means of
suitable jointing tools. More skeins of spun yarn or gasket shall
then be added and well rammed home. The yarn shall be
moistened to avoid absorbing moisture from cement mortar.
The yarn should be so placed as to centre the spigot of one pipe

within the socket of the other and shall prevent the jointing
mortar penetrating inside the pipe where it might set and
interfere with the flow of sewage.
II-138
308 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Yarn or gasket (cemented or tarred) so rammed shall not

occupy more than one-fourth of the depth of socket.
The cement shall be thoroughly mixed with medium sand in the

proportion of 1:1 (1 cement : 1 sand) and then just enough water
shall be added to make the mix plastic. On no account, the
mortar shall be made soft or sloppy. The mix shall then be
carefully inserted by hand into the joint.
Special care shall be taken for inserting the mortar into the
portion of the joint underneath the pipe. When the cement
mortar has been inserted, it shall be punched or caulked into the
joint with wooden caulking tools, and more cement mortar shall
be added until the space of the joint has been filled completely
with tightly caulked cement. No fillet of cement shall be added.
No mortar which is older than 30 minutes shall be permitted for

jointing. The cement mortar joints shall be cured at least for
seven days before testing.
The inside of each pipe shall be carefully wiped out with a mop
or scrapper sufficiently long to pass two joints from the end of
the pipe and any projecting cement shall be removed.
All pipes entering the manholes should be set in cement mortar

1:3 and a completely watertight junction effected.
(b) Bituminous joints
If specified so this joint will be used. Asphalt and sand in the

ratio of 1:7 shall be boiled together and filled into the socket in a
molten state with the aid of special moulds.
13.5.4 Testing of pipes
Testing of pipes shall be done wholly at contractor's expense inclusive

of apparatus, provision of water etc., and/or as per IS : 4127-1983.
After cement has had time to set, the pipes shall be tested in lengths
between manholes in the following 'manner'. In the lowest manhole a
plug shall be inserted in the pipe. The disc in the pipe and at the upper
manhole shall be fitted with a filling pipe with a right angle bend and an
II-139
309 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
air cock. The length of pipe shall then be filled with water by means of
the pipe connection on the upper disc. The air cock in the upper disc
shall be kept open, while the pipeline is being filled to permit the
escape of air.
When the pipes have been filled with water and air excluded, the air
cock shall be shut and water shall be poured into a conical "Filler"
attached to the testing and filling pipe of the disc in the upper manhole
until water remains in the filler. The testing or filling pipe shall then be
raised and fastened so that the height of the pipe is six feet, which will
be the usual test pressure for stone ware pipe joints.
The test will be for an hour or such longer period as may be set by the
Engineer. If the water level does not fall more than 25 mm in the
length of 90 metre, the test may be considered satisfactory.
If it is found that certain pipe joints are leaking, the water shall be run
off and joints recaulked with cement mortar and the test repeated till it
is proved by the Contractor that the joints are leak-proof.
13.5.5 Concrete bedding, haunching & encasing
Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Quantities, all SW pipes

shall be laid in accordance with IS: 4127-1983 As per site condition
haunching or/and encasing of pipes with cement concrete may be
required as per clause 4.2 & 4.3 of IS 4127-1983. The concreting shall
be done with 1:4:8 cement sand concrete.
Where sewers have less than 1.2 m cover at places of heavy traffic,
these shall be surrounded with mass concrete if directed by the
Engineer.
13.5.6 Handling of pipes
While unloading, pipes shall not be dropped from the trucks/carts on

the ground. Timber skids and steadying rope should be used while
unloading or lowering in trenches. To avoid damage specially to
spigot end, pipes should not be dragged on the hard surface.
13.6 Manholes
II-140
310 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
All manholes shall be of the size and type as given in the Schedule and
shall be provided as per drawing or as directed by the Engineer. All the
manholes shall be circular or other shape as shown in drawing. The
bed shall be in cement concrete of Mark-10B (or 1:3:6 mix) (Size of
coarse aggregate 40 mm and down) of 100 mm thickness or as shown
in the drawing and shall be projected out 75 mm from the outside face
of the wall all round. or as shown in the drawing. The working part
including channeling, benching etc., made of P.C.C. shall be of grade-
15C (or 1:2:4 mix). All manholes shall be plastered inside with 1:3
cement plaster 20 mm thick and finished with a floating coat of neat
cement unless otherwise specified.
Concrete used for precast RCC cover slabs shall be of grade 20C (or
1:1.5:3 mix)and shall be constructed as per drawing.
The top level of manholes shall be generally 100 mm above the

surrounding ground levels or as directed by the Engineer. Channeling
inside the manhole shall be done in smooth bends.
The end of pipe shall be neatly built in and finished in cement mortar
1:3.
Circular medium duty Cast iron water sealed manhole cover and
frames, 560 mm dia (clear opening) and nominal weight 128 kg shall
be provided for each manhole and shall be in accordance with IS:1726-
1991 Manhole covers with double seals (Light duty) with wt. as
specified in schedule of item shall be provided within compound near
the buildings if specified so. If specified heavy duty cover and frames,
either circular or double triangular type, shall be provided. Step irons
shall be provided with two coats of bituminous paint and shall be as per
drawing.
In cases where branch pipe sewers enter the manhole or main pipe
sewer at a level more than 1m, from the main sewer, a drop connection
shall be provided. The extra pipe length required for this connection
will be paid under item for pipelines. No other extra payment will be
allowed.
All exposed surfaces of cast iron frame and cover shall be painted with
two coats of bituminous painting
13.7 Marker plates
II-141
311 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Marker plate indicating the particular service installed shall be provided

along the routes of pipes laid below ground. These shall be of mild
steel, with the type of service and direction of flow, painted on it. The
markers shall be set firmly in a concrete base and installed at all
corners and turning points. Over straight runs markers shall be spaced
at 100 m intervals generally.
14.0 ROAD WORK
14.1 General
Road works in general shall be constructed according to the

requirements to the various specifications and codes of practices of the
Indian Roads Congress.
Works such as earthwork, masonry, concreting and the like, wherever

they occur in association with construction of roads, shall be governed
by the respective specifications of these series.
14.2 Trenching and Preparation of Subgrade
The surface of the formation of width equal to that of soling coat shall
first be cut to a depth below the proposed finished level equal to the
combined depth of soling and wearing coat, (due allowance being
made for consolidation), and dressed parallel to the finished profile.
Any roots of bushes, trees etc., shall be taken out to the full depth and
the cavities thus formed shall be filled up and rammed by the
contractor at his cost.
In slushy soil or in areas where water logging is frequent, adequate

arrangement shall be made for drainage of the area so that the sub-soil
water level is kept as low as possible.
The sub-grade shall then be consolidated with a power road roller of 8-

10 tonne capacity by rolling with minimum of 5 numbers of passes till it
is densely consolidated to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Surplus earth shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer and the

areas where it is disposed of shall be neatly dressed.
All undulations of the sub-grade surface that might develop due to

rolling shall be made good with earth and sub-grade re-rolled.
II-142
312 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
14.3 Ash / Moorum Carpet
Wherever the ground is soft and slushy, ash carpet consisting of

common boiler ash shall be laid to 5 cm thickness over the subgrade
and then rolled. In firm ground no ash carpet is necessary and boulder
soiling shall be laid directly over the sub-grade. If decided by the
Engineer, a bed of moorum of specified thickness shall be provided for
to form a sub-grade.
14.4.1 Boulder Soling
The width of the soling coat shall be 30cm (15cm on either side) more
than that of the wearing coat. Its depth shall be 15cm in cutting and
23cm in filling and made up soil, unless otherwise specified in the
schedule of quantities or shown in the drawing.
The edges of the soling shall be marked out by strings and stakes.
Soling stone shall be hand packed and set on edge with greatest length
across the road. This shall be laid closely in position on the sub-grade,
firmly set with their broadest side downwards. The joints shall be
staggered. All interstices between the stones shall be wedged in with
locking smaller stones well driven into gaps to ensure tight packing and
complete filling of interstices. Such filling shall be carried out
simultaneously with the placing in position of soling stones and shall
not lag behind.
After packing, surface shall be checked with template of approved

shape and high and low spots corrected by removing soling and re-
packing. The top surface of the soling coat shall be perfectly true to
camber and grade.
The soling shall then be thoroughly consolidated with power roller of 8-

12 tonne weight depending upon the type of soling stones, starting at
"edges" and working towards the centre. In case of super-elevated
curve the rolling shall commence from the inside edge of the curve to
the outside edge. The roller shall run over the same surface of soling at
least 10 times or more till the soling coat is well consolidated to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be checked by templates
and any disturbance in grade or camber corrected after every rolling
and finally consolidated. After that, at least 50mm thick moorum shall
be laid on top of soling coat and rolled with water to proper compaction
so that the top surface seems smooth. The rate for soling coat shall be
II-143
313 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
inclusive of the cost of the moorum as blinding materials for which no

separate payment shall be made.
14.4.2 Laterite soling
In case of laterite soling the thickness of soling shall be as follows :
(i) For road width of 7m and above the sub-base shall consist of
two layers of laterite stones 150mm maximum size. The sub-
base shall be rolled to a thickness of 230mm after compaction.
(ii) For road width of 4m to 7m,the sub-base shall consist of one

layer of laterite stone of 150mm maximum size consolidated to
115mm thick.
(iii) A layer of moorum,33.3 % in volume of laterite, shall be spread

over the laterite to a uniform thickness and rolled with 8 tonne
roller with constant watering until the mixture penetrates into the
voids of laterite layer. Care shall be taken to maintain the
camber and slopes.
Other steps for laying, compacting etc. of the laterite soling shall be
same as given under clause 14.4.1 "Boulder soling".
14.5 Kerbs
Concrete or stone kerbs, where shown in drawings, shall be fixed in

position after laying and consolidation of soling. They shall be fixed
true to line and level and secured in position by approved means.
14.6 Water Bound Macadam Surfacing
The construction of water bound macadam shall be carried out

according to IRC : 19-1981 "Standard Specification and Code of
Practice for Water Bound Macadam".
14.7 Preparation of Base and Shoulders
The subgrade shall be reshaped to the required grade and camber.

Where water bound macadam is to be laid over existing black top
surface, 50 mm x 50 mm furrows shall be cut in the existing surface at
1 m intervals inclined 45 degree to the centre line of the carriageway,
before laying of coarse aggregates. Necessary arrangements shall be
II-144
314 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
made for the lateral confinement of aggregates by constructing

shoulders in the form of two parallel mud walls 20 x 15cm which shall
be made along the outer edges of the wearing course.
14.8 Spreading Coarse Aggregate
The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly and evenly upon the
prepared base in required quantities from stock piles along the
roadside or directly from vehicles. In no case shall these be dumped in
heaps directly on the base. The aggregates shall be spread to proper
profile by using templates placed across the road about 6m apart.
Where possible, mechanical devices shall be used to spread the
aggregates uniformly.
The water bound macadam course shall be constructed in layers of not

more than 75 mm thickness. However, the Engineer may permit
courses of 100 mm compacted thickness to be constructed in a single
layer. Each layer shall be tested by depth blocks. No segregation of
large or fine particles shall be allowed.
14.9 Rolling
The coarse aggregates spread as described above shall be compacted

to full width by rolling with either three wheel power roller of 6 to 10
tonnes capacity or an equivalent vibratory roller. The weight of roller
shall depend on the type of coarse aggregate.
The rolling shall begin from edges and after the edges have been
compacted, progress gradually towards the centre, parallel to the
centre line of the road, uniformly lapping each preceding rear wheel
track by one half width. On super elevated portions, rolling shall
commence from the lower edge. Where screenings are to be applied,
rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially
compacted with sufficient voids to permit application of screenings.
Where screenings are not to be applied, as in the case of crushable
aggregates compaction shall be continued until the aggregates are
thoroughly keyed, with no creeping of stones ahead of the roller. Slight
sprinkling of water may be done during rolling, if necessary.
Rolling shall not be done when the subgrade is soft or yielding nor
when it causes a wave like motion in the base course. If irregularities
develop during rolling, and exceed 12 mm when tested with a 3m
straight edge, the surface shall be loosened and aggregates added or
II-145
315 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
removed before rolling again. The surface shall be checked by

template for camber. In no case shall screenings be used to make up
depressions.
14.10 Application of Screenings
After coarse aggregates have been rolled, screenings to fill the

interstices shall be applied gradually over the surface in thin layers.
Dry rolling shall be done when the screenings are being spread, so that
the jarring effect of roller causes them to settle into the voids of the
coarse aggregates. Damp and wet screenings shall not be used and
the spreading, rolling and brooming of screenings shall be taken up on
sections which can be completed within one day's operation.
14.11 Sprinkling and Grouting
After application of screenings, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled

with water, swept and rolled. The sprinkling, sweeping and rolling
operations shall be continued and additional screenings applied where
necessary until the coarse aggregates are well blended and firmly set
and a grout of screenings and water forms ahead of the wheels of the
roller.
14.12 Application of Binding Material
After the application of screenings, approved binding material, where it

is required to be used, shall be applied at a uniform and slow rate in
two or more successive thin layers to a thickness of 2.5 cm. After each
application of binding material, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled
with water and the resulting slurry swept in with brooms, so as to fill the
voids properly. This shall be followed by rolling with a 6-10 tonne roller,
during which, water shall be applied to the wheels to wash down the
binding material that may get stuck to them. The spreading of binding
material, sprinkling of water, sweeping with brooms and rolling shall
continue until the slurry of binding material and water forms a wave
ahead of the wheels of moving roller.
14.13 Setting and Drying
After final compaction the road shall be allowed to cure overnight. Next
morning, hungry spots shall be filled with screenings or binding
II-146
316 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
material, lightly sprinkled with water and rolled. No traffic shall be

allowed till the macadam sets.
14.14 Surface Evenness
The surface evenness of completed water bound macadam course in

longitudinal direction shall be within 12 mm when tested with a 3 m
straight edge and in cross profile within 8 mm when checked with a
template.
14.15 Bituminous Pavements
14.15.1 Bitumen premix carpet with seal coat
The consolidated thickness of this type of treatment shall be

2cm/2.5cm/4cm or as specified.
14.15.1.1 Surface preparation
Water bound macadam surface on which black topping is to be

provided shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, loose materials, caked
mud and other foreign material with the help of wire brush, chisel, picks
etc. Cleaning shall be such as to expose the stone metal to a depth of
about 6mm without dislodging the interlock of the metal. All dust and
other materials thus removed shall be thrown away at a suitable place
Any potholes, depressions and undulations found after cleaning shall

be made good with premixed chippings, and well rammed.
14.15.1.2 Tack coat
Just before the application of tack coat, the surface shall be thoroughly
cleaned by brooms and then by fanning with gunny bags.
Bitumen of specified grade heated to a temperature of 177 to 188

degree 'C' shall be spread on the prepared surface uniformly at the rate
of 0.75 kg/sq.m. by means of sprayers. It shall be applied just ahead of
and keeping pace with, laying of premix carpet.
14.15.1.3 Preparation of mix, laying & consolidation
II-147
317 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The stone grit (aggregate) shall be surface dry and contain not more
than 2% moisture before use. It shall be first screened of dust and
measured in boxes and then loaded into the drum mixer according to
the capacity of the mixing drum in the proportion given in the table
below. The aggregate shall be heated to facilitate mixing with the
binder in cold weather, where so directed by the Engineer.
The binder heated in boilers, to a temperature of 149 to 177 degrees C

or as specified for the grade used and maintained to that temperature,
shall be drawn off from the boiler into a suitable container or in bucket
gauged to show the weight of bitumen in it. This shall then be poured
over the aggregate in the mixer at the correct rate of 64 Kg/cum of
aggregate or as specified and mixing started and continued till
aggregate is uniformly coated with bitumen.
Immediately after applying the tack coat, the hot mix shall be
discharged from the mixer, carried to the road surface and spread to a
thickness sufficient to achieve after consolidation the specified
thickness. Rakes or drag spreaders shall be used for spreading the
mixture.
When the premix has been laid for a length of 15-20 metres it shall be
rolled. Rolling shall commence from edges and proceed towards the
centre. The roller wheels shall be moistened continuously so as to pre-
vent metal chips sticking to it. Any high spot or depression which
become apparent shall be corrected by addition or removal of premix
materials.
Further the prepared finished surface shall be protected from the traffic
for 24 hrs or such period as may be specified by the Engineer.
14.15.1.4 Materials
Quantity of materials required per 100 sqm of road surface shall be as

given in the table below, unless otherwise specified.
Sl. Consolidated Stone chips Sand Binder

No. thickness of (cum) (cum)
Tack Carpet Seal
premix carpet coat (kg/cum) coat
(kg) (kg/cum)
Using Paving bitumen80/100 or 30/40 grade
1. Priming tack coat
II-148
318 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Sl. Consolidated Stone chips Sand Binder

a) on a water bound
macadam surface 75
b) on an existing
black top surface 65
2. Carpe
t
2 cm 2.4 (10 mm 64
nominal size)
2.5 cm 3.0 (10 mm 64

nominal size)
4.0 cm 4.8 (12 mm 64

nominal size)
3. Seal
Coat
a) Dry area (Premixed 0.6 68
sand seal coat)
b) Wet area (Liquid 0.9 98
seal coat with chips
14.15.2 Seal coat
In dry areas where rainfall is under 150cm per year a premix sand seal
coat shall be applied immediately after laying the carpet. The binder
shall be heated in boilers of suitable design, to the temperature appro-
priate to the grade of bitumen. The aggregates shall be dry and
suitably heated to a temperature directed by Engineer before the same
are placed in the mixer of suitable design. Mixing of binder with
aggregates to the specified proportions shall be continued till the latter
are thoroughly coated with binder. The mix shall be immediately
transported from the mixing plant to the point of use and spread
uniformly on the bituminous surface to be sealed. As soon as sufficient
length has been covered with premix materials, the surface shall be
rolled with 6 to 8 tonne power roller. Rolling shall be continued till the
premix material completely seals the voids in the bituminous course
and a smooth uniform surface is obtained.
II-149
319 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
In wet areas where rainfall is above 150cm per year a liquid seal coat
with chippings (not sand) shall be applied after laying the carpet. The
binder shall be heated in boilers of suitable design, to the temperature
appropriate to the grade of bitumen and spread on the surface
preferably using mechanical sprayers. Immediately following the
application of the binder, stone chippings in a perfectly dry condition
shall be uniformly spread on the surface. Immediately after the
application of the cover material, the entire surface shall be rolled with
8-10 tonne road roller.
14.15.3 Surface dressing
The surface shall be prepared in the same way as that for premix
carpet work as per 14.15.1.1. Depression or pot holes, if any, shall be
repaired as indicated.
After the surface has been prepared and is in perfectly dry condition,
bitumen heated in the same manner as for premix carpet, shall be
sprayed over the surface preferably using mechanical sprayers. It shall
be ensured that there is even and uniform distribution of bitumen on
the surface. Spraying shall be carried out parallel to the centre line of
the road.
Immediately following the application of bitumen, stone chippings in a

perfectly dry condition, shall be uniformly and evenly spread as
specified in the item, over the entire sprayed surface. Spreading may
be done preferably by means of mechanical gritter. Finally the entire
surface shall be broomed to ensure perfect uniform spreading.
The final surface shall be checked by means of camber board etc. The
spread surface shall be rolled with 6 to 8 tonne roller till there is
sufficient boundage of chippings with bitumen. The finished surface
shall be thrown open to traffic on the following day.
14.15.4 Premixed Bitumen Concrete
14.15.4.1 General
In this type of road carpet a mixture of sand and stone aggregate is

used as aggregate producing a dense mixture. Seal coat is not
necessary as the sand used in the mix works up to the surface and
forms a seal by itself. The consolidated thickness of this type of
treatment shall vary from 4cm to 7.5cm as specified.
II-150
320 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
14.15.4.2 Surface Preparation
Same as in para 14.15.1.1 above.
14.15.4.3 Tack Coat
Same as in para 14.15.1.2 above.
14.15.4.4 Preparation of Mix, Laying & Consolidation
Para 14.15.1.3 shall generally apply except that the mixing shall be
done in two stages. The stone aggregate of the the correct specified
size and in the proportion shown in the table above shall be fed into the
mixer to which 2/3rd of the total specified quantity of bitumen heated to
the appropriate temperature shall be added. When the stone metal is
well coated, the sand in the specified proportion and the balance 1/3rd
quantity of total bitumen shall be fed into the mixer. Mixing shall be
continued until a homogeneous mix is produced and all particles are
uniformly coated with bitumen.
The premix shall be emptied on to wheel barrows or stretchers and

carried to the site of work. It shall then be spread uniformly on the road
surface with rakes or drag spreaders immediately after applying the
tack coat to a thickness sufficient to achieve after consolidation the
specified thickness. When the premix has been laid for a length of 15-
20m it shall be rolled. Rolling shall commence from edges and proceed
towards the centre.
The roller wheels shall be moistened continuously so as to prevent

metal chips sticking to it. After preliminary rolling, all honeycombs, any
high spot or depression which become apparent shall be corrected by
addition or removal of premix materials. Camber and grade shall be
checked at every stage to ensure correctness and any defect found
shall be rectified.
14.15.4.5 Materials
Quantity of materials required per 100 sqm of road surface shall be as

given in the table below unless otherwise specified.
II-151
321 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
BINDER
Sl. Thickness of Tack Hot Bitumen (cut back)/ Paving

No. consolidated coat Bitumen 80 / 100 grade
bitumen concrete (kg)
surfacing Bitumen concrete
Stone aggregate Sand (kg /

(kg / cum) cum)
1. 4 cm, 5 cm, 6 cm 75 560 128

& 7.5 cm
Aggregate
Sl. Thickness of Stone aggregate Coarse

compacted (cum / 100 sqm) sand (cum /
bitumen concrete 100 Sq.m)
surfacing
1. 4 cm 3.8 (12mm nominal size) 1.90
2. 5cm 4.8 (20mm nominal size) 2.40
3. 6cm 5.8 (60% 40mm nominal size) 2.90

(40% 25mm nominal size)
4. 7.5 cm 7.3 (60% 50mm nominal size) 3.65

(40% 40mm nominal size)
The nominal size of Coarse Aggregate herein shall mean as defined

below:
Sl. Nominal size Designation of IS Designation of IS

No. of coarse sieve through which sieve through which
aggregate the aggregate shall the aggregate shall
wholly pass be retained
i) 40 mm 50 mm 25 mm
ii) 25 mm 40 mm 20 mm
II-152
322 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
iii) 20 mm 25 mm 12.5 mm
iv) 12 mm 20 mm 10 mm
v) 10 mm 12.5 mm 6.3 mm
vi) 6 mm 10 mm 2.36 mm
14.15.5 Surface evenness
The finished surface of premix carpet and bituminous concrete shall be

tested with a straight edge 4.5 m long and any irregularity greater than
6mm shall be corrected.
14.16 Berms
Shoulders and berms shall be prepared as shown on the drawings.

Work on making berms shall not lag more than 100 metres behind the
water bound macadam consolidation. Suitable drains shall be cut on
the berms so that the water bound macadam surface is kept drained till
bituminous macadam is laid.
14.17 Kerbs
Kerbs shall be laid and set in place before completing the bituminous or
concrete wearing surface as well as the wearing surface of footpath.
Setting shall be done in mortar where so specified with Schedule of
Items. They shall be laid and set in such a way as to obtain straight
lines in the finished work, the top surface matching with the finished
surface of footpath.
Where the road edge forms a curve, the kerbs shall follow such curve.
Gaps shall be left as shown in drawings or as may be required to
provide for drainage.
14.18 Bridges and Culverts
Bridges and culverts shall be constructed according to the

specifications of Indian Roads Congress. Relevant chapters of
earthwork, concrete, masonry etc., of these series shall apply.
II-153
323 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
14.19 Boulder Pitching
Wherever specified, boulder pitching shall be provided at the inlet and

outlet of pipe culverts, or for embankments of bridges. The subgrade
shall first be dressed to level or slight slope as indicated. The
transverse slope of the pitching shall be made strictly in accordance
with the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
14.20 Scarifying & Dismantling
Where a new carriage-way abuts or includes an existing carriage-way

and the Engineer so directs, the surface of the latter shall be scarified,
adjusted and reshaped to conform with the existing and new camber or
crossfall. Materials from the existing road shall be used or disposed off
Where dismantling of the existing road has been specified, the various
layers of the road viz., bituminous macadam, water-bound macadam
and soling shall be scarified separately. Scarifying can be done either
by hand picks, or by means of scarifiers fixed to the roller. When a
roller is used for scarifying, crushing of the metal shall be avoided by
moving the metal clear of roller wheels after the scarifier has passed
over it. The loosened material shall then be combed by means of
rakes to bring out most of the larger stone. If necessary, the larger
stones thus collected shall be screened to separate fine particles if any.
The remaining metal shall then be removed and screened to recover

reusable metal. Different grades of metal shall be stacked separately
and measured.
14.21 Diversions
Where the construction of the road or culvert or bridge is in progress,

the road shall be closed to traffic and a suitable diversion shall be
provided for traffic by the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer.
The road shall be closed by the erection of barriers and suitable sign
boards at both ends which shall be provided with lights at night. Both
during night and during day, one man shall be posted at each barrier to
suitably divert the traffic and to keep the light burning during the night.
II-154
324 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
15.0 WATERPROOFING TO ROOFS & WATERPROOFING

PAINTS
15.1 Scope
This chapter deals with different types of waterproofing on roof.
15.2 Material
The materials shall conform to Part-I.
15.3 General Workmanship
The waterproofing to roofs being specialised works the Contractor shall

get these done by specialised firms/agencies.
15.4 Painting with Hot Bitumen
The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly dried and then cleaned,

with wire brushes and cotton or gunny cloth, of all loose materials and
scales. The surface shall further be cleaned with a piece of cloth lightly
soaked in kerosene oil. Bitumen shall be brought to the site in its
original container and this shall not be removed from site till the
painting job is completed. Before applying the main coatings of hot
bitumen paints, one coat of bituminous primer shall be applied. The
number of coats of hot bitumen shall either two coats or as specified in
the Schedule of Items. The bitumen of approved quality (either of
grade 80/100 or 30/40) or as specified shall be applied to the surface
after heating it to the manufacturer's specifications. Care shall be
taken to see that no blank patches are left and the quality of bitumen to
be spread shall be as specified and shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
15.5 Painting with Bitumen Emulsion
Before applying, the surface shall be cleaned thoroughly. Generally

two coats of Bitumen Emulsion are provided over a coat of emulsion
primer. Since the painting is with emulsion, the surface need not be
made dry.
II-155
325 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
15.6 Waterproofing of Roof
15.6.1 With bitumen felt
Prior to laying the insulation, roof gradient shall be checked. If

necessary, the roof shall be re-graded by screed to ensure everywhere
a run off gradient of not less than 1 in 120. The screed shall consist of
one part cement and four parts medium to coarse sand by volume.
The screed shall be cured for 7 days. The surface shall then be
cleaned of all foreign matter by wire brushing and dusting.
Waterproofing unless specified otherwise in drawings shall be the

"heavy treatment type" with primer coat as described in IS : 1346-1991.
The method of laying roofing treatment, surface finishing with pea
gravels, special mode of treatment for drain outlets, projecting pipes,
parapet walls, expansion joints, gutters, timber roofs etc., shall conform
to IS : 1346-1991. The number of layers of felts shall be as specified in
the drawing or Schedule of Items. The bonding bituminous material
shall be of grade 30/40 or as specified and the minimum quantity of hot
bitumen to be applied, shall be 1.2 kg/m2. Unless specified otherwise,
the bituminous felts shall be hessian bases of Type-3 Grade-2. Pea
gravel finish may be substituted by a coat of bituminous aluminium
paint, where so specified in the Schedule of Items.
The cement mortar used for filling the chases shall be of mix 1:4 and
the cement concrete for fillets shall be of the same grade as the roof
slab.
Where special surface finish with precast concrete or clay tiles is

specified, it shall be in accordance with the relevant chapter of this
series.
15.6.2 With bitumen mastic
The work shall be carried out generally in accordance with IS : 4365-

1967 "Code of Practice for Application of Bitumen Mastic for
Waterproofing of Roofs" or according to the manufacturer's
specifications. The work shall be carried out by a firm of specialists in
the trade.
The type of underlay or primer, thickness of application, surface finish

etc., shall be as shown on drawing or described in the Schedule of
Items. Bitumen melting shall be done in a mechanical mixer by gradu-
II-156
326 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ally heating to about 200 degree 'C'. Coarse aggregate where required
shall be added to the hot bitumen and stirred.
Each coat shall be spread evenly and uniformly by means of a float to

the required thickness. Timber gauges shall be used to regulate the
thickness. Particular care shall be taken to tuck the mastic into
grooves on vertical surfaces, at joints, around pipes or other
projections and at junction of adjoining bays.
15.6.3 Waterproofing of RCC roof with Lime concrete and Pr essed clay
titles.
Lime concrete shall consist of broken brick aggregates and lime.

Proportion of brickbat coba shall be 2.5 parts of brick jelly to one part of
lime. The brick jelly shall be hard, well burnt and of size varying from
12mm to 25mm.
The lime concrete is then laid over roof to slope to give specified
thickness and in slope of 1 in 80 or as shown on the drawing for proper
roof drainage as per roof drainage plan. The lime concrete is then to be
beaten in the manner approved by the Engineer for 48 hours or as
directed with hand beaters.
If the surface during the process of compaction becomes so uneven

that water lodges in pools, the surface shall be pricked up, and fresh
concrete
spread and consolidated as necessary to obtain an even surface.
The concrete shall then be cured by sprinkling water and allowed to

harden for a period of not less than six days before laying the roof
finish.
Roof shall be finally finished with one coarse of machine pressed clay
titles 20 mm thick laid over a 12mm thick of 1:3 mix cement mortar
mixed with 5% crude oil by weight of cement mixed in mortar. The
pressed clay tiles shall be immersed in water for two hours before
being used. The side joints of the tiles shall be more than 60 mm thick
set full in mortar. Before the work dries up completely, the tile joints
shall be raked out and pointed with cement mortar 1:3 mixed with
crude oil which shall be 5% by mass of cement. The joints shall be well
rubbed over with thin bar trowel and excess of mortar scrapped off until
the surface of the pointing attains a black polish and becomes hard. As
II-157
327 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
the work proceeds, it shall be kept thoroughly wetted until the mortar
has set firm and hard. Watering shall be continued for three weeks
after construction.
Lime concrete and tiles shall be taken up the parapet walls to a height
of 150 mm or as shown in the drawing.
The specification of pressed clay titles shall be as given in IS:2690-

1975 (Part-I). The specification of crude oil shall be as per IS:2119-
1980.
The areas around drain pipes shall be properly finished with provision
of adequate slope.
The contractor shall give guarantee for any/all types of waterproofing

for a period of 7 years against bad of faulty material and construction
and shall rectify the same at his own cost during the guaranteed
period.
15.7 Waterproofing for Basement
15.7.1 The specification covers the requirements of waterproofing of

basements, tunnels, ducts, pits, bunkers, etc.
The material used shall be bitumen felt type-3 of grade-2 conforming to

IS : 1322-1982, together with the specified bonding material and
primer.
Waterproofing shall be provided on the outside of walls and top of the

floors and shall be carried 150 mm above ground level.
The number of layers of bitumen felt to be used for walls and floor
unless otherwise shown in the drawing shall be :
i) For depths upto five metres below ground : 2 layers.
ii) For depths beyond five metres : 3 layers.
The method of laying the bitumen felts and workmanship shall in

general conform to IS : 1609-1991.
Waterproofing work shall be taken in hand only when the sub-soil water
level is at its lowest, the site shall be kept dry by adequate
II-158
328 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
arrangements for pumping out water till the work has been completed.
For this purpose drains shall be formed along the edges of the
excavation but beyond the building line, with suitable collecting sumps.
In case of large excavation areas where it is necessary to dewater
under the floor, additional land drains shall be formed across the
excavation, to adequately drain the area. Adequate arrangements
shall be made to prevent the sides of excavation from slipping while the
work is in progress.
The base concrete of mud-mat shall be rendered smooth by a 20 mm

thick sand-cement plaster (6:1). Any sharp corner over which the
waterproofing course is to be laid shall be eased out by means of
cement mortar fillets 7.5 cm in radius.
The surface must be dry before the next operation is carried out.
Blown bitumen conforming to IS : 702-1988 shall be applied hot over
the prepared surface at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2 for the first layer and for
every other subsequent layer(s). The laying of felt over the bitumen so
applied shall always commence on the floor, and shall be carried to the
walls only after treatment of the floor is complete. The minimum
overlapping of joints at sides and ends of felts shall be 10 cm. Joints
for subsequent layers of felt shall be staggered. All joints shall be
completely sealed by blow lamp.
A protective flooring of either flat bricks in cement mortar 1:3 or 6 cm

thick cement concrete type M15B or a coat of cement sand plaster
(1:3) 4 cm thick shall be constructed over the waterproofing treatment
to prevent damage to the latter during subsequent construction of the
structural floor.
The walls shall be treated in a similar way, the bitumen felts joining at
the base with the projecting felt laid over the mud-mat. The wall
surface shall be made smooth, where necessary with a coat of cement
plaster 1:5, the felts shall be laid as for the floor ensuring that the
surface to be treated is dry and then a protective brick wall, half-brick
nominal thickness shall be built in cement mortar 1:6 over the
projecting mud-mat, the space between the wall and felt being grouted
with cement slurry. Sufficient care shall be taken to ensure a perfect
bond between the waterproofing on the floor and that on the walls.
The treatment on the wall shall be carried 150 mm above the surface of
ground and tucked into a grove 6.5 cm. wide and 7.5 cm deep, the
chase being filled with cement mortar (1:4).
II-159
329 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Where waterproofing is done to the roof of an underground structure,

such as a tunnel, it shall be done in a similar way. The structural
concrete shall be rendered smooth, hot bitumen and bitumen felts
applied in the same way as for the floor and walls, and over this shall
be laid a protective layer of cement concrete grade M10C, 7.5 cm thick.
15.7.2 With epoxy based emulsion
Over the mud-mat a 20 mm plaster is to be provided to make the

surface even.
On the plastered surface of the mud-mat, three coats of epoxy based

leakproof emulsion shall be applied with reasonable gap between each
coat in order to permit sufficient drying time.
Precaution should be taken that during the process of rod binding if any
damages happens it should be immediately rectified by making patch
painting on the affected portion only and as such a complete vigilance
is to be kept to rectify the defect.
After the rod binding is over the concreting should be done with high
polymer based, chloride and sulphide free cement waterproofing
additive/admixtures @ 2% by weight of cement all through the floor
area and all through the vertically raised walls of four sides which shall
remain underground upto a depth of 8 metre and above from ground
level.
After the concreting and immediately after de-shuttering cleaning of the

concrete surface on the external faces of the walls are to be done and
then three coats of epoxy based leakproof emulsion shall be applied
with a reasonable gap between the each coat before back filling. If the
back filling is with hard material again a protective layer of plaster shall
also be applied on the external faces of walls in order to avoid
damages on the painted surface.
If the back filling is with soft sandy or alluvial soil there is no necessity
for protective layer of plastering as mentioned above.
Epoxy based paint can be applied on the wet surface hence there shall
be no stoppage of the normal progress of the project works.
15.8 Surface Application

II-160
330 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Waterproofing done by surface application of bitumen based or epoxy

based material shall conform strictly to the recommendations of the
manufacturer. The work shall be carried out by a firm of specialists in
the trade.
15.9 Guarantee
For the waterproofing on the roof as well as for underground

basements the Contractor shall give guarantee in writing for the period
of 7 to 10 years as specified in the Schedule of Item. For such
guarantee the Contractor shall get guarantee from the manufac-
turer/specialised firms and forward the same to the Engineer.
However, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the serviceability
of the waterproofing treatment throughout the guarantee period and
any leakage during that guarantee period shall be stopped by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner and without disturbing working
facility of the Owner.
15.10 Water proofing course with Fibre glass R.P. tissue
15.10.1 Scope
This section covers the furnishing of all labour, equipment and

performing all operations necessary to complete to provide water
proofing course of Fibre glass R.P. tissue all in accordance with the
drawing and these specifications.
15.10.2 Terminology
For the purpose of these specifications the following definitions detailed

hereinafter shall apply.
15.10.3 Preparation of surfaces
Surface to receive waterproofing shall be dry, free from dirt, loose

particles and foreign materials. Projections which might puncture the
membrane shall be removed and voids and crevices shall be filled in
prior to the start of work.
II-161
331 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Adequate covering shall be provided during this work to avoid

splashing or staining of the adjacent work and surfaces. Any work or
surface splashed or stained shall be thoroughly cleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Joints in the tissue felt in the different
layers shall be staggered.
15.10.4 In built-up roofing
Application
i) Suitable slope shall be provided in the roof as per manufacturers

specifications. Heat insulation may also be provided if
necessary.
ii) Prime the plastered surface primer at the rate of 0.4 Kg/sqm.
This should properly impregnate the surface and should be left
till the time it is touch-dry.
iii) Apply first coat of hot bitumen @ 1.8 Kg/sqm.
iv) Embed first layer of fibre glass RP tissue. Overlaps shall be

100mm between the layers in either direction.
v) Apply second coat of hot bitumen @ 1.8 Kg/sqm.
vi) Embed second layer of fibre glass RP tissue after the surface of
the first layer has become dry.
vii) Apply third coat of hot bitumen @ 1.8 Kg/sqm.
viii) Embed third layer of fibre glass RP tissue.
ix) Apply fourth coat of hot bitumen @ 1.8 Kg/sqm.
x) Finish with gravel grit @ 0.006 cum per sqm.
Guarantee
II-162
332 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
A written guarantee for the water tightness shall be taken for a

minimum period of 10 years.
15.10.5 Specification
Water proofing medium
i) By impregnation into the fibre glass reinforcement membrane

forms a monolithic mass.
ii) Prevents the penetration of water/moisture.
iii) Acts as a top dressing.
Layer
A single thickness of fibre glass tissue impregnated with bituminous

compound.
Multiple layer
2 or more layers of fibre glass tissue laid consecutively with

overlapping joints and impregnation with bitumen.
Bitumen/primer
A liquid bitumen of low viscosity which penetrates into a prepared

surface upon application.
Half-brick masonry shall be of approved quality 50 class brick work in

cement mortar 1:4 (1cement : 4 sand). Plaster should be in cement
mortar 1:4 (1cement : 4 sand). Sand should be fine sand conforming
to IS 383
Application
Suitable slope may be provided in lean concrete, if necessary. Over

this, 12mm thick plaster with cement mortar 1:4 (1cement : 4 coarse
sand)is to be laid.
II-163
333 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Prime the plastered surface with primer at the rate of 0.4 Kg/sqm. This
should properly impregnate the surface & then should be left till the
time it is touch dry.
Water proofing shall be as follows :-
i) Apply first coat of hot bitumen @ 2.4 Kg/sqm.
ii) Embed first layer of fibre glass RP tissue. Overlaps shall be

100mm between the layers in either direction.
iii) Apply second coat of hot bitumen @ 2.4 Kg/sqm.
iv) Embed second layer of fibre glass RP tissue after the surface of
the first layer has become dry .
v) Apply third coat of hot bitumen @ 2.4 Kg/sqm.
vi) Embed third layer of fibre glass RP tissue after the surface of
the second layer has become touch-dry.
vii) Apply fourth coat of hot bitumen @ 2.4 Kg/sqm.
viii) Embed fourth layer of fibre glass RP tissue after the surface of
the third layer has become touch-dry.
ix) Apply fifth coat of hot bitumen @ 2.4 Kg/sqm.
x) A layer of 12mm thick fine sand is to be laid after completing the

above operations. The layer of sand will not be applied on
vertical walls.
The surface should be finished with half-brick masonry in cement

mortar 1:4 (1cement : 4 coarse sand).
Guarantee
A written guarantee for the water tightness shall be taken for a

minimum period of 10 years.
General
II-164
334 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The work will be carried out by specialists in the trade. Workers shall
be provided with gum boots and hand gloves. There shall be no air
pockets. Corners shall be treated flush without any air pockets or voids.
Measurement
The unit will include supply of materials, transport, preparation of

surface, application of water proofing treatment, plastering, masonry
work etc., as specified herein. The measurement of the item will be in
square metres nearest to the second decimal of the concrete surface
which is to be damp-proofed.
15.11 Water proofing course with P.V.C sheets/ membranes
15.11.1 Jointing
The adjacent lengths of the P.V.C sheets shall be jointed by giving an

overlap of 25mm, one over another by sealing with the approved
adhesive. A minimum width of the sheet, as specified in the item, shall
be used without any joint. Jointing of the sheets, to the extent possible
and practicable, shall be done at the site workshop.
15.11.2 Laying
i) Horizontal areas: The base concrete shall be rendered smooth

by cement sand plaster 1:6 mix of 20mm thick unless otherwise
specified. It shall be ensured that there are no sharped crivices,
projections etc which may puncture and damage the sheet.
P.V.C sheets shall then be evenly laid over the smooth rendered
surface while it is green.
After laying of sheets a protective cover shall be laid over it. This
cover may be of 1:6 cement sand mortar bed of thickness 20mm
and above, flat brick/tile soling over cement sand mortar bed,
any other suitable layer or thermal insulation cover as specified
in the item. However care is to be taken that sheets do not get
damaged while laying the protective cover. The horizontal layer
of P.V.C sheets shall be carried over to a minimum of 150mm
height and tucked in to the connecting vertical walls as in the
case of roof parapets, if there is no provision of continuous
laying of the sheets in the adjacent vertical surface.
ii) Vertical surfaces

II-165
335 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
On vertical concrete surfaces the P.V.C sheets shall be fixed

along with the form work with the knobs projecting toward
concrete. The sheets shall be clamped on the top of the form
work to keep it in position. Concrete is then poured and knobs
are locked in it. After the forms have been stripped off, all the tie
bolt holes, cuts and other damages are sealed with additional
patches of sheets as per manufacturer's specification.
In case good quality of soil, completely free from foreign

materials like stone piece, hard lumps and rubbish etc, is
available, it can be used directly as a back fill. Otherwise a half
brick wall or any other measure as specified shall be provided as
a protection barrier over the projecting base of the concrete/mud
mat. The top edge of the sheet shall be tucked into a chase to
be subsequently sealed with cement sand mortar of 1:4 mix.
In case of sheets being laid both on horizontal and adjacent

vertical surfaces, the horizontal sheets shall be carried on the
vertical portion as one monolithic layer.
15.11.3 Agency
The execution work including jointing, laying and testing etc. shall be
done by a specialised agency duly approved by the Engineer.
15.11.4 Testing
After laying is complete, the sheets shall be tested by an Electronic Pin

hole detector for pin holes, cuts and other damages etc. All such
portions shall be patched suitably with additional sheets as directed
and again test checked.
15.11.5 Expansion joints
All Expansion Joints etc of dimensions as specified, shall be filled up by

Polymer Sealant of pourable grade as per manufacturer's specification
on the P.V.C sheets locked in the joint.
15.11.6 Guarantee
The contractor shall guarantee the water tightness and leak proofing of
the structure for a period of ten years after certified completion and
II-166
336 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
handing over of the jobs by furnishing a free maintenance guarantee as

per prescribed format and as specified.
15.12 Waterproofing with Non-Shrink Polymeric Waterproof Grouting

Compound
15.12.1 Work Included
The Contractor shall furnish materials, labour, plant, equipment and

tools to complete the work as specified and/or as shown in drawings.
15.12.2 Materials
Cement
Ordinary portland cement shall conform to IS : 269-1989 and portland

blast furnace cement shall conform to IS : 455-1989.
Aggregates
All aggregates shall conform to IS : 383-1970 Fine aggregates shall be

approved river or pit sand.
Cement waterproofing compound
All cement waterproofing compound shall conform to IS : 2645-1975

and shall be of approved quality.
Solvent less resin
High build polymeric surfacing which forms a thick resilient and flexible
membrane on concrete with high resistance to oil and water.
Nozzle
15 mm dia threaded G.I. pipes of suitable length plugged at both ends.
Super plasticiser
II-167
337 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
High range water reducing admixture and integral cement waterproofer

for concrete. Super plasticiser shall conform to ASTM C-194 Type F,
IS: 9103-1979 & IS:2645-1975.
15.12.3 Waterproofing of underground structures
Waterproofing shall be carried out as per the approved manufacturer's

specification and as stated below:
15.12.3.1 Raft
The sub-base (PCC) of the underground structure shall be cleaned of

all dirts and kept dry by continuous pumping of water. 20 mm thick
plaster with cement-sand mortar (1:3) mixed with approved cement
waterproofing compound as per manufacturer's specification shall be
laid on top of the sub-base. The plaster shall be finished smooth with a
steel trowel.
The plastered surface shall then be painted with two (2) coats of
approved solvent less resin to form a thick resilient and flexible
resinous membrane over the plastered surface.
Threaded nozzles of 15 mm dia and of suitable length shall be placed

and fixed in a grid pattern of maximum 1.5 m centre to centre over the
whole raft, prior to casting of RCC raft. similar nozzles will also be
placed along the construction joint, if any, at regular intervals not
exceeding 1.5 m c/c. Adequate precaution shall be taken to keep the
nozzles plugged at both ends to prevent them from getting clogged by
concrete. Similar nozzles shall also be post fixed at critical points, if
required. Approved super plasticiser-cum-cement waterproofer shall be
added to the concrete which shall be at least M20 grade as defined by
IS : 456-1978 and the water cement ratio of the concrete shall not
exceed 0.45. Adequate precaution shall be taken to keep the nozzles
vertical while concreting.
Approved non-shrink polymeric waterproof grouting compound mixed

with cement slurry shall be injected through the nozzles under pressure
by pump as per the instructions of the manufacturer. When the
injection operation is over the nozzles shall be sealed with a sealing
compound as per manufacturer's specification and instruction.
15.12.3.2 Vertical wall
II-168
338 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
15 mm dia threaded nozzle of suitable lengths shall be placed and

fixed in a grid pattern of maximum 1.5 m centre to centre over the
entire surface prior to concreting of the vertical wall. Similar nozzle are
to be also fixed at construction joints, if any, y, at regular intervals not
exceeding 1.5 m c/c. Adequate precaution shall be taken to keep the
nozzles plugged at both the ends to avoid clogging of the nozzles by
concrete. Similar nozzles shall also be post fixed at critical points, if
required.
The concrete for the vertical wall shall be at least M20 grade as defined
by IS:456-1978 having a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45.
Approved super plasticiser-cum-cement waterproofer shall be added to
the concrete as per the manufacturer's specification. Adequate
precaution shall be taken to keep the nozzles horizontal during
concreting. The exterior surface of the concrete shall be plastered with
12 mm thick cement sand mortar (1:3) mixed with approved cement
waterproofing compound conforming to manufacturer's specification.
The plastered surface shall then be finished smooth with a neat coat of
cement slurry and painted with two coats of approved solventless resin
to form a thick resilient and flexible resinous membrane over the
plastered surface. Approved non-shrink polymeric waterproof grouting
compound mixed with cement slurry shall be injected through the
nozzles under pressure by pump as per the manufacturer's
specification and shall be sealed with a sealing compound as per
manufacturer's specification and instruction.
16.0 MISCELLANEOUS
16.1 False ceiling
16.1.1 Scope
This chapter deals with the specification for various types of false
ceiling as listed below :
a) Wooden ceiling (solid wood) and decorative ply.
b) Ceiling with insulating Building Board/Particle Boards etc.,
c) A.C. Sheet and ply wood ceiling.
d) Plaster of Paris ( Gypsum Anhydrous ) ceiling over wooden

frame.
II-169
339 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
e) Plaster of paris ( Gypsum Anhydrous ) Tiles ceiling.
f) Wooden cover, fillets, beading for ceiling.
16.1.2 General
16.1.2.1 Materials
All materials shall be in accordance with the general specifications of

materials, Part-I, Schedule of items and as shown in drawings.
Special finishing materials as specified in schedule of item shall be

procured from the specified source and got fixed by employing skilled
worker in the trade under direct supervision of the manufacturer.
16.1.3 Openings for installation of light fittings
Openings in the ceiling for installation of A/C grills, light fittings shall be
provided as per drawings.
16.1.4 Recess for pelmet
Recess for the installation of pelmets shall be provided where shown in

drawings along the windows/ doors.
16.1.5 Grills
Grills made of wooden, M.S., Aluminium, PVC or any other material as

necessary shall be provided as indicated in the drawing.
16.1.6 Frame work
The type of frame to receive the ceiling material may be of wood,

aluminium or M.S. as specified in the schedule of item and as
mentioned in the drawing.
16.1.7 Wooden framing for false ceiling
Unless otherwise specified in schedule of items the wooden frame work

shall be of following description :
II-170
340 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The frame work for false ceiling shall be of approved quality teak wood
scantlings, the runners shall be 75 x 50 mm size and shall be spaced at
1200 mm c/c and the battens shall be 50 x 50 mm size spaced at 600
mm c/c (approx) forming a grid of 600 x 600 mm or any other grid
suitable for fixing the false ceiling material and its size. The runner and
battens shall be joined by halving joint using counter sunk 6 mm bolt
with washer of required length with soffit of runner and batten in perfect
level. The heading joints between runners shall be made with lap joints
using 2 nos. 6 mm dia counter sunk bolts with washer. Heading lap
joints between battens shall be made with suitable size screws. The
wall ends of the runner shall be embedded in the wall (50 mm deep)
and shall be grouted with 1:2:4 cement concrete. The soffit of
framework shall be made perfectly horizontal. The teak wood frames
shall be treated with 2 coats of wood preservations treatment before
fixing the tiles/boards as the case may be.
The main runners of frames shall be suspended by M.S. flat 40 x 3 mm

/12mm dia M.S. round/T.S. hangers placed at 1200 mm c/c (approx),
the top end of the hangers shall be hocked to R.C.C. reinforcement of
slab or fixed to M.S. flat cleats installed in slab for the purpose or
hooked to purlins of the trusses. The hangers may be twisted or ends
of M.S. round/T.S. hanger flattened to allow for fixing the same with
T.W. frame or M.S. cleats with bolts of suitable size.
For teak wood framings of shaped ceilings the spacings of frames and
hangers levels of false ceiling etc., shall be required to obtain the
shapes/drops and profile of the ceiling and to the requirement of ceiling
material. The frames shall be locally adjusted to create openings of
required sizes for installation of light fittings, grills of air conditioning
system.
16.1.8 Metal framing
16.1.8.1 Galvanised pressed steel framing system
Galvanised pressed steel framing system for false ceiling shall be

procured from reputed manufacturer and installed by specialist
agencies under technical guidance of the manufacturer and strictly as
per their specifications. Unless specified otherwise these shall consist
of G.I. rectangular pipes at 900 mm c/c suspended by M.S. hanger
fixed to R.C.C. slab with M.S. cleats and cross channels fixed to
rectangular pipes at 450 mm c/c as per "Galvolock" system of M/s
II-171
341 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Eastern Interior Pvt Limited or equivalent. Ceiling materials shall be

fixed to cross channels as per specifications of the manufacturer.
Framing shall be adjusted to provide openings for the light fittings and
air-conditioning grills but these shall be supported independently and
not on the framing.
16.1.8.2 Aluminium grid ceiling framing system
Framing for Aluminium grid false ceiling system shall be of reputed

manufacturer Bestlok, Eezilock or equivalent. It shall consist of
aluminium main tee and cross tee's suspended by adjustable hangers
fixed to R.C.C. floor with cleats. The grid may be 600 x 600 mm, 1200
x 600 mm or as per drawings. Ceiling materials, shall be fixed to
frames strictly as per manufacturers specification.
16.1.9 Fixing of Ceiling
16.1.9.1 Wooden ceiling with planks
These shall be of class of wood and thickness as specified in Schedule

of items. Unless specified otherwise the width of the ceiling board shall
be 100 mm to 150 mm and shall be planed true on the exposed
surface. The maximum length of the finished board shall be 1800 mm.
The boards/strips shall be joined with tongue and grove joints and
heading joints in adjacent board of the same strip shall be square butt
type neatly finished. These joints shall be staggered in alternate strip
or line. The boards shall be fixed to T.W. battens by headless brass
pins. Moulding beads at junctions with walls and other locations as per
drawings shall be provided. Necessary opening for installation of light
fittings and A/C grill shall be provided and junctions if required shall be
finished with moulded beads.
The false ceiling shall finally be checked for line and level, sand
papered and polished with colourless polish to achieve matt satin
natural finish.
16.1.9.2 Decorative ply ceiling
These shall be with decorative selected group matched ply of Teak Ply,
white cedar ply or any other approved class of veneer ply in strips,
square or rectangular panel matching the ply of wall panelling, if any, in
the same room and of thickness as per schedule of item and drawings.
II-172
342 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The strip ply, square/rectangular panels shall be fixed to T.W.

framework with panel pins. Moulded beads of same wood as that of
ply of matching shade shall be provided at junctions with walls and as
specified in drawings.
Where specific pattern of grains and shade is required the ply cut into
shapes as per design may be pasted on a backing ply with adhesive
and such made panels shall be fixed to framing.
The ceiling shall be checked for line, and levels and exposed surfaces
shall be sand papered and finally polished with colourless polish to
achieve matt satin natural finish.
16.1.9.3 Ceiling with insulation board/particle boards
Insulation boards shall be of approved manufacturer, shade, design

and thickness as specified in schedule of items and drawings. These
may be plain, textured, perforated with natural finish or with white
finished surface.
The boards shall be cut to suit the panel sizes of ceiling with special
tools and by skilled workmen strictly as per manufacturers
specifications. The board shall be fixed to T.W. frames with brass
screws or as per manufacturers recommendation and in case of metal
frames as per recommendations of the manufacturer of the ceiling
system. The joints where exposed shall be of uniform thickness (3 mm
to 6 mm) and pattern as shown in drawings.
The ceiling shall be checked for line and level and exposed surfaces
prepared appropriately to receive the paint as specified in schedule of
item and drawing.
16.2. Wooden partitions
16.2.1 Scope
All materials for the wooden partitions shall be of respective class as

specified in the part (I) and as mentioned in schedule of items.
16.2.1.2 Frame work
Unless otherwise specified in the schedule of items, framing for

partitions shall be made of approved quality teak wood scantlings of
II-173
343 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
sizes as mentioned in schedule of items and drawing. The spacing of

frames shall not exceed 1200 mm c/c in both direction. The joints of
the frame shall be made as per standard joinery practice using
standard adhesive as described in wood work chapter. The faces of
the frames to receive ply/wooden board shall be true to line, level and
plumb. The frames shall be firmly secured to walls, ceilings, floors by
making chases and grouting the frames in 1:2:4 cement concrete or
fixing the frames with metal clamps/flats screwed to above elements.
The frame shall be treated with 2 coats of wood preservative. Where
the panelling material is of decorative ply of 3.5 mm to 4 mm thickness,
commercial ply of 6 mm thickness shall be fixed to the frame work for
backing purpose. Where sunk (coffered) panels are to be made,
combination of single and double layers ply shall be used for backing to
achieve level difference for sunk panels.
16.2.3 Boarding/facing for partition
a) Wooden plank/board
These shall be of class of wood and thickness as specified in the

schedule of item and drawings. These shall be fixed to backing
wooden frame work with counter sunk brass screws in pattern
and designs, with groves, joints, beads, fillets, cover moulds as
shown in drawings. The exposed surfaces shall be sand
papered and polished as specified.
b) Decorative ply wood facing
These shall be with decorative teak wood/rose ply/white cedar

3.5 to 4 mm thickness of selected pieces with matching colour,
texture and grains and shall be fixed to the backing ply with
panel pins in pattern, design, with uniform width of joints, beads,
fillets, cover mould as shown in drawings. The exposed
surfaces shall be lightly sand papered finished with colourless
polish to achieve matt satin finish.
c) Jolly pan (laminated) board
Where specified Jolly pan boards shall be fixed to teak wood

frame work strictly as per manufacturer's specification. The
boards after fixing shall be cleaned of all adhesives etc.
d) Formica facing
II-174
344 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Formica facing shall be fixed to the backing ply with standard

adhesive as described for panelling works.
16.3 Expansion and Isolation Joints
16.3.1 General
Expansion and isolation joints in concrete structures shall be provided

at specific places as per details indicated on the drawings. The
materials and types of joints shall be as specified hereinafter. In case
of liquid retaining structures, additional precautions shall be taken to
prevent leakage of liquids as may be specified on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. All materials are to be procured from reliable
manufacturers and must have the approval of the Engineer. Where it
is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply the material, the
Engineer may demand test certificates for the materials and/or instruct
the Contractor to get them tested in an approved-laboratory free of cost
to the Owner. Joints shall be formed true to line, level, shape,
dimension and quality as per drawings and specifications. Prior
approval, for the method of forming the joints, should be obtained from
the Engineer before starting the work.
16.3.2 Bitumen impregnated board
Bitumen impregnated fibre board of approved manufacturer as per IS:

1838 (Part 1)-1983 may be used as fillers for expansion joints. It must
be durable and waterproof. It shall be compressible and possess a
high degree of rebound. The dimensions of the board should be equal
to that of the joint being formed. At the exposed end, the joint shall be
sealed with approved sealing compound to a depth of at least 25 mm
after application of an approved primer. The sealing compound and
the primer shall be applied as specified by the manufacturer.
16.3.3 Joint sealing strips
16.3.3.1 General
Joint sealing strips may be provided at the construction, expansion and

isolation joints as a continuous diaphragm to contain the filler material
and/or to exclude passage of water. The sealing strips will be either
metallic like G.I., Aluminium or Copper, or Non-metallic like rubber or
P.V.C.
II-175
345 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Sealing strips will not have any longitudinal joint and will be procured
and installed in largest practicable lengths having a minimum number
of transverse joints. The jointing procedure shall be as per the
manufacturer's recommendations, revised if necessary, by the
Engineer. If desired by the Engineer, joints in rubber seals may have
to be vulcanised.
16.3.3.2 Metal sealing strips
Metal sealing strips shall be either G.I., Aluminium or Copper and

formed straight, U-shaped, Z-shaped or any other shape and of
thickness as indicated in the drawing and schedule of items and/or as
instructed by the Engineer.
The transverse joints will be gas welded using brass rods and
approved flux. In case it is found that the joints cannot be made leak
proof, longer lap lengths and different method of brazing which will
render it leak proof, will be adopted by the Contractor without any
additional cost to the Owner. The edges shall be neatly crimped and
bent to ensure proper bond with the concrete.
a) G.I. Strips
G.I. strips shall be minimum 1.5 mm thick and 150 mm in width

unless specified otherwise. The Strips shall be strong, durable,
without any rust or crease. At the joints, the overlapping should
be for a minimum length of 50mm
b) Aluminium strips
Aluminium strips shall be minimum 18 SWG thick and 300 mm

wide unless specified otherwise and shall conform to IS : 737-
1986. A minimum lap of 50 mm length is required at the joints.
c) Copper strips
The copper strips shall be minimum 18 SWG in thickness and

300 mm width.
It should be cleaned thoroughly before use so as to expose

fresh surface, without any reduction in gauge. A minimum lap of
50 mm in length is required at the joints.
II-176
346 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
16.3.3.3 Non-metallic sealing strips
These will be normally in Rubber or PVC Rubber or PVC joint seals

can be of shape having any combination of the following features :
a) Plain
b) Central bulb
c) Dumb-bell or flattened ends
d) Ribbed and corrugated wings
e) V-shaped
Transverse joints will be allowed only under unavoidable circumstances

and with the specific approval of the Engineer. The actual size and
shape shall be as shown in drawings/Schedule of Items and or as
The method of forming these joints, laps etc., shall be as specified by

the Manufacturer and/or as approved by the Engineer taking particular
care to match the central bulbs and the edges accurately.
a) Rubber sealing strips
The minimum thickness of rubber sealing strips shall be 3 mm

and the minimum width 100 mm. The material will be natural
rubber and be resistant to corrosion, abrasion and attacks from
the acids, alkalies and chemicals normally encountered in
service. The physical properties will be generally as follows :
Specific Gravity : 1.1 to 1.15
Shore Hardness : 65A to 75A
Tensile Strength : 25 - 30 N/mm2
Maximum Safe Continuous

Temperature : 75 Degree 'C'
Ultimate Elongation : Not less than 350%
b) P.V.C. sealing strips

II-177
347 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The minimum thickness of P.V.C sealing strips will be 3 mm and

the minimum width 100 mm. The material should be of good
quality Polyvinyl Chloride highly resistant to tearing, abrasion
and corrosion as well as to chemicals likely to come in contact
with during use. The physical properties will generally be as
follows :
Specific Gravity : 1.3 to 1.35
Shore Hardness : 60A to 80A
Tensile Strength : 10 - 15 N/mm2
Maximum Safe Continuous Temperature : 70 Degree 'C'
Ultimate Elongation : Not less than 275%
16.3.4 Bitumen compound
When directed, the gap in expansion joints shall be thoroughly cleaned

and bitumen compound laid as per manufacturer's specifications. The
compound to be used shall be of approved manufacture and shall con-
form to the requirements of IS: 1834-1984.
16.4 Barbed Wire Fencing
16.4.1 Materials
16.4.1.1 Galvanised barbed wire
Barbed wire shall be properly galvanised and shall be obtained from

the approved manufacturer as specified in detail in Part-1.
16.4.1.2 Other materials
The specifications of materials, for angle iron posts, concrete works,

plasters, if any, and for other works, shall conform to the requirements
as specified in Part-I.
16.4.2 Workmanship
The work shall comprise of the following :

II-178
348 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
a) Excavation in ground of required dimensions with all sides

vertical in any type of soil including soft rock and removing the
soil and dressing it neatly.
b) Filling the holes in full with cement concrete 1:3:6 mix, well
packed, after erecting the posts in correct line, level and plumb.
In case of any post coming at local depression, the hole may not
be of full depth but the depth of concrete will always be made 60
cm raising it above ground level with necessary shuttering.
c) Where the angle iron posts are specified in the item these shall
be 50 mm x 75 mm x 6 mm unless mentioned otherwise. 10 mm
dia holes with saw cuts for inserting the wires shall be made as
per the spacings of barbed wire shown in drawing or as directed
by the Engineer. The foot of the post shall be provided with
base plate for anchorage. The spacing shall be 2.5 m or as per
drawing. After inserting the wire into holes the socket is to be
pressed back.
d) Straining bolts are to be provided 15 m apart from each row of

wire for maintaining proper tension in the wire and without any
sag or looseness.
e) Posts are to be painted as directed by the Engineer.
16.5 Chain link fencing
16.5.1 Scope
The work under this specification covers the supply and fixing of
galvanised steel chain link fencing with galvanised steel posts chain
link fabric.
16.5.2 Material
Galvanised steel chain link fabric and galvanised steel pipe posts shall
be obtained from the approved manufacturer as specified in detail in
Part - I .
16.5.3 Workmanship
II-179
349 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The GI pipe posts shall be embedded in plain cement concrete not

leaner than 1:4:8 foundations. The height of posts above top of
foundations and spacing of post shall not be more than 3 m. The chain
link fabric shall be fixed to the fencing posts with the help of stretcher
galvanised bars ( 25 x 6 flats ) which will be bolted to the lugs welded
to the posts. The stretcher bars shall be provided in the lapping of
fabric also.
The spacing of posts and strut shall be 3.0m apart centre to centre,
unless otherwise specified or as per Engineer-in-charge to suit the
dimension of the area to be fenced. Every 15 th last but one end posts
and corner posts shall be strutted on both sides and end posts on one
side only.
Fixing of posts and struts shall be as specified in clause
4.21.8 Part II of specification.
Concertina coil fencing shall be fixed on angle iron shaped
with 9 horizontal reinforced barbed tape (RBT) stud tied with GI staples
and GI clips to retain horizontal including necessary bolts or GI barbed
wire tied to angle iron all complete as per direction of Engineer-in-
charge with reinforced barbed tape.
II-180
350 of 497
PART – III NORMS OF CEMENT CONSUMPTION
351 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
1. MASONRY WORK
2. PLAIN/REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK
3. FINISHING WORK
4. FLOORING WORK
5. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
6. WATER SUPPLY/DRAINAGE & SANITARY WORKSS
III-I
352 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
GENERAL
For calculating the requirements of cement in various items of work the following
standards will be adopted. Over the above theoretical quantity of cement, additional
allowance upto plus or minus 3% shall also be allowed as certified by the engineer.
For items not covered in this standard, CPWD standards shall be followed or calculated
as per uses/requirement in absence of standard norms. Cement required for enabling
work and cement required for testing purposes will be taken into account for consumption
purpose. However, in no case such quantity should exceed 5% of the total cement used
in the work or as certified by the engineer based on actual observation whichever is less.
Sl.No. Description of Item Cement Requirement
MASONRY WORK
1. Random rubble masonry with CM 1:4 1.255 quintals per cum
2. Random rubble masonry with CM 1:6 0.825 quintal per cum
3. Coursed rubble masonry in CM 1:6 0.75 quintal per cum
4. Brick work in CM 1:4 0.950 quintal per cum of BW
5. Brick work in CM 1:6 0.625 quintal per cum of BW
6. Half brick work in CM 1:3 1.43 quintals per 10 sqm of area
7. Half brick work in CM 1:4 1.06 quintals per 10 sqm of area
8. 75mm thick brick in CM 1:4 0.65 quintal per 10 sqm of area
9. 75mm thick brick in CM 1:3 0.81 quintal per 10 sqm of area
III-1
353 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
10. Projected brick bands,

Drip course etc. in CM 1:6
finished with 12mm thick
cement plaster 0.165 quintal per 10 RM
11. Half brick thick,

Honey combed brick work in CM 1:4 0.064 quintals per sqm
PLAIN/REINFORCED CONCRETE
1. RCC/PCC of nominal mix 1:5:10

complete (excluding finishing with CP) 1.30 quintals per cum of concrete
complete (excluding finishing with CP ) 1.70 quintals per cum of concrete
complete (excluding finishing with CP ) 2.23 quintals per cum of concrete
complete (excluding finishing with CP) 3.18 quintals per cum of concrete
Controlled Concrete - Plain and Reinforced
5. Concrete grade (i) M -5A

(ii) M -5B
(iii) M -7.5A
(iv) M -7.5B
6. Concrete grade (i) M -10A

(ii) M -10B
(iii) M -10C To be mutually agreed
based on
7. Concrete grade (i) M -15B mix design to be
(ii) M -15C prepared by contractor &
(iii) M -15D approved by the
Engineer
III-2
354 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8. Concrete grade (i) M -20B plus

(ii) M -20C wastage and all
(iii) M -20D incidentals as decided.
9. Concrete grade (i) M -25B

(ii) M -25C
(iii) M -25D
10. Concrete grade (i) M -30C

(ii) M -30D
11. Applying cement slurry

on RCC slab for
receiving cement
concrete flooring. 2.75 kg/sqm
FINISHING
1. 6mm thick C.P. 1:4 0.280 quintal per 10 sqm area

12. 12mm thick bearing plaster in 0.590 quintal per 10 sqm area
CM 1:4 with neat cement finish
III-3
355 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
13. Neat cement punning 0.200 quintal per 10 sqm area

14. Flush or ruled or cut or weather 0.155 quintal per 10 sqm area
pointing on brick work with CM 1:3
15 Flush or ruled or cut out or 0.200 quintal per 10 sqm area

weather pointing on brick work
with CM 1:2
16. Raised and cut pointing on brick 0.235 quintal per 10 sqm area
work with cement mortar 1:3
17. Flush or ruled pointing on brick 0.075 quintal per 10 sqm area
flooring with cement mortar 1:4
18. Flush or ruled pointing on brick flooring 0.050 quintal per 10 sqm area
with cement mortar 1:6
FLOORING
1. Brick on edge flooring in
cement mortar 1:4 1.100 quintal per 10 sqm area
2. Brick on edge flooring in
cement mortar 1:6 0.800 quintal per 10 sqm area
3. 25mm thick (IPS) cement concrete

flooring 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 sand : 4
graded stone chips 12mm nominal
size) finished with a floating coat of
neat cement. 1.020 quintal per 10 sqm area
4. 40mm thick (IPS) cement concrete

flooring 1:2:4 with 20mm and down
stone chips finished with a floating coat
of neat cement. 1.500 quintal per 10 sqm area
5. 25mm thick (IPS) flooring with base

coat 19mm thick 1:2:4 using stone
III-4
356 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
chips 10mm nominal size and 6mm

topping coat 1:1 (1 cement : 1 stone
chips 3mm size ) with a floating coat of
neat cement. 1.370 quintal per 10 sqm area
6. 40mm thick (IPS) flooring with base

coat 30mm thick 1:2:4 using stone
chips 10mm nominal size and10mm
topping coat 1:1 (1 cement : 1 stone
chips 3 to 6mm size) with a floating
coat of neat cement. 2.320 quintal per 10 sqm area
25mm thick cast-in-situ grey terrazzo

flooring, under layer 19mm thick
cement concrete 1:2:4 with 10mm
nominal size chips and 6mm thick
topping laid in cement marble powder
mix 3:1 (3 cement : 1 marble powder)
by weight in proportion of 4:7 (4
cement marble powder mix : 7 marble
chips) by volume. 1.370 quintal per 10 sqm area
8. 40mm thick cast-in-situ grey terrazzo

nominal size chips and10mm thick
topping laid in cement marble powder
mix 3:1 (3 cement : 1 marble powder)
by weight in proportion of 4:7
(4 cement marble powder mix : 7
marble chips) by volume. 1.575 quintal per 10 sqm area
9. 40mm thick cast-in-situ terrazzo

nominal size chips and top layer 9mm
thick with marble chips of size 4 to
7mm nominal size laid in cement
III-5
357 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
marble powder mix 3:1 (3 cement : 1

marble powder) by weight in proportion
of 4:7 (4 cement marble powder mix : 7
marble chips) by volume.
a) Dark or light shade pigment with grey
cement 1.583 quintal per 10 sqm area
b) Light shade pigment or without any 1.010 quintal per 10 sqm area
(grey cement) pigment with (grey cement)
white cement 0.580 quintal per 10 sqm area
(white cement)
c) Medium shade pigment with 50% grey 1.295 quintal per 10 sqm area
cement and 50% white cement (grey cement)
0.290 quintal per 10 sqm area
(white cement)
10. 40mm thick cast-in-situ terrazzo
nominal size chips and top layer 12mm
thick with marble chips of size 7 to
12mm nominal size laid in cement
marble powder mix 3:1 (3 cement : 1
marble powder) by weight in proportion
of 2:3 (2 cement marble powder mix : 3
a) Dark or light shade pigment with grey

(grey cement) pigment with white (grey cement)
(white cement)
III-6
358 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1

(white cement)
d) White cement without any pigment 0.895 quintal per 10 sqm area
(grey cement)
(white cement)
11. Terrazzo cast-in-situ skirting and dado,
top layer 6mm thick marble chips laid
in cement marble powder mix 3:1 (3
cement : 1 marble powder) by weight in
proportion of 4:7 (4 cement marble : 7
(A) 18mm thick with under layer 12mm

thick cement plaster 1:3
a) Dark or light shade pigment with grey 1.490 quintal per 10 sqm area
cement
pigment with white cement. (grey cement)
(white cement)
(white cement)
(B) 21mm thick, with under layer 15mm

thick cement plaster 1:3
a) Dark or light shade pigment with grey 1.640 quintal per 10 sqm area
cement
pigment with white cement. (grey cement)
III-7
359 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(white cement)
(white cement)
12. Precast terrazzo tiles 20mm thick with
marble chips of sizes upto 6mm laid in
25mm thick bed of lime mortar, jointed
with neat cement slurry mixed with
pigment
a) Dark shades using grey cement 0.88 quintal per 10 sqm area
b) Light shade using white cement. 0.44 quintal per 10 sqm area
(grey cement)
(white cement)
c) Medium shade using 50% grey cement 0.66 quintal per 10 sqm area
and 50% white cement (grey cement)
(white cement)
13. Precast terrazzo tiles 20mm thick with
marble chips of sizes upto 6mm in
skirting or on walls, laid on 12mm thick
cement plaster 1:3 jointed with neat
cement slurry
a) Dark shades using grey cement 1.395 quintal per 10 sqm area
b) Light shade using white cement. 1.175 quintal per 10 sqm area
(grey cement)
(white cement)
c) Medium shade using 50% grey cement 1.285 quintal per 10 sqm area
III-8
360 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
and 50% white cement (grey cement)

(white cement)
14. White glazed tiles 5, 6 or 7 mm thick in 0.942 quintal per 10 sqm area
flooring, skirting and dado on 12 mm (grey cement)
thick cement plaster 1 : 3 in base and 0.25 quintal per 10 sqm area
joined with white cement, slurry etc. (white cement)
15. Marble stone slab flooring over 20mm

thick base of lime mortar 1:1:1 (1 lime :
1 surkhi : 1 sand) and jointed with
white cement slurry etc.
a) 20 mm thick / 30 mm thick / 40 mm 0.075 quintal per 10 sqm area

thick (white cement)
16. Marble stone slab flooring over 20mm

thick base of cement mortar 1:4 &
jointed with white cement slurry etc.
a) 20 mm thick 1.275 quintal per 10 sqm area

(grey cement)
(white cement)
b) 30 mm thick 1.290 quintal per 10 sqm area

(grey cement)
(white cement)
c) 40 mm thick 1.310 quintal per 10 sqm area

(grey cement)
(white cement)
17. Marble tiles 18 to 24 mm thick in risers 1.16 quintal per 10 sqm area
III-9
361 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
of steps, skirting, dado, walls and (grey cement)

pillars laid on 12mm thick cement 0.075 quintal per 10 sqm area
mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 sand ) and (white cement)
jointed with white cement slurry
18. Extra for each additional thickness of 5

mm granolithic layer of 1:2:4 for
flooring 0.016 quintal per 10 sqm of area
19 12mm thick cement plaster skirting,

dado risers of steps and edges of
ground sink with CM 1:3 finished with a
floating coat of neat cement. 0.800 quintal per 10 sqm of area
20 15mm thick cement plaster skirting,

dado risers of steps and edges of
ground sink with CM 1:3 finished with a
21. 19mm thick cement plaster skirting and

dado with 12mm thick backing with CM
1:3 and 7mm topping 1:1 (1 cement : 1
stone chips 3mm size) finished with a
22. 25mm thick cement plaster skirting and

dado with 18mm thick backing with CM
1:3 and 7mm topping 1:1 (1 cement : 1
stone chips 3mm size) finished with a
MISCELLANEOUS
1. Marble work for wall lining (Veneer 0.715 quintal per 10 sqm of area
work) 1.8 to 2.4 cm thick in CM 1:3 (grey cement)
including pointing with white cement 0.170 quintal per 10 sqm of area
mortar 1:2 (1 white cement : 2 marble (white cement)
III-10
362 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
dust)
2. Marble work for wall lining (Veneer 1.020 quintal per 10 sqm of area
work) 4 cm thick in CM 1:3 including (grey cement)
pointing with white cement mortar 1:2 0.170 quintal per 10 sqm of area
(1 white cement : 2 marble dust) (white cement)
3. Grading roof for water proofing

treatment with :-
a) CC 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 3.2 quintal per cum of Concrete

stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)
b) CM 1:3 5.1 quintal per cum of mortar
c) CM 1:4 3.8 quintal per cum of mortar
4. Providing and fixing MS fan clamps of

standard shape and size in existing
RCC slab including cutting chase and
making good. 0.016 quintal each
5. Making plinth protection 50mm thick of

CC 1:3:6 (1 cement : 3 sand : 6 graded
stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)
over 75mm bed of dry brick ballast
40mm nominal size well rammed and
consolidated and grouted with fine
sand including finishing the top
smooth. 1.1 quintal per 10 sqm of area
6. Grouting with
a) CM 1:2 7.18 quintal per cum
b) CM 1:3 5.40 quintal per cum
III-11
363 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7. DPC 25mm thick (1:2:4) 0.81 quintal per 10 sqm of area
8. Making plinth protection with bricks on

edge in CM 1:6 over 7.5cm bed of dry
brick aggregate 40mm nominal size
rammed, consolidated and grouted
with fine sand and top of bricks pointed
with CM 1:2. 0.86 quintal per 10 sqm of area
9. Providing and fixing 25mm dia GI pipe

outlet in CM 1:3 including cutting and
making good the walls. 0.05 quintal per 10 RM
10. Providing and fixing 40mm dia GI pipe

outlet in CM 1:3 including cutting and
making good the walls. 0.075 quintal per 10 RM
11. Providing chases 75mm wide 50mm
deep in walls for conduit pipe and filling
the same with CC 1:3:6 0.075 quintal per 10 RM
12. Fixing steel windows with 1:2:4
concrete blocks 0.40 quintal per 10 sqm of area
13. Cement-sand mortar :
a) 1:1(1cement :1sand) 10.2 quintals per cum
b) 1:2(1cement : 2sand) 6.8 quintals per cum
c) 1:3(1cement : 3sand) 5.1 quintals per cum
d) 1:4(1cement : 4sand) 3.8 quintals per cum
e) 1:5(1cement : 5sand) 3.1 quintals per cum
f) 1:6(1cement : 6sand) 2.5 quintals per cum
III-12
364 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
DRAINAGE/SANITARY & WATER SUPPLY INSTALLATIONS
1. 100mm dia AC rain water pipe

I/c fittings with CM 1:2 0.725 quintal per 100 RM of pipe
2. 150mm dia AC rain water pipe

I/c fittings with CM 1:2 0.82 quintal per 100 RM of pipe
3. Fixing IWC pan with traps, pair of

footrests, and flushing cistern
complete 0.125 quintal each
4. Fixing EWC pan with trap and flushing

cistern complete 0.01 quintal each
5. Fixing wash basin and kitchen sink 0.025 quintal l each
6. Fixing urinal cistern including pipes 0.025 quintal each
7. Fixing & finishing floor trap 0.015 quintal each
8. Fixing HCI pipes and specials, 100mm

dia and 75mm dia including making
good the walls 0.135 quintal per 10 RM of pipe
9. Fixing GI pipes of all dia with clamps

(for inside work only) 0.015 quintal per 10 RM of pipe
10. Jointing glazed stoneware pipe with

CM 1:1
a) 100 mm dia 2.17 quintals per 10 RM of pipe
b) 150 mm dia 3.23 quintals per 10 RM of pipe
III-13
365 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
11. Laying cement concrete 1:5:10 all

round SW pipe including bed concrete
as per standard design
a) 100mm dia SW pipe 19.24 quintals per 100 RM of pipe
b) 150mm dia SW pipe 23.53 quintals per 100 RM of pipe
12. Gully chamber as per specification. 0.385 quintal each
13. Stopcock chamber as per

specification 0.185 quintal each
14. Inspection chambers as per

specification
a) 600x600x600mm deep 1.43 quintals each
b) 750x600x600mm deep 1.435 quintals each
c) 900x900x600mm deep 1.885 quintals each
15. Extra depth of inspection chambers as

per specification
a) 600x600mm 0.805 quintal per RM of depth
b) 750x600mm 1.295 quintal per RM of depth
c) 900x900mm 1.460 quintal per RM of depth
d) 1200x900mm 1.835 quintal per RM of depth
III-14
366 of 497
PART – IV DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE
367 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
GENERAL
The materials used in construction shall, besides conforming to the specifications

and standards mentioned, be the best of the existing kinds obtainable. Where a
particular 'Brand' or 'Make' of material is specified such 'Brand' or 'Make' of
material alone shall be used.
A high standard of workmanship and accuracy shall be achieved in all sections

and parts of the work. The workmanship shall be in accordance with the latest
and the best civil engineering practice.
The Contractor shall ensure that all sections of the work are carried out with
utmost care to achieve the dimensions shown in drawings or specifications. Where
special and close tolerances are required in any particular section of work, these
will be shown in the drawing and such tolerances shall be met. In the absence of
such specific mention in drawings the following dimensional deviations may be
tolerated, provided they do not impair the appearance or render the particular
section of work unacceptable to the purpose for which it is intended. Tolerance for
materials and workmanship not covered in this part as mentioned hereinafter will
be in accordance with the relevant IS code.
Description Permissible tolerance
Building bricks, in length width and height : As per IS 1077 - 1992
Laterite stone, in length, width & height : Plus or minus 5 mm
Natural building stone
a) For stones required in ashlar masonry :

Length & Breadth : Plus or minus 5mm
Height : Plus or minus 3mm
b) For stones required other than in ashlar

masonry :
Length & Breadth : Plus 5mm, minus 10mm
Height : Plus 5mm, minus 5mm
IV-1
368 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Concrete and reinforced concrete pipes :

Length : Plus or minus 1% of
standard length
Internal diameter, upto 300 mm : Plus 3 mm Minus 1.5
mm
Cast iron spigot & socket pipes and fittings :
Length of fittings : Plus or minus 10mm
Length of pipe : Plus or minus 20mm
Thickness : minus 1 mm
Internal dia of socket : Plus or minus 3 mm
Depth of socket : Plus or minus 10mm
External dia, upto 75 mm : Plus or minus 3mm
100 mm : Plus or minus 3.5mm
150 mm : Plus or minus 4mm
Stoneware pipes, in length
upto 75 cm : Plus or minus 10mm
Upto 90 cm : Plus or minus 15mm
In thickness of barrel and socket not exceeding

450mm : Plus or minus 2mm
IV-2
369 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
In thickness of barrel and socket between 500

to 600mm : Plus or minus 3mm
Glazed tiles, length of all 4 sides : Plus or minus 0.8mm
Individual dimensions and thickness : Plus or minus 0.5 mm
Metal doors, windows and ventilators - In

overall dimension : Plus or minus 1.5 mm
Wooden doors, windows, ventilators Overall

dimension of door, window, ventilators : Plus or minus 3 mm
All components of shutter except glazing bar

Width : Plus or minus 3 mm
Thickness : Plus or minus 1 mm
Glazing bar, width & thickness : Plus or minus 1 mm
Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings
a) Thickness
i) butt welded light tubes : Plus not limited minus
8%
medium and heavy tubes : plus not limited minus

10%
ii) seamless tubes : plus not limited minus

12.5%
b) Weight
i) single tube (irrespective of the quantity) : + 10% , - 8%
IV-3
370 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ii) for quantity of less than 150m of one

size : + 10% , - 8%
iii) for quantity of 150m and over of one : + 4% , - 4%

size
Earth work
Finished level of site levelling in hard rock : Plus or minus 50mm
Finished level of site levelling except for hard

rock : Plus or minus 100 mm
Level of pits, trenches foundations : Plus or minus 50mm
IV-4
371 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Concrete & Reinforced concrete
Footings, plan dimension : Plus 50 mm Minus 12

mm
Eccentricity : 0.02 times the

dimension of footing in
the direction limited
to 50 mm
Thickness : Plus or minus 0.05 times

the specified thickness
Foundations
Deviation of planes and lines of their

intersection from vertical or inclination along
full height : Plus or minus 20 mm
Deviation of horizontal plane from horizontal

line
for 1 m of the plane in any direction : Plus or minus 5mm
for the whole plane : Plus or minus 20mm
Sizes of cross section : Plus or minus 8mm
Surfaces of inserts to support loads : Plus or minus 5mm
Length of elements : Plus or minus 20 mm
Equipment foundations :
Top level of bolt : Plus 20mm
Top level of foundation before grouting : Minus 20mm
IV-5
372 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Axes of anchor bolts in plan : Plus or minus 5mm
Axis of foundation in either direction : Plus or minus 10mm
Deviation in vertical line along height : Plus or minus 10mm
Sizes of pits in plan : Plus or minus 20 mm
Sizes of steps in plan : minus 20mm
Levels of steps, benches and pits : minus 20mm
Axes of inserts in plan : Plus or minus 10 mm
Basic dimensions in plan : Plus or minus 10mm
Deviation of horizontal plan from horizontal line
for 1 m of plane in any direction : Plus or minus 5mm
for the whole plane : Plus or minus 20mm
Local deviations of top surface when checked

with a 2 m long straight edge : Plus or minus 8mm
Buildings :
Surfaces when checked with a 2 m long

straight edge : Plus or minus 8mm
Sizes of cross section : Plus 8mm Minus 0 mm
Length of elements : Plus or minus 20mm
Deviation from horizontal plane, for whole

building : Plus or minus 10mm
Plumb in verticality : 1 in 1000 of height
IV-6
373 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
for columns supporting floor beams : Plus or minus 10mm
for framed columns linked with crane girders

and beams : Plus or minus 10mm
Reinforced concrete walls : Length : Plus or minus

20mm
Flatness of surface when checked with a 2 m

long straight edge : Plus or minus 8mm
Level of top surface to support assembled

elements : Plus or minus 5mm
Deviation in planes and lines of intersection

from vertical : Plus or minus 15mm
Size of cross section : Plus or minus 8mm
Placing of reinforcement :
Length of bar upto 75 cm long (Other than

straight bars) : Plus 3 mm Minus 5 mm
75 - 150 cm long : Plus 5 mm Minus 10 mm
150 - 250 cm long : Plus 6 mm Minus 15 mm
250 cm long and above : Plus 7 mm Minus 25 mm
Straight bars, all lengths : Plus or minus 25 mm
Spacing of bars : Plus or minus 5 mm

Anchor bolts :
Shift in location in plan : Plus or minus 5 mm
IV-7
374 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Same, when bolts are located outside of

structural columns : Plus or minus 10mm
Top level : Plus 20 mm
Threaded length : Plus 30 mm
For Walls For Pillars
Masonry
Width : Plus or minus 10 Plus or minus 10

mm mm
Shift in axes : Plus or minus 10 --- ---

mm
Deviation in row from horizontal

line for every 10m length
: Plus or minus 15 --- ---
mm
Flatness of surface when

checked with a 2 m long
straight edge : Plus or minus 10 Plus or minus 5 mm
mm
Deviation in lines separating

storeys Deviation of surface
from vertical and and at angles
and corners : Plus or minus 15 Plus or minus 15
mm mm
for 1 storey : Plus or minus 10 Plus or minus 10

mm mm
for whole building : Plus or minus 30 Plus or minus 30

mm mm
IV-8
375 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
Dimensions of openings for

doors, windows etc : Plus 15 mm
Minus 0 mm
Flooring, skirting, dado and :

plastering
Insitu concrete floor : 4 mm
Concrete tile and mosaic, in

any 3 m length : 3 mm
in large open area : 15 mm
wall tiling - surface should not

vary from general plane by
more than 1 in 200. Marble and
such superior work, in any 2 m
length : 1.5 mm
in any row : 3 mm
Plastered surfaces, flatness

when checked with a 2 m long
straight edge : 3 mm
Vertical surfaces, upto 1 storey : 5 mm
Over full heights : 10 mm
Metallic Inserts on assembled

components length and width : Plus or minus 3
mm
Road work
IV-9
376 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
The levels of the sub-grade and different pavement courses should not vary from
those calculated with reference to the longitudinal and cross-sections of the road
as shown on the drawing beyond the tolerance given below :-
Sub-grade : plus or minus 25mm

Sub-base : plus or minus 20mm
Base : plus or minus 15mm
Wearing course : plus or minus 6mm
IV-10
377 of 497
PART – V METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
378 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
CONTENTS
1.0 GENERAL
2.0 EARTHWORK
3.0 ANTI - TERMITE TREATMENT
5.0 MASONRY
6.0 PLASTERING
7.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING & PAINTING
8.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING WORKS
9.0 WOODWORK
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS
11.0 GLAZING
12.0 WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE, SEWERAGE & SANITATION
13.0 WATER PROOFING, DAMP PROOFING
14.0 CEILING AND LINING
15.0 ROAD WORK
V-I
379 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 The method of measurement of the various items of work shall be in

accordance with IS : 1200 (Part 1 to 28) - 1971 to 1993 unless otherwise
mentioned in this part or in the schedule of items or in preamble or in the
specification.
1.2 If there is any contradiction in meaning between any portion of this part and
that of IS :1200 (Part 1 to 28) - 1971 to 1993, the stipulation of this part
shall prevail.
1.3 The descriptions and explanations given herein have as much forces as
though they are incorporated into the description of the items themselves in
the schedule of items.
2.0 EARTH WORK & SAND FILLING
2.1 General
2.1.1 Each dimension upto 25 m shall be measured to nearest 0.01 m and to

nearest 0.1 m for dimensions over 25 m. Areas shall be worked out to the
nearest 0.01 m2 and cubical contents to the nearest 0.01 m3.
2.1.2 Shoring and strutting shall not be measured separately unless otherwise
specified.
2.1.3 Dewatering for earth work and sand filling work shall not be measured
separately unless otherwise specified.
2.1.4 For classification of soils, relevant clauses of Technical specification

(workmanship and other requirements ) is to be followed.
2.2 Requirements for particular works
2.2.1 Site levelling
V-1
380 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
2.2.1.1 For site levelling levels shall be taken jointly before start & after completion
of work and the quantity computed based on the levels. Measurements
shall be made only for excavation and no separate measurement for filling
shall be made except where earth, borrowed from elsewhere for site
levelling work, will be measured separately only for that borrowed portion of
earth.
2.2.1.2 In cases where it is not possible or convenient to take measurements from

excavated cuts or borrow pits, excavation shall be worked out from filling
based on the levels to be taken before and after completion of works.
Deduction of 10 percent will be made for voids, however for consolidated
fills done through heavy mechanical means, the deduction for voids shall be
5% in place of 10%.
2.2.1.3 In exceptional cases where the quantity is measured on the lorry

measurement, loose stacks, boxes or any other similar method with the
approval of the Engineer the deduction for voids shall be 20 per cent from
the actual quantity.
2.2.2 Excavation
2.2.2.1 Before commencing excavation of foundations for buildings and structures,

the initial ground levels shall be jointly recorded. The depth of excavation
and the calculation of lift shall be based on this. Normally the initial ground
level shall be considered as the level of the site as handed over to the
contractor. In case excavation is planned and approved to be taken up
subsequent to terracing, the terrace level shall be treated as initial ground
level.
2.2.2.2 Excavation of foundations, trenches, basements, pits etc., shall be

measured to the dimensions shown in the excavation plan, if any, or of the
lowest concrete or masonry course, as the case may be and the actual
depth. Working space and slopes shall not be measured.
2.2.2.3 Excavation of rock shall be measured from stacks of excavated rock with a
deduction of 50 per cent for voids or measured in the solid based on levels.
V-2
381 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
2.2.2.4 In case of following works, no measurement will be recorded for the

excavation beyond drawing / specification.
(a) In work which will be covered externally with damp proof covering.
(b) In work which requires formwork.
(c) In work which requires workmen to operate from the outside and for
guniting and post tensioned concrete, ground beams etc.
However, if there is a specific provision otherwise in the

item/specification/preamble, for authorised working, it shall be measured
accordingly. This working space may be 60 cm. measured from the face of
the structure at lowest level, unless otherwise mentioned.
2.2.2.5 Surface Dressing
Trimming of natural ground, excavated surface and filled up area to remove

vegetation and/or small in equalities not exceeding 15 cm deep shall be
described as surface dressing and measured in square metres unless
otherwise specified in the schedule of items/ preamble.
2.2.2.6 Lead
The distance for removal shall be measured over the shortest practicable
route and not necessarily the route actually taken.
The description of the item shall include loading and unloading.
For the purpose of the measurement of the lead, the area excavated shall
be divided in suitable block and for each block the distance from the centre
of the block to the centre of the placed earth pertaining to this block shall be
taken as lead.
2.2.3 Back filling/filling
2.2.3.1 In foundations, trenches, basements, pits, etc. and in other like areas, the
measurements shall be the theoretical volume of the filling computed from
V-3
382 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
drawings i.e. the volume measured under excavation minus the volume
occupied by the structure and part filling if any, done otherwise.
2.2.3.2 In filling under floors the measurements shall be the theoretical volume as
per drawings after deducting the part filling if any, done otherwise.
2.2.3.3 In embankments, the work shall commence only after recording jointly the
initial ground levels and the measurements shall be made on the basis of
finished cross section and initial ground levels. Where controlled
compaction by mechanical compaction is done, 5% deduction for voids
shall be made. In case controlled compaction by mechanical means is not
done then deduction for voids shall be 10%.
2.2.3.4 Filling/Back filling shall not be measured separately for items of excavation,
where filling/back-filling is a part of the composite item and as such is
included in excavation item itself.

Measurement shall be the plinth area of the ground floor of the building
treated. Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m and area to
nearest 0.01 m2.
4.1 Concrete
4.1.1 Dimensions shall be measured to nearest 0.01 m except for the thickness
of slab, which will be to nearest 0.005 m. Areas shall be worked out to
nearest 0.01 m2 and cubic contents to nearest 0.01 m3.
4.1.2 The concrete shall be measured as per drawings except in the cases of
approved variations which will be measured separately.
No deductions shall be made for the following :
i) Ends of dissimilar materials such as beams, rafters, purlins etc., upto

500 cm2 in cross section.
V-4
383 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ii) Openings upto 0.1 m2 in area (In calculating area of an opening, the
thickness of any separate lintel or sill shall be included in the height.
No extra labour for forming such opening or voids shall be
measured).
iii) Volume occupied by reinforcement or other embedments such as

anchors, inserts, conduits or volume occupied by pipes, sheathing
etc. not exceeding 100 sq. cm. each in cross sectional area or as
specified.
iv) Small voids not exceeding 40 cm2 each in cross section.
v) Moulds, drip moulding, chamfer, splay, beds, grooves and rebates

upto 10 cm in width or 15 cm in girth.
4.1.3 Columns shall be measured from top of column base to underside of first
floor slab and from top of floor to underside of floor slab above thereafter.
Beams shall be measured from face to face of columns and will include
haunches. Depth of beam shall be measured from bottom of slab and in
the case of inverted beams from top of slab. Chajjas and other cantilevers
shall be measured from the face of the projection.Where vertical fins are
combined with chajja, the latter shall be measured clear between fins. In
case chajja is not combined with lintel, beam or slab, it shall be measured
inclusive of bearing.
4.2 REINFORCEMENTS
4.2.1 Norms for Steel Consumption
The requirement of mild and high strength deformed bars for various works
like reinforcement, guard bars, fan hooks etc. shall be calculated as
mentioned below :
i) As per drawing including
(a) Authorised laps, bends, standard hooks and deviations etc.
V-5
384 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
(b) Spacer bars, chairs, hangers, supports, spacer blocks dowels

etc. are to be considered for wastage only and not to be measured
for payment purpose.
ii) Quantity upto 0.5% of (i) above towards unaccounted wastages, plus
iii) Quantity upto 3% of (i) above towards cut pieces, which shall be
pieces below 2m. length. These cut pieces shall not be taken back
even though steel has been issued by the client/owner.
4.2.2 Reinforcements shall be measured in lengths to the nearest 0.01 m for

various diameters of bar and converted into weight in tonnes to the nearest
kg. on the basis of standard weights as per IS : 1786-1986. No allowance
shall be made in the weight for rolling margin.
4.2.3 Authorised laps, standard hooks, bends shall be measured.
4.2.4 Sapacer bars, chairs, hangers, supports, spacer blocks and unauthorised
laps etc. shall not be measured unless otherwise specified.
4.2.5 Dowels neither shown on the drawings nor instructed by the Engineer, but
required for construction facilities shall not be measured for payment.
4.2.6 Modification of already embedded reinforcement, if required due to faulty

fabrication or placement, shall not be measured for payment.
4.2.7 The measurements of reinforcements (including authorised laps, hooks,

bends) shall be taken only from Bar bending lists or from the drawings
except in the cases of approved variations which will be measured as per
4.2.2.
4.2.8 Wire netting and fabric reinforcement shall be described (including meshes
and wire/strands) and measured in square metre, unless otherwise
specified in the schedule of item. Authorised laps shall be measured.
Raking or circular cutting and waste shall be included in the description of
item.
V-6
385 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.2.9 Hoop iron shall be fully described and measured in running metres unless
otherwise specified in the schedule of item.
4.2.10 Binding wire for the reinforcement shall not be measured separately and
shall be included in the item of reinforcement.
4.3 ADMIXTURE
Admixture will be measured separately as specified or on the basis of the

requirement as approved by the Engineer.
4.4 FORMWORK
Each dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m and area to the
nearest 0.01 sq.m.
4.4.1 Formwork shall be measured as the actual surface in contact with concrete
and paid in sq.m. unless included in the rate for concrete in specific item of
work.
4.4.2 All the measurements shall be computed from the drawings except in the
cases of approved variations which will be measured separately.
4.4.3 Formwork shall not be measured separately for precast concrete work,
grouting and damp proof course which shall be included in the concrete
rates.
4.4.4 No measurement for formwork in construction joints shall be made.
4.4.5 Openings upto 0.1 sq.m. shall be neglected, as if non - existent, for the
purpose of formwork measurement.
4.4.6 No extra measurement or payment shall be made for making the form work
water proof or for supports, scaffolding, staging, centering, approaches etc.
4.4.7 No measurement shall be taken for the formwork in pockets, openings,

chambers, chases etc., in concrete if the cross sectional area is less than or
V-7
386 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
equal to 0.1 sq.m. in each case. If the cross section area of any opening
exceeds 0.1 sq.m. the actual area of the formwork shall be measured for
payment.
4.5 EMBEDDED PARTS
4.5.1 These shall be measured on the basis of standard theoretical weight of the
complete insert according to the drawing/direction.
4.5.2 Embedded steel, which are the integral parts of the embedment according
to drawing and are required for anchoring the embedded parts in concrete
shall be measured on the basis of the theoretical standard weight. In case
of anchor bolts the theoretical weights of the nuts, lock nuts, check nuts and
washers shall be added in the measurement for payment.
4.5.3 All bye-works such as jigs, fixtures, templates and other arrangements
which are not integral parts of the embedded parts, but necessary to secure
those (embedded parts) in position shall not be measured for payment.
4.5.4 Anti-corrosive paint over the exposed surfaces and protection of the anchor
bolts with grease tc., shall not be measured for payment.
4.5.5 Modification works necessary to rectify the mistake of already placed

embedded parts shall not be measured.
4.6 GROUTING
4.6.1 Grouting shall be measured in volume except in the cases of grouting by

special cement compound or epoxy compound which will be measured by
number.
4.6.2 Measurement shall be computed from the drawings except in the cases of
approved variations which shall be measured separately and subsequently
added to or deducted from.
4.6.3 Necessary formwork shall not be measured for payment.
4.7 DAMP PROOF COARSE
V-8
387 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.7.1 Measurement shall be in sq.m. stating thickness and computed from the
drawings except in the cases of approved variations which will be
measured separately.
4.7.2 Necessary formwork shall not be measured for payment.
5.0 MASONRY
5.1 Dimensions shall be measured to nearest 0.01 m, areas to nearest 0.01 m2
and cubic contents to nearest 0.01 m3.
5.2 No deduction shall be made for :
(i) Ends of dissimilar materials such as joints, beams, posts, girders,

trusses, lintels, purlins etc., upto 0.1 m2 in section.
ii) Openings upto 0.1 m2 in area.
(iii) Wall plates, bed plates, bearing of slab etc., thickness not exceeding
10 cm. and bearing not extending over the full thickness of wall.
(iv) Cement concrete blocks for holdfasts and the like.
(v) Iron fixtures such as pipes etc. upto 300 mm. dia. and hold fasts for
doors and windows.
5.3 Dressed stonework such as in sills, cornices , column caps, copings etc.,
shall be measured as the smallest rectangular block from which the finished
stone can be worked.
5.4 Honeycomb openings shall not be deducted from the area of honeycomb
brickwork.
5.5 Brickwork of full brick width or more shall be measured in cu.m. while of
thickness of half brick or less shall be measured in sq.m., unless otherwise
specified.
V-9
388 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.6 Reinforcements for reinforced brick work shall be measured separately,

unless otherwise specified and no deduction for reinforcement shall be
made from brickwork.
6.0 PLASTERING & POINTING

6.1 All plastering and pointing shall be measured in sq.m. unless otherwise
described. Dimensions shall be measured to nearest 0.01 m and areas to
0.1 sq.m.
6.2 Ceiling shall be measured between walls or partitions (dimensions before

plastering) shall be taken. Measurement of wall plastering shall be taken
between walls or partitions for length (dimension before plastering) and
from top of floor or skirting to ceiling for height.
6.3 The methods of measurement including the deductions for openings etc.,
shall be according to the relevant part of IS : 1200 (Part 1 to 28) - 1971 to
1993.
7.0 WHITE WASHING, COLOUR WASHING, PAINTING & OTHER

FINISHES.
The method of measurement shall be according to the relevant part of
IS : 1200 (Part 13 & 15) - 1987.
8.0 FLOORING, PAVING & FACING WORKS

8.1 The work shall be measured as a complete finished item including
necessary underbed, adhesives, dividing strips, joint sealing and necessary
grinding, polishing and finishing where specified. The subgrade or the base
course shall be measured separately against respective item unless
8.2 All works shall be measured net, dimensions being measured to nearest
0.01 m and areas to nearest 0.01 sq.m. Any opening less than 0.1 sq.m. in
area shall not be deducted nor any extra payment made for that.
V-10
389 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.3 Building paper or water proofing by bituminous felts/mastic asphalt

treatment, where specified to be laid below floor, shall be measured
separately for payment unless otherwise specified.
8.4 Laps and seams in sheet finishing (linoleum, cork, PVC, rubber & like) shall
be deemed to be included in the item itself even if not described explicitly
and shall not be measured and paid separately.
9.0 WOODWORK
9.1 All work shall be measured net for finished dimensions as fixed, that is no
extra measurement or allowance shall be made for shape, joints, wastage
etc. subject to specific provision made in the IS : 1200 (Part 21) - 1973 and
for dimensions supplied beyond those specified in the drawing.
9.2 Wooden frame
rought, finished and fixed shall be measured net for overall length nearest
to 0.01 m, width and thickness to the nearest 2mm or as specified in the
drawing and cubic contents calculated in cubic metres to the nearest three
places of decimals.
Wooden shutters of all types
Length and width of the shutters shall be measured net as fixed to the
nearest cm. in closed position covering the rebates of the frame but
excluding the gap between the shutter and the floor and the area calculated
in square metre upto two places of decimal.
Over lap of two leaves of shutter shall not be measured separately.
Hand rails
Hand rails of finished width and depth as specified in the item shall be
measured in running metres upto two places of decimal.
9.3 Painting and polishing, unless otherwise described in the schedule of

items, shall be measured separately for payment.
V-11
390 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.4 Builder's hardware and fittings for doors windows and ventilators shall be
measured separately, unless stated otherwise in the Schedule of Items.
Hardware and fittings shall be measured according to IS : 1200 (Part-VII) -
1972.
9.5 Hold fasts for door, window and ventilator frames shall be measured
separately.
9.6 Timber Partitions
This shall be measured in area calculated in sq. m. to the nearest two

places of decimal.
9.7 Glazed shutters and glazed partitions (Wooden)
Glazed shutters/glazed partitions with wooden frames shall be measured as

a single item in area calculated in sq.m. to the nearest two places of
decimal. No separate measurement for glazing/glass panes shall be made.
9.8 Provision of making holes/opening/chases in masonry/ concrete flooring

etc. for fixing and making good of the same shall not be measured
separately for payment.
9.9 Bitumen painting or approved wood preservative of the timber surfaces in

contact with masonry/concrete floor etc. shall not be measured for payment.
10.0 METAL DOORS, WINDOWS & VENTILATORS

10.1 Door, window and ventilator/louvers as fixed, shall be measured net as
clear width between jambs and clear height between floor/sill and underside
of lintel, but excluding the gap between door shutters and floor.
Dimensions shall be calculated to the nearest 0.01 m., area calculated in
sq.m. upto two places of decimal.
10.2 For MS collapsible shutter/gate, rolling shutter sliding folding door, length
and breadth shall be measured to the nearest cm. for the clear area of
V-12
391 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
opening as per drawing in which they are installed and calculated in sq.m.
to the nearest two places of decimal.
10.3 M.S. Rolling grills, doors of steel plate, sliding door louvered ventilators,
gates, grills, as fixed, shall be measured and computed to weight from the
size as per drawing unless otherwise specified.
10.4 Glazed doors, windows, louvers, partitions (both steel and aluminium) shall
be measured in sq.m. to the nearest two places of decimal. No separate
measurement for glazing/glass panes shall be made for payment.
11.0 GLAZING
11.1 Glazing shall not be separately measured for doors, windows and
ventilators unless otherwise specified.
11.2 North light and roof glazing shall be paid as the area from outside to outside
of glazing including frames, to the nearest 0.01 sq.m.
11.3 Glazing, where shown in the schedule of items as a separate item, shall be
measured from edge to edge of glass as fixed.
12.0 WATER SUPPLY, DRAINAGE, SEWERAGE & SANITATIONS
12.1 All the pipelines buried under soil/masonry/floors/ concrete, laid

over/underground/along masonry/along under floor shall be measured in
metres along the centreline together with fittings/specials upto two places of
decimal against respective schedule of items for different diameter (the
diameter as specified shall mean nominal bore except PVC pipe) unless
12.2 All necessary earth work in trenches for laying pipe lines including
dewatering, levelling and trimming to the gradient, sand filling in the
trenches before laying the pipe, back filling either by sand or by approved
borrowed soil after laying the pipe lines including necessary compaction by
spraying water and levelling/dressing the same shall not be measured
V-13
392 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.3 All required specials, i.e. bends tees, shoes cowls, plug, elbows, unions,
caps, checkout and the like excluding valves shall not be measured
12.4 All fixing and supporting arrangement of the pipes like the supports,
saddles, brackets, clamps, cleats, covering the pipes with concrete in case
of pipes laid over ground, special arrangement for supporting the pipe like
while coming out from the building to the trenches etc. shall not be
measured separately for payment, unless otherwise specified.
12.5 All the arrangement in road crossing like cutting the road, diverting the road
and drains, concealing the pipes with suitable approved measures,
backfilling the area, covering and making good of the road with similar
materials/design shall not be measured separately for payment, unless
12.6 Septic tanks, inspection pits, manholes etc., shall be considered as a

composite single item including excavation, dewatering, concrete, masonry,
back filling, protection of other service lines and all the like works unless
12.7 All the valves and all the bathroom/W.C./Kitchen fixures like bib tap, stop
cock, shower, all sanitary wares, towel rails, mirrors etc., shall be measured
separately under respective item in the schedule, unless otherwise
specified.
13.0 WATER PROOFING, DAMP PROOFING
13.1 Water proofing for roofs
13.1.1 Length and breadth shall be measured in metre upto two places of decimal
and area calculated in sq.m. upto two places of decimal.
13.1.2 Measurement shall be made for the net covered area. No measurement
shall be made for overlapping for end and side joints and for bends
around/along the corners, ends and for special treatment around pipes, rain
water gulleys, steel structure and the like etc. No deduction shall be made
V-14
393 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
in the measurement for the opening of area less than 0.1 m2 each and no
extra payment shall also be made for any special works made around such
openings.
13.1.3 Water proofing treatment shall be considered as a single composite item

including priming painting coat, water proofing felts, binding bituminous
coats, top bituminous coat and pea size gravel or sand finishing etc.
13.1.4 For lime concrete terracing the consolidated thickness shall be considered
for measurement.
13.2 For Water proofing treatment in basement
13.2.1 With bituminous felts
13.2.1.1 Length and breadth shall be measured in metre upto two places of decimal
and area calculated in sq.m. utp two places of decimal.
13.2.1.2 Measurement shall be made for the net covered area. Measurement shall
be made from the drawing, except in certain special cases where it is
impossible to compute from drawing and the measurement shall be made
as executed. No measurement shall be made for overlaps, special
measures around projected pipes, sealing the bends/rounds and in other
cases, necessary projection/ overlap for the connection between vertical
and horizontal junction etc.
13.2.1.3 Water proofing treatment shall be considered as a single composite item,

including priming painting coat, water proofing felts, binding bituminous
coats and top bituminous coat etc.
13.3 Mastic Treatment
13.3.1 Length and breadth shall be measured in metres upto two places of decimal
and area calculated in sq.m. upto two places of decimal.
13.3.2 Measurement shall be made for the net covered area. No deduction in
measurement shall be made for opening of area upto 0.1 sq.m. each and
no extra payment shall be made for any special treatment around such
V-15
394 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
openings. No measurement shall be made for extra payment for the

special works necessary for junctions, corners, roundings, bends for the
works around pipes and the like.
14.0 CEILING & LININGS

14.1 Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m., areas to be worked
out to the nearest 0.01 sq.m.
14.2 Work formed to circular surfaces shall be measured separately unless

14.3 All work unless otherwise described shall be measured as flat in sq.m.
14.4 No deduction in measurement shall be made for openings not exceeding

0.4 sq.m. and no extra measurement shall be made for forming such
openings.
15.0 ROAD WORK
15.1 Dimensions shall be measured to nearest 0.01 m. Where the thickness is

less than 20 cm., it shall be measured to nearest 0.005 m. Areas shall be
worked out to nearest 0.01 sq.m. and cubic contents to the nearest 0.01
cu.m.
15.2 Where thickness is measured, it shall be the minimum thickness after

compaction.
15.3 Cement concrete bases and roads shall be measured either in sq.m. or
cu.m. as specified.
15.4 Unless otherwise specified, expansion and dummy joints shall be described
and measured separately and given in running metres stating the thickness
and depth of the joints.
V-16
395 of 497
`

PART – VI SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR
CONSTRUCTION WORKS
396 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
1.0 GENERAL
This specification deals with the subject matter of safety and protection to
be observed in the Civil Construction. This shall be followed along with all
related statutory requirements/obligation including Governmental byelaws,
codes, ordinance of local or central authorities related to the construction
work.
In case of complicated work like deep excavation, intricate shuttering and

formwork, excavation in loose soil and below water table, stacking of
excavated earth etc., work plan with necessary drawings and documents
have to be prepared by the Contractor and got approved by the Engineer.
Necessary reference shall be made to the following Indian Standard

Codes on safety requirements for various type of work :
Indian Standard
4081 - 1986 Blasting & Drilling.
5916 - 1970 Construction with Hot Bituminous Materials.
4130 - 1991 Demolition of Buildings.
3764 - 1992 Excavation Work
5121 - 1969 Piling & Other Deep Foundations.
4014 - (P-II) - 1967 Scaffolding, Steel Tubular.
3696 - (P-I & P-II) Scaffolds and Ladders.
1987 to 1991
6922 - 1973 Structures Subject to Underground Blasts.
4756 - 1978 Tunneling Work.
5499 - 1969 Underground Air-raid Shelters in Natural Soil.
VI-1
397 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4138 - 1977 Working in Compressed Air.
7293 - 1974 Working with Construction Machinery
8989 - 1978 Erection of Concrete Framed Structures.
2.0 BLASTING
2.1 Detonators and other explosive for blasting shall be taken to the blasting
area in the original container or any separate non-metal container. This
shall not be carried loose or mixed with other materials. Detonators and
explosives must be kept separately.
2.2 No shot for blasting shall be fired except by persons licensed to do so.
2.3 Drilling shall not be resumed after a blast has been fired unless a thorough
examination has been made to make sure that there is no unexploded
charge.
2.4 Before firing a shot, sufficient warnings by means of whistling and/or

otherwise shall be given to get men off the danger area. Blasting areas
shall be cordoned off & red flags during day time and red lights during
night time displayed prominently marking off the cordoned area.
2.5 All people except those who have actually to light the fuses must be
removed to a safe distance of not less than 200 metres as a rule.
2.6 Wherever possible, blasting mats should be used.
2.7 Contractors doing blasting work must have licence and an approved
magazine to store explosives.
2.8 Blasting operations shall be carried out during fixed hours of the day which
shall be notified in writing.
2.9 Provisions in explosives Rules 1940 as amended from time to time, Indian
Explosives Act 1844 (IV of 1884), and others shall be strictly followed.
3.0 EXCAVATIONS
VI-2
398 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.1 Sides of all excavations must be sloped to a safe angle, not steeper than
the angle of repose of the particular soil. If it is not possible to give a
proper slope, the sides of the excavation where there is a danger of fall or
dislodgement of earth or any material, shall be securely supported by
timber or other type of shoring.
3.2 No excavation or earth work below the foundation level of an adjoining

building shall be taken up unless adequate steps are taken to prevent
damage to the existing structure or fall of any part.
3.3 Every accessible part of an excavation, pit or opening in the ground into
which there is a danger of persons falling shall be suitably fenced with a
barrier upto a height of one metre suitably placed from the edge of the
excavation as far as practicable.
3.4 No material or load shall be placed or stacked near the edge of the
excavation or opening in the ground. The excavated material shall not be
placed within 1.5 m of the trench or half of the depth of the trench
whichever is more.
3.5 Cutting shall be done from top to bottom. No undercutting of sides of

excavation shall be allowed.
3.6 All narrow trenches 1.2 m or more depth, shall at all times be supplied with
atleast one ladder for each 30m in length or fraction thereof. Ladder shall
be extended from bottom of the trench to atleast one metre above the
surface of the ground. The side of the trenches which are 1.5 m or more
in depth shall be stepped back to give suitable slope, or securely held by
planking, strutting and bracing so as to avoid the danger of side collapse.
3.7 Materials shall not be dumped against existing walls or partition to a height
that may endanger the stability of the walls.
3.8 While withdrawing piled materials like loose earth, crushed stone, sand,
etc., from the stock piles, no over hanging shall be allowed to be formed
in the existing dump.
VI-3
399 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
3.9 No material on any of the sites of work shall be so stacked or placed as to

cause danger or inconvenience to any person or public or any other
agency at work.
4.0 DEMOLITION
4.1 On every demolition job, danger signs shall be conspicuously posted all
round the structure and all doors, openings giving access to the structure
shall be kept barricaded or marked except during the actual passage of
workmen or equipment. However, provision shall be made for at least two
independent exits for escape of workmen during any emergency.
4.2 During night, red lights shall be placed on or about all the barricades.
4.3 Where in any work of demolition it is imperative, because of danger

existing to ensure that no unauthorised person shall enter the site of
demolition outside working hours, a watchman should be employed. In
addition to watching the site he shall also be responsible for maintaining
all notices, lights and barricades.
4.4 All the necessary safety appliances as per IS ;4130 shall be issued to the
workers and their use explained. It shall be ensured that the workers are
using all the safety appliances while at work.
4.5 The removal of a member may weaken the side wall of an adjoining
structure and to prevent possible damage, these walls shall be supported
until such time as permanent protection is provided. In case any danger is
anticipated to the adjoining structure the same shall be got vacated to
avoid any danger to human life.
4.6 The power on all electrical service lines shall be shut off and all such lines
cut or disconnected at or outside the property line, before the demolition
work is started. Prior to cutting of such lines the necessary approval shall
be obtained from the electrical authorities concerned. The only exception
will be any power line required for demolition work itself.
VI-4
400 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
4.7 All gas, water, steam and other service lines shall be shut off and capped
or otherwise controlled at or outside the building line, before demolition
work is started.
4.8 All the mains and meters of the building shall be removed or protected
from damage.
4.9 If a structure to be demolished has been partially wrecked by fire,

explosion or other catastrophe, the walls and damaged roofs shall be
shored or braced suitably.
4.10 Walkways and passage ways shall be provided for the use of the
workman who shall be instructed to use them and all such walkways and
passageways shall be kept adequately lighted, free from debris and other
materials.
4.11 All nails in any kind of lumber shall be withdrawn, hammered or bent over
as soon as such lumber is removed from the structure being demolished,
and placed in piles for future cleaning or burning.
4.12 All the roads and open area adjacent to the work site shall either be
closed or suitably protected.
4.13 No electric cable or apparatus which is liable to be a source of danger or a

cable or apparatus used by the operator shall remain electricity charged.
4.14 All practical steps shall be taken to prevent danger to persons employed
from risk of fire or explosion or flooding. No floor, roof or other part of the
building shall be so overloaded with debris or materials as to render it
unsafe.
5.0 VEHICLE
5.1 No person shall board any vehicle or equipment when it is in motion.
5.2 Suitable blocks shall be placed against the wheels of a vehicle when it is
used for tipping materials into excavation or a pit or over the edge of any
embankment or earthwork to avoid the danger of its running over the
edge.
VI-5
401 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
5.3 All workers shall stand clear of the vehicle while it is dumping. If the
material being dumped is very heavy or sticky, dump hooks shall be used
or dumper shall be clamped to prevent any danger of its tripping.
5.4 Materials shall not be allowed to be loaded in a vehicle so as to project

horizontally beyond the sides of the body of the vehicle. All materials
projecting beyond the front or rear shall be indicated by a red flag in the
day and with red light in the night.
5.5 Driver of the truck or any heavy vehicle shall not reverse it unless assisted
by a signal man who shall have a clear view of the driver and the area
beyond the truck during reversing operation.
5.6 Maximum speed of a heavy vehicle must not exceed 15 km. per hour.
VI-6
402 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
6.0 SCAFFOLDING, GANGWAYS, LADDERS & SHUTTERING
6.1 For all work that cannot be done from the ground level or from part of any
permanent structure or from other available means of support, soundly
constructed scaffoldings of adequate strength shall be used as a safe
means of access to places of work.
6.2 All scaffolding shall be securely supported or suspended and wherever

necessary be properly braced to ensure stability.
6.3 Chains, ropes or other lifting materials used for the suspension of
scaffoldings must be of adequate strength and shall be of tested quality.
6.4 All such chains and ropes used for the suspension of scaffoldings shall be
properly fastened to safe anchorage points.
6.5 The platform of a suspended scaffolding shall be sufficiently wide.

Suspended scaffolding shall have hand rail on 3 sides of about 1.0 m
height.
6.6 All working platform and stages from which workers are liable to fall shall
be of adequate width depending on the type of work done and closely
boarded and planked.
6.7 Scaffolding or staging more than 3.5 m above the ground or floor,
suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary support
shall have a guard rail properly attached, bolted, braced and otherwise
secured atleast 1 m high above the floor or platform of such scaffolding or
staging and extending along the entire length of the outside ends thereof
with only such opening as may be necessary for the delivery of materials.
Such scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened as to prevent it from
swaying from the building or structure. The platform shall also be
provided with toe boards of atleast 150 mm high so placed as to prevent
the fall of materials and tools from there.
6.8 All platforms or gangways, runways and the stairs shall be kept free from
unnecessary obstructions, materials or junk.
VI-7
403 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
6.9 Working platforms, gangways & stairways shall be so constructed that

they shall not sag unduly or unequally, and if the height of the platform or
the gangway or the stairway is more than 3.5 m above ground level or
floor level they shall be closely boarded, shall be of adequate width and
shall be suitably fenced.
6.10 Every opening in the floor of a building or in a working platform shall be

provided with suitable fencing or railing whose minimum height shall be 1
m to prevent the fall of persons or materials.
6.11 Every ladder shall be securely fixed at top and bottom. A ladder more
than 5 m long shall have a prop.
6.12 All ladders used shall be of good construction, sound materials and
adequate strength. Ladders with defective or missing rungs shall not be
brought into use. The spacing of rungs shall not exceed 30 cms and
these shall be recessed atleast 12 mm into rails.
6.13 All ladders or rungs used for vertical height of more than 10 m shall have
an intermediate landing. All such intermediate landings shall be provided
with guard rails to a height of atleast 1 m.
6.14 Every ladder shall be securely placed so that it cannot move either at the
top or at the bottom and it shall rise to a height of atleast 1.2 m above the
place of landing.
6.15 No portable single ladder shall be over 8 m in length.
6.16 Spacing between the side rails of the ladder shall not be less than 300 mm
for ladders upto 3 m in length. For longer lengths, this shall be increased
at 6 mm for each additional 0.3 m of length.
6.17 Metal ladders must not be used for electrical work or near electric circuit of
equipments.
6.18 All scaffolds, ladders and other safety devices mentioned or described
herein shall be maintained in safe condition and no scaffold, ladder or
equipment shall be altered or removed while it is in use.
VI-8
404 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
6.19 Unfinished scaffolding which is under construction shall be prominently

marked as unsafe and any access points shall be closed.
6.20 All Planking and Decking on walkways and scaffolds should be adequately
supported at each end of the plank and intermediately if necessary.
Planks should not be allowed to cantilever beyond the last support but
should be overlapped if necessary on to the next plant.
6.21 Shuttering
The above remarks shall be applicable for this also. Shuttering,

particularly for slabs, should be treated as a scaffold. Unfinished
shuttering should be marked as dangerous similarly the finished formwork
should be adequately supported, care being taken to avoid trap door
effects.
7.0 MOBILE LIFTING APPLIANCES

7.1 No mobile lifting appliances shall used on a sloping surface unless
adequate precautions are taken to ensure stability.
7.2 Adequate precautions shall be taken to see that jib of the mobile crane
does not come in contact with overhead electric transmission line.
7.3 Only one person shall give signals to the operator of mobile lifting
appliances.
7.4 Maximum load to be lifted by lifting appliances shall be marked in a

position where it can be clearly seen by the crane driver and the operator.
7.5 No load shall be raised, lowered or suspended from a chain or rope

having a knot in any of the part.
7.6 No chain which is joined to another chain by means of bolt and nut shall
be used for raising, lowering or suspending any load.
7.7 All chains, ropes and lifting gears shall be carefully examined and tested
by a competent Maintenance Engineer atleast once in every quarter.
VI-9
405 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.8 When the work is stopped or when the mobile lifting equipment is not in
operation, the boom must be lowered to the horizontal position and tied
securely in place to prevent accidental drop.
7.9 No person shall walk under a load which is swinging by a lifting

equipment.
Guide rope must be attached to the load to prevent its swinging.
7.10 The foot blocks of the crane before starting work shall be securely
supported and firmly anchored to prevent its movement in any direction.
7.11 Use of Hoisting machines and tackle including their attachments,

anchorage and supports shall conform to the following standards of
condition.
7.11.1 These shall be of good mechanical construction, sound material and

adequate strength and free from defect and shall be kept in good working
order.
7.11.2 Every rope used in hoisting or lowering materials or as a means of

suspension shall be of durable quality and adequate strength and free
from patent defects.
7.11.3 Every crane driver or hoisting appliance operator shall be properly

qualified and no person under the age of 21 years shall be in charge of
any hoisting machine or give signals to the operator.
7.11.4 In case of every hoisting machine and every chain ring hook shackle
swivel and pulley block used in hoisting or lowering or as means of
suspension the safe working load shall be ascertained by adequate
means, every hoisting machine and all gears referred to above shall be
plainly marked with the safe working load. In case of hoisting machine
having a variable safe working loading, each safe working load of the
conditions under which it is applicable shall be clearly indicated. No part
of any machine or of any gear referred to above in this paragraph shall be
loaded beyond the safe working load except for the purpose of testing.
Mobile cranes shall have the working load and the radius of jib for the load
marked on it.
VI-10
406 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
7.11.5 The top pulley for hoisting a load shall be opened monthly and the spindle
inspected to see if any undue wear has taken place and for greasing.
7.11.6 In case of departmental machine, the safe working load shall be notified
by the Engineer concerned. As regards contractor's machines the
Contractor shall notify the safe working load of the machine to the
Engineer whenever he brings any machinery to site of work and get it
verified by the Engineer concerned.
7.12 Motors, gearing, transmission, electric wiring and other dangerous part of
hoisting appliances shall be provided with efficient safeguards. Hoisting
appliances shall be provided with such means as will reduce to the
minimum, the risk of accidental descent of the load. Adequate
precautions shall be taken to reduce to the minimum, risk of any part of a
suspended load becoming accidentally displaced.
8.0 RIVETTING, WELDING & GAS CUTTING & STEEL

ERECTION
8.1 Rivetting
8.1.1 Bolts covered with wet or slippery compounds shall not be used in
fabricating structural work.
8.1.2 The rivet heater must keep the rivet heating equipment as near as
possible to the place of work.
8.1.3 A pail of water shall always be kept ready for quenching fire when
stopping rivetting work.
8.1.4 Hot rivet shall not be thrown across aisles and shaftways.
8.1.5 Metal buckets for catching hot rivets must have false wooden bottoms to
prevent rivets from rebounding.
8.1.6 All rivets, bolts, nuts, and other tools must be kept in boxes and not left
loose, (For any further safety measures relevant Indian Standards and
safety specifications of structural section shall be referred to).
VI-11
407 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.2 Welding & Gas Cutting
8.2.1 All cylinders must be used and stored in upright position only.
8.2.2 Cylinders must be stored away from open flames and other source of
heat.
8.2.3 Oxygen cylinders must not be stored near other cylinders containing gas
or oil, grease or other combustible materials.
8.2.4 While the cylinder is in use, the cylinder valve key or wrench must be
placed on the valve spindle.
8.2.5 Before a cylinder is moved, the cylinder valve must be closed.
8.2.6 Gas cutting torches must be lighted by means of friction flames or similar
other methods and not with matches.
8.2.7 When torches are being changed or welding stopped for some time valves
for all cylinders must be closed.
8.2.8 The coloured lenses used for welding or gas cutting must be of proper
shade for the work being done.
8.2.9 Suitable eye protection equipment such as goggles, hand shields etc.,
must be used by persons engaged in welding or gas cutting operations.
8.2.10 Before any heavy structural member is gas cut, make sure that it is
cleared and supported by ropes, cables, chains or any other means to
prevent its dropping or swinging.
8.2.11 Cylinder valves and connections are not to be lubricated. All oily or
greasy substances must be kept away from cylinders.
8.2.12 Substantial and incombustible screen must be used below or near the
welding operations, if there is a possibility of a spark falling on other
workmen engaged in work closely.
VI-12
408 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
8.2.13 All air pipe lines and air hoses must be frequently inspected. Air hoses
shall not be used for dusting or for cooling purposes.
8.3 Steel Erection
8.3.1 All persons shall stand clear when a crane is sorting or shifting steel
girders or other structural materials.
8.3.2 No person shall stand, walk or work beneath any suspended load.
8.3.3 Guide rope must be used for guiding lifting loads.
8.3.4 When guiding a beam or fabricated structure or erection it shall be so held

that the employees hands do not get jammed against other objects.
8.3.5 Safety belts equipped with suitable life lines must be used by persons
working at heights and standing on structural members. Life line must be
tied to an independent support. For any further safety measures, for
Structural Steel Works, IS : 7205 - 1974 shall be referred to.
9.0 SAFETY APPLIANCES
9.1 Workers employed on mixing asphaltic materials, cement and lime

mortars, shall be provided with protective footwear and protective goggles.
9.2 Those engaged in white washing and mixing or stacking of cement bags
or any materials which is injurious to the eyes, shall be provided with
protective goggles.
9.3 Those engaged in welding works shall be provided with welder's protective
eye-shields.
9.4 Stone breakers shall be provided with protective goggles and protective
clothing and seated at sufficiently safe intervals.
VI-13
409 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.5 When workers are employed in sewers and manholes which are in use,
the Contractor shall ensure that the manhole covers are opened and
chambers are ventilated atleast for an hour before the workers are allowed
to get into the manholes, and the manholes so opened shall be cordoned
off with suitable railing and provided with warning signals or boards to
prevent accident to the public.
9.6 The Contractor shall not employ men below the age of 18 and women on
the work of painting with products containing lead in any form. Whenever
men above the age of 18 are employed on the work of lead painting the
following precautions shall be taken :
9.6.1 No paint containing lead or lead products shall be used except in the form
of paste or ready made paint.
9.6.2 Suitable face mask should be supplied for use by them when paint is
applied in the form of spray on a surface having lead paint dry rubbed and
scraped.
9.6.3 Overalls shall be supplied by the Contractors to the workmen and

adequate facilities shall be provided to enable the working painters to
wash during the cessation of work.
9.7 The workers going into inspection chamber shall have gas masks, gum
boots and rubber gloves while working inside. After coming out they shall
have some disinfectant from the first aid box for proper washing
9.8 All necessary personnel safety equipment such as safety helmets, safety
boots, safety belts, leather gloves for welders, clear glass safety goggles
etc., as considered adequate by the engineer have to be kept available for
the use of persons employed at the site of work and maintained in
condition suitable for immediate use and Contractor shall take steps to
ensure proper use of equipment by the workers.
9.9 All the persons entering the tunnel shall be provided with protective wear,
such as helmets, steel toe safety shoe, gum boots or other suitable type of
protective foot wear. In the case of steeply inclined tunnels and inshafts,
safety belts shall also be provided.
VI-14
410 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
9.10 Sign boards 1 x 1.5 m in size with the following wording shall be erected at
the access to these areas. "CONSTRUCTION AREA, HELMET
REQUIRED BEYOND THIS POINT"
9.11 No loose garments or ragged clothing shall be worn by the personnel

engaged in tunneling operation.
9.12 A telephone system shall provided to ensure a positive and quick method
of communication between all control location inside tunnel and portal of
the tunnels when longer than 500 m and for shafts when longer than 50 m
9.13 Irrespective of length and bends in the tunnel, arrangements shall be

made for transmitting of warning signals by any one of the following
means.
9.13.1 By electrically operated bells, operated by battery/dry cells with the bell
placed outside the tunnel and the position of the switch shifting with the
progress of the tunneling work. The position of the operating switch
although temporary shall be so chosen as to ensure proper accessibility
and easy identification.
9.13.2 By the use of two field (magnet type) telephone.
9.13.3 Any other suitable arrangement like walkie-talkie.
9.14 Arrangement for rendering prompt and adequate first aid to the injured
persons shall be maintained at every work site under the guidance of a
medical officer-in-charge of the project. Depending upon the magnitude of
the work the availability of an ambulance at a very short notice (at
telephone call) shall be ensured.
9.15 First-aid arrangements commensurate with the degree of hazard and with
the number of workers employed shall be maintained in a readily
accessible place throughout the working hours. At least one experienced
first-aid attendant with his distinguishing badge shall be available on each
shift to take care of injured persons. Arrangements shall be made for
calling the medical officer, when such a need may arise. It is
recommended that foreman/assistant foreman/supervisor/ permanent
workmen who are normally present at each working phase in each shift
VI-15
411 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
are given adequate training on first-aid methods to avoid employment of a

separate attendant.
9.16 Stretchers and other equipment necessary to remove injured persons

shall be provided at every shift.
9.17 Where there are more than 50 persons working in a shift, effective artificial
respiration arrangements shall be provided, with trained men capable of
providing artificial respiration.
10.0 ELECTRICAL
10.1 Only authorised persons shall handle or otherwise interfere with electrical
equipment. Any person detecting electrical apparatus being handled by
an unauthorised person or equipment in unsafe condition must report the
matter to the Engineer concerned.
10.2 No person shall work on any live electric conductor or apparatus and no
person shall assist such person on such work, unless he is authorised in
that behalf.
10.2.1 After isolating the equipment from the source of supply before the work
begins, a sign 'DONT'T SWITCH ON' must be hung on or near the switch
to avoid its being accidentally or inadvertently switched on when persons
are working.
10.2.2 Take out the fuses and keep in safe custody.
10.2.3 The switch may be locked if locking arrangement exists.
10.2.4 Earth the equipment, before work, to discharge it and short the terminals
as a precautionary measure against accidental switching ON.
10.2.5 After the work is finished take out Earthing and shorting link.
10.2.6 Remove all tools and materials from the site of work. Replace the fuses
and unlock the switch.
VI-16
412 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
10.2.7 The switch shall only be put 'ON' by the person who switched it 'OFF' or by
the person authorised by him in writing.
10.3 When working on live equipment use one hand only whenever possible, it
is advisable to keep the other hand behind the back. Shocks from hand to
hand are most dangerous.
10.4 All persons handling electrical gear in elevated position must use safety
belts. Even a slight shock may cause loss of balance and fall.
10.5 No one shall attempt to extinguish a fire on or near a live electrical

apparatus with water. Water is a good conductor of electricity. Use
extinguishers wherever provided. Use sand and blankets etc., if available.
10.6 No person shall use any part of electrical equipment for storing or hanging
clothes, umbrellas or other articles. Serious accidents occur from this
practice.
10.7 For attending the work on O.H. lines or equipment use wooden ladders.
Metallic ladders shall not be used.
10.8 Use insulated tools and ensure the insulation is in proper condition
periodically at least once in three months. Use rubber gloves wherever
possible.
10.9 As far as possible verbal instructions shall be avoided in case of pre-

arranged shut-down of electrical apparatus.
10.10 When workers are employed for electrical installations which are already
energised, insulating mats, wearing apparel such as gloves, sleeves and
boots as may be necessary shall be provided. The workers shall not wear
any rings, watches and carry keys or other materials which are good
conductors of electricity.
11.0 MISCELLANEOUS
11.1 The Contractor shall provide necessary fencing and lights to protect the
public from accident.
VI-17
413 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
11.2 Fire extinguishers adequate in number shall be kept by the Contractor at

the site of works where there is risk of fire hazard.
11.3 Adequate washing facilities shall be provided near the place of work.
11.4 When the work is done near any place where there is risk of drowning, all
necessary equipments shall be provided and kept ready for use and all
necessary steps taken for prompt rescue of any person in danger and
adequate provisions shall be made for prompt first aid treatment of all
injuries likely to be sustained during the course of the work.
11.5 These safety provisions shall be brought to the notice of all concerned by
displaying on a Notice Board at a prominent place at the work spot. The
persons responsible for compliance of the code shall be named therein
by the Contractor.
11.6 To ensure effective enforcement of the rules and regulations relating to

safety precautions, the arrangements made by the Contractor shall be
open to inspection by the Engineer and Owner.
11.7 Not withstanding the above clauses there is nothing in those to exempt the
Contractor from the operations of any other Act or Rule in force in the
Republic of India.
11.8 All storage, handling and use of flammable liquids shall be under the
supervision of qualified persons. Flammable liquid shall not be stored
inside the tunnel
11.9 All sources of ignition shall be prohibited in areas where flammable liquids
are stored, handled and processed. Suitable warning and 'NO SMOKING'
signs shall be posted in all such places. Receptacles containing
flammable liquids shall be stacked in such a manner as to permit free
passage of air between them.
11.10 All combustible materials shall be continuously removed from such areas
where flammable liquids are stored, handled and processed. All spills of
flammable liquids shall be cleared up immediately. Containers of
flammable liquids shall be tightly capped.
VI-18
414 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
12.0 REPORTING OF ACCIDENT
All accidents, major or minor must be reported immediately. The

Contractor, will provide first aid to the injured person immediately and
the injured person shall report to the first aid station along with the
'INJURED ON WORK' form duly filled in quintuplicate and submit to the
Medical Officer of the First Aid Station".
Serious Injury
In case of serious injury, the following procedure shall be adopted by the

Contractor :
1. Provide First Aid at his own First Aid Station.
2. Take the injured person to the Hospital along with the "INJURED
ON WORK" form duly filled in.
3. Reporting the accident to the Owner/Engineer by the Contractor.
Fatal Accident
Fatal accident must be reported immediately to the Engineer/Owner as

well as to the Police.
Penalty
Failure to observe the Safety Rules will make the Contractor liable to
penalty by way of suspension of work, fine and termination of contract.
VI-19
415 of 497
ANNEXURE- A
LIST OF IS & IRC CODES REFERRED
416 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
ANNEXURE - A
LIST OF IS & IRC CODES REFERRED
IS 383 : Specification for coarse & fine aggregates

from natural sources for concrete.
IS 2386 (Part 1 to 8) : Method of Test for aggregates for concrete
IS 456 : Code of practice for plain and reinforced

concrete.
IS 712 : Specification for building limes.
IS 3182 : Specification for broken brick (burnt clay )

fine aggregate for use in lime mortar.
IS 269 : Specification for 33 grade ordinary Portland

Cement.
IS 455 : Code of practice for Portland Slag Cement.
IS 1489 : Specification for Portland Pozzolana

Cement.
IS 8041 : Specification for rapid hardening Portland

Cement.

Cement.
A-1
417 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1

Cement.
IS 8043 : Specification for Hydrophobic Portland

Cement
IS 12330 : Specification for Sulphate resisting Portland

Cement.
IS 6452 : Specification for high alumina cement for

structural use.
IS 8042 : Specification for White Portland Cement.
IS 3535 : Methods of sampling Hydraulic Cement.
IS 4031 (Part 1 to 15) : Methods of test for Hydraulic Cement.
IS 4032 : Method of Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic

Cement.
IS 2645 : Specification for Integral Cement

Waterproofing Compounds.
IS 1599 : Method of Bend Test.
IS 1608 : Method of Tensile Testing of Steel

Products.
IS 6925 : Method of test for determination of Water

Soluble Chlorides in concrete admixtures.
IS 432 : Specification for mild steel and medium
A-2
418 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire

for concrete reinforcement.
IS 1786 : Specification for high strength deformed

steel bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement.
IS 1566 : Specification for hard drawn steel wire

fabric for concrete reinforcement.
IS 280 : Mild steel wire for general engineering

purposes.
IS 2062 : Structural steel (Standard Quality).
IS 1161 : Steel Tubes for Structural purposes.
IS 5624 : Foundation bolts.
IS 1363 - (Part 1 to 3) : Hexagon Head bolts, screws, nuts.
IS 2016 : Plain washers.
IS 3063 : Single coil rectangular section spring

washers.
IS 1239 (Part 1&2) : Mild Steel Tubes and other wrought steel
pipe fittings.
IS 1367 : Technical supply conditions for threaded

steel fasteners.
IS 1030 : Carbon steel castings.
A-3
419 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 3480 : Flexible steel conduit for electrical wiring.
IS 2667 : Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical

wiring.
IS 9537 (Part 3) : Conduit for electrical installations - Rigid

Plain conduits of insulating materiel.
IS 6946 : Flexible non-metallic conduits for electrical

installations.
IS 3419 : Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits.
IS 5913 : Methods of tests for Asbestos Cement

Products.
IS 2098 : Specification for asbestos cement building

boards.
IS 2096 : Specification for asbestos cement flat

sheets.
IS 9537 (Part 2) : Conduit for electrical installations - Rigid

steel conduits.
IS 2614 : Method for sampling of fasteners.
IS 1592 : Specification for asbestos cement pressure

pipes.
IS 9627 : Specification for asbestos cement pressure

pipe (Light duty).
A-4
420 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 6908 : Specification for asbestos cement pipes

and fittings for sewerage and drainage.
IS 1626 (Part 1 to 3) : Specification for asbestos cement building

pipes & pipe fittings and roofing fittings
IS 459 : Specification for unreinforced corrugated

and semi corrugated asbestos cement
sheets
IS 1077 : Specification for common burnt clay

building bricks.
IS 3495 (Part 1 to 4) : Method of Test for burnt clay building

bricks.
IS 3620 : Specification for laterite stone block for

masonry.
IS 1121 : Method of test for determination of strength

properties of natural building stone.
IS 1124 : Method of test for determination of water

absorption Sp. Gr. etc. of building stones
IS 1125 : Method of test for determination of

weathering of natural building stones.
IS 1126 : Method of test for determination of dura-

bility of building stone.
IS 1127 : Recommendation for dimensions and
A-5
421 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
workmanship of natural building stones for

masonry work.
IS 2185 ( Part-1) : Specification for concrete masonry unit

Hollow and solid concrete blocks.
IS 2116 : Specification for sand for masonry mortar
IS 1542 : Specification for sand for plaster.
IS 2185 (Part-2) : Specification for concrete masonry unit-

Hollow and solid light weight concrete
blocks.
IS 2185 (Part-3) : Specification for concrete masonry unit -

Auto claved Cellular Aerated concrete
blocks.
IS 6041 : Code of practice for construction of Auto

claved Cellular concrete block masonry.
IS 6441 (Part 1 to 9) : Method of Test for Auto claved Concrete

Products.
IS 3068 : Specification for broken brick (burnt clay)

coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete.
IS 2114 : Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazo

floor finish.
IS 460 (Part 1 to 3) : Specification for Test Sieves.
IS 1237 : Specification for cement concrete flooring
A-6
422 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
tiles.
IS 777 : Specification for glazed earthen ware wall

tiles.
IS 1129 : Recommendation for dressing of natural

building stone.
IS 1130 : Specification for Marble (blocks, slabs and

tiles).
IS 809 : Specification for rubber flooring materials

for general purposes.
IS 3462 : Specification for unbacked flexible PVC

flooring.
IS 3461 : Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles
IS 2818 : Indian Hessians.
IS 653 : Linoleum sheets and tiles.
IS 5389 : Code of practice for laying hard wood

parquet and wood block flooring.
IS 210 : Grey Iron Castings.
IS 2114 : Code of practice for laying in-situ terrazzo

finish.
IS 1198 : Code of practice for laying of linoleum

flooring.
A-7
423 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 1003 (Part-2) : Specification for timber panelled & glazed

shutters, windows and ventilator shutters.
IS 1141 : Code of practice for seasoning of timber.
IS 1003 (Part-1) : Specification for timber panelled & glazed

shutters - Door shutters.
IS 287 : Recommendation for maximum permissible

moisture content of timber used for different
purposes.
IS 2202 (Part-1) : Specification for wooden flush door shutters

(Solid core type).
IS 2191 (Part-1&2) : Specification for wooden flush door shutters

(cellular and hollow core type).
IS 3087 : Specification for wood particle boards

(Medium density) for general purposes.
IS 3478 : Specification for high density wood particle

boards.
IS 3097 : Specification for veneered particle boards
IS 303 : Specification for plywood for general

purposes.
IS 1328 : Specification for veneered decorative

plywood.
IS 205 : Specification for non-ferrous metal butt
A-8
424 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
hinges.
IS 1341 : Specification for steel butt hinges.
IS 362 : Specification for parliament hinges.
IS 453 : Specification for double acting spring

hinges.
IS 3818 : Specification for continuous (Piano) hinges.
IS 206 : Specification for Tee and Strap hinges.
IS 281 : Specification for mild steel sliding door bolts

for use with padlocks.
IS 1019 : Specification for rim latches.
IS 2681 : Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding

door bolts for use with padlocks.
IS 204 (Part 1&2) : Specification for tower bolts - Ferrous and

Non-ferrous metals.
IS 208 : Specification for door handles.
IS 2209 : Specification for mortice locks (vertical

type).
IS 6607 : Specification for rebated mortice locks

(vertical type).
IS 1823 : Specification for floor door stoppers.
A-9
425 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 1837 : Specification for fan light pivots.
IS 207 : Gate and shutter hooks and eyes.
IS 6343 : Specification of door closers

(peneumatically regulated) for light door
weighing upto 40 Kg.
IS 8756 : Specification for ball catches for use in

wooden Almirah.
IS 6315 : Specification for floor springs (hydraulically

regulated) for heavy doors.
IS 7197 : Specification for Double action floor spring

(without oil check) for heavy doors
IS 364 : Specification for fan light catch.
IS 3828 : Specification for ventilator chains.
IS 363 : Specification for hasp and staples.
IS 9899 : Specification for hat, coat and wardrobe

hooks.
IS 729 : Specification for drawer locks, cup-board

locks and box locks.
IS 3564 : Specification for door closers (Hydraulically

regulated).
IS 4351 : Specification for steel door frames.
A-10
426 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 419 : Putty for use on window frames.
IS 5187 : Specification for flush bolts.
IS 3847 : Specification for mortice night latches.
IS 4621 : Specification for indicating bolts.
IS 1038 : Specification for steel doors, windows and

ventilators.
IS 1977 : Structural steel (ordinary quality).
IS 1361 : Specification for steel windows for industrial

buildings.
IS 7452 : Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows

and ventilators.
IS 1948 : Specification for aluminium doors, windows

and ventilators.
IS 1148 : Specification for hot rolled rivet bars for

structural purposes.
IS 1949 : Specification for aluminium windows for

industrial buildings.
IS 204 (Part 1) : Specification for tower bolts-non-ferrous

metal.
IS 733 : Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy

bars, rods and sections (for general
A-11
427 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
engineering purposes).
IS 6248 : Specification for metal rolling shutters and

rolling grills.
IS 1081 : Code of practice for fixing and glazing of

metal doors, windows and ventilators.
IS 2339 : Specification for Aluminium Paint for

general purpose in dual containers.
IS 2835 : Flat Transparent sheet glass.
IS 5437 : Wired and figured glass.
IS 101 (Part 1 to 8) : Method of sampling and test for paints,

varnishes and related products.
IS 2074 : Ready mixed paint, air drying, red oxide

zink chrome, priming.
IS 5410 : Cement paint, colour as required.
IS 427 : Distemper, dry, colour as required.
IS 428 : Distemper, oil emulsion, colour as required.
IS 348 : French polish.
IS 5411 (Part 1&2) : Plastic emulsion paint.
IS 702 : Industrial Bitumen.
IS 73 : Paving Bitumen.
A-12
428 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 217 : Cut Back Bitumen.
IS 454 : Specification for Digboi type cutback

bitumen.
IS 5467 : Specification for shellac Wax.
IS 3384 : Specification for Bitumen primer for use in

water proofing and damp proofing.
IS 290 : Specification for Coal Tar Black Paint.
IS 341 : Specification for Black Japan, Type A, B &

C.
IS 1322 : Specification for bitumen felts for water

proofing and damp proofing.
IS 218 : Specification for creosote oil for use as

wood preservative.
IS 3037 : Specification for Bitumen mastic for use in

water proofing of roofs.
IS 1580 : Specification for Bituminous compound for

water proofing and caulking purposes.
IS 8542 : Specification for polish for wooden furniture

paste.
IS 9862 : Ready mixed paint, brushing etc.
IS 782 : Specification for caulking lead.
A-13
429 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 405 (Part 1&2) : Lead sheet and strips.
IS 5134 : Bitumen impregnated paper.
IS 2849 : Specification for non load bearing gypsum

partition blocks.
IS 8591 : Specification for floor polish paste.
IS 2095 : Specification for gypsum plaster boards.
IS 77 : Specification for linseed oil, boiled for

paints.
IS 533 : Gum Spirit of turpentine (oil of Turpentine).
IS 1504 : Bees Wax.
IS 3536 : Ready mixed paint, brushing, wood primer

pink.
IS 8273 : Specification for gypsum plaster for use in

the manufacture of fibrous plaster board.
IS 5871 : Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking

and damp proofing.
IS 651 : Specification for salt glazed stoneware pipe

and fittings.
IS 1729 : Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil pipe.
IS 771 (Part 1 to 7) : Specification for glazed fire clay appliances.
A-14
430 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 1230 : Cast iron rain water pipes and fittings.
IS 774 : Flushing cisterns for water closets and

urinals.
IS 2548 (Part 1&2) : Specification for plastic seats and cover for
water closet.
IS 1726 : Specification for cast iron manhole cover

and frames.
IS 1239 (Part 1&2) : Mild steel Tubes and fittings.
IS 4984 : Specification for high density polyethylene

pipes for potable water supplies: Sewerage
and industrial effluents.
IS 2556 (Part 1 to 15) : Specification for vitreous sanitary

appliances (vitreous china).
IS 7328 : High density polyethylene materials.
IS 4985 : Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes

for potable water supplies.
IS 3076 : Specification for low density polyethylene

pipe for potable water supplies.
IS 9762 : Specification for polyethylene floats for ball

valve.
A-15
431 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 3395 : Code of practice for fire safety of industrial

buildings.
IS 7834 (Part 1 to 8) : Specification for injection moulded PVC

fittings with solvent cement joint for water
supplies.
IS 8008 (Part 1 to 7) : Specification for injection moulded HDPE

fittings for potable water supplies.
IS 8360 (Part 1 to 3) : Specification for fabricated high density

polyethylene fittings for potable water.
IS 784 : Specification for prestressed concrete pipe.
IS 1703 : Specification for copper alloy float valves

(horizontal plunger type) for water supply
fittings.
IS 12234 : Specification for plastic equilibrium float

valve for cold water services.
IS 778 : Specification for copper alloy gate, globe

and check valves for water works purposes.
IS 1536 : Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure

pipes.
IS 1537 : Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water,

gas and sewage.
IS 1538 (Part 1 to 23) : Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste
A-16
432 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
and ventilating pipes, fittings and

accessories.
IS 3589 : Electrically welded steel pipes for water,

gas and sewage.
IS 781 : Specification for cast copper alloy screw

down bib taps and stop valves for water
services.
IS 1239 (Part 1&2) : Mild steel tubes and fittings.
IS 779 : Specification for water meters.
IS 1795 : Specification for pillar taps for water supply

purposes.
IS 1363 (Part 1 to 3) : Dimensions for screw thread run-outs and

undercuts.
IS 2016 : Plain washers.
IS 638 : Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion

jointing.
IS 4127 : Code of practice for laying of glazed

stoneware pipes.
IS 458 : Specification for precast concrete pipes.
IRC 19 : Standard specification and code of practice

for water Bound macadam.
A-17
433 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IRC 29 : Tentative specification for 4 cm Asphaltic

concrete surface course.
IRC 15 : Standard specification and code of practice

for construction of concrete roads.
IS 6313 : Code of practice for antitermite measures in

building.
IS 1054 : Dieldrin emulsifiable concentrates.
IS 1308 : Aldrin dusting powders.
IS 6439 : Hepta chlor emulsifiable concentrates.
IS 2632 : Crotonaldehyde.
IS 1791 : Specification for batch type concrete

mixers.
IS 10262 : Recommended guidelines for concrete mix

design.
IS 7861 (Part 1) : Code of practice for extreme weather

concreting - Recommended practice for hot
weather concreting.
IS 1199 : Methods of sampling and analysis for

concrete.
IS 516 : Method of test for strength of concrete.
IS 7861 (Part 2) : Code of practice for extreme weather
A-18
434 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
concreting. Recommended practice for cold

weather concreting.
IS 2502 : Code of practice for bending and fixing of

bars for concrete reinforcement.
IS 2751 : Recommended practice for welding of mild

steel plain and deformed bars for reinforced
construction.
IS 800 : Code of practice for general construction in

steel and deformed bars.
IS 816 : Code of practice for use of metal arc

welding.
IS 814 : Covered electrodes for manual metal arc.
IS 3370 (Part 1&2) : Code of practice for concrete structures for

the storage of liquids.
IS 2911 (Part 1 to 4) : Code of practice for design and

construction of pile foundations.
IS 1343 : Code of practice for prestressed concrete.
IS 1785 (Part 1&2) : Specification for plane hard drawn steel

wires for prestressed concrete.
IS 2250 : Code of practice for preparation and use of

masonry mortars.
IS 1635: : Code of practice for field slaking of building
A-19
435 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
lime.
IS 2212 : Code of practice for brick work.
IS 1597 (Part 1&2) : Code of practice for construction of stone

masonry.
IS 4101 (Part 1 to 3) : Code of practice for external facing and

veneer.
IS 737 : Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys,

sheet and strips ( for general engineering
purposes ).
IS 2572 : Code of practice for construction of hollow

connect block masonry.
IS 1661 : Code of practice for application of cement

finishes.
IS 5766 : Code of practice for laying of burnt clay

brick flooring.
IS 5491 : Code of practice for laying of in-situ

granolithic concrete flooring topping.
IS 3316 : Specification for structural granite.
IS 1196 : Code of practice for laying bitumen mastic

flooring.
IS 1195 : Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring.
A-20
436 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 3462 : Specification for unbacked flexible PVC

flooring.
IS 1198 : Code of practice for laying fixing and

maintenance of linoleum floor.
IS 848 : Specification for synthetic resin adhesive

for plywood.
IS 4457 : Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous

acid resisting tiles.
IS 851 : Specification for synthetic resin adhesive

for construction work (non structural) for
wood.
IS 2202 (Part 1&2) : Specification for wooden flush door

shutters.
IS 102 : Ready mixed paint.
IS 1081 : Code of practice for fixing and glazing of

metal doors.
IS 6248 : Specification for metal rolling shutters and

rolling grills.
IS 1868 : Anodic coatings on aluminium and its

alloys.
IS 2065 : Code of practice for water supply in

buildings.
A-21
437 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 2064 : Code of practice for selection, installation

and maintenance of sanitary appliances.
IS 7634 (Part 1 to 3) : Code of practice for plastic pipes.
IS 1742 : Code of practice for building drainage.
IS 5330 : Criteria for design of anchor blocks for

penstocks with expansion joints.
IS 3114 : Code of practice for laying of cast iron

pipes.
IS 783 : Code of practice for laying of concrete

pipes.
IRC-SP11 : Hand book of quality control for

construction of roads and run-ways.
IRC-63 : Tentative guidelines for use of low grade

aggregates and soil aggregate mixtures in
road pavement construction.
IRC-60 : Tentative guidelines for use of Lime Fly Ash

Concrete as pavement base or sub-base.
IRC-74 : Tentative guidelines for use of Lean

Cement Concrete and lean concrete Fly
Ash Concrete as pavement base or sub-
base.
IS 6509 : Code of practice for installation of joints in
A-22
438 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
concrete pavement.
IS 1838 (Part 1) : Specification for performed filler for

expansion joint in concrete pavements and
structures.
IRC-43 : Recommended practice for Tools,

Equipment and appliances for concrete
pavement construction.
IRC-15 : Standard specifications and code of prac-

tice for construction of concrete road.
IS 3036 : Code of practice for laying lime concrete for

a water proofed roof finish.
IS 1346 : Code of practice for water proofing of roofs

with bitumen felts.
IS 1609 : Code of practice for laying damp proofing

treatment using bitumen felt.
IS 4365 : Code of practice for application of bitumen

mastic for waterproofing of roofs.
IS 9103 : Specification for admixtures for concrete.
IS 2645 : Specification for integral cement water

proofing compounds.
IS 1834 : Specification for hot applied sealing

compound for joint in concrete.
A-23
439 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 278 : Specification for Galvanized barbed wire for

fencing.
IS 2721 : Specification for Galvanized steel chain link

fabric.
IS 280 : Specification for Mild steel wire.
IS 4826 Specification for hot dipped galvanized

coating on round steel wires.
IS 1200 (Part 1 to 28) : Method of measurement of building and

Civil Engineering Works.
IS 4081 : Safety code for blasting.
IS 5916 : Specification for cast iron gratings for

drainage purposes.
IS 4130 : Safety Code for demolition of building.
IS 3764 : Safety code for excavation work.
IS 5121 : Safety code for piling.
IS 4014 (Part 2) : Code of practice for steel tubular

scaffolding.
IS 3696 (Part 1&2) : Safety code of scaffolds and ladders.
IS 6922 : Criteria for safety and design of structures

subject to underground blast.
A-24
440 of 497
REGD. OFF: RANCHI

EDITION : 1
IS 5499 : Code of practice for construction of

underground raid shelter.
IS 4138 : Safety code for working in compressed air.
IS 7293 : Safety code for working with construction

machinery.
IS 8989 : Safety code for erection of concrete framed

structures.
IS 4756 : Safety code for Tunneling work.
IS 7205 : Safety code for erection of structural steel

works.
A-25
441 of 497
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION,
ERECTION AND PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURES,
GATES AND MISCELLANEOUS WORK
SPECIFICATION NO.: MEC/S/05/12/01 (Rev-0)
442 of 497
MECON Limited, STRUCTURAL SECTION, STANDARD
Regd. Office: RANCHI NEW DELHI. SPECIFICATION
FABRICATION, ERECTION AND PAINTING MEC/S/05/12/01 (Rev.-0) Page 1 of 29

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
1. General Page - 2
2. Section – 1 Fabrication of steel structures Page – 3
3. Section – 2 Erection of steel structures Page - 11
4. Section - 3 Fabrication and erection of miscellaneous structures Page - 16
5. Section – 4 Painting of Steel Structures Page - 20
LIST OF ANNEXURES
Annexure - A Permissible Deviation in pitch and gauge of holes or bolts of normal accuracy
Annexure – B Tolerance of assembled components of steel structures
Annexure – C Tolerance in erected steel structures
Annexure – D Material of Construction
443 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION, ERECTION AND PAINTING OF

STEEL STRUCTURES AND CHAIN LINK FENCING
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 This specification shall apply to general steelwork, for CNG Distribution works. The structures shall
include canopies, loading unloading platforms, hoarding, crossovers, ladders, Fencing and Fencing
Gates, staircases, pipe supports, skid supports, , sheds, stockades/trestles, Boundary wall MS Gate
etc.
444 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-1: FABRICATION OF STEEL STRUCTURES
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
2.1 The scope of work under fabrication includes, but not limited to, the following:
a) Preparation and supply of material indents, bolt lists, bought out items list, etc.
b) Procurement and collection of all material from stockyards/stores, including loading,

transportation, unloading and stacking and storing on skids or supports.
c) Procurement and collection of all consumables like bolts, nuts, washers, electrodes,
paints, shims, packs, etc., including allowance for spares and wastage.
d) Preparation and submission of modification/rectification sketches, As-Built drawings,

erection drawings, bill of materials, and shipping documents for approval of CLIENT.
e) Cold straightening of section and plates, whenever they are bent and kinked.
f) Fabrication of all steel structural components covered under tender drawings, design
drawings and generally described under the scope of the project.
g) Making arrangements for and conducting tests such as chemical analysis, physical
and mechanical tests on raw materials where specified/as directed by CLIENT.
h) Control Assembly of steel structural components at shop, wherever required.
i) Preparation of steel structural surfaces for painting as provided in the

specifications/drawings.
j) Application for one primer coat of painting at shop, as specified in the design
drawing/specifications.
k) Loading, transportation from fabrication workshop to site of erection and unloading of

all steel structural components/units/assemblies.
l) Preparation of ‘As-built’ drawings.
445 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
3.0 MATERIALS
3.1 Structural Steel
3.1.1 Structural steel and other related materials for construction shall conform to Annexure-F.
3.1.2 Due to non-availability of specified materials, suitable substitutions may be provided with the
consent of CLIENT. Such substitution shall be incorporated in the “As-built” drawings.
3.1.3 All the items are to be cut as per requirements of the drawing. If joints are to be provided in
any item in order to meet requirements of size and shape, cutting plan showing locations of
joints shall be prepared for consideration of purchaser. Joints provided shall be incorporated
in “As-built” drawings.
3.1.4 Rolling and cutting tolerances shall be as per IS:1852-1985.
3.1.5 Only tested materials shall be used unless use of untested materials for certain secondary
structural members is permitted by CLIENT. If test certificate for the material is not available
from the main producer, the following tests shall be carried out at the discretion of CLIENT:
a) Chemical Composition
b) Mechanical Properties
c) Weldability test
3.2 Bolts and Nuts
3.2.1 Black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS:1363-1992.
3.3 Electrodes
3.3.1 Electrodes shall conform to IS:814-1991.
4.0 STORING OF MATERIALS
4.1 Materials shall be stored and stacked properly ensuring that place is properly drained and is
free from dirt. It shall be ensured that no damage is caused due to improper stacking.
446 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
5.0 MATERIAL PREPARATION
5.1 Cut edges shall be finished smooth by grinding or machining wherever necessary. Sufficient
allowance (3mm to 5mm) should be kept in the items incase machining is necessary.
5.2 Cutting may be effected by gas cutting, shearing, cropping or sawing.
5.3 Straightening and bending shall be done in cold condition as far as practicable.
5.4 If required, straightening and bending may be done by application of heat between 900ºC and
1100ºC. Cooling down of the heated item shall be done slowly.
6.0 DRILLING AND PUNCHING OF HOLES
6.1 Drilling and punching of holes for bolts shall be done as per clause no.11.2.4 of IS:800-1984,
unless otherwise specified by CLIENT.
6.2 Drifting of holes for bolts during assembly shall not cause enlargement of holes beyond
permissible limit or damage the metal.
6.3 Holes for bolted connection should match well to permit easy entry of bolts. Gross mismatch
of holes shall be avoided.
6.4 Permissible deviation in holes for mild steel bolts of normal accuracy and high strength bolts
are given in the Annexure-A.
7.0 ASSEMBLY FOR FABRICATION
7.1 Fabrication of all structural steelwork shall be in accordance with IS:800-1984 and in
conformity with various clauses of this Specification, unless otherwise specified in the
drawings.
7.2 Fabrication of structures shall preferably be taken up as per the sequence of erection.
7.3 All erection units shall bear reference drawing no. at a prominent location on the structures for
easy identification at site.
7.4 Fabricated structures shall conform to tolerance as specified in this Specification and in
IS:7215-1974. In case of contradiction, tolerance specified in this Specification shall prevail.
447 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
7.5 All the components of structures shall be free from twist, bend, damage, etc.
7.6 Splice joints shall generally be of full strength butt weld and wherever possible, shall be
located at zones of minimum or substantially lesser stress.
7.7 Splice joints of flange and web should preferably be staggered.
7.8 Where necessary, washers shall be tapered or otherwise suitably shaped to give the heads of
nuts and bolts satisfactory bearing.
7.9 The threaded portion of each bolt shall project through the nut at least by one thread.
7.10 Tolerance of assembled components of structures are given in Annexure-B.
7.11 Permissible deviations from designed (true) geometrical form of the despatch elements shall
be in accordance with IS:7215-1974.
8.0 WELDING
8.1 The Contractor shall work out welding procedure for CLIENT’s approval, considering the
following factors:
i) Specification and thickness of steel.

ii) Specification of electrode or/and base wire.
iii) Welding process (manual arc welding, submerged arc welding).
iv) Type of structures to be welded (thickness of components meeting at a joint).
v) Sequence of welding.
vi) Weather condition.
vii) Inspection procedure to be followed
viii) Design requirements of the joints.
8.2 All metal arc welding shall be carried out as per IS:9595-1980.
8.3 Electrode shall conform to Clause no. 3.3 of this Specification.
8.4 Electrodes shall be stored in a dry place. Electrodes whose coatings are damaged due to
absorption of moisture or due any other reason shall not be used.
8.5 Recommendations of electrode manufacturer are to be strictly followed.
448 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
8.6 Welding surface shall be smooth, uniform, free from fins, tears notches or any other defect
which may adversely affect welding.
8.7 For multi-run weld deposit, the next run should be done only after thorough removal of slag
and proper cleaning of surface.
8.8 Fillet weld shall have the correct profile with smooth transition into parent metal. Dressing of
welds, if specified, shall be done by such method which does not cause grooving and other
surface defects on the weld or on the parent metal.
8.9 Fillet welds shall not be stopped at corners but shall be returned round them.
8.10 Welding shall not be done under such weather conditions which might adversely affect the
efficiency of the welding.
8.11 Ends of structural members and portions of gussets receiving welding at site shall be left
unpainted.
8.12 Permissible deviation in assembly of weld joints shall be in accordance with Annexure-C.
9.0 INSPECTION & TESTING
9.1 CLIENT/Inspector shall have free access at all times to those parts of Contractor’s or his
Sub-contractor’s works which are concerned with the fabrication of steel works and shall be
afforded all reasonable facilities at all stages of preparation, fabrication and trial assemblies
for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the provisions
of relevant specification.
9.2 All gauges and templates, tools, apparatus, labour and assistance for checking shall be
supplied by the contractor free of charge. CLIENT/Inspector may, at his discretion, check the
test results obtained at the Contractor’s works, by independent test at the Government Test
House or elsewhere, and should the material so tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the cost
of such test shall be borne by the Contractor.
9.3 Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements for stage inspection by CLIENT/Inspector
during the fabrication at shop and incorporate all on-the-spot instructions/ changes conveyed
in writing to the Contractor.
9.4 Material improperly detailed or wrongly fabricated shall be reported to CLIENT/Inspector and
shall be made good as directed. Minor misfits which can be remedied by moderate use of drift
pins, and moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping may be corrected in that manner, if
449 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
in the opinion CLIENT/Inspector, the strength or appearance of the structure will not be
adversely affected. In the event CLIENT/Inspector directs otherwise, the items will be rejected
and a completely new piece shall be fabricated. The cost of correcting errors shall be to the
account of the Contractor.
9.5 i) CLIENT/Inspector shall have the power:
a) To certify, before any structure is submitted for inspection, that the same is not in
accordance with the contract, owing to the adoption of any unsatisfactory method of
fabrication.
b) To reject any structure as not being in accordance with Specification and drawings.
c) To insist that no structure or parts of the structure once rejected is resubmitted for
inspection/test, except in cases where CLIENT/ Inspector considers the defects as
rectifiable.
ii) If, on rejection of structure by CLIENT/Inspector, the Contractor fails to make

satisfactory progress within the stipulated period, CLIENT/Inspector shall be at liberty
to cancel the contract and fabricate or authorize the fabrication of the structures at
any other place he chooses, at the risk and cost of the Contractor, without prejudice
to any action being taken in addition to terms of General Conditions of Contract.
iii) CLIENT/Inspector’s decision regarding rejection shall be final and binding on the
Contractor.
iv) The Specifications prescribe various tests at specified intervals for ascertaining the
quality of the work done. If the tests prove unsatisfactory, CLIENT/Inspector shall
have liberty to order the Contractor to re-do the work, done in that period and/or to
order such alterations and strengthening that may be necessary at the cost of the
Contractor and the contractor shall be bound to carryout such orders failing which the
rectification/redoing will be done by CLIENT through other agencies and the cost
recovered from the Contractor.
v) Notwithstanding any inspection at the workshop, CLIENT/Inspector shall have the

liberty to reject, without being liable for compensation any fabricated members or
materials brought to site that do not conform to specifications/drawings.
vi) All rejected materials shall be removed from the site of fabrication by the Contractor at
his own cost and within the time stipulated by CLIENT/Inspector.
450 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
10.0 CONTROL IN WELDING
10.1 The extent of quality control in respect of welds for structural elements shall be as follows and
shall be conducted by the contractor at his own cost:
a) Visual Examination - All welds shall be 100% visually inspected to check the
following:
i) Presence of undercuts
ii) Visually identifiable surface cracks in both welds and base metals
iii) Unfilled craters
iv) Improper weld profile and size
v) Excessive reinforcement in weld
vi) Surface porosity
Before inspection, the surface of weld metal shall be cleaned of all slag, spatter matter, scales
etc. by using wire brush or chisel.
b) Dye Penetration Test (DPT) - This shall be carried out for all important
fillet welds and groove welds to check the following :
i) Surface cracks
ii) Surface porosity
Dye Penetration Test shall be carried out in accordance with American National Standard
ASTM E165.
11.0 ACCEPTABLE LIMITS OF DEFECTS IN WELD
11.1 The limits of acceptability of defects detected during visual inspection and Dye Penetration
Test shall be in accordance with clause 8.15.1 American National Standard ANSI/AWS
D1.1-96.
12.0 RECTIFICATION OF DEFECTS IN WELDS
12.1 In case of detection of defects in welds , the rectification of the same shall be done as follows :
i) All craters in the weld and breaks in the weld run shall be thoroughly filled with weld.
451 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
ii) Undercuts, beyond acceptable limits, shall be repaired with dressing so as to provide
smooth transition of weld to parent metal.
iii) Welds with cracks and also welds with incomplete penetration, porosity, slag inclusion
etc. exceeding permissible limits shall be rectified by removing the length of weld at
the location of such defects plus 10 mm from both ends of defective weld, and shall
be re-welded. Defective weld shall be removed by chipping hammer, gouging torch or
grinding wheel. Care shall be taken not to damage the adjacent material.
13.0 DESPATCH INSTRUCTIONS
Each despatchable structure shall bear mark no. along with reference drawing number at two
prominent locations.
13.1 “As-built” drawings shall be prepared after fabrication is completed to indicate

additions/alterations made during the process of fabrication. (Refer clause 3.1.2 & 3.1.3.)
13.2 Center lines of column flanges and both sides of web shall be punched, preferably at top and
bottom to facilitate alignment after erection.
14.0 COMPLETION DOCUMENTS
14.1 On completion of work, the Contractor shall submit to CLIENT the following documents:
a)The technical documents according to which the work was carried out.
b)Copies of the “As built” drawings showing thereon all additions and alterations made during
fabrication.
c)Manufacturer’s test certificates
d)Certificates/documents on control checking
e)Test of welds
14.2 Inspection Certificates shall be issued to the contractor for the structures found acceptable in
all respects by CLIENT/Inspector.
452 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-2: ERECTION OF STEEL STRUCTURES
15.0 SCOPE OF WORK
In addition to provision of erection and transport equipment, the scope of work includes supply
of tools and tackles, consumables, materials, labour and supervision and shall cover the
following:
a) Storing and stacking of all fabricated structural components/units/ assemblies at site

storage yards till the time of erection.
b) Transportation of structures from storage yard to site of erection, including multiple

handling, if required.
c) All minor rectification/modifications such as:
i) Removal of bends, kinks, twists etc. for parts damaged during transportation
and handling.
ii) Reaming of holes which do not register or which are damaged, for use of next
higher size bolt.
iii) Plug welding and re-drilling of holes which do not register and which cannot
be reamed for use of next higher size bolt.
iv) Drilling of holes which are either not drilled at all or are drilled in incorrect
position during fabrication.
d) Fabrication of minor missing items as directed by CLIENT.
e) Verification of the position of embedded anchor bolts and inserts w.r.t. line find levels,
installed by others based on Geodetic Scheme/Bench mark/ Reference co -ordinates
taken by the Contractor.
f) Rectifying at site damaged portions of shop primer by cleaning and application

touch-up paint.
g) Erection of structures including making connections by bolts/welding as per drawing.
h) Alignment of all structures true to line, level plumb and dimensions within specified
limits of tolerance.
453 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
i) Application at site after erection, required number of coats of primer and finishing
paint as per specification and drawing.
j) Rectification of structures as per instructions of the Engineer-Incharge.
16.0 STORING AND HANDLING
16.1 Storage of structures shall be preferably be done in such a manner that erection sequence is
not affected.
16.2 While storing, care shall be taken so that structures do not come in direct contact with the
earth surface and accumulated water.
16.3 Stacking of the structures shall be done in such a way that, erection marks are visible easily
and handling does not become difficult. Wherever required, wooden sleepers/grillage may be
used.
16.4 Handling and storage of materials shall be as per IS:7969-1975, to ensure safety.
17.0 ERECTION
17.1 General
17.1.1 Erection shall be carried out in accordance with IS:800-1984 and other relevant standards
referred to therein.
17.1.2 For safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork, staging, temporary support, false work,
etc. shall be erected as required.
17.1.3 The fabricated materials received at erection site shall be verified with respect of marking on
the key plan/marking plan or shipping list.
17.1.4 Any material found damaged or defective shall be stacked separately and the damaged or
defective portions shall be painted in distinct colour for identification and the same shall be
brought to the notice of CLIENT.
454 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
17.2 Erection Drawings
17.2.1 The approved erection drawings and any approved arrangement drg, specification or
instruction accompanying them shall be followed in erecting structures.
17.3 Erection of Structures
17.3.1 Erection work shall be taken up after receipt of clearance from CLIENT.
17.3.2 For safety requirements during erection, provisions in IS:7205-974, IS:7969-1975 and other
relevant Indian standards shall be followed.
17.3.3 Erection shall be carried out with the help of maximum mechanization possible.
17.3.4 Prior to commencement of erection, all the erection equipment, tools, tackles, ropes, etc. shall
be tested for their load carrying capacity. Such tests may be repeated at intermediate stages
also if considered necessary and frequent visual inspection shall be done of all vulnerable
areas and components to detect damages or distress in the erection equipment, if any.
17.3.5 Following shall be taken care of during erection, whenever necessary:
17.3.5.1 Erected members shall be held securely in place by bolts to take care of dead load, wind load
and erection load.
17.3.5.2 All connections shall achieve free expansion and contraction of structures wherever provided.
17.3.5.3 No final bolting or welding of joints shall be done until the structure has been properly aligned.
17.3.5.4 Instrumental checking of correctness of initial setting out of structures and adjustment of
alignment shall be carried out in sequence and at different stages as required. The final
levelling and alignment shall be carried out immediately after completion of each section.
17.3.5.3 The Contractor shall design, manufacture, erect and provide falsework, staging temporary
support etc. required for safe and accurate erection of structural steelwork and shall be fully
responsible for the adequacy of the same.
17.3.5.4 The Contractor shall also provide facilities such as adequate temporary access ladders,
gangways, tools & tackles, instruments, etc. to CLIENT/Inspector for his inspection at any
stage during erection.
455 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
17.4 Field Connections
17.4.1 Assembly by permanent bolts.
17.4.1.1 The numbers of washers on permanent bolts shall not be more than two (and not less than
one) for the nuts and one for the bolt head.
17.4.1.2 Wooden rams or mallet shall be used in forcing members into position in order to protect the
metal from injury or shock.
17.4.1.3 Where bolting is specified on the drawing, the bolts shall be tightened to the maximum limit.
The threaded portion of the each bolt shall be project through the nut by at least one thread.
Tapered washers shall be provided for all heads and nuts to achieve uniform bearing on
sloping surface.
17.4.1.4 To prevent loosening of nuts, spring washers or lock nuts shall be provided as specified in the
design/shop drawings.
17.4.1.5 All machine-fitted bolts shall be perfectly tight and the ends shall be checked to prevent nuts
from becoming loose. No unfilled holes shall be left in any part of the structures.
17.4.2 Assembly by welding.
17.4.2.1 All field assembly by welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
fabrication. Where the steel has been delivered painted, the paint shall be removed before
field welding for a distance of at least 50mm on either side of the joints to be welded.
17.4.2.2 All other requirements in welding shall be in accordance with clauses specified under
Section-1 of this Specification
18.0 ACCEPTANCE STANDARD OF WELDING
18.1 Acceptance standard of welding shall be as specified in Section-1 of this Specification.
19.0 BEDDING AND GROUTING
19.1 Base plates shall be set to elevations shown on the drawings, supported aligned and levelled
using steel wedges and shims or by other approved methods. Plates shall be levelled
properly, positioned and the anchor bolts tightened.
456 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
20.0 PAINTING AFTER ERECTION
20.1 The painting shall be as per painting specification (Section-4) of this Specification) and
instruction given on drawings.
20.2 Site painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to cause
condensation on the surface to be painted.
21.0 ERECTION TOLERANCE
Maximum permissible tolerance in erected steel structures shall be as given in Annexure-D.
22.0 ACCEPTANCE OF WORK
22.1 Acceptance of erected steel structures shall be either after completion of erection of all the
structures or in blocks.
22.2 Preliminary Acceptance will be done in the following cases:
i) Any steelwork or part thereof embedded in concrete.
ii) Steel structures which are to be covered in the process of carrying out further work.
23.0 DOCUMENTATION
23.1 The following documents shall be prepared at the time of acceptance of erected structures:
i) Documents showing actual deviations made during execution of erection work and
approval of competent authority.
ii) Documents showing acceptance of embedded structures.
iii) Certificate/documents on control checking and test of materials (if any) and weld.
iv) Data and result of geodetic measurements obtained while checking the erection of
the structures.
23.2 Copies of “As-Built” drawing showing thereon all additions and alternations which took place
between approval of drawing and erection of structures.
457 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION 3- FABRICATION AND ERECTION OF MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES
26.00 Roof and Side Cladding with Zincalume high tensile sheets. .
26.01 The scope of work shall cover:
a. Preparation of drawings showing layout and size of sheets used, details of connections and
flashing, Bill of Materials, etc.
b. Procurement and supply sheets of all sizes, flashing and fittings like corner pieces, apron
pieces, ridges, cutting and bending of sheets, wherever required, drilling of holes all as per
Specification and Drawings.
c. Procurement and supply of all fixtures and accessories such as self drilling, self tapping
fasteners (galvanised with EPDM seals), washers, sealants, neoprene fillers etc.
d. Procurement and supply of Rockwool insulation along with its fixing accessories such as cleats
for fixing wire mesh, aluminium foil, metal/wire mesh etc(wherever applicable).
e. Loading, transportation, unloading and delivery of sheeting with/without insulation material from
place of procurement to erection site.
e. Provision of all tools and tackles, equipment, labour supervision and services required for the
satisfactory completion of the work specified herein and on the drawings.
f. Erection in position of sheets and insulation where specified, for roofing, walling, louvers,
erection of all flashing, fittings like ridges, valleys, gutters, corners, apron, etc. at all locations all
work as per Drawings and Specifications.
26.02 Fixing of sheets
26.02.01 All fixing of the roof and side sheeting to purlins/insulations shall be by means of self drilling, self
tapping screws.
26.02.02 Self Tapping screws shall be provided at all crest/valley at purlin locations for roof sheeting and
at all valleys of the corrugations for side sheets.
26.02.03 All sheets shall be stitched together by self drilling/self tapping screws at spacing not more than
500mm.
458 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
26.03 Laps
26.03.01 All roofing shall be provided with two corrugations side lap and 200mm end lap.
26.03.02 All side/gable end sheets shall be provided with single corrugation side lap and 100mm end lap.
26.03.03 Overhang of sheets on the roof and side cladding shall not exceed 300mm.
26.04 Erection
26.04.01 Erection is to be carried out with the lay of the side laps such that under the prevailing wind, rain
is not driven into the lap. The sheets shall be laid so that side lap in any two consecutive rows is
staggered.
26.04.02 Broken or otherwise damaged sheeting shall not be erected.
26.04.03 Cutting, framing and trimming of all openings required shall be carried out at site.
27.0 CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATE
The scope of work shall cover:
a) Procurement and supply mesh, line wire, stretcher bar, barbed wire (if shown in the
drawings) and other accessories for chain link fencing and gate all as per
specifications and drawings.
b) Loading, transportation, unloading and delivery of material for fencing and gate from
place of procurement to erection site.
c) Provision of all tools, tackles, equipment, labour, supervision and services required for
the satisfactory completion of the work specified herein and on the drawings.
d) Erection in position of the fencing and gate at all locations, all work as per
specification and drawings.
459 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
27.1 Erection
27.1.1 The height of chain link fencing shall be 3.0/2.5m top of vertical post. Punch Tap Concertina
coil is to be provided over chain link fencing.
27.1.2 Straining posts shall be provided at all ends and corners of fences, at changes in direction or
acute variations in levels and at intervals not exceeding 66m on straight lengths of the fence.
Intermediate posts shall be spaced at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m.
27.1.3 Struts shall be fitted to all straining posts behind the chain link fabric in the direction of the
fence.
27.1.4 There shall be four evenly spaced rows of line wire. The top wire shall be doubled, making five
line wires in all. The bottom wire shall be close to the ground. Each line wire shall be strained
lightly by means of eyebolt strainer at each straining point. The eyebolt strainer shall consist of
bolt with welded eye. The bolt shall be sufficiently threaded and fitted with a nut and washer.
Each line wire shall be secured to each of the intermediate posts by a wire stirrup passing
through holes in the posts and secured to the line wire by three complete turns on each side
of the post. Two-way eyebolt strainers shall have suitable ring nuts fitted after wires have
been strained on one side.
27.1.5 The mesh shall be strained between each pair of straining posts and shall be secured to each
straining post by means of a stretcher bar. One of the top line wires shall be threaded through
the appropriate adjacent rows of mesh, care being taken that no meshes in the rows are by-
passed by the line wire except where deviation is necessary at the straining posts. The
second top line wire shall be strained in front of the fencing. The mesh shall be attached to top
and bottom line wires by wire ties spaced 150mm apart and to other line wires by wire ties
spaced 450mm apart. Bottom row of the mesh shall be threaded to the foundation concrete
using staples spaced 500mm apart and set in concrete to a depth of 150mm. The top of
concrete shall be 50mm above G.L. and 50mm below the fencing.
460 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
27.2 Chain link fencing Gate
27.2.1 A gate of suitable width shall be provided in the direction of the chain link fabric. The mesh
and barbed wire used for the fabrication of gate shall be identical in all respects to that of
chain link fencing. The gate may be single leaf or double leaf depending on the width of the
gate.
27.2.2 The gate frame shall be a pipe frame with stiffeners at mid-height and mid-width.
The mesh shall be welded to the gate frame/stiffeners.
27.2.3 Each leaf of the gate shall be supported on a pivot in the foundation for the straining post and
shall be laterally held at two points, one near the top of the straining post and second near the
middle of the straining post. The free end of each leaf shall be provided with a tower bolt at
the base of the frame. An aldrop shall be provided at the mid-height of the frame.
461 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
SECTION-4: PAINTING OF STEEL STRUCTURES
25.0 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PAINTING
25.1 General
The steel surface which is to be prepared shall be cleaned of dirt and grease and the heavier
layers of rust shall be removed by grinding prior to actual surface preparation to a specified
grade.
Surface preparation to be followed prior to painting shall be based on the requirement of a

particular painting system as per Clause 27.0.
25.2 Mechanical Cleaning
Manual/ power tool cleaning shall be done as per grade St-2 or St-3, of Swedish Standard
Institution SIS 055900.
i) Grade St-2: Thorough scraping and wire- brushing, machine brushing, grinding etc.
This grade of preparation shall remove loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter.
Finally the surface is to be cleaned with a vacuum cleaner or with clean compressed
air or with clean brush. After preparation, the surface should have a faint metallic
sheen. The appearance shall correspond to the prints designated St-2.
ii) Grade St-3: very thorough scraping and wire brushing, machine brushing, grinding
etc. The surface preparation is same as for grade St-2 but to be done much more
thoroughly. After preparing the surface, it should have a pronounced metallic sheen
and correspond to the prints designated St-3.
25.3 If no grade of surface preparation is specified, Grade St-2 shall be followed.
26.0 PAINTS AND PAINTING
26.1 For use of specific painting system as mentioned in the Specification, the paint manufacturer’s
specification shall prevail.
26.2 General compatibility between primer and finishing paints shall be established through the
paint manufacturer supplying the paints.
462 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
26.3 Before buying the paint in bulk, it is recommended to obtain sample of paint and establish
“Control Area of Painting”. On control area surface preparation and painting shall be carried
out in the presence of manufacturer of paint.
26.4 In order to ensure that the supplied paint meets the stipulation in design drawing/specification,
if required, samples of paint shall be tested in laboratories to establish quality of paint with
respect to viscosity, adhesion/bond of paint in steel surfaces, adhesion/simulated salt spray
test, chemical analysis (percentage of solids by weight), normal wear resistance as
encountered during handling & erection, resistance against exposure to acid fumes, etc.
26.5 Whole quantity of paint for a particular system of paint shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer.
26.6 Thinners, wherever used, shall be as per recommendation of the paint manufacturer.
26.7 Areas which become inaccessible after assembly of structures shall be painted before
assembly, after cleaning the surfaces as specified.
26.8 Wherever shop primer painting is scratched, abraded or damaged, the surfaces shall be
thoroughly cleaned using emery paper and power driven wire brush wherever warranted, and
touched up with corresponding primer. Touching up paint shall be matched and blended to
eliminate conspicuous marks.
26.9 If more than 50% of the painted surface of an item requires repair, the entire item shall be
mechanically cleaned and new primer coats shall be applied followed by finishing coats as per
painting specification.
All field-welded areas on shop painted item shall be mechanically cleaned (including the weld
area proper, adjacent areas contaminated by weld spatter or fumes and areas where existing
primer. intermediate / finishing paint is burnt). Subsequently, new primer and finishing coats of
paint shall be applied as per painting specification.
26.10 Application of paint shall be by spraying or brushing as per IS:487-1985 and in uniform layers
of 50% overlapping strokes. Painting shall not be done when the temperature is less than 5°C
or relative humidity more than 85%, unless manufacturer’s recommendations permit. Also
painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather. During application, paint agitation must
be provided wherever such agitation is recommended by the manufacturer.
26.11 Paint shall be applied at manufacturer’s recommended rates. The number of coats shall be
such that the minimum dry film thickness (DFT) specified is achieved. The dry film thickness
463 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
of painted surfaces shall be checked with elcometer or measuring gauges to ensure

application of specified DFT.
26.12 All structures shall receive appropriate number of primer and finishing coats in order to
achieve overall DFT as per design drawings/specifications. First coat of primer paint shall be
applied not later than 2-3 hours after preparation of surface, unless specified otherwise.
26.13 The finishing paint as specified shall be of approved colour and quality. The under coat shall
have different tint to distinguish the same from the finishing coat.
26.14 Edges, corners, crevices, depressions, joints and welds shall receive special attention to
ensure that they receive painting coats of the required thickness.
26.15 Parts of surfaces embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, rust, mill scale
etc. and shall be given a protective coat of Portland cement slurry immediately after
fabrication. No paint shall be applied on this part.
26.16 Zinc-rich primer paints, which have been exposed several months before finishing coat is
applied, shall be washed down thoroughly to remove soluble zinc salt deposits. In similar
circumstances, the surfaces of paint based on epoxy resin should be abraded or lightly blast
cleaned to ensure adhesion of next coat.
26.17 Surfaces which cannot be painted but require protection shall be given a coat of rust inhibitive
grease according to IS:958-1975 or equivalent international standard.
27.0 PAINTING SYSTEM
The recommended painting system for general service requirement of steel structures
covering surface preparation, application of primer coats, intermediate coats (if necessary)
and final coats to develop the required minimum dry film thickness on steel surface is
indicated as below
a. Surface preparation: St 2 according to Swedish Standard SIS055900.
b. Primer paint: Two coats of redoxide zinc chromate in phenolic alkyd medium (DFT
25µ/coat) of single pack type with 30-35% solids and covering capacity 12-13
m²/lit/coat.
c. Finishing paint: Two coats of synthetic enamel in alkyd medium with superior quality
water and weather resistant pigments (DFT 25µ/coat) of single pack type with 30-40%
solids and covering capacity 16-18 m²/lit/coat.
464 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
28.0 MEASUREMENTS
28.1 Structural Steel
Structural steelwork will be measured by the metric tonne and as per IS:1200(Part-8)-1993
and IS:1200(Part-9)-1973 subject to provisions outlined below:
a) The calculation of quantities shall be based on unit weights for structural sections as
given in IS Handbooks. In the case of mild steel plates, the calculated weights shall
be based on 78.5 kg/m2/centimeter thick plate. The payments will be made on the
basis of weights of members as per drawings. However, any changes on the above
weights during fabrication erection, payment shall be based on sketches approved by
CLIENT.
b) In the event the IS does not specify any mode of measurement for a particular item of
work, the same shall be measured as per any other relevant international standard or
as directed by CLIENT.
c) The weight of all plates and sections shall be calculated from the approved drawing
using the minimum overall square or rectangular dimensions and theoretical weight,
no deduction being made for skew cuts, holes etc. In the case of plates, other than
gussets, the actual dimensions shown on approved drawings will apply unless
approved otherwise by the purchaser based on cutting diagram of mother plates.
d) The weight of all welding runs, bolt, stanchion base packing, cuttings to waste and
rolling margins, and coatings of paint, will be excluded from the measured weight and
shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the rates for structural steelworks quoted
by the Contractor.
e) Temporary works and all other materials not included in the permanent works shall be
excluded from any measurement for payment.
f) Chain link fencing shall be measured in running meter basis, as specified and shown
on the drawings.
465 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
28.2 Sheets
28.2.1 sheets for roofing and side cladding shall be measured by lump sum or the square meter of
net laid area, as specified and shown on the drawings or scope of work.
28.2.2 No allowance shall be made for wastage, cutouts, overlaps, etc., in the measurement.
28.2.3 The unit rate shall include all fasteners, flashing and fitting such as ridges corners, aprons and
other accessories.
28.2.4 No deduction will be made for openings for area less than a single sheet. Also no extra
payment will be made for making openings.
29.0 ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS
29.1 After completing the erection of a unit or portion thereof, the Contractor shall give a notice in
writing stating that the job is complete in all respects and ready for preliminary
acceptance.The job shall be jointly inspected visually by representatives of Contractor and
CLIENT. All observed defects and omissions as per drawing and specification shall be noted
down.
29.2 The Contractor shall make good all these defects, deficiencies and omissions and shall inform
in advance CLIENT/Inspector for inspection. The Engineer-Incharge shall satisfy himself that
all the defects, deficiencies and omissions noted down during preliminary acceptance have
been rectified.
466 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-A
Permissible deviations in pitch and gauge of holes for bolts of normal accuracy
Permissible deviations in
Permissible
each group of holes
Hole Diameter deviations in
Sl. No. Description
(mm.) spacing Low
(mm.) Carbon steel alloy
steel
a. Deviation in hole diameter. Upto 17 +1.0 No limits
Above 17 +1.5
b. Ovality (Difference between the biggest Upto 17 +1.0 No limits
and the smallest diameters). Above 17 +1.5
c. Curves exceeding 1mm. and cracks on- - Not permissible
the hole edges.
d. Non-coincidence of holes in separate
details of the assembled unit:
Upto 1mm. - - Upto 50% Upto

50%
Above 1mm. upto 1.5mm. - - Upto 10% Upto
10%
e. Slope of axis. - Upto 30% the No limits No limits
thickness of
unit.
467 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-B
Tolerance of Assembled Components of Structures
Deviation ( ± ) mm. for elements of structures

Sl. Description of components in
Upto 1m. to 5m. to 10m. to 15m. to 20m. to Over
No. structures
1m. 5m. 10m. 15m. 20m. 25m. 25m.
1.
i. Deviations from the dimensions
assembled.
Length and width of the details cut:
a. Manual gas cutting as per marking 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 - -
b. With shears or with saw as per 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
marking.
c. With shears or with a saw with a 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 - -
stop.
d. Machine gas cutting. 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
ii. Length and width of planed 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 - -
processed on edge planing
machine.
2.
i. Distance between centers of the
end holes:
a. Drilled according to marking. 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 - -
b. Drilled according to a gauge with 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 - -
bushing.
ii. Distance between centers of
adjacent holes:
a. Drilled according to marking or a 1.5 - - - - - -
gauge..
b. Drilled according to a gauge with 0.5 - - - - - -
bushing.
468 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-C
Tolerances in Erected Steel Structures
Sl. No. Description Tolerance

1. Deviation of structure at foundation top level w.r.t. true axis
a. in longitudinal direction. ± 5mm.
b. In lateral direction. ± 5mm.
2. Deviation in the level of bearing surface of structures at foundation top w.r.t. ± 5mm.
true level.
3. Out of plumb of structure from true vertical axis and measured from structure± H/1000 or ±25mm.
top. Whichever is less.
Note: ‘H’ above is the structure height in mm.
Notes:
1. The tolerances do not apply to steel structures where deviations from true positions are intimately
linked or directly influenced by technological processes. In such cases, tolerances on erected steel
structures shall be as per recommendations of process technologists/equipment suppliers.
2. The observed or calculated values of deviations of steel structures from their true positions shall be
rounded off in accordance with IS:2-1960 for comparison with permissible tolerances specified in
this table. The number of significant places retained in the rounded off value shall be the same as
that specified in this table.
469 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Annexure-D
Material of construction (as applicable)
1.0 Unless otherwise specified in the drawing, all rolled sections and plates shall conform to
Grade-A as per IS: 2062-1992.
2.0 Steel sheets shall conform to IS:1079-1988.
3.0 Steel tubes for structural purposes shall conform to IS: 1161-1979 (Grade YST-240).
4.0 Gutters and down comers shall be of copper bearing steel conforming to IS: 2062-1992.
5.0 Crane rails shall conform to IS: 3443-1980.
6.0 Roof Covering/ Sheeting: Canopy roof sheeting shall be of 0.6mm Zincalume/ galvalume colour
coated sheets and shall have trapezoidal profile with 28-32 mm deep crest and 186-250 c/c
profile width with minimum two ribs at centre for stiffening. The sheet shall be of minimum fy =
345 MPa and shall be coated with hot dip metallic Zinc aluminum alloy @ 150 gsm coating
mass total on both sides.
7.0 Providing, cutting, fabrication and installation of canopy false ceiling with TRAC 150 F of
Interarch (or equivalent) coil coated (Pre-painted) steel false ceiling system comprising of
150 mm wide x 17 mm deep roll formed out of 0.50 mm thick polyester coated galvanized
steel panels, fixed on steel runner of 34.5 mm width x 48 mm deep manufactured out of
0.60 mm thick precoated galvanized steel with rigid suspension of 20x20x0.5 mm fixed with
steel brackets/clips etc. The suspension system should be meant of exterior use. The carrier
shall be suspended at 1mtr c/c supported from purlin and suspension angle at 500 mm c/c.
panel shall be factory cut to provide minimum joints. The longitudinal joints shall have
additional special G.I. Splice in between two panels. The carrier joint shall have a carrier
splice maintaining a module of 150 mm. The ceiling shall be clipped on to the suspended
carriers after they are aligned and leveled. Cutting for fixing of light fittings shall be done as
per the cutout required to fit the fixture. The work shall be carried out under a specialized
and experienced supervisor.
8.0 All black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts shall conform to IS: 1363-1984 and IS: 1364-1983
(for precision and semi-precision hexagonal bolts). Washers shall conform to IS: 1148-1982.
470 of 497

OF STEEL STRUCTURES
8.0 Covered electrodes for arc welding shall conform to IS: 814-1991. Coding of electrodes shall be
as follows:
a. ER 421 'C' x for mild steel of Grade A and Grade B as per IS: 2062-1992.
b. EB 542 'C' x H3X for:
mild steel of Grade B as per IS: 2062-1992 for dynamically loaded structures (arising out of
crane, vibratory screen, equipment, etc.),
SAIL-MA micro alloyed steel 350 HYA/HYB and
when combined thickness (CT) for steel conforming to IS:2062-1992 exceeds 40mm.
where ‘C’ is the value of current as recommended by the electrode manufacturer.
9.0 Material for chain link fencing shall conform to IS:2721-1979. Mesh for chain link fencing shall
be of 3.15mm hot dip galvanized steel mesh wire, the diameter being measured over zinc
coating. The diameter of mesh wire shall not vary from the specified diameter by more than
0.05mm. The material for mesh wire and line wire of chain link fencing shall conform to
IS:280-1978. Stretcher bar for erection of mesh shall consist of mild steel flats
25mmx4.75mm. The stirrup wire for securing the line wires to the intermediate post shall be of
2.5mm mild steel wire. Hairpin staples for fastening the bottom line wire to the foundation
concrete shall be of 6mmÖ mild steel wire with ends of staples bent outwards for adequate
anchorage. The cleats for eyebolts shall be of mild steel plate 10mm thick.
10.0 Material for barbed wire shall conform to IS:278-1978. Line wire for the barbed wire shall be
made from two strands of galvanized steel wire of nominal dia 2.5mm twisted together. Barbs
shall be made of point wire of galvanized steel of nominal dia 2.5mm in such a way that four
points of the barbs are set and located or locked as far as possible at right angles to each
other. Droppers for barbed wire shall be of mild steel flat 25mmx4.75mm with 38mmx4.85mm
half round staples for fastening the barbed wire.
471 of 497
472 of 497
473 of 497
474 of 497
475 of 497

Is 13849 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Is 13849 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BID DOCUMENT

CONSTRUCTION OF DECOMPRESSION FACILITY AND

DOMESTIC COMPETITIVE BIDDING

Bid Document No.:

PREPARED AND ISSUED BY

1.0 CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

1.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

1.3 SITE WORK

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

2.0 PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES

2.1 SITE CLEARANCE

2.2 EARTH WORK IN CUTTING & FILLING

2.3 SANDFILLING AND STONE SOLING

2.4 BRICKWORK IN SUB STRUCTURE

2.5 BRICKWORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE

2.6 PCC WORK

2.7 RCC WORK IN SUB STRUCTURE

2.8 RCC WORK IN SUPERSTRUCTURE

2.9 BOUNDARY WALL

2.10 BUILDING WORKS

2.11 FINISHING WORKS

2.12 STEEL WORKS

2.13 ALUMINIUM DOORS/ WINDOWS/ PARTITIONS

2.14 KERB STONE

2.15 SFRC PRE-CAST SLAB

2.16 GROUTING WITH NON-SHRINKABLE COMPOUND

1.0 CIVIL, STRUCTURAL AND ARCHITECTURAL WORKS

1.2 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

All costs towards testing/inspection of materials/goods shall be borne by the

1.3 SITE WORK

Complete construction work including supply of labour, construction materials,

1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

2.00 PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES - GENERAL

The Preamble to Schedule of Item is an integral part of the SCHEDULE OF RATES

 All workmen while working on height shall wear safety helmets.

 All inflammable material shall be kept in non-inflammable containers that are

 Consumption of liquor and smoking shall not be permitted on the site.

 The site shall be illuminated at night when there is work in progress.

 The storing of all inflammable/explosive material shall be done as per the

 . Contractor shall keep the Owner and Consultant completely indemnified by

PREAMBLE TO SCHEDULE OF RATES

2.1.0 SITE CLEARANCE

a) Dismantling of all existing structures in brick masonry/stone

b) Disposal of all material to be cleared from the site to any authorised

c) Provide all assistance/co-ordination/liaison between any and all

Note: Demolition of PCC/Brick Masonry, road will be paid in Cu.M.

2.2.0 EARTH WORK IN CUTTING & FILLING

Complete earthwork in Excavation of earth/municipal waste/ malba etc. &

Brief description of major items shall be as follows:

a. Taking pre-work and finished levels.

iii) No separate payment for excavation for foundation / sewerage /

Earthwork shall be done as per approved detailed construction drawings to be

2.3.0 SAND FILLING AND STONE SOLING

Complete works in filling is included in the scope.

Brief description of major items shall be as follows:

a) Taking pre-work and finished levels

Note : Payments to be done on completed work profiles by considering the

2.4.0 BRICK WORK IN SUB STRUCTURE

Complete works in brick masonry in foundation is included in the scope.

Brief description of major civil items shall be as follows:

i) Earth Work in excavation including back filling using serviceable

vi) Lime wash on exposed surfaces of plaster.

The construction of brick foundation work shall be done as per